120+ Easy Lunch Recipes - The Best Soups, Salads & Sandwiches https://foolproofliving.com/category/lunch/ Tried & True Recipes ยท No Refined Sugars Fri, 30 Jan 2026 19:23:37 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.8.3 https://foolproofliving.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/cropped-cropped-Foolproof-Living-Favicon-image-resized-32x32.png 120+ Easy Lunch Recipes - The Best Soups, Salads & Sandwiches https://foolproofliving.com/category/lunch/ 32 32 Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-sweet-potato-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-sweet-potato-salad/#respond Tue, 14 Oct 2025 19:13:31 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83779 Would you believe me if I said I never had a sweet potato until I moved to the U.S. in…]]>

Would you believe me if I said I never had a sweet potato until I moved to the U.S. in my early 20s? The fact is, sweet potatoes aren’t a typical ingredient in Turkish/Mediterranean cooking.

However, that doesn’t mean we can’t incorporate some of those classic Mediterranean flavors into a salad that could easily be the centerpiece of your holiday table or, really, any time you need a great fall salad. 

To me, this Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad is just that. Made by roasting sweet potatoes with shallots and chickpeas, layering them with arugula, and topping everything with candied walnuts and feta cheese, it may sound a bit unexpected, but I promise you it works wonderfully.

Ingredients You’ll Need Plus Smart Swaps:

You’ll find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here’s a closer look at what goes into this roasted sweet potato salad, and a few simple swaps, to help you make it your own:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

The Core Components: Sweet Potato & Shallots

Sweet potatoes: When choosing sweet potatoes, go for ones that feel firm with smooth skin and have no soft spots. Smaller to medium-sized potatoes are ideal as they’re sweeter, creamier, and easier to manage than the larger, starchier ones. Once peeled and chop them up into even pieces so they roast evenly. 

PRO Tip: Some people incorrectly call sweet potatoes yams, but they are not the same thing. This recipe is tested only with sweet potatoes.

Shallots or Red Onion: Roasting them in large chunks turns them super sweet and caramelized, but if you are not a fan of large chunks of onion in your salad, you can slice them thinly before roasting.

However, I find that the large pieces give you more caramelized flavor compared to the sliced version. 

Alternatively, you can use a large red onion as a substitute for shallots.

Chickpeas: I am using canned chickpeas for convenience. Though it is imperative to take the time to pat them dry well after draining, as they won’t crisp up if they are still soaking wet.

Green, Cheese, and Dressing

Arugula: I usually buy triple-washed arugula from the store to save on time. 

I think the slightly bitter, peppery taste of arugula pairs beautifully with the rest of the ingredients. However, if you prefer something milder, you can use spring mix or baby spinach. For a heartier baked sweet potato salad, you can use massaged kale

Regardless of the salad greens you are using, make sure that they are rinsed and spin-dried so that the salad dressing can coat the greens well.

Maple Candied Walnuts: I use a handful of walnuts for extra crunch and some sweetness. You can also use pecans or almonds, or for a nut-free version, go for roasted pumpkin seeds or sunflower seeds. Maple syrup is my choice of sweetener, but agave or honey would also work.

Feta Cheese: This is a Mediterranean classic, but you could also add goat cheese instead. For a vegan, dairy-free option, simply omit the feta or use a plant-based feta cheese.

Optional Add-Ins and Flavor Boosters

Pomegranate molasses and arils: While this is also a Mediterranean classic and works beautifully in this salad, I know not everyone has it in their pantry. It will change the overall taste a bit, but a drizzle of balsamic reduction would be a good alternative to pomegranate molasses.

Again, optional, but I also like to add a handful of pomegranate arils for a pop of color.

Grains/seeds: If you are making this sweet potato salad as a part of your weekly meal prep and want it to be a bit more filling and satisfying, you can add a cup (or two) of cooked quinoa, couscous, farro, or even bulgur wheat.

How to Make Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad

Here’s how this salad comes together: first, we roast the veggies and make the candied walnuts, and then we make a simple vinaigrette and assemble. Here’s exactly how I do it step by step:

Sweet potatoes, shallots and chickpeas on a sheet pan from the top view.

Step 1 – Roast the Vegetables: After testing this recipe multiple times, I found that roasting everything at once makes cleanup so much easier without sacrificing crispness. 

Grab a large baking sheet, as we want to make sure all the veggies have enough room to roast evenly. I like to use parchment paper for easy clean up, but it is optional.

Spread sweet potatoes, shallots, and chickpeas on the sheet pan, drizzle them with olive oil, salt, and pepper, and give them a good toss. Roast everything in a preheated 425 °F /218°C oven for 20 minutes. Be sure to give it a toss halfway through to ensure everything browns and caramelizes evenly.

A collage of images showing how to make maple candied walnuts.

Step 2 – Make the Candied Walnuts: My version of making maple candied walnuts here is super simple. Simply mix walnuts with maple syrup, spread onto a sheet pan lined with parchment paper, sprinkle with coarse salt, and roast for 5-7 minutes in the oven.

I usually roast them while the veggies are in the oven, so I don’t have to wait later on.

Whatever you do, do not (I repeat, do not) skip the parchment paper (because they will stick to the pan) and sea salt (it helps make them even more delicious).

A collage of photos showing how to make the dressing for the salad and how to dress arugula.

Step 3 – Prep the Dressing and season arugula: When the veggies are cooling, make the dressing. It is as simple as it gets: Add olive oil, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and pepper to a small bowl and whisk to combine. 

When you’re ready to serve, place the arugula in a large bowl and drizzle with the dressing. Using your clean hands or a pair of tongs, gently toss to ensure that all the greens are coated with the dressing.

Give it a taste and make sure they are seasoned well. If necessary, add more salt and pepper. 

A collage of photos showing the assembly stages of making this roasted sweet potato salad.

Step 4 – Assemble: You can assemble the salad in the bowl with the now-well-seasoned arugula, but since we are planning to serve this as a showstopping centerpiece for Thanksgiving, I transfer it to a large oval serving platter. 

Then all we need to do is to top them off with the roasted veggies, maple candied walnuts, crumbled feta cheese, and, if using, drizzle everything with a few tablespoons of pomegranate molasses. I also add a handful of pomegranate seeds to make it even more colorful and festive, but it is optional.

Making This a Festive Holiday Centerpiece: Make-Ahead & Presentation Tips

This Mediterranean fall salad is a fantastic alternative to your usual boring roasted sweet potatoes that everyone serves on Thanksgiving.

Mediterranean sweet potato salad on a plate from the top view.

And, the good news is that you can make each component of the recipe ahead of time and assemble it right before serving. Here’s how I do it:

Presentation: Platter vs. Bowl

Serve on a Platter: I strongly recommend serving this salad on a large oval platter instead of a deep bowl, which not only makes for a much prettier presentation but also helps the delicate arugula hold its shape since it’s not weighed down by the toppings. It also ensures that every guest gets a bit of everything with each serving.

Make-Ahead Strategy (For a Crispy Salad)

  • Roast Components Ahead: You can roast the sweet potatoes, shallots, and chickpeas, and prep the candied walnuts and salad dressing a day or two in advance.
  • Bring to room temperature: Ensure the roasted veggies and nuts are completely cooled before storing them or adding them to the arugula, as warm ingredients will melt the feta and cause the delicate greens to wilt.
  • Store Separately: Store the cooled components in airtight containers in the refrigerator, and assemble everything right before serving.

Storage of Leftovers

  • Leftovers Keep Well: Leftovers do keep well for up to 3 days in the refrigerator if kept in an airtight container.
  • Arugula will Wilt: The arugula will naturally wilt once dressed. However, a good toss before serving brings it back to life. Always taste for seasoning and add more salt or pepper as necessary before serving.

Serving Suggestions

This Mediterranean baked sweet potato salad is as versatile as it is beautiful. Serve it warm or at room temperature, making it perfect for a cozy fall dinner or your Thanksgiving spread. It is surely one of my favorite Thanksgiving vegetable sides that I make every year.

Here are a few of my favorite dishes to pair it with:

With Turkey: If you’re planning on making a complete Thanksgiving spread, serve it alongside my Herb Roasted Turkey. Or, pair it with my Baked Turkey Tenderloin for a smaller holiday meal or simple weeknight dinner.

With Chicken: For another simple weeknight option, try serving it with my Baked Bone-In Chicken Breast. Alternatively, if you want to keep the Mediterranean flavors going, serve it alongside my Harissa Honey Chicken for a feast that is guaranteed to impress.

Vegetarian: This salad makes the perfect side to my Stuffed Eggplant as a Mediterranean-inspired meatless meal.

FAQs

Can I use canned sweet potatoes?

I wouldn’t recommend it since they’re too soft and won’t caramelize properly in the oven. That said, if it’s all you have on hand, just bake for about 10 minutes to warm them through.

Can I serve it cold?

Yes, this salad tastes great warm, at room temperature, or chilled straight from the fridge.

Can I air fry the veggies?

You technically can, but it will be hard to fit them all at once. If you prefer to roast everything in the air fryer, I recommend either doing it in two batches or air frying each veggie separately to ensure even roasting.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Mediterranean Salads You Might Like

I love keeping a few salads in rotation that are just as easy to make as this sweet potato salad recipe. Here are a few other Mediterranean salads I never get tired of:

  • My go-to for BBQs, picnics, and meal prep is this Mediterranean Pasta Salad. It is easy to make, and just uses a few pantry staples and fresh veggies.
  • Shepherd’s Salad (Çoban Salatası) is a refreshing Turkish tomato and cucumber salad tossed with olive oil and lemon juice. It’s a summer staple I grew up eating in Turkey.
  • If you want a quick, plant protein-packed salad that is ready in 30 minutes, try my Mediterranean Quinoa Salad. It can also be served cold or warm and it is another salad recipe that you can make ahead.
Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad from the top view on a serving platter.
Print

Mediterranean Sweet Potato Salad Recipe

Sweet Potatoes are not common in the Mediterranean, but that doesn’t mean we cannot use them in a salad that embodies the flavors of the region. Made by roasting sweet potatoes tossed with chickpeas, feta, and candied walnuts and serving them on a bed of arugula, this make-ahead salad is worthy of your holiday table as a colorful centerpiece or a humble yet filling lunch to take to work with you on a Tuesday.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Cooling time 10 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 250kcal

Ingredients

For The Veggies

  • 2 large sweet potatoes 1 ½ lbs peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 3 shallots medium size – peeled and sliced/quartered (or 1 large red onion, cut into wedges)
  • 1 can chickpeas 15-ounce- drained, rinsed, and patted dry
  • 3 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Candied Walnuts

  • ½ cup halved walnuts
  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup
  • 1/8 teaspoon flaky sea salt

For The Dressing

  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons fresh lemon juice
  • 1 garlic clove minced
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Salad:

  • 3 cups arugula leaves loosely packed, rinsed and spin dried
  • ¼ cup crumbled feta cheese 2 oz.
  • 2 tablespoons Pomegranate molasses* optional

Instructions

  • Preheat your oven to 425°F (220°C). Line a sheet pan with parchment paper.
  • Place cubed sweet potatoes, shallots, and chickpeas onto the baking sheet. Drizzle them with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Toss to ensure they are evenly coated with the seasonings.
    Roasted veggies on a sheet pan from the top view.
  • Roast for 20 minutes, tossing halfway through, until the potatoes are golden, the shallots are caramelized, and the chickpeas are lightly crispy.
  • To make the candied walnuts, in a small bowl, mix together the walnuts with maple syrup.
    Candied walnuts in the making.
  • Line a small baking sheet with parchment paper and spread the walnuts evenly. Sprinkle them with a pinch of flaky sea salt and roast them in the oven for 5-7 minutes or until lightly toasted and golden. It is okay to roast them while the veggies are roasting.
  • When roasted, remove the veggies and walnuts from the oven and let them cool for 10-15 minutes.
  • Meanwhile, make the salad dressing by whisking together olive oil, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and pepper in a bowl.
    Dressing for the salad and tossing the arugula with it by hand.
  • To assemble the salad, place the arugula in a large salad bowl. Drizzle it with the dressing and toss to coat.
  • Pile the veggies on top and give it another big toss.
    A collage of images showing the stages of the assembly of the recipe.
  • Garnish with candied walnuts, crumbled feta, and drizzle with pomegranate molasses (if using) right before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6-8 (loose) cups of salad that is ideal for serving 6 people as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • *A good substitute for pomegranate molasses is balsamic reduction. The flavor will change slightly, but it will still be delicious. Alternatively, if you do not have either of them, you can omit using them entirely.
  • Make ahead: You can prepare all components of the recipe in advance, let them reach room temperature, store them in an airtight container in the fridge, and assemble the salad right before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 250kcal | Carbohydrates: 26g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 6mg | Sodium: 748mg | Potassium: 362mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 10953IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 84mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-sweet-potato-salad/feed/ 0
Kale Apple Slaw https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/ https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/#comments Tue, 16 Sep 2025 23:25:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=49034 Using apples in a savory salad isn’t new, but I think most apple salads miss a chance to pair them…]]>

Using apples in a savory salad isn’t new, but I think most apple salads miss a chance to pair them with something as sturdy and earthy as kale. A good dressing is key, especially when kale is involved, because let’s be honest, on its own, it’s not everyone’s favorite (my husband would agree). 

For me, the magic is in the balance of textures and tastes. Sweet, crisp apples meet earthy kale, all tied together with a dreamy maple Dijon dressing. Then comes the crunch from sunflower seeds, which makes every bite a little more exciting.

I call it a slaw because I was inspired by the Kale Apple Slaw at Tropical Smoothie Café, a cult-favorite dish that I loved so much that I had to recreate it in my own kitchen. It’s the kind of salad I make as part of my weekly meal prep because it holds up so well in the fridge. 

One bite and I think you’ll agree, let’s make it together.

Kale and Apple Slaw Ingredients 

You only need a handful of produce and a few basic pantry staples to make this fresh kale apple coleslaw. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my testing on ingredients and substitutions:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

For the Dressing

It is no secret that the dressing is the most important part of any kale salad, as sturdy kale leaves can use a ton of help when it comes to flavoring. I decided to use my Maple Dijon Vinaigrette as it offers the perfect balance of sweet and tangy flavors that complements the rest of the ingredients.

Below are a couple of notes from my recipe testing:

Maple syrup: I love the caramel-like sweetness it brings with the Dijon. For a lighter, citrusy twist, swap it with orange juice. Honey also works if you prefer a richer sweetness. I tested this slaw with all three, and while each works, they give the salad a slightly different character.

Apple cider vinegar: A key ingredient. It adds acidity to the dressing and also ties the apples into the overall flavor. If you don’t have it, red wine vinegar works too, but the taste is a little sharper.

For The Slaw

Apple: Crisp, firm apples hold up best. Fuji, Pink Lady, and Honeycrisp are my top picks, though tart Granny Smith is also great. Whatever you choose, slice or cube them just before serving to avoid browning.

Kale: I usually go with curly kale, but lacinato kale (aka Tuscan kale) works just as well. Each type has a different flavor and texture. If you’re not sure which to use, my Types of Kale guide can help you decide.

Seeds and nuts: I often use sunflower seeds, especially when I want to keep the recipe nut-free. When I do use nuts, I prefer raw almonds, pecans, or walnuts. Their mild taste lets the kale and apples stand out.

Cabbage: Red cabbage adds color and a subtle earthy note, but green cabbage works if that’s what you have. The thinner you slice it, the better it absorbs the dressing. I usually shred it with this insert I keep in my food processor, which I’ve found safer and quicker than a traditional mandoline. If you’re pressed for time, a bagged coleslaw mix is a fine shortcut.

Red Onion: Even though red onion has a stronger taste, I like using it here because it stands up well against hearty kale and crisp cabbage. If you prefer something milder, green onions are a good alternative.

How to Make Kale Apple Slaw

One of my favorite things about this kale apple salad, besides how fresh and crunchy it is, is how easily it fits into any meal. It lasts for days in the fridge and pairs with just about anything. Here’s how I put it together:

Step 1 – Make the salad dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together the maple syrup, dijon mustard, apple cider vinegar, olive oil, salt, and pepper. 

Then, add the sliced red onion to the dressing mixture and let it steep in the mixture while you prepare the rest of the ingredients. The vinegar takes away the sharp edge of raw onion, making it softer and slightly sweeter.

person showing how to make maple dijon vinaigrette

Step 2 – Prepare the salad: In a large mixing bowl, add the shredded kale, shredded carrots, and sliced red cabbage. Drizzle with the dressing and red onion, then use your hands to lightly massage the kale to break down the tougher parts of the leaves, making them more tender, less bitter, and better at soaking up the dressing. 

Pro Tip: Massaging kale might seem like an unusual practice, but I believe it is the secret to making kale tender, which is a common complaint among many people. Once massaged, it transforms into something much softer and easier to enjoy.

Person showing how to make kale apple slaw with step by step photos.

Step 3 – Serve: Top it off with the sliced apple and sunflower seeds. Toss the mixture one more time to evenly distribute the toppings, and serve immediately for the best crunch and freshest flavor.

Tropical smoothie kale apple slaw recipe in a bowl.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

This easy slaw recipe is meal-prep friendly, holding up beautifully in the fridge for days, so you can enjoy a crisp side dish all week long. Here are the best ways to ensure it stays fresh:

Make ahead: The Maple Dijon Vinaigrette can be prepared up to 2 days in advance and stored in a mason jar in the fridge. On the day you plan to serve, simply toss it with the kale, cabbage, and carrots, then add the apples just before serving. Assembly takes only about 5 minutes.

Storage: Once assembled, the slaw will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. For the best texture and color, slice the apples right before eating to prevent browning.

Kale and Apple Slaw in a bowl with two spoons on the side

What to Serve with Apple Kale Slaw

This kale and apple slaw is one of those salads that just works with almost anything. It’s crisp, colorful, and adds a fresh bite that makes any meal feel a little brighter. Here are a few of my favorite ways to enjoy it:

  • Pair it with grains: For a more filling meal, consider adding a cooked grain like quinoa, bulgur wheat, or wild rice. They will soak up the maple dijon dressing and turn it into a quick lunch you can grab from the fridge.
  • With turkey: If you need a light but satisfying dinner in under an hour, pair this slaw with my Turkey Tenderloin. The turkey is juicy, tender, and quick to cook, so you can have a balanced meal even on a weeknight. 
  • With chicken: My Baked Bone-In Chicken Breast is one of my favorite proteins to serve on top. The crispy skin and juicy meat add just enough richness.
  • With meatloaf: Serve the slaw with my Turkey Meatloaf to lighten up a classic comfort food dinner. The fresh crunch balances the comfort of the meatloaf without feeling heavy.

Expert Tips

While the recipe is pretty simple and straightforward, here are a few pro tips for making the best kale apple coleslaw:

  • Using red onion: Raw red onion can be sharp, even when thinly sliced. I like to soak it in water or massage it with salt to mellow the bite. In this recipe, I let it sit in the dressing instead, which softens the flavor while adding depth. If you enjoy raw onion as-is, you can skip this step.
  • Slice everything thinly: Large pieces of kale are tough to chew. Removing the stems and slicing the leaves into thin ribbons helps them absorb the dressing, making the salad easier to eat. 
  • Massage the kale: This is the step that turns tough kale into something tender and delicious. A quick massage not only softens the leaves but also helps the dressing cling to every bite. 
  • Blanch for a milder taste: If you find kale too bitter, you can blanch it. Just boil for a minute or two, then plunge into ice water. This quick step softens the leaves and tones down their bitterness.
  • Optional Add-Ins: You can easily make this salad your own with a few simple additions or swaps. Try dried cranberries or pomegranate seeds instead of apples for a sweet-tart twist, or add a handful of shaved parmesan to bring a savory, umami note that makes it even more delicious.

FAQs

What part of the kale do you cut off?

Remove the tough center stem (also called the rib) that runs down the middle of each leaf. It’s hard and chewy when raw, so strip the leafy greens away and chop them into bite-sized pieces for the best texture.

How can I make the kale less bitter?

The best way to reduce kale’s bitterness is to massage it with the dressing for 2-3 minutes to soften the leaves. This breaks down the tough fibers and makes the kale more tender and easier to chew. If you’re sensitive to bitterness, blanch the kale for 1-2 minutes before adding it to the salad.

How can I tell if I’m choosing good kale?

Look for kale with firm, crisp leaves that have a rich green color. Skip any that are starting to yellow, feel limp, or have wilted spots.

What’s the best apple to use in kale apple coleslaw?

Firm, crisp apples such as Honeycrisp, Fuji, Pink Lady, or Granny Smith work best.

Can I use a different dressing to make this kale and apple slaw recipe?

Yes. For a lighter, more citrusy flavor, try it with my Lemon Balsamic Dressing. For a creamy variation, use my Yogurt Salad Dressing.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Kale Recipes You Might Like:

If this recipe convinced you to give kale a chance, I am confident that you’ll be looking for more. So, here are a few other fresh kale salad recipes that I know you’ll enjoy:

  • If you’re in the mood for something cozy and seasonal, my Fall Harvest Salad is packed with all the fall flavors we love and is drizzled with a sweet dressing that ties it all together.
  • For a crunchy, make-ahead option, my Brussels Sprout Kale Salad includes shaved Brussels sprouts and kale with a bright vinaigrette.
  • And when you’re craving something simple and satisfying, my Kale and Avocado Salad comes together in minutes with a sweet-sour dressing you’ll want to drizzle on everything.
Kale Apple Carrot Slaw in a bowl with two spoons on the side
Print

Kale Apple Slaw Recipe

15 minute Kale Apple Slaw recipe that is perfect for a satisfying and filling meal. Also gluten free and vegan, you can make a batch as a part of your weekly meal prep and enjoy it throughout the week.
Course Salad
Cuisine American Vegan
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 407kcal

Ingredients

For The Maple Dijon Vinaigrette

  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup
  • 1 tablespoon dijon mustard
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ small red onion sliced thinly

For The Kale Apple Slaw

  • 6 cups curly kale (1 bunch destemmed and cut into ribbons)
  • 2 carrots shredded
  • 1 cup red cabbage sliced thinly
  • 1 apple sliced thinly
  • 1 cup sunflower seeds or any other nuts

Instructions

  • To make the salad dressing: Whisk together maple syrup, dijon mustard, garlic, apple cider vinegar, olive oil, salt and pepper in a small bowl or in a mason jar. Add in the sliced red onion and let it steep in it as you work on the rest of the ingredients.
    A collage of images showing the making of the dressing.
  • To make the Apple Kale Slaw: Place kale, shredded carrots and sliced red cabbage in a bowl. Drizzle it with the dressing. Using clean hands, give them a light massage making sure to distribute the dressing evenly throughout the salad. As you massage, the tough kale leaves will soften.
    Person showing how to massage kale for the slaw.
  • Top it off with sliced apple and sunflower seeds. Give it a toss and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 7 to 8 cups of salad and is ideal for four servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Steep the red onion: This is an optional step but letting your red onion slices soak in the dressing will give them a great texture and make them less bitter and overpowering.
  • Slice everything thinly: To make sure every bite of this recipe bursts with flavor, make sure you thinly slice all of your ingredients. Small pieces make it easier for your veggies to soak up the tangy dressing.
  • Massage the kale: Though it may seem like an odd step, massaging the kale is crucial to giving your leaves the perfect, tender texture. The massaging process infuses the kale with the acidic dressing, which helps break down the parts of fresh kale that are hard to digest.
  • Storage: Once prepared, kale and apple coleslaw will stay fresh in an airtight container for up to 3 days. Be sure to store it in an airtight container in the fridge.

Nutrition

Calories: 407kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Sodium: 381mg | Potassium: 585mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 8535IU | Vitamin C: 48mg | Calcium: 148mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/kale-apple-slaw/feed/ 2
Turkish Shepherd Salad https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-shepherd-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-shepherd-salad/#respond Mon, 25 Aug 2025 18:22:56 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83027 What is Shepherd Salad? If there were such a thing as the easiest salad in the world, Shepherd Salad would…]]>

What is Shepherd Salad?

If there were such a thing as the easiest salad in the world, Shepherd Salad would probably top the list. 

The name may sound a little unusual, but it comes from humble origins. In the countryside of Turkey, shepherds carried simple, inexpensive ingredients like tomatoes, cucumbers, onions, and peppers. Out in the fields, they would quickly chop everything and dress it with olive oil and lemon juice for a fresh, no-cook meal.

Shepherd salad in a bowl with spoons on the side.

Because these were the kinds of ingredients that were affordable and easy to find, Shepherd Salad has always been considered a simple, everyday dish rather than a luxury.

Today, Çoban Salatası remains a staple across Turkey and the Eastern Mediterranean. While it shares some similarities with Greek Salad, Shepherd Salad does not usually include cheese or olives, keeping it lighter and more refreshing. 

I left Turkey over 20 years ago, but to this day, I still make this salad almost daily when summer produce is at its peak. It’s one of those recipes that instantly brings me back home.

Simple Ingredients You’ll Need 

You’ll only need a handful of fresh vegetables and pantry staples to make this easy summer salad. You can find the full ingredient list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my experience and from how it is traditionally made in Turkey:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.

Tomatoes: Use the ripest, juiciest tomatoes you can find. Heirloom, Roma, cherry, or even steak tomatoes all work well.

Cucumbers: The authentic Turkish shepherd salad recipe uses Persian cucumbers, which are crunchy and with fewer seeds compared to English cucumbers. However, both types can be used in this recipe. If your cucumbers are freshly picked, it is not necessary to peel them, but I recommend tasting them, as older cucumbers may have bitter skin.

Scallions: I opted for scallions (also known as green onions) for their mild flavor, but finely chopped red onion or white onion can be used if you prefer a sharper bite. If you’re using green onions, you can use both the white parts and the green parts.

Green peppers: Traditionally, this salad is made with a Turkish pepper called sivri biber, a long, slender pepper that can range from mild to hot. Since I can’t find it here in the US, I usually use Anaheim peppers or jalapeños. For a milder option, a green bell pepper works as well.

Lemon juice: For the best taste, use freshly squeezed lemon juice, but in a pinch, bottled juice would also work. You can also swap it with white wine vinegar, apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar for a slightly different tang.

Olive oil: I recommend using a mild-flavored extra virgin olive oil.

Sumac powder: Sumac is usually available in the Middle Eastern or Mediterranean section of most grocery stores, sold as sumac spice or sumac powder. I often buy mine online, and if you are new to sumac, I really like Eastanbul Sumac Spice.

Just be sure to check the best-by date, as sumac has a shorter shelf life than many other spices (usually around 6 months).

Fresh herbs: I use fresh flat-leaf parsley in this recipe, but you can easily switch it up with whatever herbs you have on hand. In Turkey, it is very common to add fresh mint, fresh dill, or even a mix of the two.

Optional Add-Ins (Modern Variations):

The traditional Shepherd’s Salad is made with just the basics, but you can easily make it your own with a few optional add-ins. Some of my favorites are:

Olives: A handful of olives is a delicious way to make this salad more substantial and filling. In Turkey, we often use briny, firm varieties like Gemlik olives, but Kalamata and black olives work as well. Any olives you enjoy, even simple green olives, will do the trick.

Feta cheese: For the best taste and creamy texture, choose a good-quality feta made from sheep’s or cow’s milk and stored in brine. 

Dried mint: In some parts of Turkey, a small pinch of dried mint is sprinkled over the salad for more of an earthy flavor. It is not used in every version, but it is a traditional touch that pairs well with the sumac.

Urfa Chile or Aleppo Pepper: For a little heat, you can also sprinkle in some Urfa Chile pepper, Aleppo pepper, or any red pepper flakes you have on hand. For the most authentic result, aim for a variety that isn’t too spicy so the fresh flavors of the salad can really shine.

How to Make Turkish Shepherd Salad (Step-by-Step Guide)

Making Shepherd’s Salad couldn’t be simpler. You don’t need any special equipment; just a sharp knife, a cutting board, and a bowl. Here’s how to prepare it:

A collage of images showing the assembling of shepherd's salad.

Step 1 – Chop the vegetables: One of the hallmarks of this salad is that everything is cut into small, even pieces. This way, every bite has a little bit of everything. Dice the tomatoes, cucumbers, scallions, and peppers, then transfer them to a large bowl.

Step 2 – Add the dressing: Drizzle the vegetables with lemon juice and olive oil. Sprinkle with sumac, salt, and black pepper.

A collage of images showing the mixing of Turkish tomato and cucumber salad.

Step 3 – Finish with herbs: Add the chopped parsley on top. Using salad tongs (or clean hands), gently toss until the vegetables are evenly coated. Tossing gently is key, as it helps keep the tomatoes from getting mushy.

Step 4 – Serve: Enjoy right away while the vegetables are crisp and fresh. Shepherd’s Salad is best served immediately, since the salt and lemon juice draw water out of the vegetables, and the salad can become watery if it sits too long.

Storing Leftovers & Making Ahead

Making Ahead: You can chop the vegetables a few hours in advance and store them covered in the refrigerator. For the best texture, wait to add the dressing until just before serving to keep the vegetables crisp and prevent too much liquid from collecting in the bowl.

Storing Leftovers: Place any leftovers in an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 2 days. Keep in mind that the vegetables will naturally release some liquid as they sit, which will make the salad softer the next day. If that happens, just give it a quick toss and, if needed, add a squeeze of fresh lemon juice to brighten it back up.

Freezing: Freezing is not recommended since the vegetables lose their crisp texture once thawed. For the freshest taste and crunch, enjoy this salad right away.

Expert Tips:

While Shepherd’s Salad is simple to make, a few small details can take it from good to truly authentic. Here are my best tips:

  • Use fresh ingredients: This salad depends on peak-season produce. Ripe, juicy tomatoes and crisp cucumbers make all the difference. If your vegetables aren’t in season, sprinkle them with a pinch of salt and let them sit for a few minutes to bring out their natural juices.
  • Finely chop the vegetables: The traditional way in Turkey is to cut everything into small, even pieces. This will give you a mix of everything in each bite, and it will also ensure the lemon and olive oil coat everything evenly.
  • Season just before serving: Salt and lemon juice draw liquid out of the vegetables, especially tomatoes. So to keep the salad crisp, add the dressing and seasonings right before you bring it to the table.
  • Mix gently: Toss the salad lightly with your hands or salad tongs so the tomatoes don’t break down and become mushy.
  • Keep it chilled: Shepherd’s Salad is especially refreshing when served slightly cold. If you prep the vegetables ahead, store them in the fridge and dress just before serving.

Delicious Ways to Serve Turkish Shepherd Salad:

The pairing options are endless for this Turkish tomato and cucumber salad. While you can enjoy it with nearly any meal, here are some of my favorite ways to serve it:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Turkish shepherd salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Turkish Shepherd Salad Recipe

An authentic Turkish Shepherd Salad (Çoban Salatası) made with juicy tomatoes, crisp cucumbers, peppers, onions, and parsley. Light, refreshing, and ready in just 15 minutes.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 119kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 medium-sized tomatoes diced into 1 ½ inch cubes
  • 3 Persian cucumbers peeled and sliced ¼ inch thick
  • 2 scallions both green and white parts, thinly sliced
  • 2 green peppers Aneheim peppers, jalapenos, or serrano peppers – seeds removed and sliced thinly
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon sumac
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Place tomatoes, cucumbers, scallions, and green peppers in a large bowl or a large platter.
    Side by side images showing the ingredients of Turkish shepherd's salad.
  • Drizzle it with lemon juice, olive oil, and season with salt, pepper, and sumac.
  • Sprinkle it with fresh parsley and toss to combine.
    Side by side photos showing the making of coban salad.
  • Serve it right away.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6 cups of salad (depending on the size of your vegetables), and it is ideal for 4 (large) servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storage: Place leftovers in an airtight container and keep them in the fridge for up to 2 days. It is normal for the vegetables to release their juices as they sit. Just give it a stir before serving.
  • Optional add-ins: As I was writing this recipe, I wanted to stay true to the traditional recipe. However, some modern-day versions of this recipe add other ingredients like a handful of crumbled feta cheese, chopped black olives, and a sprinkle of red pepper flakes (or Urfa chile if you can get your hands on.) All of these would be great addition to the recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 119kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 588mg | Potassium: 247mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 748IU | Vitamin C: 61mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg

FAQ’s

What’s the difference between Turkish Shepherd Salad and Greek Salad?

Both salads feature tomatoes and cucumbers as their base, but they are prepared and served differently. In Turkish Shepherd Salad, the vegetables are finely chopped so every bite has a mix of everything. It’s dressed simply with olive oil, lemon juice, and sometimes a sprinkle of sumac, and traditionally does not include cheese or olives (though you can add them if you like).

Greek Salad (Horiatiki), on the other hand, is made with larger chunks of vegetables and usually includes feta cheese, olives, and oregano, giving it a heartier and more briny flavor.

Can I add cheese to Turkish Shepherd Salad?

While it is not traditional, you can sprinkle it with a handful of crumbled feta cheese.

What does Çoban mean in Turkish?

Çoban, pronounced as Chough-bahn, means Shepherd.

Other Turkish Salads You Might Like:

Turkish cuisine is known for similar, easy-to-make salads like this one that you can make during the peak tomato season. A few of my favorites are:

  • Summer tomatoes mixed in with white beans and red onions, Piyaz (Turkish White Bean Salad) is yet another simple salad 
  • At every kebab restaurant in Turkey, you’ll find a side of ezme, and my version shows you how to make this authentic “Turkish salsa” at home with just a few simple ingredients.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-shepherd-salad/feed/ 0
Grilled Flank Steak Salad https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-flank-steak-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-flank-steak-salad/#respond Tue, 12 Aug 2025 20:16:42 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82744 During the summer months, I try to avoid turning on the stove or oven. If I can make it on…]]>

During the summer months, I try to avoid turning on the stove or oven. If I can make it on the grill, that is where you will find me, especially when peak summer produce is at its best. This marinated flank steak salad is the perfect way to celebrate the season in one big fresh bowl. 

Grilled marinated flank steak salad from the top view.

For years, I grilled flank steak with just salt and pepper, but lately, I have been marinating it for a few hours, which really amps up the flavor. The rest is simple: toss in whatever summer produce you have on hand, such as tomatoes, corn, or radishes, and make it your own. But really, take my recipe as a place to start and make it your own. 

It is a fantastic summer salad recipe you will want to make again and again.

Simple Ingredients You’ll Need

You’ll find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but here are a few notes you need to bring this grilled steak salad to life: 

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Flank Steak: 

I usually use about 1½ pounds of flank steak. When buying flank steak to use in this salad, ask your butcher to give you a piece that is well marbled for the best flavor. 

You can certainly keep it simple with a little salt, pepper, and olive oil, but I opted to use my Flank Steak Marinade, which only takes about an hour to work its magic. 

Salad Dressing: 

I’m using my Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette for this recipe because it pairs beautifully with the grilled steak and vegetables. If you’re in the mood for something lighter, my Lemon Vinaigrette is a great option too. You can even make the dressing a day ahead and keep it in the fridge until you’re ready to serve.

For the Salad:

Lettuce: I like using romaine for the crunch, but any salad greens you have on hand will work. Arugula or a simple spring mix are great options, too. Just make sure they’re thoroughly washed, dried, and chopped into bite-sized pieces. 

Corn: I grill my corn on the cob right before grilling the flank steak, but any corn, whether it is thawed frozen corn or drained and rinsed canned corn, would work in this recipe.

Tomatoes: I like using cherry tomatoes, but any tomato will work. Roma, heirloom, or any ripe summer tomato is a good option. If you’re using cherry tomatoes, slice them in half or into quarters if they’re too big. For other tomatoes, cut them into bite-sized pieces so they’re easy to mix into the salad.

Radishes:  I use regular red radishes, but any variety works. Just slice them thinly so the acid in the dressing can cut through their bitterness and give them a lightly pickled taste.

Scallions: I opted for thinly sliced green onions (including both the white and green parts) for their milder flavor. But if you’re after something with more bite, thinly sliced red onions are a great option.

Avocado: Choose a ripe avocado. I recommend adding it just before serving so it stays fresh and does not turn brown. You can slice or cube it depending on your preference.

Cheese: I used fresh mozzarella for its mild flavors. If you can get your hands on them, fresh mozzarella pearls are ideal, but you can also buy a whole mozzarella and cut it into bite-sized cubes. 

Alternatively, for a bolder cheese option, crumbled goat cheese or blue cheese can also be used.

How To Make Grilled Flank Steak Salad?

This marinated flank steak salad recipe consists of two main parts: first, we marinate the flank steak, then we grill it and assemble the salad. I usually marinate the steak the night before so it’s ready to go, making this a perfect weeknight summer dinner. 

Below are the step-by-step instructions, along with helpful notes from my recipe testing:

Person making a flank steak salad and adding it into a bowl with the steak.

Step 1 – Make the Marinade: In a mixing bowl, combine all the marinade ingredients and whisk until smooth. I like to start with the wet ingredients first, then add the seasonings so everything blends evenly. Place the flank steak in a shallow glass dish or a resealable plastic bag. 

Pour the marinade over the surface, ensuring it’s evenly coated, then gently press or massage it in to allow the marinade to soak in. Cover and let it rest for at least 1 hour, or refrigerate up to overnight. Avoid marinating for more than 24 hours, as the acidity can break the meat down quite a bit and affect the texture.

Person making salad dressing and grilling the meat.

Step 2 – Make the Salad Dressing: In a small bowl, combine the balsamic vinegar, lemon juice, minced garlic, kosher salt, and pepper. Whisk to combine. Then, while whisking, slowly drizzle in the extra virgin olive oil until the dressing looks smooth and emulsified. Doing so helps the oil and vinegar come together without separating too quickly.

During my recipe testing, I’ve found that using a combination of balsamic vinegar and lemon juice gives the dressing a nice balance of depth and brightness, complementing the balsamic flavors in the steak marinade.

Step 3 – Grill the Steak: Preheat your grill to 500°F. High heat is key here because it sears the steak, creating those beautiful grill marks. Scrape the grates clean to remove any leftover bits so the meat can get even contact with the heat, then coat them generously with olive oil. Place the steak directly on the grill and cook for about 4 to 5 minutes per side for medium-rare. Use an instant-read thermometer (affiliate link) to check doneness and avoid overcooking, especially with lean cuts like flank steak.

If you’re not sure what temperature to aim for, here’s a quick guide to help you cook your steak just the way you like it:

  • Medium-rare: 130 to 135°F (3 to 4 minutes per side)
  • Medium: 140 to 145°F (4 to 5 minutes per side)
  • Medium-well: 150 to 155°F (5 to 6 minutes per side)

I usually aim for medium-rare to keep the steak juicy and tender. Going much past medium can cause it to dry out.

Step 4 – Rest the Steak: Transfer the steak to a platter and cover with foil. Let it rest for at least 10 minutes while you prepare the salad. This allows the juices to redistribute so they stay in the meat when sliced, keeping every bite juicy and tender.

A collage of images showing the dressing of the salad and the slicing of the grilled steak.

Step 5 – Assemble the Salad: In a large salad bowl, combine the chopped romaine lettuce, grilled corn, cherry tomatoes, thinly sliced radishes, thinly sliced green onions, avocado (sliced or cubed), and cubed mozzarella. 

That being said, if you are assembling this salad a few hours in advance, it is best to add the avocado at the last minute to prevent it from browning. The same goes for the dressing; it is best to drizzle it right before serving to keep the salad crispy and fresh.

Taste and adjust the seasoning as needed. Sometimes all it needs is a pinch of salt or a touch more acidity to bring everything together.

Step 6 – Slice the Steak: Slice the steak thinly (about ½ inch thick) against the grain. This means cutting across the natural lines you see running through the meat. Those lines are muscle fibers, and cutting across them makes each bite softer and easier to chew. 

The steak salad on a large plate from the top view.

Step 7 – Arrange and serve: Arrange the meat on top of the salad and serve while still warm.

Expert Tips for the Best Results

  • Plan ahead for grilled corn: If you’re planning to grill your corn, be prepared to set aside a bit more time, as it takes longer to grill corn than flank steak. Corn usually needs 10-15 minutes on the grill (depending on size), while flank steak takes about 5-7 minutes. I recommend starting with the corn first, so everything finishes around the same time.
  • Dressing and greens: The beauty of this salad is that it can be made with whatever salad greens you have on hand. I use romaine lettuce because I find that it gives a nice bite and crunch to the overall salad. It is also able to withstand the salad dressing for a longer time. 
    If you choose to use more delicate salad greens like arugula or spring mix, it is best to drizzle the salad with the dressing right before serving to prevent soggy greens.
  • Avocado: Add avocado just before serving to keep it fresh and prevent it from browning.
  • Best Timing for Serving: I recommend making the salad (without the dressing) while the steak is resting. Dress the salad, give it a quick toss, and then slice the steak and place it right on top so it’s ready to serve.

How to Store Leftovers?

Storage: I always recommend storing the steak separately from the salad because once the greens sit with the dressing, they start to get soggy pretty quickly. 

If you know you’ll have leftovers, let everything come to room temperature first, then place the steak and the salad in separate airtight containers before popping them in the fridge. Both will keep well for up to 3 days.

Reheating (optional): You can enjoy this straight from the fridge, but if you’d rather have it warm, just reheat the steak on its own before adding it back to the salad. Right before serving, give the salad a good toss to redistribute everything, and if needed, add a pinch more seasoning since the juices tend to settle at the bottom and the greens can lose a bit of their seasoning as they sit.

FAQs

Can I use a different cut of steak?

Yes. Skirt steak is the closest substitute and works really well with this marinade. Sirloin is another great option if you prefer something a little thicker and more tender. Just keep in mind that cooking times will vary depending on the cut and thickness, so use an instant-read thermometer to get it just right.

Can I make this salad ahead of time?

You can prepare the components ahead of time, such as making the dressing and cooking the steak. I recommend storing everything separately and assembling the salad just before serving so the greens stay crisp and fresh.

What if I don’t have a grill for the steak?

You can cook flank steak in a hot cast-iron skillet on the stovetop or under the broiler in your oven. For the stovetop, sear it in a lightly oiled skillet for 3-5 minutes per side for medium-rare. For the oven, broil it on a rack set over a baking sheet for about 5-6 minutes per side, depending on your preferred doneness. Always let it rest for 5-10 minutes before slicing against the grain.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Flank Steak Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you’re a fan of this grilled flank steak salad, you’ll want to try these other flank steak recipes:

  • Switch up your usual taco night with my Flank Steak Tacos, pairing them with your favorite toppings and enjoying them on warm tortillas.
  • For a satisfying and comforting meal, my Chimichurri Steak Sandwich has juicy grilled steak with fresh chimichurri on soft bread for a lunch or dinner you’ll want to make on repeat.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Grilled flank steak salad with utensils on the side.
Print

Grilled Flank Steak Salad Recipe

This grilled flank steak salad is packed with tender marinated steak, crisp romaine, sweet grilled corn, creamy avocado, and fresh mozzarella. Tossed in a tangy balsamic dressing, it's a fresh, meal-worthy summer salad perfect for weeknights or backyard gatherings.
Course Dinner, Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Marinating Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 45 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 551kcal

Ingredients

For the flank steak marinade:

  • ¼ cup olive oil plus more to oil the grill grates
  • cup soy sauce
  • ¼ cup balsamic vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 2 tablespoons Worcestershire sauce
  • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 tablespoon honey
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon sweet paprika
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 ½ lbs flank steak

For The Salad Dressing:

  • 3 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 garlic clove peeled and minced
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/2 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1/4 cup extra virgin olive oil

For The Salad:

  • 2 heads romaine lettuce rinsed, dried, and roughly chopped (about 6 cups)
  • 2 cups corn kernels grilled, or frozen, and thawed or canned and rinsed
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes cut in half
  • 3 small radishes sliced thinly
  • 3 scallions chopped (both white and green parts)
  • 1 ripe avocado sliced
  • 1 cup fresh mozzarella cheese cubed or crumbled goat cheese or blue cheese

Instructions

  • To make the marinade, grab a large enough container that can accommodate your flank steak and place ¼ cup of olive oil, ⅓ cup of soy sauce, ¼ cup of apple cider vinegar, 2 tablespoons of lemon juice, 2 tablespoons of Worcestershire sauce, 1 tablespoon of Dijon mustard, 1 tablespoon of honey, 3 cloves of minced garlic, 1 teaspoon of sweet paprika, ½ teaspoon of ground cumin, ½ teaspoon of kosher salt, ¼ teaspoon black pepper in it. Whisk until smooth.
    Flank steak marinade being poured into a bowl.
  • Cover and let it marinate in the fridge for at least an hour or overnight (no more than 24 hours.)
  • While the meat is marinating, make the salad dressing. In a small bowl, place 3 tablespoons of balsamic vinegar, 2 tablespoons of freshly squeezed lemon juice, 1 clove garlic, peeled and minced, 1 teaspoon kosher salt and 1/2 teaspoon freshly ground black pepper. Give it a whisk. While still whisking, slowly add the 1/4 cup of extra-virgin olive oil. Whisk until fully incorporated and smooth. Set it aside.
    A collage of images showing the dressing being made and the meat grilled.
  • To grill the steak, preheat a gas grill to 500 degrees °F. Scrape the grill grates and coat them generously with the oil.
  • Place the flank steak on the grill and cook for 3-4 minutes on each side for rare (internal temperature is 130 to 135 °F), 4-5 minutes on each side for medium (internal temperature is 136 to 145 °F), or 5-6 minutes on each side for medium-well (internal temperature is 146 to 155 °F).
  • When it reaches your desired doneness, transfer the grilled flank steak to a platter and cover it with foil. Let it rest while you prepare the salad.
  • To make the salad, place 6 cups of roughly chopped romaine lettuce, 2 cups of corn, 1 cup of chopped cherry tomatoes, 3 small sliced radishes, 3 thinly sliced green onions, 1 sliced avocado, and a cup of mozzarella pearls in a large salad bowl.
    Person adding the dressing over the salad and the steak is sliced.
  • Drizzle the dressing over the salad and toss to ensure that all of the ingredients are evenly coated. Add more seasoning to taste and adjust as needed.
  • Slice the steak against the grain (1/2-inch thick slices) and layer it over the salad just before serving.
    Grilled marinated flank steak salad from the top view.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 10 cups of salad that is ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storing leftovers: If you know you’ll have leftovers, I recommend storing the salad and the meat separately. If not, place the leftovers in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Corn: You can use any corn you have on hand. Frozen (and thawed), Canned (and drained) or grilled fresh corn would all work. If you are planning to grill your corn, I recommend setting aside a bit more time as it takes longer for corn to grill (compared to the flank steak).

Nutrition

Calories: 551kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 35g | Fat: 34g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Cholesterol: 83mg | Sodium: 1721mg | Potassium: 1358mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 18731IU | Vitamin C: 25mg | Calcium: 224mg | Iron: 6mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/grilled-flank-steak-salad/feed/ 0
Watermelon Cucumber Salad with Feta and Mint https://foolproofliving.com/minted-watermelon-salad-bulgur/ https://foolproofliving.com/minted-watermelon-salad-bulgur/#comments Wed, 16 Jul 2025 21:24:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=9222 Having grown up in the Mediterranean means having a few cooling staples like this cucumber, watermelon, and feta salad in…]]>

Having grown up in the Mediterranean means having a few cooling staples like this cucumber, watermelon, and feta salad in your back pocket. Summers get so hot that refreshing, no-cook dishes like this are a staple on every table.

Versions of this salad show up all across the Mediterranean, from Italy to Greece and beyond. The ingredients may vary slightly, but the combination of juicy watermelon, crisp cucumbers, briny feta cheese, and fresh herbs is a classic in many Mediterranean kitchens.

Every year, as soon as watermelons showed up at the market, my mom would start making it on repeat. With the sweet juiciness of watermelon, the crunch of cold cucumbers, and the creamy-salty bite of feta, it’s the kind of dish that doesn’t need much fuss to shine.

This is what summer tastes like where I’m from: easy, filling, and somehow always the first thing to disappear from the table.

Watermelon Feta Mint Salad Ingredients

This summer watermelon salad with feta and cucumber starts with an easy honey-lime dressing and a short list of ingredients. You can find the complete list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes to consider when shopping for this refreshing salad.

The ingredients for watermelon cucumber salad from the top view.

For the Salad Dressing:

I use my honey-lime dressing in this watermelon mint feta salad because the sweet, floral brightness of lime and honey pairs beautifully with the natural sweetness of the watermelon.

Olive Oil: Choose a light and balanced extra virgin olive oil that isn’t overly peppery or grassy. You want something that supports the salad without overpowering the other ingredients. My current favorite single-source olive oil brand is Garcia de la Cruz (affiliate link.)

Lime Juice: Freshly squeezed lime juice is best, but bottled works in a pinch. If you don’t have lime, freshly squeezed lemon juice is an acceptable substitute. It will taste slightly different but still refreshing. You can also add a little lime zest (about ¼ teaspoon) to enhance the citrus notes. Just be sure to zest the lime before juicing it.

Honey: A floral local honey works especially well here, but maple syrup or agave are good alternatives if that’s what you have. Just know they’ll shift the flavor slightly.

For the Salad:

Watermelon: You’ll need 8 cups of watermelon cut into small 1-inch cubes. Seedless watermelon is the easiest option, but if you’re using regular watermelon, try cutting along the natural lines of the seeds to remove them more easily.

Cucumbers: Persian cucumbers offer great crunch, but regular English cucumbers also work well. I usually peel mine, especially if the skin tastes bitter, which can happen if the fruit has been sitting for a while. Removing the seeds is optional.

Fresh Herbs: The classic combo is watermelon, feta, and mint, but I like to add a little torn fresh basil for even more freshness. I don’t recommend using dried herbs here, as their flavors tend to overpower the dish.

Feta Cheese: I recommend buying a block of feta and crumbling it yourself. It’s creamier, fresher, and gives you more control over the size and texture of the crumbles. If you’re looking for alternatives, mild cheeses like goat cheese or queso fresco would also work well.

How to Make Watermelon Cucumber Salad (Easy Step-by-Step Instructions)

This watermelon and cucumber salad recipe comes together in just 15 minutes from start to finish. Here’s how I make it, step by step:

A collage of images shwowing the dressing for watermelon cucumber salad and the ingredients in a bowl.

Step 1- Make the Dressing: In a mason jar or small bowl, combine the olive oil, fresh lime juice, salt, and honey. Shake or whisk well until the mixture is fully emulsified and appears creamy and cohesive, with no oil separation. If you’d like to save even more time, you can make the dressing in advance and store it in an airtight jar in the fridge for up to 2 days.

Step 2 – Assemble the Salad: Grab a large bowl (one that gives you plenty of room to toss later without squishing anything) and add the diced watermelon, sliced cucumber, and fresh mint and basil. I recommend tearing the herbs by hand instead of chopping them with a knife. This helps preserve the delicate texture of the basil and prevents it from bruising or darkening.

A collage of images showing Mediterranean watermelon salad being drizzled with the dressing.

Step 3 – Add the Dressing: Right before serving, drizzle the dressing over the salad. Gently toss with a large spoon (or two spoons, for an even gentler touch), taking care not to mash/bruise the watermelon cubes.

Step 4 – Finish with Feta: Top the salad with crumbled feta cheese just before serving. If you’d like, finish with a pinch of flaky sea salt to bring out the natural sweetness of the watermelon.

Watermelon Cucumber Salad Variations & Easy Add-Ins

Looking to truly make this watermelon cucumber mint salad recipe your own? Below are a few easy ways to switch things up using ingredients you may already have at home. These are optional, but they’re great if you want to build on the base recipe.

Change up the dressing: When I want a different twist, I swap the honey-lime dressing with my Lemon Balsamic Dressing. Watermelon cucumber salad with balsamic vinaigrette is just as bright and tangy. You can also finish the salad with a drizzle of balsamic reduction right before serving for a deeper, more concentrated flavor.

Make it heartier: If you’re making this watermelon feta salad as part of your meal prep, stir in a cup (or two) of cooked quinoa, bulgur, or wild rice to make it more filling. For a more traditional green salad base, add a handful of salad greens or baby spinach.

Add Summer tomatoes:  Juicy sliced summer tomatoes (I like heirlooms for salads like these) add another layer of flavor and make the salad even more seasonal and vibrant.

Add Onion: A little onion can bring a nice savory bite. You can use thinly sliced red onions, Pickled Red Onions, or Roasted Red Onions. For a milder option, chopped scallions work well too.

Make it vegan: To make this a vegan-friendly salad, simply omit the cheese or use a store-bought or homemade vegan feta. And don’t forget to swap the honey in the dressing for maple syrup or agave.

Foolproof Tips for the Best Watermelon Cucumber Salad

Making this watermelon feta cucumber salad is simple, but here are a few tips to help you get the best results on your first try:

Be gentle when mixing: Use a light hand when tossing the salad to keep the delicate ingredients from breaking apart. A large spoon or your hands work best for gently combining everything.

Choose a good watermelon: Look for a ripe watermelon that feels heavy for its size and has a large yellow field spot. That spot means it had time to ripen on the vine, which usually means better taste and juiciness.

Cut your watermelon and cucumber evenlyDice the watermelon into bite-sized pieces, or use a melon baller for a more decorative look. For the cucumber, peeling is optional, but I recommend slicing it thinly or cutting it into evenly sized cubes so you get both watermelon and cucumber in every bite.

Do not skip the salt: It may sound unusual, but adding a bit of salt to sweet watermelon makes a big difference. It brings out the natural sweetness and enhances the flavors of both the watermelon and cucumber.

Serve it chilled: This watermelon salad tastes best when it is nice and cold. I like to refrigerate the watermelon, cucumber, and feta before prepping so that everything is cool and refreshing when it is time to serve.

Assemble at the last minute: For the best texture, combine the watermelon, cucumber, herbs, and dressing just before serving. This keeps the watermelon and cucumber from getting soggy.

How to Make Ahead and Store?

If you are planning to make this watermelon cucumber feta salad recipe ahead of time, here are my best tips:

Make Ahead: To save valuable time when you’re ready to serve, you can prep the components ahead: Cut the watermelon, slice the cucumbers, crumble the feta, and make the dressing. Store each component in a separate container with a tight-fitting lid. Assemble your feta watermelon cucumber salad right before serving to ensure the best texture and prevent sogginess.

Storage: Leftover salad will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. However, be aware that the watermelon mixture will collect water as it sits. Simply drain, sprinkle salad with fresh herbs, and mix with a touch more dressing to bring it back to life before serving.

A close up of watermelon salad with feta and mint in a bowl.

What to Serve with Watermelon Cucumber Salad?

There are so many options when it comes to serving this watermelon salad with feta and mint. While I usually make it for lunch and serve it by itself, you can easily pair it with meats and vegetables for your summer meals. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

Grilled Protein: Enjoy it as a light lunch or dinner, and serve it as a side dish to hearty grilled meat and seafood like Grilled Pork Chops, Shrimp Kebobs, Grilled Shrimp, Grilled Mahi Mahi, Shish Tawook, or Greek Yogurt Chicken.

Vegetarian Dinners: Keep the entire meal plant-forward and serve it as a wonderful addition to vegetarian main meals like Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant, Baked Eggplant Ziti or Lemon Ricotta Pasta.

Picnic & Potluck Dishes: This salad is always a hit at summer BBQs, picnics, and potlucks. Pair it with other crowd-pleasers like my No Mayo Coleslaw or Greek Yogurt Coleslaw, or Caper Potato Salad.

Quick Answers to Common Questions (FAQs)

Does watermelon and cucumber taste good together?

Yes, watermelon and cucumber are exceptionally delicious when paired together. The juicy watermelon is the perfect balance to the crisp cucumber.

What is watermelon salad made of?

Watermelon salad consists of watermelon, cucumber, fresh mint, fresh basil, and feta cheese tossed in a lime or balsamic vinegar-based dressing.

How do I pick a ripe watermelon quickly?

Look for one with a creamy yellow field spot, a dull rind (not shiny), and that feels heavy for its size. When you give it a gentle tap, it should sound deep and hollow.

What if I don’t have fresh mint?

Fresh mint adds a lot to this recipe, but if you do not have any on hand, you can simply leave it out. The salad will still be delicious, just a little less aromatic.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Savory Fruit Salads You Might Also Like:

If you love sweet and savory salads, you are in the right place. Here are a few other fruit-forward recipes you might want to try:

Watermelon and cucumber salad in a bowl with two spoons in the bowl.
Print

Watermelon Cucumber Salad Recipe

This Watermelon cucumber salad is an incredibly refreshing savory fruit salad that is flavored with honey lime dressing. Ready in 15 minutes, it is the perfect summer salad you can serve for lunch or take with you to summer potlucks, picnics, and BBQ parties.
Course Lunch
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 290kcal

Ingredients

For the Honey Lime Dressing:

  • 4 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 3 tablespoons fresh lime juice from 1 lime
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoon honey

For The Salad:

  • 8 cups fresh watermelon ~ 5 to 6 lbs – cut into 1-inch cubes (preferably seedless)
  • 2 Persian cucumbers peeled and sliced ¼ inch thick, or English cucumbers
  • 3 tablespoons fresh mint roughly torn
  • 2 tablespoons fresh basil roughly torn
  • ½ cup feta cheese crumbled (or goat cheese)
  • Pinch sea salt optional

Instructions

  • Mix olive oil, fresh lime juice, salt, and honey in a mason jar and shake vigorously. Set aside.
    Watermelon salad dressing and the ingredients in a bowl.
  • Place watermelon cubes, sliced cucumber, fresh mint, and basil in a large salad bowl.
  • Right before serving, drizzle the dressing over the salad. Give it a gentle toss being careful not to bruise or break the watermelon chunks.
  • Sprinkle the feta cheese on top, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary. Alternatively, you can sprinkle it with a pinch of sea salt. Serve cold.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 8 cups of cucumber watermelon salad ideal for serving 4 adults. The nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Serve it chilled. This salad is best when served cold. I like to keep each ingredient in the refrigerator before and after prepping. This way, all the salad is perfectly chill (and super refreshing) before serving.
  • Assemble at the last minute: Toss all the ingredients with the dressing just before serving. This keeps the integrity and texture of the watermelon and cucumber intact.
  • Be gentle while tossing: Use gentle hands to keep the delicate ingredients’ shape and structure.
  • Make Ahead: Prepare all the ingredients and store them in separate containers. You can also make the dressing 3 days in advance and keep it in a mason jar in the fridge. Toss it all together just before serving.
  • Storage: Leftover salad will keep fresh in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. However, be aware that the watermelon mixture will collect water as it sits. Drain, sprinkle salad with fresh herbs, and toss with a touch more of the honey lime dressing to bring it back to life before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 290kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 365mg | Potassium: 434mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 24g | Vitamin A: 2056IU | Vitamin C: 30mg | Calcium: 131mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/minted-watermelon-salad-bulgur/feed/ 6
Easy Tzatziki Sauce Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/#comments Tue, 01 Jul 2025 16:52:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15923 What is Tzatziki Sauce? (Beyond the White Gyro Sauce) You know that question about your desert island food? Tzatziki would…]]>

What is Tzatziki Sauce? (Beyond the White Gyro Sauce)

You know that question about your desert island food? Tzatziki would be mine. 

At its core, tzatziki is a yogurt-based dip made with strained yogurt (also known as Greek yogurt), cucumber, garlic, lemon juice, and herbs (typically dill or mint).

Referred to by many names, such as Greek Tzatziki sauce, Tzatziki Sauce, and Cucumber Yogurt Sauce, it can be served as a dip, a sauce, or even as a dressing. 

It pairs well with just about anything, from meat to gyros, to Turkish kebabs, to grilled or roasted vegetables.

While many people in the U.S. know it as the white sauce that comes with a gyro, that version is often heavier, sometimes made with mayonnaise or sour cream, and doesn’t always include cucumber. 

My homemade tzatziki sauce recipe is different here. It’s the real thing. The kind of tzatziki you’ll find on tables in homes across Turkiye, Greece, and beyond.

Essential Ingredients for Authentic Tzatziki (And Why They Matter)

The good news is that this easy tzatziki recipe requires only a few simple ingredients and comes together in minutes. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful tips to keep in mind when shopping:

Tzatziki sauce ingredients from the top view with text on the image.

Full-fat Greek Yogurt (also known as Strained Yogurt): I think the best yogurt for tzatziki is a whole-milk, plain Greek yogurt. It yields a rich and creamy tzatziki dip, a main characteristic of this Mediterranean sauce.  If your container has any liquid sitting on top, be sure to strain that out before using.

You can also use plain, unsweetened yogurt or even low-fat or fat-free yogurt, but the texture will be a bit looser compared to Greek yogurt.

Fresh Cucumber: Either Persian or English cucumbers work well. I like to peel them first, as some cucumber skin can be bitter. Still, it is a personal preference.

I grate them using the large holes on a box grater and then drain them in a mesh sieve. It might seem like an extra step, but thoroughly draining the grated cucumber helps eliminate excess liquid, giving you the thick, creamy consistency that this cucumber tzatziki sauce is known for.

Fresh Garlic Cloves: The traditional version of this Mediterranean yogurt sauce calls for fresh, finely minced garlic. I usually add two cloves per 1 ½ cups of yogurt, but feel free to adjust the amount based on your preferences. 

If you prefer a milder flavor, garlic powder is a fine substitute. Since it’s more concentrated, I recommend using about 1 teaspoon per 1 ½ cups of yogurt.

Fresh Herbs: I like using fresh dill, but fresh mint is another classic option. In Turkiye, it’s also common to use dried dill or mint if fresh isn’t available. That said, I think fresh herbs bring a brighter, more vibrant taste.

Fresh Lemon Juice: Just a squeeze is enough to brighten the flavors and balance the richness of the yogurt.

Kosher Salt and Black Pepper: You won’t need anything beyond basic seasoning here. Start with the amounts listed in the recipe and adjust to taste.

Extra Virgin Olive Oil (Optional): You won’t see olive oil listed in my recipe because my mom never used it. I find that thick, whole-milk yogurt gives the sauce all the richness it needs. However, if you’d like to add it, a tablespoon of olive oil per 1 ½ cups of yogurt is a good starting point.

How to Make Easy Homemade Tzatziki: A Step-by-Step Guide

Making a delicious tzatziki with yogurt, shredded cucumber, and lemon juice doesn’t require any special cooking techniques, so anyone can do it.

A collage of images showing how to strain grated cucumber and make the yogurt mixture.

Step 1 – Grate and drain the cucumber: Using the large holes of a box grater, grate the peeled cucumber and transfer it to a fine-mesh strainer. Press down with a spatula to release the excess moisture. I usually let it sit for a few minutes to help the juices drain completely.

Once drained, you should have about 1 cup of grated cucumber.

Alternatively, you can wrap the shredded cucumber in a clean tea towel and squeeze it by hand to remove as much liquid as possible.

Step 2 – Whisk the yogurt base: In a medium bowl, combine the Greek yogurt, freshly squeezed lemon juice, minced garlic, salt, and black pepper.

Whisk until smooth and creamy. This is also a good time to give it a quick taste and adjust the seasoning if needed.

A collage of photos showing how to make tzatziki from scratch.

Step 3 – Add cucumber and herbs: Fold in the drained cucumber and fresh dill or mint. Mix until everything is evenly combined.

Step 4 – Cover and chill:
You can serve it right away, but if you have the time, cover and let it rest in the fridge for at least 30 minutes. This allows the flavors to meld and deepen.

A bowl of tzatziki surrounded with vegetables.
Print

Easy Tzatziki Sauce Recipe

An easy tzatziki sauce recipe that you can make in minutes and serve with all your savory Mediterranean/Middle Eastern dishes.
Course Sauce
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 61kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 English Cucumber peeled (or 2 Persian cucumbers)
  • 1 ½ cups Whole Milk Greek Yogurt unsweetened and unflavored
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 2 cloves fresh garlic peeled and minced finely
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • cup fresh dill or fresh mint

Instructions

  • Using the large holes of a box grater, grate the cucumber. Transfer it into a fine-mesh strainer and strain all of its juices, pressing it with a rubber spatula. Set aside.
    A collage of images showing how to make the recipe.
  • In a medium-size mixing bowl, whisk together yogurt, lemon juice, minced garlic, salt and pepper.
  • Using a spatula, fold in the cucumber and dill. Transfer to a bowl.
    Person making the tzatziki in a bowl.
  • If you have time, cover with plastic, and let it sit in the fridge for a few hours before serving.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 ¼ to 1 ½ cups of tzatziki sauce which is ideal for 4 servings as a condiment. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: Make the recipe as written up to 2 days before serving. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge. Be sure to give it a good stir before serving.
  • Storage: This sauce will stay fresh for about 3-4 days. Simply place leftovers in an airtight container and keep them in the fridge. If you notice any liquid separation, just give your Tzatziki a good stir before serving.
  • A word on olive oil: My recipe relies on rich yogurt for creaminess and does not require adding any olive oil, unlike some other tzatziki recipes. However, for extra depth, drizzle 1 tbsp extra virgin olive oil on top before serving.
  •  

Nutrition

Calories: 61kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 4mg | Sodium: 31mg | Potassium: 245mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 381IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 105mg | Iron: 1mg

Expert Tips from a Lifelong Tzatziki Maker

This recipe is pretty straightforward, but there are a few things I want to point out so you can end up with the best tzatziki on your first try:

  • Don’t skip draining the shredded cucumber: This is the single most important step when it comes to achieving that creamy texture tzatziki is known for. Yes, it’s an extra step, but it makes all the difference.
  • DIY Greek Yogurt: If you don’t have Greek yogurt, you can strain plain yogurt at home. Just place a fine-mesh sieve over a bowl and line it with cheesecloth (a paper towel will also work in a pinch). Add the yogurt, cover it, and let it sit in the fridge for a few hours. The longer it sits, the thicker it becomes.
    Since plain yogurt has more liquid, I recommend using about half a cup more than the recipe calls for to account for the liquid that will drain.
  • Avoid overmixing: Once you have folded in the cucumber and herbs, mix only until the ingredients are just combined. Overmixing can cause the cucumber to release more liquid, which may water down the sauce.
  • Do not skip the chilling: To me, the secret to the best tzatziki sauce is letting it rest in the fridge. This time allows the flavors (especially the garlic and fresh herbs) to develop and deepen. Even just 30 minutes makes a difference, but planning for an hour or two can yield even better results.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

Make Ahead: You can make this Greek tzatziki sauce recipe a day or two ahead. Just be sure to transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge.

Storage: Leftovers will keep for up to 3 days in the refrigerator. Give it a good stir before serving, and if any liquid has collected on top, simply pour it off or drain it before mixing.

Delicious Ways to Serve Tzatziki Sauce in Your Daily Cooking

Images showing food that uses tzatziki.

I may or may not have been caught eating this Mediterranean classic with a spoon. All jokes aside, tzatziki is a staple for a reason. It pairs beautifully with just about any meat or vegetable dish that could use a cooling, creamy contrast. Here are a few of my favorite ways to use it:

Kabobs and Gyros: Simply drizzle it right on top! If you want to try something different, try drizzling this sauce over my Karniyarik recipe (aka Turkish Stuffed Eggplant), Greek Yogurt Chicken, Shish Taouk, or Baked Chicken Kabobs, Chicken Shawarma, or serve it with Turkish Kofte

Sauce for Burgers and Sandwiches: I love using it as a spread for Greek Lamb Burgers (pictured above) or my Chicken Pita Wraps. It adds a creamy contrast and brings everything together.

Vegetables and Vegetable Dishes: A dollop of tzatziki can turn simple roasted eggplant into a delicious appetizer. It’s also a great match for baked zucchini fritters, crispy falafel, or just about any veggie-forward dish you’d serve at a gathering.

With Salads: Tzatziki isn’t just a dip; it makes a fantastic, creamy addition to various salads. I particularly love a dollop alongside or even mixed into my easy Greek salad for an extra layer of freshness.

Grain Bowls: Drizzle it over shawarma chicken bowls (pictured above) or make it part of a DIY Cava bowl. It adds creaminess and brightens the rest of the toppings.

Part of a Meze Platter: Serve it in a bowl as a dip on a large platter along with cheese and crackers, olives, hummus, muhammara, pita bread (or pita chips), and fresh raw vegetables.

Tzatziki Sauce Variations & Substitutions:

  • Dairy-Free/Vegan Options: To make this vegan or dairy-free, use a neutral-flavored plant-based yogurt. I prefer unflavored cashew yogurt, but coconut or almond milk yogurt can also work. Just make sure it’s unsweetened and as thick as possible for the best consistency.
  • Herb Variations: You can easily make this creamy tzatziki sauce your own by switching up the herbs. Fresh dill and mint are classic options, but parsley or chives are also great alternatives. No fresh herbs on hand? You can leave them out and still have a delicious dip.
  • Making it Thinner (like Turkish Cacık): If you have ever been to Turkiye, you’ve probably had cacik, a thinner version of tzatziki. To achieve that texture, simply use plain yogurt instead of Greek yogurt, or stir in about ½ cup of cold water (or more, depending on your preference) until you reach the desired consistency.

FAQs:

How Do You Spell Tzatziki?

The phonetic spelling is /tsaˈtsiːki/. The word for this Greek yogurt cucumber sauce is spelled T-Z-A-T-Z-I-K-I. It is a loanword from Modern Greek, which actually comes from the Turkish word cacık, of unknown origin.

How Do You Pronounce Tzatziki?

So, how do you say Tzatziki? The correct way to pronounce Tzatziki is “tsah-see-key.” Think of the tsah part as how you say “pizza,” without the first two letters.

Can Tzatziki sauce be frozen?

Technically, you can freeze yogurt, but after thawing, it loses its creamy consistency. This is generally true for most savory yogurt-based dressings or sauces. Therefore, I wouldn’t recommend freezing Tzatziki sauce.

Can I use non-fat yogurt?

Yes, you can use any plain yogurt you like. However, I recommend sticking to Greek Yogurt as it is thicker than other yogurt types. The higher the fat content, the more delicious and creamy it would be, but non-fat or low-fat plain yogurt would still do the job.

Do I have to strain the juice of the cucumber?

The correct answer is yes. Some people even go as far as straining yogurt and cucumber in a colander lined with cheesecloth overnight in the fridge. I guess it is because they prefer a thicker consistency. However, in my opinion, the thickness of Tzatziki is a personal preference. If you like yours runny then no need to strain the juices and vice versa.

Do I have to peel the cucumber?

It is a personal preference. I prefer to peel mine as some cucumber skin can be bitter.

Can I substitute sour cream for yogurt?

I don’t usually recommend it, as the flavor and texture are quite different. Sour cream is richer and tangier than yogurt, and it has a higher fat content, which can make the sauce feel heavier than intended.

What can i substitute for greek yogurt in tzatziki sauce?

If you don’t have Greek yogurt, you can use plain (unsweetened) yogurt to make tzatziki. Since it is not as thick as Greek yogurt (also known as strained yogurt), I recommend straining its liquid before use. Simply place it in a fine-mesh strainer lined with cheesecloth and set it in a bowl.

Other Yogurt Sauce Recipes You Might Also Like:

  • My Yogurt Dill Sauce is bright, herby, and perfect for serving with salmon, baked potatoes, or simple roasted vegetables.
  • A drizzle of my Greek yogurt salad dressing instantly turns any salad greens into a refreshing, creamy side that goes with just about any meal.
  • A spoonful of my Yogurt Tahini Sauce adds a creamy, nutty layer to grain bowls, roasted veggies, or just about anything that needs a little something extra.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/feed/ 25
Texas Caviar Recipe (Cowboy Caviar) https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/ https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/#comments Wed, 25 Jun 2025 18:24:29 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=22788 For years, I avoided this cowboy bean salad anytime I saw it at a potluck or outdoor party. If you’re…]]>

For years, I avoided this cowboy bean salad anytime I saw it at a potluck or outdoor party. If you’re like me and didn’t grow up eating it, you might agree that some versions can be overly sweet.

Then I came across Dorie Greenspan’s version in her cookbook Everyday Dorie (affiliate link) and decided to give it another shot. To my surprise, it was nothing like what I had tasted before. Her cowboy caviar dressing was perfectly tangy with just a touch of sweetness, balancing out the earthy beans in the best way.

Cowboy caviar in a bowl with two spoons on the side.

This recipe, sometimes called Texas Caviar, Cowboy Caviar, Cowboy Salad, or even Cowboy Bean Dip, is my take on her version, with a few minor tweaks.

Whatever name you use, it’s one of the easiest dishes to throw together, and it works as a dip, a salad, or a chunky salsa perfect with a side of tortilla chips.

Texas Caviar Ingredients

For a quick overview, find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below. But for truly foolproof results, here are my top tips as you shop and prep:

The Dressing Ingredients:

Some versions of this recipe use bottled Italian dressing, but I find those to be overly oily and lacking in depth. What makes this Cowboy Caviar dip different is the homemade lime and olive oil dressing. It’s just enough to coat the beans and veggies without weighing them down, adding brightness and balance in every bite.

Ingredients for cowboy caviar's dressing.

Here are a couple of helpful ingredient notes as you make the dressing:

Lime zest and lime juice: My version of the Texas Caviar dressing uses both lime zest and fresh lime juice to bring out a bright, tangy flavor. Four tablespoons of lime juice might sound like a lot, but trust me, it’s just the right amount.

If you prefer a milder taste, you can use 2 tablespoons of red wine vinegar and reduce the lime juice to 2 tablespoons.

And just a quick tip: it’s always easier to zest the lime before squeezing it.

Spices: I use a small amount of ground cumin and sweet paprika, following Dorie’s recipe. I think they add a beautiful depth and a welcome punch. Still, if you’re not a fan of either spice, feel free to leave them out.

Sweetener: I almost always reach for natural sweeteners like honey or maple syrup, but granulated sugar works in a pinch if that’s what you have on hand.

Garlic: Whenever I make a salad dressing, I love using fresh garlic. I think the sharp bite and depth of flavor just can’t be replicated. But if you prefer something milder, you can substitute it with 1 teaspoon of garlic powder.

Salad Ingredients:

A photo showing what's in Texas caviar.

Beans: I use a combination of black beans and black-eyed peas in my version of this Cowboy Caviar salad. In my opinion, black-eyed peas are pretty much a must in any Texas Caviar dip recipe. You can swap red kidney beans or pinto beans in place of the black beans if you’d like, and you’ll still get the heart of the dish.

Canned beans help keep things quick and easy, but you can absolutely cook them from scratch if that’s your preference.

Just be sure to rinse and dry them well before assembling the salad to avoid extra liquid watering it down.

Corn: In the summer, I love using fresh shucked corn when it’s in season. But if you’re making this at another time of year, frozen (and thawed) or canned (rinsed and drained) corn works just as well.

Onion: I use a combination of finely chopped green onions and red onions because I love the distinct flavors each one adds. You get a mix of color, crunch, and both mild and sharp flavors. If you prefer a milder taste, you can leave out the red onion. Or if you want something with more bite, skip the green and just use red.

Peppers: Most Texas Caviar recipes use a combination of red bell peppers and jalapeño, and for good reason. Each one brings its own unique flavor. If you like a bit of heat, feel free to leave some of the jalapeño seeds in for a touch of spiciness.

Tomatoes: During the summer months, I love using colorful cherry tomatoes for this Texas Caviar dip. But really, any kind of tomato will work. Heirloom, beefsteak, or even regular Roma tomatoes are all good options. Just be sure to cut them into small, bite-sized pieces so they mix easily with the other ingredients.

Avocado: It is optional and not traditional, but I think a ripe avocado makes a great addition, especially if you’re planning to serve this as a dip with chips on the side. Just be sure to cut it into small cubes so it blends in nicely.

Fresh Herbs: I used a handful of finely chopped fresh cilantro leaves, but if you are not a fan, you can use fresh parsley instead.

How To Make Texas Caviar?

Making this recipe takes no more than 15-20 minutes and requires no special equipment. 

Step 1 – Make the Cowboy Caviar Dressing: 

Person making Texas caviar dressing.

In a mixing bowl, whisk together the olive oil, lime zest, lime juice, ground cumin, paprika, kosher salt, honey, and garlic until fully combined.

Or, if you prefer, add everything to a mason jar, put the lid on, and give it a good shake.

You can also make the dressing a day or two ahead of time to speed things up even more when you’re ready to assemble the dip.

Step 2 – Assemble the salad:

Cowboy caviar salad from the top view in a bowl.

In a large salad bowl, combine the drained and rinsed black beans and black-eyed peas with the corn kernels, scallions, red onion, bell peppers, jalapeños, tomatoes, and chopped cilantro.

If you’re using avocado, I recommend adding it just before serving so it doesn’t brown.

Step 3 – Drizzle and Serve:

Images showing how to make Cowboy caviar.

Drizzle the dressing over the salad and gently toss to combine, being careful not to break up the beans too much.

This is also a good time to give it a taste and adjust the seasoning if needed.

Make Ahead and Storage Tips:

One of the best things about this Cowboy Salad recipe is that it can be made ahead of time (one or two days). In fact, I recommend it because the extra time allows the flavors to mingle and develop. Here’s how I do it:

  • To make ahead:
    Prepare the dressing and chop all the salad ingredients except the avocado. Toss everything together in a large bowl, drizzle with the dressing, cover tightly, and refrigerate. If you’re using avocado, add it just before serving to keep it from browning.
  • Storing leftovers:
    Transfer any leftover Cowboy Caviar to an airtight container and keep it in the fridge for up to 5 days. Before serving, give it a good stir and freshen it up with a squeeze of lime juice and a sprinkle of salt if needed.

Expert Tips for The Best Texas Caviar

While this recipe is pretty straightforward, below are a few helpful tips for the best results.

  • Let it rest: This step is optional, but I recommend letting the salad rest in the fridge for about an hour before serving. It gives the tangy lime juice dressing time to soak into the beans and veggies, bringing everything together.
  • Evenly cut vegetables: The most time-consuming part of this recipe is chopping the vegetables, but it’s worth taking your time. Aim to cut everything into similar-sized pieces so each bite feels balanced. Try to slice the tomatoes thinly and cut the peppers into small, bite-sized pieces, ideally smaller than the black-eyed peas.
  • Be gentle as you toss: When mixing the salad, go slowly and gently to avoid breaking the beans. This helps keep the texture nice and prevents everything from turning into mush. 

Cowboy Caviar Variations and Substitutions

Making this Cowboy Caviar dip your own is easy because, let’s face it, this simple recipe is endlessly customizable. Here are a few ideas to get you started:

  • Add more veggies: You can pack your Cowboy Caviar with even more fresh vegetables. Try thinly sliced cucumbers, chopped celery, or even finely diced radishes for extra crunch and color.
  • Add fruit: I’ve seen versions of this recipe made with sweet fruit like mango or pineapple. It might sound unexpected, but the sweetness pairs nicely with the tangy dressing, adding a refreshing twist, especially when served as a dip with chips.
  • Switch up the dressing: While my favorite part of this recipe is the tangy lime dressing, I sometimes change things up with my chili lime vinaigrette, which incorporates chili powder and adds a more Mexican-inspired twist.
  • Toss in grains: I love adding a cup of cooked quinoa, wild rice or farro to make it a filling salad especially if I am making this recipe as a part of my weekly meal prep.
  • Make it vegan: If you prefer a vegan version, just swap the honey for maple syrup or agave.

What To Serve with Texas Caviar?

It’s no secret that this recipe makes a great side dish or appetizer, whether you’re heading to a summer BBQ, a potluck, or packing lunch for work. But if you’d like to turn it into a full meal, you have plenty of options. Here are a few ideas:

  • Grilled Meats and seafood: Serve it alongside grilled chicken, shrimp, or salmon for a light and colorful plate. It’s a perfect match for summer cookouts or easy weeknight dinners.
  • With chips on the side: This Cowboy Salsa recipe makes a great appetizer when served with tortilla chips. I like using the scoopable kind, so you can get a little bit of everything in each bite.
  • With eggs: Scrambled eggs wrapped in a tortilla with a generous spoonful of Texas Caviar makes an excellent breakfast burrito. It adds freshness, texture, and just the right amount of zing to your morning meal.

FAQs

What is Texas Caviar?

Texas Caviar is a recipe originally created and served by Helen Corbitt, the culinary director of Neiman Marcus, in 1940s Dallas.

Made with a combination of canned or cooked beans (i.e. red, black, or pinto), black-eyed peas, peppers, tomatoes, garlic, and other extras like corn, avocado, mango, and various herbs and spices, since then it has stood the test of time and become a Southern classic.

Texas Caviar vs. Cowboy Caviar: Is There a Difference?

The dish was originally created in Texas, which is how it got the name “Texas Caviar.” Over time, people started calling it “Cowboy Caviar” as a fun, casual nickname.

How far in advance can you make cowboy caviar?

You can make Cowboy Caviar up to 2 days in advance. Just store it in an airtight container in the fridge, and it should still taste fresh and delicious. If you’re planning to include avocado, wait to add it until right before serving to keep it from browning.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Delicious Bean Salads You’ll Love

Fan of bean salads? Me too! Here are a few more that you might like:

  • My Corn and Black Bean Salad is yet another great alternative to a bean salad that you can serve with chips on the side.
  • What makes my Five Bean Salad recipe the best bean salad is the garlicky mustard dressing. Just like this cowboy caviar recipe, it uses a combination of canned beans and some lightly boiled fresh green beans.
  • If you have extra black eyed peas, then my Black Eyed Peas Salad is just as fresh and satisfying. Not to mention, it takes 15 minutes to make.
Texas caviar in a bowl with two spoons on the side.
Print

Texas Caviar Recipe

This Texas Caviar (aka Cowboy Caviar)loaded with black-eyed peas, corn, tomatoes, peppers, and tangy lime dressing makes the best salad, dip, or side dish. Ready in 30 minutes and can be made ahead.
Course Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 192kcal

Ingredients

For The Dressing:

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon lime zest
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon paprika sweet or smoked
  • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon honey
  • 2 cloves garlic minced

For The Caviar Dip:

  • 1 can black beans 15-oz can, drained and rinsed
  • 1 can black eyed peas 15-oz can, drained and rinsed
  • ½ cup corn kernels frozen (and thawed), canned (and drained) or fresh corn would all work
  • 3 scallions both white and green parts are chopped
  • cup red onion chopped finely or diced
  • 1 red bell peppers chopped (approx. 1/2 cup)
  • 1 jalapeno pepper seeded and chopped
  • ½ cup cherry tomatoes sliced thinly
  • ½ avocado ripe – cut into small cubes
  • ½ cup fresh cilantro rinsed and chopped

To Serve With (Optional)

  • Your favorite hot Sauce
  • Tortilla Chips

Instructions

  • To make the dressing: Whisk together the olive oil, lime zest, lime juice, ground cumin, smoked paprika, salt, honey and garlic. Set it aside.
    Person making Texas caviar dressing with lime juice.
  • For the Texas Caviar dip (or salad): Place, black beans, black eyed peas, corn kernels, scallions, red onion, bell peppers, jalapeno pepper, cherry tomatoes, avocado, and fresh cilantro in a bowl.
    The ingredients for Cowboy caviar in a bowl from the top view.
  • Drizzle it with the dressing and give it a gentle toss. Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
    Person drizzling the salad with dressing and mixing it.
  • If preferred, add in a few dashes of your favorite hot sauce and serve with tortilla chips.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 5-6 cups of Cowboy caviar ideal for serving 6 adults as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving and does not include the calories coming from (optional) tortilla chips.
  • Make ahead: You can make this recipe up to 2 days in advance. If you go in that direction, add the avocado right before serving to avoid browning.
  • Storage: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • If you want to go with more of the traditional Italian salad dressing route instead of the lime dressing I used, feel free to use my Italian salad dressing below: ¼ cups extra virgin olive oil
    2 tablespoons white wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar
    1 tablespoon freshly squeezed lemon juice
    1 clove of garlic, minced
    1 teaspoon dried basil
    1/4 teaspoon dried oregano
    ¼ teaspoon crushed red pepper (optional)
    ½ teaspoon Kosher salt (I use Diamond kosher salt)
    ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Nutrition

Calories: 192kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 326mg | Potassium: 386mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 982IU | Vitamin C: 39mg | Calcium: 31mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was originally published in March 2019. It has been updated with some additional information with no changes to the original recipe in July 2025.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/feed/ 44
Burrata Caprese https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/ https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/#comments Wed, 18 Jun 2025 22:05:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=67454 Key Ingredients to make Caprese Salad with Burrata Caprese burrata salad is a cinch to make and requires just a…]]>

Key Ingredients to make Caprese Salad with Burrata

Caprese burrata salad is a cinch to make and requires just a few key ingredients from the grocery store or farmer’s market. You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Below are some helpful tips as you shop for this recipe’s ingredients.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Burrata cheese: Fresh burrata cheese is a soft Italian cheese with a delicate, creamy center, similar in taste and texture to fresh mozzarella. It’s usually sold submerged in water in a tub. Before using it in your salad, take it out of the fridge and let it come closer to room temperature to enhance its flavor and texture. 

Also, drain off any excess liquid before tearing it into pieces.

Tomatoes: I like to use a mix of large heirloom tomatoes and sweet cherry tomatoes. The juicy heirlooms bring a meaty, steak-like texture to the salad, while cherry tomatoes add a pop of sweetness. Feel free to use any variety you have on hand, including Roma, beefsteak, vine-ripened, or grape tomatoes.

To get the best flavor, keep your tomatoes on the counter (not in the fridge) and try to use them within a few days of buying them. For easy, clean slices, I recommend using a serrated knife.

Fresh basil leaves: To finish the salad, use whole basil leaves or tear them gently with your hands instead of cutting them with a knife, which can bruise their delicate leaves and release bitter flavors.

Balsamic vinegar: If your budget allows, look for a traditional, aged balsamic vinegar from Modena. Its deep sweetness and complex flavor will elevate the salad. However, you can absolutely use a more affordable condiment-style balsamic vinegar and it’ll still taste delicious!

Extra virgin olive oil: I prefer a single-origin extra virgin olive oil with mild, fruity notes for this recipe. It adds a lovely finishing touch and complements the creamy burrata perfectly.

Seasonings: Keep it simple with kosher salt and freshly cracked black pepper. A final sprinkle of flaky salt adds a nice, salty crunch.

How to Make this Burrata Caprese Recipe?

The combination of burrata, tomato and basil is just as delicious here as a traditional caprese salad. The good news is that making it is quick and easy with only a few steps:

A collage of images showing how to make burrata Caprese recipe.

Step 1 – Prepare tomatoes: Slice the larger tomatoes using a serrated knife into ⅓-inch thick slices. If using cherry tomatoes, cut them in half (or you can quarter them as well). 

Grab a large serving platter and arrange the sliced tomatoes overlapping until it covers the bottom of the plate. 

Sprinkle it with salt to ensure they are properly seasoned.

Step 2 – Add burrata: Place burrata balls in the center of the serving platter. Alternatively, gently cut them into smaller pieces with a sharp paring knife and scatter the chunks over the sliced tomatoes. Alternatively, you can carefully tear into small chunks by hand.

Step 3 – Season: Sprinkle the tomatoes and burrata with the remaining salt and black pepper. Finish with a generous drizzle of olive oil and balsamic vinegar ensuring that each slice of tomato gets a bit of oil and a bit of balsamic vinegar.

Garnish with torn basil leaves before serving.

How to Store Leftovers?

Leftover burrata caprese will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for 2–3 days. Keep in mind that the burrata’s creamy center will solidify a bit over time, so it won’t be quite as creamy on days two and three.

Before serving leftovers, drain off any excess liquid to prevent them from becoming soggy. To “revive” your burrata caprese, add a few fresh tomato slices and some fresh basil leaves, then drizzle with a little extra olive oil and balsamic vinegar. Finish with a sprinkle of flaky salt for a fresh, vibrant bite.

Expert Tips

  • Use peak season tomatoes for the ultimate flavor. While creamy burrata may seem like the star of the show, slightly ripe, juicy tomatoes are just as crucial for the most delicious dish. When shopping for tomatoes for this recipe, take a moment to ensure that they are not overly ripe and free of any bruises.
  • Season tomatoes liberally:  Don’t be shy about salting the tomatoes. Properly seasoning them draws out their natural juices and enhances their sweet, vibrant flavor.
  • Serve at room temperature: To achieve the perfect burrata “ooze”, bring it to room temperature before tearing and adding it to the salad. This way, it will be extra creamy with a soft and spreadable texture.
  • Presentation is key: This is a showstopping salad that will become the talk of the table. Be creative – assemble the tomatoes somewhat haphazardly and whimsical. Allow the burrata to shine in the center or scattered into pieces.
  • Resist the urge to overcomplicate it: This is a super simple tomato salad that truly shines when made with in-season, high-quality ingredients. Stick to the basics and let the fresh flavors speak for themselves. There is no need for extra bells and whistles!
  • Double the recipe or halve it for a small crowd: The recipe below serves four, but I could honestly eat the whole thing myself. Double or triple the recipe for a large party, or halve it when serving for one or two.

Variations

While the combination of basil, burrata, and tomatoes is quite simple and effective, you can take this recipe to the next level by changing it up a bit. Here are a few variations I’ve tried and recommend:

  • Use balsamic reduction instead of balsamic vinegar: Balsamic reduction (also known as sweet balsamic glaze) is reduced balsamic vinegar that is sticky and sweet, and can add just another level of flavor to this burrata caprese salad recipe. Simply drizzle your burrata salad with balsamic glaze at the very end (instead of the balsamic vinegar drizzle) for a robust and tangy finish.
  • Change up the Dressing: Take it up a notch with a simple basil dressing for caprese salad, like Basil Vinaigrette or go for Balsamic and Lemon Dressing.
  • Add avocado: Although unconventional, a ripe avocado adds another layer of creaminess and color to this tomato burrata salad. Simply slice a ripe avocado (or cut it in cubes) for an added layer of flavor and texture.
  • Add summer fruit: Add a handful of summer berries, such as sliced juicy strawberries or raspberries, or some ripe stone fruit like peaches and apricots for a burst of color and natural sweetness.

What to Serve With Caprese Burrata Salad

When you put this Caprese salad with burrata on the table, I think we can all agree that it will be the star of the show. Make it a part of your Memorial Day Menu, Labor Day Menu, or 4th of July celebrations! Here are some pairing and serving suggestions:

  • Crusty Bread: Serve it with warm crusty bread like French baguette or No Knead Olive Bread on the side for an appetizer that is guaranteed to impress.
  • Bruschetta: Slice a baguette, brush with olive oil and toast just before serving alongside the tomato caprese with fresh burrata, or make it a part of your Meat and Cheese Platter.
  • Grilled or Roasted Meats: Give it a nice boost of protein and serve it as a side dish with Marinated Shrimp Skewers, Grilled Mahi Mahi, Greek Yogurt Chicken or Shrimp Scampi.
  • Pasta: Go all-out Italian and serve it with a main dish, such as my Garlic Butter Pasta or Lemon Ricotta Pasta.
  • Crisp White Wine: If all else fails, treat yourself to this gorgeous salad and a crisp, chilled glass of wine like an Italian Pinot Grigio or Sauvignon Blanc.
Burrata Caprese styled on a plate from the top view.

FAQs

What is burrata?

Creamy burrata cheese is an Italian cow’s milk cheese that features an outer shell of fresh mozzarella wrapped around a soft-center of stracciatella (cheese curds and cream).

Where does burrata cheese come from?

Burrata originated in Puglia, Italy at the Castel del Monte and since has become a global sensation around the world.

What’s the difference between burrata and caprese?

Burrata is the soft cheese ball with a creamy center, whereas caprese is the simple Italian salad that can be made with either burrata or fresh mozzarella.

What is the difference between burrata and mozzarella?

Burrata and mozzarella are both creamy, white, semi-soft Italian cheeses very similar in appearance. However, burrata is made with an outer layer of fresh mozzarella and filled with soft, stringy curd and cream known as stracciatella (the cheese, not the gelato). As a result, it has a super creamy texture and taste. Mozzarella is made from cow or water buffalo milk that is firm and bouncy.

How to cut burrata?

Instead of slicing it with a knife (as you would with mozzarella cheese), try breaking it using your clean hands. I usually like to break it into chunks, revealing all the creamy bits, and place it over the tomatoes.

How do you eat burrata?

Burrata is typically first sliced with a knife (or torn with clean hands) to reveal its creamy soft center, drizzled with olive oil and flakey sea salt, then eaten just as is with a fork, summer produce, or toasted bread.

Other Tomato Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

Whether you simply love the combination of tomato, basil, and burrata, or need some delicious ideas to use up your summer tomatoes, I have plenty of recipes I know you’ll love. Below are a few that I make over and over again during the peak tomato season:

  • My Caprese Chicken Sandwich is an open-faced sandwich that’s a wonderful weeknight recipe, with the same classic flavor profile as burrata caprese. It’s a fantastic summer dinner idea.
  • For a quick and easy weeknight dinner, my Pizza Caprese celebrates the flavors of the classic Italian recipe by turning it into a pizza that’s especially great when serving kids.
  • If you want to travel down to the South Mediterranean, try my Piyaz – Turkish Tomato White Bean Salad for another tomato salad recipe that’s a bit different but just as delicious.
  • Try my quick Tomato Cucumber Mozzarella Salad for a simple summer side that you can make in less than 15 minutes.
Burrata Caprese placed on a plate from the top view.
Print

Burrata Caprese Recipe

Put your fresh summer tomatoes to good use with this Burrata Caprese recipe that you can make in 10 minutes.This easy summer salad combines the classic Italian flavors we all love, but uses Burrata instead of mozzarella cheese.
Course Salad
Cuisine Italian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 93kcal

Ingredients

  • 4-5 large tomatoes
  • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt or flaky sea salt
  • 2 balls burrata cheese 8 ounces in total
  • ¼ cup fresh basil leaves torn
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil plus more for finishing
  • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar or balsamic glaze

Instructions

  • Slice tomatoes into ⅓-inch thick slices. Arrange them on a serving platter. Sprinkle tomato slices with ½ teaspoon salt.
  • Arrange burrata balls in the middle or gently break them with a sharp pairing knife and scatter the chunks over the sliced tomatoes.
  • Sprinkle everything with the rest of the salt and freshly ground black pepper. Drizzle with olive oil and balsamic vinegar.
  • Garnish it with basil leaves. Serve!

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves 4 generously. I usually serve one ball of burrata and two medium-sized tomatoes for 2 people. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply this recipe using this ratio.
  • Tomatoes: While we use heirloom tomatoes in the recipe, you can use any type of tomatoes you have on hand. Cherry tomatoes, vine-ripened tomatoes and even roasted tomatoes would work in this recipe.
  • You can serve burrata as a whole or gently break it to reveal the creamy center. This way, your guests can easily serve themselves.
  • Storage: Leftover burrata caprese will keep for 2-3 days in an airtight container in the fridge. However, keep in mind the buratta’s cream will solidify and lose its viscosity over time, so it will not be as creamy on days two and three.

Nutrition

Calories: 93kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 0.4mg | Sodium: 444mg | Potassium: 307mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1108IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 21mg | Iron: 0.5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/feed/ 2
Mediterranean Pasta Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-pasta-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-pasta-salad/#comments Thu, 22 May 2025 12:56:19 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81553 Even as someone who develops recipes for a living, I still have those moments before a get-together when I’m standing…]]>

Even as someone who develops recipes for a living, I still have those moments before a get-together when I’m standing in the kitchen wondering, what should I bring? I mean, I know I have a blog full of recipes, but when you’re serving a crowd with so many preferences and diet restrictions, it’s always a hard decision to make.

My experience is that this Mediterranean macaroni salad seems to please most people. For one thing, most people love the familiar “Greek” flavors (i.e. cucumbers, olives, tomatoes, etc.) and it rarely needs an introduction. To me, it is like a bistro pasta salad that is the most popular dish on the menu.

Cold Mediterranean pasta salad in a bowl with wooden spoons from the top view.

Key Ingredients:

The good news is that once you understand the process and the flavor profile, it’s easy to make this Mediterranean pasta recipe your own. You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but below are a few helpful notes and substitutions:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.

Pasta: I used farfalle (also known as bow tie pasta), but other shapes like rotini and fusilli would also work. I prefer these shapes as they hold on to the dressing, blend well with the rest of the ingredients, and are easy to scoop and eat cold. Of course, you can always use gluten-free pasta if preferred. 

Canned & fresh veggies: In my humble opinion, using a combination of canned and fresh vegetables is what makes this Mediterranean noodle salad a winner. And the best part is that if you do not have one ingredient (or you don’t care for it), you can use another. Here are a few optional add-ins and substitution ideas:

  • Onion: Use finely chopped red onion instead of scallions.
  • Tomatoes: If tomatoes are not in season, use finely chopped sun-dried tomatoes instead.
  • Fresh Herbs: Fresh oregano is the classic “Mediterranean” herb used in salads like this, but other herbs like fresh parsley, dill, and mint would all work.
  • Cheese: Not a fan of feta cheese? Use goat or no cheese if you prefer a vegan or dairy-free version of this pasta salad. 
  • Add protein: If you want to turn this into a more filling meal, feel free to bulk it up with a protein. Chickpeas are a great plant-based option and work beautifully with the Mediterranean flavors. You can also add grilled shrimp, chicken, or even canned tuna for a quick boost. Just be sure everything is cooled before mixing it in.
  • Pasta Salad Dressing: I used my go-to Mediterranean Vinaigrette, but my Lemon Balsamic Vinaigrette would also be a great dressing option.

How to Make Mediterranean Pasta Salad?

Once you have the ingredients ready, making this Mediterranean diet pasta salad is no more than a few easy steps. You can find the detailed recipe below, but here’s how I put it together:

A collage of images showing cooked pasta and making of the pasta salad dressing.

Step 1 – Cook the pasta: I feel like most pasta salads either have too much pasta or too many “supporting” ingredients. For a salad with so many add-ins, I find that 8 ounces of pasta (which gives you about 4 cups cooked) is the right balance.

Cook it in well-salted boiling water until al dente, according to the package instructions. Then drain and rinse under cold water to stop the cooking process.

Pro tip: Let the pasta cool completely before adding the rest of the ingredients. If it’s too warm, it can wilt the veggies or melt the cheese. Plus, the dressing will soak in too quickly, leaving the salad a bit dry.

Step 2: Make the dressing: You can make the Mediterranean pasta salad dressing in a mason jar (great if you’re making it ahead) or a measuring cup, but if I’m making this for just us at home, I usually grab a large bowl and make it right there. 

That way, (1) I don’t have to wash another dish, and (2) I can start building the salad directly in the bowl.

No matter what vessel you’re using, start by adding the lemon juice, garlic, Dijon mustard, oregano, salt, and pepper. Then, slowly drizzle in the olive oil while whisking. This helps emulsify the dressing, making it a little creamy and helping it cling to the pasta.

Photos showing how to assemble the Mediterranean noodle salad.

Step 3 – Assemble the salad: Grab a large salad bowl. And I do mean large because we’ve got a good amount of vegetables going in. Add the cooled pasta along with the rest of the ingredients. It’ll look like a pile at first, and that’s totally fine.

Step 4: Dress and serve: Drizzle with the dressing and toss to combine. It might get a little messy, but that’s part of the charm of this easy pasta salad. Use tongs or two large spoons, and be gentle (and patient) as you toss.

If you have the time, cover and let it sit in the fridge for 30 minutes so the flavors can mingle.

Expert Tips:

Before you start cooking, here are a few tips to help you get the best results from this cold Mediterranean pasta salad. These small details can make a big difference in taste, texture, and presentation.

Drain the canned vegetables: One of the reasons this salad is so convenient is that it takes advantage of canned or jarred ingredients like artichoke hearts, roasted bell peppers, and olives. But if you don’t drain them properly, they can add too much moisture and water down the salad. Use a colander and drain each ingredient thoroughly before adding it to the bowl.

Taste for seasoning: Whenever I write a recipe with salty or briny ingredients like feta cheese and olives, I keep the added salt to a minimum. But let’s face it, not all feta or olives are created equal. Some are much saltier than others. So it’s always a good idea to taste those components first, then adjust the amount of salt in the dressing as needed.

Chop everything into similar sizes: For the best texture and an even bite, keep all the ingredients around the same size as the pasta. It’s a small thing, but it helps everything mix well and makes the salad easier to eat.

Serving Suggestions:

While this Mediterranean bow tie pasta salad can stand on its own, it also pairs well with a variety of main dishes. Below are a few of my favorite ways to serve it:

  • Roasted or grilled meat and seafood: This pasta salad is the ideal companion to a simply grilled salmonbaked chicken breast, or even lamb chops. The fresh, vibrant flavors of the salad beautifully cut through the richness of grilled proteins, making for a light yet satisfying meal.
  • Make it a Mediterranean weeknight dinner: Make a batch of my mom’s Chicken Kofta Recipe and serve it with your pasta for a true Mediterranean feast.
  • Bread: Serve it with a side of crusty bread (such as my Olive Bread) or warm pita bread to scoop up every last bit of that delicious dressing.
  • Fresh fruit: If all you need is a light and refreshing complement, serve it alongside a bowl of seasonal fresh fruit, such as watermelon, berries, or grapes.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Mediterranean cold pasta salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Mediterranean Pasta Salad Recipe

This Mediterranean Pasta Salad is a vibrant, make-ahead dish that’s perfect for gatherings, lunches, or easy dinners. It travels well and tastes even better after a few hours.
Course Vegetarian Pasta
Cuisine American Vegetarian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 350kcal

Ingredients

For the Salad:

  • 8 oz dry pasta farfalle, fusilli or rotini
  • 3 Persian cucumbers or 1 English cucumber – peeled and sliced thinly
  • 1 ½ cups cherry tomatoes quartered
  • 2/3 cup black olives such as Kalamata olives sliced or chopped – 3 oz.
  • 1 cup roasted red peppers sliced and drained (or cut into small strips) (I use jarred)
  • 1 cup marinated artichoke hearts quartered and drained (7 oz after drained)
  • 3 scallions thinly sliced
  • 2 cups arugula or baby spinach – washed and dried
  • 4 oz. feta cheese crumbled

For the Mediterranean Dressing:

  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice or red wine vinegar
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • ½ teaspoon fresh oregano finely chopped – or ⅛ teaspoon dried oregano
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt plus more to taste
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil

Instructions

  • Bring a large pot of salted water to a boil. Cook the pasta until it’s al dente, according to the package directions. Drain and rinse under cold water to stop the cooking process. Set it aside.
    A collage of images showing the cooked pasta and salad dressing for the recipe.
  • While the pasta is cooking, make the dressing by whisking together 3 tablespoons lemon juice (or vinegar), 1 clove of minced garlic, ½ teaspoon Dijon mustard, ½ teaspoon chopped oregano, ½ teaspoon of Kosher salt, and ¼ teaspoon black pepper in a small bowl. Slowly drizzle in ¼ cup of olive oil while whisking until fully emulsified.
  • To assemble the salad, in a large bowl, combine the cooked and cooled pasta, cucumber, tomatoes, olives, roasted red peppers, artichoke hearts, scallions, arugula, and feta cheese.
    Images showing how to assemble the Mediterranean macaroni salad.
  • Pour the dressing over the salad and toss gently to ensure all ingredients are evenly coated with the dressing. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • If you have the time, cover and let it sit in the fridge for 30 minutes before serving.
    Pasta salad in a bowl with wooden utensils.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6-7 cups of pasta salad that is ideal for six (generous) servings as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead Instructions: Keep in mind that this salad gets better as it sits, so you can absolutely make it a day in advance. The only thing I recommend is holding off on adding the arugula or spinach until just before serving so the greens stay fresh and don’t wilt.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. It is normal to get a bit soggy as it sits. Be sure to give it a good toss and taste (and adjust) the seasoning before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 350kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 1104mg | Potassium: 314mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1027IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 154mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-pasta-salad/feed/ 4
Red Cabbage Slaw https://foolproofliving.com/red-cabbage-slaw/ https://foolproofliving.com/red-cabbage-slaw/#comments Wed, 30 Apr 2025 14:37:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81303 How to Make Red Cabbage Slaw? This recipe comes together in just a few steps with simple ingredients you probably…]]>

What You Need to Know in a Nutshell?

Before you dive in, here are a few quick tips that will help you make the best red cabbage slaw every time:

Slice Thinly for Best Texture: A mandolin is great for getting ultra-thin, even slices, but a sharp knife works just as well. The key is to slice the cabbage as evenly as possible to keep the slaw light, crisp, and not bulky.

Make It Ahead: This simple slaw stores beautifully in the fridge if you prefer to make it ahead. In fact, it gets even better as it sits and the flavors meld together — ideal for meal prep!

No mayo dressing: Made with a light, tangy vinegar dressing instead of mayo, this purple cabbage slaw recipe is naturally vegan. It’s a great option if you’re looking for a coleslaw that’s a little lighter but still delivers on texture and taste.

How to Make Red Cabbage Slaw?

This recipe comes together in just a few steps with simple ingredients you probably already have on hand, and once everything’s sliced and tossed, you’re ready to go. Here’s how to make it:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Step 1 Gather Your Ingredients: For a full list and measurements, check out the recipe card below. Here’s a few ingredient substitution ideas:

  • Make It Creamy: I opted for a vinegar-based dressing to keep it light, but if you prefer your red cabbage coleslaw with mayonnaise, this classic coleslaw dressing will give you that creamy texture and flavor you’re after.
  • Onion: I like the milder bite of green onions here, but thinly sliced red onions work just as well if you want a bit more punch.
  • Fresh Herbs: A handful of parsley brightens up the slaw and adds a pop of green, but feel free to use what you have — fresh cilantro, dill, or even fresh mint would all be delicious.
  • Carrots: I add carrots for extra crunch and a pop of color, but you can definitely leave them out if you prefer a simpler slaw.
    Steps showing how to make coleslaw with red cabbage.

    Step 2 Prepare the vegetables: Using a mandolin (or a sharp chef’s knife if you prefer), shred the red cabbage into thin, even slices. Grate the carrots using the large holes of a box grater, then thinly slice the green onions and chop the parsley. Add all the ingredients to a large mixing bowl and set it aside.

    Step 3 Mix the Dressing: In a small bowl or mason jar, whisk together the extra virgin olive oil, minced garlic, lemon juice, apple cider vinegar (or red wine vinegar or rice vinegar), honey (or maple syrup or sugar), Dijon mustard, kosher salt, and black pepper until smooth.

      Red cabbage slaw being drizzled with dressing.

      Step 4 Toss It All Together: Drizzle the dressing over the cabbage mixture. Use clean hands (or tongs) to toss everything together, making sure the vegetables are evenly coated.

      Step 5 Chill and Serve: If you have the time, cover the bowl and refrigerate for at least 30 minutes to let the flavors come together. Serve your red cabbage carrot slaw chilled and enjoy.

        Coleslaw with red cabbage and carrots in a bowl.

        What to Serve It With?

        This simple red cabbage slaw is one of those side dishes that pairs well with many meals. Whether you’re making tacos, grilling, or just pulling together a quick weeknight dinner, it brings the perfect pop of color and crunch. Here are some of my favorite ways to serve it:

        • Tacos: I love using this red cabbage slaw for tacos! It’s especially good piled onto brisket tacos for a smoky, hearty bite. It’s also fantastic with flank steak tacos, adding just the right amount of freshness, and honestly, it’s a must with fish tacos. The crunch balances out the tender, flaky fish so well.
        • Grilled Meats: This slaw is a total no-brainer for BBQ season. Serve it alongside grilled harissa chicken for a spicy kick or with grilled turkey tenderloin for a light but satisfying meal. And I am pretty sure no one would complain if you served it with grilled lamb burgers either.
        • Grilled Seafood: For seafood nights, I love pairing it with grilled shrimp, grilled salmon, or grilled mahi mahi. It’s the kind of side that keeps everything feeling light, bright, and colorful. Perfect for summer dinners!
        • Pulled Pork: Try tossing this purple cabbage slaw onto your pulled pork sandwiches for a crunchy twist, or serve it next to a big plate of roasted veggies and grains for a fresh meal.

        Similar Salad Recipes You Might Like:

        It is no secret that coleslaw recipes are some of the most popular summer salads. Here are a few other reader favorites in case you need more inspiration:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

        Red cabbage and carrot slow in a bowl.
        Print

        Red Cabbage Slaw Recipe

        A vibrant and easy Red Cabbage Slaw made with a light, zesty dressing — no mayo needed! Great for tacos, pulled pork, grilled meats, and fresh summer meals. Vegan and gluten-free.
        Course Vegan side dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Resting time (otpional) 30 minutes
        Total Time 45 minutes
        Servings 8 servings
        Calories 98kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Coleslaw

        • 1 head of red cabbage about 1 ½ lbs shredded (~7-8 loosely packed cups)
        • 2 medium carrots peeled and shredded, about ½ lbs (~2 cups)
        • 3 green onions chopped thinly (or 1/2 cup sliced red onion)
        • 3 tablespoons fresh parsley roughly chopped

        For The Dressing

        • 3 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
        • 2 cloves fresh garlic finely minced
        • 1 tablespoon lemon juice or lime juice
        • 3 tablespoons apple cider vinegar or red wine or rice vinegar
        • 1 tablespoon honey or maple syrup, or sugar
        • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        Instructions

        • Place shredded red cabbage (about 7-8 cups), 2 shredded carrots, 3 thinly sliced green onions, and 3 tablespoons of chopped fresh parsley in a large bowl. Set it aside.
          Cabbage slaw made with red cabbage preparation photos.
        • In a small bowl (or mason jar), whisk together 3 tablespoons of extra virgin olive oil, 2 cloves of minced garlic, 1 tablespoon honey (or your preferred sweetener), 1 tablespoon of lemon juice, 3 tablespoons apple cider vinegar, 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard, 1 teaspoon kosher salt and ¼ teaspoon of ground black pepper.
          Person drizzling and mixing purple cabbage slaw with dressing and mixing it.
        • If you have the time, cover and refrigerate for 30 minutes before serving. Serve chilled.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: Red cabbage can range in size. I used a small to medium-sized head (about 1 ½ pounds with the core), which gave me roughly 7 to 8 cups of sliced cabbage. Once you mix it with the shredded carrots (about 2 cups), you’ll have around 10 cups of veggies. After tossing it with the dressing and letting it sit, the slaw wilts slightly and loses about 1½ to 2 cups in volume. Even so, this recipe still makes plenty — enough to comfortably serve 6 to 8 people as a side dish.
        • Taste for Seasoning: Always give your slaw a taste before serving. If it seems like it needs more salt right away, give it a little time to sit first. As the slaw rests, the flavors develop and become more pronounced, so it might balance out perfectly without adding anything extra.
        • Make ahead: You can prep it a day in advance — just toss everything together, cover it, and place it in the fridge. Letting it sit for a few hours (or even overnight) helps the flavors come together.
        • Storing leftovers: Leftovers will keep well in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Just give it a quick toss before serving. If any liquid has settled at the bottom, that’s totally normal — a quick stir will bring it right back to life.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 98kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 339mg | Potassium: 337mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 3890IU | Vitamin C: 64mg | Calcium: 60mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/red-cabbage-slaw/feed/ 2
        Cottage Cheese Flatbread https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-flatbread/ https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-flatbread/#comments Thu, 06 Mar 2025 14:31:19 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80245 If you’ve spent any time on social media lately, you’ve probably noticed that cottage cheese is having a major comeback.…]]>

        If you’ve spent any time on social media lately, you’ve probably noticed that cottage cheese is having a major comeback. This viral cottage cheese flatbread recipe, created by Francesca Aralla of HealthyMumWay, is a perfect example of why—it’s simple, high in protein, and incredibly versatile.

        Cottage cheese flatbread used as a wrap.

        Ingredients You’ll Need

        This recipe for cottage cheese flatbread calls for only 2 main ingredients—seriously, it’s that simple. A 2-ingredient recipe that takes only 5 minutes to prepare is a lifesaver for those who love to meal prep and for busy weeknight dinners. Here’s what you’ll need:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Full-Fat Cottage Cheese: The full-fat 4% version of cottage cheese works best in this recipe, giving it the desired end texture. My favorite cottage cheese brands are Good Culture, Trader Joe’s, and Daisy. If you prefer to use 2%, Good Culture is a solid choice.
        • Eggs: I tested this recipe using large whole eggs, which is what I recommend. However, if you want to make cottage cheese flatbread with egg whites, you can do so—just be aware that your protein flatbread will end up being lighter in both color and flavor. 
        • Optional—Salt: I don’t include this as a main ingredient, as adding salt will be determined by the type of cottage cheese you end up using. Some types of cottage cheese are saltier than others, so be sure to taste your cottage cheese before adding any additional salt. If you do, just a pinch will do. 
        • To Prep Pan—Cooking Spray: Have a can of cooking spray handy to ensure your baked cottage cheese flatbread doesn’t stick to the baking sheet. I prefer avocado oil spray. 

        Optional Add-Ins

        This simple cottage cheese flatbread recipe is endlessly customizable. Depending on which toppings, spices, sauces, and ingredients you choose to use, you can turn this into a wide variety of meals. 

        A little tomato sauce, Italian seasoning, and cheese—you’ve got pizza. Choose hummus, cucumber, and red onion for a Mediterranean twist. You get the idea. Here are some of my optional add-in suggestions you can try:

        • Seasonings & Spices: Give your keto cottage cheese flatbread a bolder overall flavor by using garlic powder, onion powder, black pepper, red pepper flakes, paprika or a seasoning blend like Italian seasoning. 
        • Fresh herbs: Chop up some fresh parsley or chives for a pop of color and taste. You can use fresh basil is you are using this flatbread as “pizza crust.”
        • Cheese: While this is already a high protein flatbread recipe, some additional cheese will up the overall grams of protein and add a rich flavor. Feel free to add two tablespoons of either grated Parmesan cheese or grated mozzarella. 
        • A Sweet version: While the viral recipe is served as a savory cottage cheese flatbread, I have also made a sweeter version by adding a pinch of cinnamon, a teaspoon of vanilla, and a touch of honey for a breakfast-style flatbread.

        How to Make Cottage Cheese Flatbread?

        It only takes a couple of simple steps to make this low carb cottage cheese flatbread. Here’s how:

        1. Prepare your baking sheet & oven: Preheat the oven to 350° degrees F. Next, line a small sheet pan (I used a quarter sheet pan, which is 9 ½  by 13 inches) with parchment paper and spray the sides with cooking spray. Do not skip this step, as both of these elements make sure your high-protein flatbread will not stick to the pan. Without them, it would be hard to remove and keep them in one piece. Once ready, set it aside.
        A collage of images showing how to make flatbread with cottage cheese and eggs.
        1. Blend your cottage cheese mixture: Place one cup of cottage cheese, two whole eggs, and a pinch of salt (plus any of the optional add-ins you want) into the bowl of your food processor. Pulse it 6-7 times in one-second intervals until it is fully incorporated but not pulverized; you do not want to liquify it. It is okay to have small pieces of cottage cheese remaining. If you do not have a food processor, you can use a hand mixer, a whisk or a blender.
        2. Spread your egg and cottage cheese flatbread: Pour the mixture onto the parchment-lined sheet pan and spread it into an even (ideally 8 by 11 inch rectangular) layer using a spatula or the back of a spoon. An even thickness is essential for even cooking. 
        3. Bake it in the oven. Bake it in the preheated oven for 30 to 35 minutes or until it is lightly golden brown. Then remove it and let it cool for 5 minutes before carefully removing it from the pan. Serve it by itself, as a sandwich wrap, or as a pizza base, following the suggestions below.

        How to Serve it?

        This is the best cottage cheese flatbread recipe because—here’s the fun part—you get to use your creativity and choose how you want to serve it. Here are three options to get you started: 

        Two ways to serve cottage cheese flatbread; as a wrap and as a pizza base.
        1. Enjoy it as is. It’s a delicious high-protein snack served plain.
        2. Make a Sandwich: Any of your favorite sandwich toppings will work here. I like to spread it with a thin layer of mayo (or mustard) and then place three slices of provolone cheese, 2 slices of deli meat (turkey or chicken breasts are my favorite), some lettuce, and some sliced tomatoes. Gently roll the cottage cheese bread wrap around the ingredients, and then cut it in half before serving. You can also use a pre-made mix, such as chicken salad with mayo instead, which is popular on Instagram and TikTok.
        3. Make a Pizza: For a cottage cheese flatbread pizza recipe, here’s what to do: After 30 minutes of baking, remove it from the oven and then spread it with ½ cup of marinara sauce (or plain tomato sauce),  ½ to ⅔ cup of shredded mozzarella cheese, and 12-15 slices of turkey (or regular) pepperoni. Put it back in the oven and bake until the cheese is melted, for about 4-5 minutes.

        How to Store Cottage Cheese Flatbread

        This cottage cheese flatbread recipe comes together so quickly that it’s easy to make fresh the day you plan to serve it. However, if you would like to make larger batches to meal prep, here’s how to store any extras you may have:

        • Storage: Once cooled, store it in an airtight container for up to 3 days. I recommend that you place parchment paper in between any stacks of flatbread that you have to prevent them from sticking together. 
        • Reheating: Leftover flatbread with cottage cheese can be enjoyed cold, at room temperature, or warm. If you wish to eat it warmed up, place it on a parchment-lined sheet pan in a low-heat oven of 300 degrees F for 5-7 minutes or until warmed all the way through. 

        FAQs

        How long to cook cottage cheese flatbread?

        The overall cooking time really depends on the thickness of your cottage cheese mixture and what size pan you’re using. If you spread it out in an evenly thin layer about 8” by 11” in size as I did, it will take about 30-35 minutes to cook. If you decide to use a smaller pan and thus have a thicker layer of the mixture, your cooking time will need to be longer.

        How long does it last?

        If stored in an airtight container in the fridge, your flat bread with cottage cheese will last for up to 3 days. 

        How many calories in cottage cheese flatbread?

        One serving of this egg and cottage cheese flatbread recipe is 166 calories, with 17 grams of protein, 9 grams of fat, and 4 grams of carbohydrates. 

        Can you freeze it?

        Technically, yes, you can freeze it, though I prefer to serve it the same day it’s made. For the meal preppers making large batches who wish to freeze them, my main tip is to place parchment paper in between the layers of flatbread, then wrap them all in stretch film/plastic wrap to keep out moisture.

        Expert Tips

        While this is a very uncomplicated recipe, here are a few notes to help ensure your cottage cheese flatbread comes out as beautifully as it did in my test kitchen: 

        • Let it cool for a few minutes after it comes out of the oven. This will allow your flatbread to set and be easier to handle. Otherwise, it may stick to the paper and potentially tear when peeling it off.
        • Thickness and time of cooking time matters. If you follow this recipe’s instructions, you’ll be spreading your mixture out into roughly an 8”x11” rectangle on your quarter sheet pan. If you end up using a smaller pan, your flatbread will be thicker and require a longer baking time. 
        • Texture matters. When mixing your eggs and cottage cheese together, resist the urge to overmix them. You want the mixture to maintain a little thickness, which means some small chunks of cottage cheese are okay. You don’t want to completely puree and liquify the mixture in your Vitamix or blender. Just a few pulses of the blender, food processor, or immersion blender will suffice. 
        • How to make air fryer cottage cheese flatbread: If you’re not looking for perfection, feel free to make this recipe in your air fryer. Due to the smaller space inside the air fryer, you will want to make half a batch of this recipe at a time, so ½ cup of cottage cheese with only one whole egg. Cook it at 350 degrees F for 10 minutes. At that point, check on your flatbread, and if it isn’t cooked enough, give it another 15 minutes. When you take it out, allow it to cool before handling it and serve.
        • If you’re using egg whites, take note. Egg whites will result in a lighter flatbread. Both the color/appearance will be lighter than you see in the main recipe pictures (though the air fryer photos show an egg white version), and the flavor itself will be less robust. 
        • Be careful about adding salt. Many brands of cottage cheese are salty enough on their own and don’t require any additional salt. Taste your cottage cheese before you add any extra salt. In my recipe testing, both Good Culture and Trader Joe’s cottage cheese didn’t need any added sodium.
        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make this flatbread with cottage cheese recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

        Cottage cheese flatbread topped off with deli meat, tomatoes and microgreens.
        Print

        Cottage Cheese Flatbread Recipe

        If you’re looking for a simple, high-protein, and gluten-free flatbread alternative, this 2 ingredient Cottage Cheese Flatbread recipe is for you! Made with just two main ingredients—cottage cheese and eggs—this viral recipe is low-carb, keto-friendly, and packed with 17 grams of protein per serving. While it’s not a traditional bread, it is a great alternative as a satisfying base for wraps, sandwiches, and even pizza.
        Course Breakfast, Snack
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 35 minutes
        Total Time 40 minutes
        Servings 2 servings
        Calories 166kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 cup whole milk cottage cheese 4%
        • 2 large eggs
        • Pinch of Salt* optional
        • cooking spray

        Instructions

        • Preheat the oven to 350°F and line a small sheet pan (I used a quarter sheet pan, which is 9 ½ by 13 inches) with parchment paper and spray the sides with cooking spray. Set aside.
        • Place one cup of cottage cheese and two whole eggs (plus any of the optional add-ins you want) into the bowl of the food processor.
          The batter in a food processor before and after it is mixed.
        • Pulse 6-7 times in one-second intervals until thoroughly incorporated but not pulverized. We do not want it to be fully liquid; it is okay to have small chunks of cottage cheese.
        • Pour the mixture onto the prepared baking sheet and spread it in an even (ideally an 8-inch by 11-inch rectangular) layer using a spatula or the back of a spoon.
          The batter spread on a sheet pan before and after it is baked.
        • Bake in the preheated oven for 30 to 35 minutes or until it is lightly golden brown.
        • Let it cool for 5 minutes and carefully remove it from the pan.
        • To serve you have three options. You can:
          1. Enjoy it as is.
          2. Make a sandwich: Spread it with a thin layer of mayo (or mustard) and then place any of your favorite sandwich toppings. I like to start with three slices of provolone cheese and then layer it with two slices of deli meat (turkey or chicken breasts are my favorite) and some lettuce and sliced tomatoes. Gently roll and then cut it in half before serving.
          3. Make a Pizza: After 30 minutes of baking, remove it from the oven and spread it with ½ cup of marinara sauce, ½ to ⅔ cup of shredded mozzarella cheese, and 12-15 slices of turkey (or regular) pepperoni. Put it back in the oven and bake until the cheese is melted, for about 4-5 minutes.
          A collage of images showing how to use cottage cheese flatbread as a sandwich wrap and pizza base.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes one flatbread that is about 8 by 11 inches, which is ideal for 2 servings. The nutritional facts below include the 2 ingredients listed in the recipe. They do not include the optional wrap or pizza ingredients.
        • Adding salt: Be sure to taste your cottage cheese before adding salt in the mixture. Most cottage cheese is already salty. 
        • Storing leftovers: Once cooled, store it in an airtight container for up to 3 days. If you make a few batches, I recommend placing a sheet of parchment paper between stacks of your flatbread to prevent them from sticking together. 
        • Reheating: You can serve this flatbread warm or cold. If you prefer to serve it warm, place it on a parchment-lined sheet pan in a low-heat oven of 300 degrees F for 5 minutes or until warmed all through. 

        Nutrition

        Calories: 166kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 182mg | Sodium: 393mg | Potassium: 170mg | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 385IU | Calcium: 112mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-flatbread/feed/ 4
        Asparagus Salad Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/asparagus-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/asparagus-salad/#comments Tue, 04 Mar 2025 23:34:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=36068 For many of us home cooks, spotting fresh asparagus at the store is the first sign that spring has finally…]]>

        For many of us home cooks, spotting fresh asparagus at the store is the first sign that spring has finally arrived. After months of cold and hearty winter meals, those vibrant green spears feel like a promise of warmer days ahead.

        And with asparagus in season, I’m always looking for new ways to enjoy it. This simple asparagus salad is one of my go-to recipes—it’s fresh, easy to make, and perfect for meal prep. And if you’re looking for more salad recipes with asparagus, my Butter Lettuce Salad is another great option to try.

        Asparagus Salad with Feta, Tomatoes and fresh basil in a large salad bowl from the top view.

        Key Ingredients and Substitutions:

        This simple asparagus salad is packed with everyday ingredients that come together to create a refreshing and satisfying dish. The good news, you ask? You can easily customize it to your taste or use what you have on hand. Below is what you’ll need, along with ingredient substitutions, so you can make it your own with what you have on hand.

        Ingredients for the recipe are laid out
        • Fresh asparagus: During asparagus season, you’ll often find different varieties at the store—thin or thick, and sometimes even in shades of green, purple, or white, depending on where you live. Any of these will work beautifully in this recipe! Just be sure to trim off the tough woody ends for the best texture. And if you’re not using them the same day you buy them, don’t worry—I’ve written a whole guide on how to store asparagus to keep it fresh for longer.
        • Tomatoes: I opted for cherry tomatoes that I sliced in half but you can use any tomatoes you have on hand. Just slice them in bite sized pieces.
        • Radishes: I love adding thinly sliced radishes for a pop of color and crunch.
        • Olives: Use any olive you have on hand. Kalamata olives, Castelvestrano olives, or green olives would all work. Not a fan of olives? Omit them. It will still be delicious.
        • Onions: I prefer the mild flavor of scallions but a thinly sliced red onion would also work.
        • Cheese: Adding cheese is optional. I opted for feta cheese for a Mediterranean flair, but parmesan cheese, goat cheese, and shredded mozzarella would also work. And if you need a dairy-free salad, omit cheese altogether.
        • Fresh herbs: The combination of fresh basil and asparagus is terrific, but fresh mint, dill, and parsley would also work beautifully in this fresh asparagus salad recipe.
        • The dressing: My go-to asparagus salad dressing is my homemade lemon vinaigrette. However, you can also use my avocado salad dressing, lemon balsamic vinaigrette in this asparagus salad recipe. Or you can also try my Maple Dijon Vinaigrette for more of a sweet and tangy salad.

        Optional Add-ins:

        What I love most about this spring asparagus salad is that you can keep it simple or jazz it up with these optional add-ins to make it your own. Here are a few ideas:

        • Add nuts: You can easily add in some crunch and extra protein by adding a handful of pecans, walnuts, or pine nuts.
        • Spring mix or Butter Lettuce: If you’d like to turn this into more of a green asparagus salad, toss in a handful of spring mix or butter lettuce leaves for extra freshness and texture.
        • Peas: A handful of blanched peas make a great addition to this salad. They add a subtle sweetness and a pop of color, making the dish even more vibrant and seasonal.

        How To Cook Asparagus for A Salad?

        Asparagus is one of those wonderfully versatile vegetables that can be enjoyed in so many ways, no matter the season.

        However, if you’re making this salad during peak asparagus season and have access to freshly picked spears, you can even serve them raw following this recipe.

        Raw asparagus salad offers a satisfying, crisp, and refreshing bite that is truly a treat.

        However, I also encourage you to try other methods of cooking asparagus for this salad recipe. Whether you prefer oven baked asparagus, air fryer asparagus, steamed asparagus, or pan sautéed asparagus, this vibrant spring vegetable always makes for a quick and delicious addition to any salad recipe, and this one is no exception.

        How To Make Asparagus Salad?

        There’s something so satisfying about creating a beautiful salad with fresh, seasonal ingredients. And this asparagus salad is just that—a simple yet flavorful dish that highlights the best of spring. Here are the easy steps to follow:

        Person cooking asparagus for salad in a baking sheet
        1. Cook the asparagus: As mentioned earlier, if you’re making this salad during the asparagus season, you can serve it raw for a crisp, fresh bite. However, I personally love roasting it—drizzling the spears with olive oil, seasoning with salt and pepper, and letting the heat bring out their natural sweetness. The slightly smoky, caramelized flavors are just so delicious and addictive.
          Alternatively, you can blanch the asparagus for a few seconds to keep it tender-crisp while maintaining its vibrant green color. The instructions below are for medium size asparagus. For thick asparagus, I recommend increasing the cooking time by 1-2 minutes.
        Person making lemon vinaigrette from the top view
        1. Make the lemon vinaigrette: I make a batch of this dressing during the weekend and keep it in a jar in the fridge. To make it, whisk together extra-virgin olive oil, fresh lemon juice, garlic, dijon mustard, salt, and pepper in a small mixing bowl until emulsified.
        Cold asparagus salad with all ingredients placed in a salad bowl top view
        1. Assemble the salad: Once you have your asparagus ready, all you have to do is to chop the rest of the ingredients. Then, go ahead and place chopped asparagus, cherry tomatoes, sliced radishes, chopped green onion, and kalamata olives in a large bowl and drizzle it with the lemon vinaigrette. Grab two large spoons or tongs and give it a gentle toss, making sure that all the veggies are coated with the dressing.
        2. Garnish and Serve: If preferred, top your asparagus salad with feta cheese and a handful of freshly torn basil leaves. Serve immediately or cover with stretch film and refrigerate.
        Cold asparagus salad recipe placed in a bowl with lemon dressing on the side

        How To Store Leftovers & Make Ahead Instructions

        One of the great things about using asparagus in salad is that it holds up well, even after a day or two in the fridge. Whether you’re making it ahead for meal prep or saving leftovers, here’s how to keep it fresh and delicious.

        • To Store Leftovers: The best part about this spring asparagus salad is that it holds up well. Store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
        • To make it ahead of time: If you want to make this salad in advance, I recommend preparing and storing all the vegetables in a bowl and then adding the lemon vinaigrette, feta cheese, and basil leaves at the very end, right before serving.

        Serving Suggestions:

        While this asparagus salad with lemon vinaigrette is perfect when served by itself, you can turn it into a whole meal with other recipes like:

        Expert Tips

        • Trim the woody ends: Asparagus spears have tough, fibrous ends that aren’t pleasant to eat. Be sure to snap or trim them off using a sharp knife before cooking.
        • Skip the frozen asparagus: While you can use thawed asparagus, it won’t have the same crisp, fresh bite that makes this salad so delicious. Fresh asparagus is best for both texture and flavor.
        • Serve it warm or cold – This salad is delicious both ways! Serve it warm right after roasting the asparagus for a cozy side dish, or let it chill in the fridge for a refreshing, make-ahead option.
        • Use good quality ingredients: Since this salad is made with just a few simple ingredients, each one really shines. Opt for fresh, in-season asparagus, juicy cherry tomatoes, and good-quality olive oil for the best flavor.

        You Might Also Like:

        If fresh veggie-packed salads are your jam, here are a few more you might like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this Asparagus Salad recipe, please take a minute to give it a star rating and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Asparagus salad in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Asparagus Salad Recipe

        A simple Asparagus Salad drizzled with homemade lemon vinaigrette and topped with feta, tomatoes, and olives. Light, crunchy, and perfect as a side dish, light lunch, or meal prep option. Gluten-free and vegetarian.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 12 minutes
        Total Time 17 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 229kcal

        Ingredients

        To roast the asparagus:

        • 1 bunch asparagus spears rinsed and the woody ends cut
        • 2 teaspoons vegetable oil
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        For the lemon vinaigrette:

        • ¼ cup olive oil
        • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
        • 1 clove garlic minced
        • 1/2 teaspoon dijon mustard
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon black pepper

        For the salad:

        • 1 cup cherry tomatoes sliced
        • ½ cup radishes thinly sliced
        • 3 scallions stalks – chopped
        • ½ cup kalamata olives optional
        • ½ cup feta cheese cut into cubes or crumbled or grated parmesan cheese (optional)
        • ½ cup basil leaves loosely packed and torn (optional)

        Instructions

        • Preheat the oven to 425 degrees F. Place asparagus on a sheet pan in one layer. Drizzle with oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Give it a toss, making sure that all the spears are coated with the oil and seasoning.
        • Roast for 12 minutes or until the asparagus is cooked*. Transfer onto a plate and let asparagus cool. When cooled, cut the asparagus into 2-inch pieces. Place into a salad bowl.
        • While the asparagus is roasting make the lemon vinaigrette by mixing together 1/4 cup olive oil, 3 tablespoons of lemon juice, 1 clove of minced garlic, 1/2 teaspoon of dijon mustard, 1 teaspoon of kosher salt, and 1/2 teaspoon of black pepper.
        • To assemble the asparagus salad: Place tomatoes, radishes, scallions, olive into the bowl with the asparagus. Drizzle with the dressing.
        • Stir in the feta cheese (if using) and basil leaves. Give it a gentle toss. Serve.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 4 cups (loosely packed) salads that serves four adults as a side dish. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply the recipe. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Raw asparagus: During the spring, when asparagus is in season, you can use raw asparagus to make this salad, especially if you can get your hands on freshly picked asparagus. Some people like to shave it (using a vegetable peeler), which will work, but I also like to cut it into bite-size pieces for a fresh and crispy spring salad.
        • Blanched Asparagus: Alternatively, you can blanch asparagus to make this recipe. To do so, bring a pot of salted water to a boil. Add the asparagus spears and cook them for 4-5 minutes or until fork tender. Meanwhile, prepare the ice bath by placing some ice cubes and cold tap water in a bowl. Remove the asparagus using a slotted spoon and place it in the bowl of ice water (to stop the cooking process). Drain and cut it into smaller pieces.
        • How To Store Leftovers? The best part about this spring asparagus salad that it holds up well. Store it in an airing container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
        • Instructions to Make It Ahead: If you want to make this salad in advance, I recommend preparing and storing all the vegetables in a bowl and then adding the lemon vinaigrette, feta cheese, and basil leaves at the very end right before serving.
         

        Nutrition

        Calories: 229kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 1363mg | Potassium: 172mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 606IU | Vitamin C: 18mg | Calcium: 121mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/asparagus-salad/feed/ 13
        Quinoa Tabbouleh https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/ https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/#comments Sat, 01 Mar 2025 12:47:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20389 Growing up in a Mediterranean country, tabbouleh, or kisir, was a staple in our house. It was my mom’s go-to spring…]]>

        Growing up in a Mediterranean country, tabbouleh, or kisir, was a staple in our house. It was my mom’s go-to spring and summer salad, which she paired with pretty much everything. 

        This version, made with protein-rich quinoa (a fantastic substitute for bulgur), is the latest addition to my Quinoa Salad recipes collection, and it’s just as delicious as the traditional recipe. If you love quinoa as much as I do, be sure to check out my Mediterranean Quinoa Salad for another fresh and vibrant option. 

        Quinoa tabouli being drizzled with the dressing.

        And if you’ve ever wondered about the different names and spellings—tabbouleh, tabouli—they’re simply variations of the same name, reflecting different versions of the Arabic word.

        Recipe Ingredients:

        This tabouli quinoa recipe is made with simple ingredients that make a bright and refreshing salad. The fresh herbs and crisp vegetables provide a delicious contrast to the fluffy quinoa, while the tangy lemon dressing ties everything together beautifully. You will need:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Quinoa: This quinoa tabbouleh salad will work with any type of quinoa. Red, black, tricolor and white quinoa would all work. It is imperative to rinse quinoa before cooking if you want it to taste good. 
        • Cooking liquid: While water works just fine, I highly recommend cooking your quinoa in vegetable stock. It adds depth of flavor, ensuring that the base of your quinoa tabouli salad is tasty right from the start.
        • Fresh lemon juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice is my favorite acid for the dressing used in this recipe, but in a pinch, white wine vinegar can be used. The flavors would be slightly different but still be great.
        • Extra Virgin Olive Oil
        • Fresh herbs: A mix of fresh herbs is key to classic tabouli, and this quinoa version is no exception. I like to use a cup of fresh flat-leaf parsley, a cup of fresh dill, and half a cup of fresh mint leaves, but there’s no strict rule—adjust to your taste! You can stick to just parsley and dill or skip the dill altogether if it’s not your favorite.
        • Fresh tomatoes: I prefer using colorful cherry tomatoes for their sweetness and vibrant look, but any variety will work—just be sure to chop them into small pieces for even distribution.
        • Cucumber: I prefer Persian cucumbers as they are crunchy, but English cucumbers would also work.
        • Scallions: Green onions provide a mild onion flavor that ties everything together. While it is not traditional, finely chopped red onion could be a good substitute in a pinch. 
        • Seasonings: I kept it simple with just kosher salt and pepper in this tabbouleh quinoa salad recipe, but you can add a touch of ground cumin, ground coriander, or a pinch of red pepper flakes to the dressing for extra depth of flavor.

        Optional Add-Ins

        While the recipe for quinoa tabouli I’m sharing stays close to the traditional version, you can easily customize it with a few extra ingredients. These aren’t traditional, but they add delicious new flavors:

        • Feta Cheese: A handful of crumbled feta adds a creamy, salty contrast that pairs perfectly with the Mediterranean flavors.
        • Kalamata Olives: Their briny, tangy taste enhances the salad and adds an extra punch of flavor.
        • Garlic: The traditional tabbouleh salad recipe does not use garlic in the lemon dressing, but you can always add a minced garlic clove if you are a fan.
        • Chickpeas: Again, the classic tabbouleh recipe does not use chickpeas, but sometimes I add a can of (drained and rinsed) chickpeas to make it even more satisfying.

        How To Make Quinoa Tabbouleh?

        Making this quinoa tabouli recipe is easy, and it comes together in just a few steps in under 20 minutes. Yes, there is a bit of chopping involved, but the result is a refreshing and wholesome dish that you’ll want to make on repeat.

        A collage of images showing how to cook quinoa and make the dressing.
        1. Cook the Quinoa: Place the rinsed quinoa in a medium saucepan along with your cooking liquid and salt. Bring to a boil, reduce to a simmer, cover, and cook for about 10-12 minutes until the liquid is absorbed. Let it rest for 10 minutes, then fluff with a fork and transfer it to a large bowl to cool.
        2. Make the Dressing: While the quinoa is cooking, prepare the dressing. In a small bowl, whisk lemon juice, olive oil, salt, and black pepper until fully combined. 
        3. Chop the fresh herbs and veggies – Finely chop the fresh parsley, dill, and mint. Quarter the cherry tomatoes, dice the cucumbers and thinly slice the scallions. Add the chopped herbs, tomatoes, cucumbers, and scallions to the cooled quinoa.
        Tabbouleh with quinoa in a salad bowl.
        1. Assemble your tabouli quinoa salad – Drizzle the cooked quinoa and the veggies with the dressing and gently toss to combine.
        2. Serve – Taste for seasoning and add more salt, pepper, or lemon juice as needed. Serve immediately or refrigerate for later.

        How To Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

        My favorite thing about this quinoa tabbouleh salad recipe is that it stores well. As a matter of fact, since the flavors meld together over time, it actually tastes even better the next day. Here is how I make-ahead and store leftovers:

        • Make Ahead: If preparing in advance, cook and cool the quinoa, chop the veggies, and make the dressing a day or two in advance. Store them separately in airtight containers in the fridge. Toss everything together about an hour before serving for the best texture and flavor.
        • Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Before serving, give it a quick stir, taste for seasoning, and refresh it with a squeeze of lemon and more seasoning if needed.
        • Freezing: You can technically freeze this dish, but I do not recommend it as it will lose most of its fresh flavors when thawed.

        Expert Tips:

        This recipe is simple and easy to make, but to ensure the best quinoa tabbouleh, here are a few key tips to help you get it right on your first try:

        • Chopping by hand vs. using a food processor: I like to chop the herbs by hand using a sharp chef’s knife as it gives me more control over the texture, ensuring evenly chopped herbs. Plus, there is no risk of over-processing, which can turn herbs into a paste. However, if you prefer a food processor, pulse in short bursts instead of running it continuously to prevent the herbs from turning into a paste.
        • Herb stems: When it comes to herbs, you can chop the parsley and dill stems, as they are tender and flavorful. However, with mint, I prefer using only the leaves unless you’re growing your own and it’s super fresh.
        • Are you short on time? You can prep the herbs and veggies a day in advance and store them in the fridge until you’re ready to put it all together.
        • Let the quinoa cool a bit: You can mix everything together while the quinoa is still warm for a slightly different texture and flavor, but letting it cool first helps keep the herbs fresh and vibrant. I usually cook the quinoa a day in advance—not only does this save time, but it also ensures it’s perfectly cooled and ready to use.
        • Cooking quinoa: While I opted to cook quinoa on the stovetop, you can cook quinoa in the microwave, in an instant pot, and a rice cooker. Feel free to pick the method that works best for you. Also, I usually cook a big batch and freeze some for later. If you have some cooked quinoa on hand, this quinoa tabbouleh comes together in minutes.
        • Serve at room temperature: This tabouli recipe with quinoa tastes best when served at room temperature, allowing the flavors to fully develop. If you made it in advance, take it out of the fridge 15 minutes before serving for the best taste and texture.

        Serving Suggestions:

        You can serve this gluten-free tabbouleh salad with any protein or vegetarian main or just by itself for a light meal. Below are a few of my favorite pairings:

        Other Quinoa Salads You Might Also Like

        If you make this recipe for tabbouleh salad with quinoa, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to leave a star rating and a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        This recipe was originally published in September 2018 and updated in March 2025 with new step-by-step photos and more helpful tips. The recipe itself remains the same, with only minor edits for clarification.

        Quinoa tabbouleh in a salad bowl with a spoon on the side.
        Print

        Quinoa Tabbouleh Recipe

        Traditional Mediterranean Tabbouleh Salad made with a twist. Made with protein-rich quinoa, this vegan and gluten-free Quinoa Tabbouleh Salad Recipe is the perfect year-round salad for all your indoor and outdoor parties.
        Course Side Dish – Salad
        Cuisine Mediterranean, Turkish
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 27 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 205kcal

        Ingredients

        For the Quinoa:

        • 1 cup uncooked quinoa rinsed
        • 1 ¾ cups water or vegetable stock
        • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

        For The Dressing:

        • 4 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed – plus more to taste
        • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt more to taste as needed
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        For the Tabbouleh:

        • 1 cup fresh parsley chopped
        • 1 cup fresh dill chopped (optional)
        • ½ cup fresh mint leaves chopped
        • 1 cup cherry tomatoes quartered
        • 2 Persian cucumbers peeled and chopped or 1 English cucumber
        • 3-4 scallions sliced thinly both white and green parts

        Instructions

        • Place 1 cup quinoa in a saucepan along with 1 ¾ cups of vegetable stock (or water) and a half teaspoon of kosher salt. Stir to combine, put the lid on, and bring it to a boil over medium-high heat.
          Person showing how to cook quinoa.
        • Once it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to low and cook for 10-12 minutes or until water is fully absorbed. Turn the heat off and let it rest for 10 minutes. Fluff it with a fork, transfer it to a large salad bowl, and let it cool while working on the rest of the ingredients.
        • Meanwhile, prepare the dressing by whisking together 4 tablespoons of freshly squeezed lemon juice, ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil, ½ teaspoon kosher salt, and ¼ teaspoon black pepper in a bowl. Set it aside.
          A collage of images showing how to make the dressing and prep the ingredients.
        • To assemble the quinoa tabbouleh, add 1 cup of chopped parsley, 1 cup of fresh dill, ½ cup fresh mint, 1 cup of quartered cherry tomatoes, 2 chopped Persian cucumbers, 3 thinly sliced green onions into the bowl with the quinoa.
        • Drizzle it with the dressing. Give it a gentle toss.
          A bowl of tabouli with quinoa is being drizzled with the dressing.
        • Taste for seasoning and serve immediately.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 5 to 6 cups of tabbouleh, ideal for serving six adults as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Using dill: Most tabouli recipes are made with fresh parsley and mint, but my mom always added fresh dill, so I followed in her footsteps. If you are not a fan, you can omit using dill (and use more parsley or mint instead.)
        • A quick note on chopping herbs: Traditional tabbouleh is made with finely chopped herbs for a light, delicate texture, but if you prefer a rougher chop, that works too! It all comes down to personal preference.
        • Make Ahead: If preparing in advance, cook and cool the quinoa, chop the veggies, and make the dressing a day or two in advance. Store them separately in airtight containers in the fridge. Toss everything together about an hour before serving for the best texture and flavor.
        • Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Before serving, taste for seasoning and add more lemon juice and salt and pepper if needed. 

        Nutrition

        Calories: 205kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Sodium: 408mg | Potassium: 404mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 1812IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 66mg | Iron: 3mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/feed/ 22
        Chicken Orzo Soup https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-orzo-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-orzo-soup/#respond Mon, 17 Feb 2025 14:54:50 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80259 Ingredients for Lemony Chicken Orzo Soup This easy soup recipe comes together with a few basic ingredients you probably already…]]>

        How This Recipe Fixes the 2 Most Common Orzo Soup Mistakes

        Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

        Growing up in the Mediterranean, “Chicken Noodle Soup” wasn’t really a dish I knew much about. Instead, my mother made this Chicken Orzo Soup every time I felt under the weather.

        The good news? It isn’t much different from a classic American chicken noodle soup in method or taste. However, it features a much brighter, lemony broth, a hallmark of Mediterranean cooking. But because the ingredients are similar, the issues you run into are also the same:

        • The “Mushy Pasta” Issue: If you’ve ever ended up with a pot of bloated pasta (orzo in this case) that “drank” all your broth, you know the frustration.
        • Dry, Rubbery Chicken: This happens when the meat is boiled for far too long.

        After years of watching my mom and refining this recipe in my own kitchen, I’ve learned two non-negotiables for success:

        1. The Timing: Add the orzo towards the end of the cooking process. This prevents the pasta from overcooking and becoming giant and mushy. And no, you do not need to cook the orzo separately before adding it to the soup.
        2. A gentle simmer: Maintain a gentle simmer and cook the chicken only until it registers 165°F on a meat thermometer.

        One final note: While many consider this a “Greek” soup, do not confuse it with Avgolemono. Traditional Avgolemono soup is thickened with an egg-lemon sauce. My version here is lighter, finished with plenty of fresh lemon juice and a handful of fresh herbs.

        Ingredients for Lemony Chicken Orzo Soup

        This easy soup recipe comes together with a few basic ingredients you probably already have on hand.

        While the complete list of ingredients is in the recipe card below, here are a few notes from making this recipe over the years:

        Ingredients for chicken orzo recipe soup, including chicken, orzo, carrots, celery, onion, garlic, lemon, olive oil, chicken broth, and herbs.

        Chicken: I used boneless, skinless chicken thighs in this soup because I find dark meat more flavorful than white meat. Plus, I find that it stays moist even after it is poached in hot broth. That said, boneless and skinless chicken breasts are also a great option if you prefer a leaner cut. 

        Orzo pasta: Any brand of dried orzo pasta will work for this recipe. There is no need to cook it ahead of time, as the orzo cooks directly in the broth.

        If you are not familiar with it, orzo is a small, rice-shaped pasta that looks similar to rice but cooks much more quickly, making it ideal for soups like this one.

        Chicken stock: It is no secret that Homemade chicken stock elevates any soup, and using a high-quality bone broth makes the texture slightly creamier thanks to its natural collagen.

        With that being said, if you’re short on time, store-bought chicken broth works just as well. I recommend buying a low-sodium one so you can adjust the seasoning yourself.

        Mirepoix: Yellow onion, carrots, and celery make the aromatic vegetable base of any great soup, including this chicken orzo lemon soup. 

        Fresh garlic: I used 3 cloves in this recipe, but feel free to adjust if you prefer a stronger garlic flavor. While I prefer fresh garlic, in a pinch, you can use garlic powder. It is not traditional, but it would work.

        Lemon juice: I used 4 tablespoons in this lemon chicken orzo soup, but I highly recommend keeping some extra on hand, as you may want to add more at the end after tasting.

        Fresh herbs: I used fresh parsley at the end, but if you’d like a little extra burst of Mediterranean flavor, a handful of chopped fresh dill or fresh thyme works beautifully as well.

        Seasonings: Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper are all you really need, but I like adding a teaspoon of Italian seasoning, although it’s completely optional.

        Lemon zest: This is optional, but if you enjoy a brighter lemon flavor, stir in about 1 teaspoon of freshly grated lemon zest right before serving.

        How to Make Chicken Orzo Soup? (Step-By-Step)

        With one pot and 45 minutes, anyone can make this easy soup recipe. Here is how I make it:

        Chopped carrots, celery, and onion cooking in olive oil in a large pot, followed by seasoning added to the softened vegetables.

        Step 1 – Cook your veggies: Heat the olive oil in a Dutch oven or a large soup pot (with a lid) over medium-high heat. Next, add your chopped onion, chopped carrots, and chopped celery. Cook, stirring occasionally, until the vegetables are softened but not browned, which takes about 7 to 8 minutes.

        Step 2 – Add your seasonings: Toss the minced garlic, Italian seasoning, kosher salt, and ground black pepper with the veggies. Sauté the mixture, stirring constantly, for 30 seconds, just until the garlic is fragrant.

        Cooked chicken thighs shredded with forks on a cutting board for lemon chicken orzo soup.

        Step 3 – Add in the broth: Pour in the chicken stock and lemon juice, then add the boneless, skinless chicken thighs (or breasts). Bring the soup to a boil, then reduce the heat to medium and let it simmer gently for about 15 minutes, or until the chicken is fully cooked. The chicken should register 165°F (74°C) when checked with a meat thermometer.

        Once cooked, remove the chicken from the pot and transfer it to a cutting board to rest for a couple of minutes before shredding. 

        Step 4 – Cook your orzo directly in the broth: Add the orzo into the simmering broth and cook for about 10 minutes, stirring occasionally to prevent it from sticking to the bottom of the pot.

        Step 5 – Shred the chicken: While the orzo cooks, shred the chicken with two forks, or cut it into small pieces if you prefer. Then, add it back into the pot and stir to combine.

        Pro Tip – Shred or cut? My mother would always shred the chicken, which is what I usually do. However, if it is easier to cut it into smaller cubes, that is perfectly fine. Remember, the goal here is to have some chicken with every spoonful, so cut them into bite size pieces.

        Two images side by side showing 
shredded chicken added back into simmering lemon chicken orzo soup in a large pot and served in a bowl.

        Step 6 – Season and garnish: When the orzo is fully cooked, give the soup a quick taste, and adjust the seasoning with more salt and lemon juice as needed. Add the chopped parsley, ladle into bowls, and serve right away.

        Two bowls of lemon chicken orzo soup served with crusty bread, fresh dill, sliced carrots, shredded chicken, and lemon wedges.

        Expert Tips for the Best Chicken Orzo Soup

        This chicken lemon orzo soup recipe is simple, but a few small tricks can make a big difference in the final dish. 

        Here are some tips to help you get the best results on your first try:

        Cut your veggies evenly: For the best texture and even cooking, try to chop the onion, carrots, and celery into similar-sized pieces. This way, they’ll soften at the same rate, which will give you the best base without any pieces turning mushy while others stay firm.

        Do not overcook the orzo: It cooks quickly because it is a small pasta, so timing is critical. Adding it toward the end of cooking helps keep the texture tender rather than mushy.
        However, keep in mind that cooking times may vary slightly depending on the brand you use, so following the packaging instructions is the best way to achieve al dente orzo. 

        Adjust your lemon and seasonings to taste: Lemon is a personal preference, as some people (like me!) like this homemade chicken orzo soup even more lemony. Therefore, I highly recommend tasting it before serving and adding a little more lemon juice, salt, or fresh herbs as you see fit.

        This soup will thicken as it sits: As the soup rests, the orzo continues to absorb liquid, which naturally thickens the broth. This is especially helpful to keep in mind if you are not serving it right away. When reheating, simply add a splash of water or chicken stock to loosen it back to your desired consistency.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        Lemon chicken orzo soup in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Chicken Orzo Soup Recipe

        This Lemon Chicken Orzo Soup is a cozy, one-pot meal with tender chicken, orzo pasta, and a bright, lemony broth. Easy to make in under 45 minutes, it’s the ultimate Mediterranean chicken soup recipe, perfect for busy weeknights or cold winter days!
        Course Soup
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Kosher
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 30 minutes
        Total Time 45 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 338kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 tablespoons olive oil
        • 1 medium onion chopped about 2 cups (265g.)
        • 3 medium carrots peeled and cut into small pieces about 1 cup (135 g.)
        • 2 stalks celery sliced thinly, about 1 cup (125 g.)
        • 3 cloves fresh garlic minced
        • 1 teaspoon Italian seasoning
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt more to taste
        • ½ teaspoon black pepper
        • 6 cups homemade chicken stock
        • 4 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed plus more to taste
        • 1 lb boneless skinless chicken thighs or breasts*
        • 1 cup uncooked orzo 155 g.
        • ½ cup fresh parsley and or dill, roughly chopped

        Instructions

        • Heat olive oil in a Dutch oven or a large pot with a lid over medium-high heat. Add 2 cups of chopped onion, 1 cup of chopped carrots, and 1 cup of chopped celery. Cook, stirring occasionally, until vegetables are softened, 7-8 minutes.
        • Add 3 cloves of minced garlic,1 teaspoon Italian seasoning, 1 teaspoon kosher salt and ½ teaspoon of ground black pepper. Saute, stirring constantly, for 30 seconds.
        • Add 6 cups of chicken stock, 4 tablespoons of lemon juice and 1 pound (about 4) boneless skinless chicken thighs (or 2 medium-sized chicken breasts).
        • Bring it to a boil. Once it comes to a boil, bring the heat down to medium and let it simmer for 15 minutes or until the chicken is fully cooked. Chicken should register 165 degrees F when inserted with a meat thermometer.
        • Remove the chicken and transfer to a cutting board.
        • Stir in the orzo and let it cook for 10 minutes, stirring occasionally.
        • While the orzo is cooking, shred the chicken using two forks (or you can also cut it into small bite-sized pieces.)
        • Add the now-shredded chicken back into the pot and stir to combine.
        • When the orzo is fully cooked, give it a quick taste and add more seasoning and lemon juice as needed.
        • Add ¼ cup chopped parsley, ladle into bowls, and serve.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 7-8 cups of soup ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Cooked chicken: While I used raw chicken, if you have leftover or rotisserie chicken on hand you can make this soup even faster. Simply shred it (or cut it into cubes) and then add it to the soup right before adding the orzo. 
        • Storage: Bring the leftover soup to room temperature, place it in an airtight container, and keep it in the fridge for up to 3-4 days. Reheat in a saucepan with a splash of water or broth.
        • Freezing: While you can technically freeze this soup as it is, I am not a fan of freezing pasta. If you are planning to freeze it, reserve the portion that you are planning to freeze before adding the orzo in the soup.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 338kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 79mg | Sodium: 438mg | Potassium: 671mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 5556IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 50mg | Iron: 2mg

        How to Store, Freeze, and Reheat Chicken Orzo Soup

        Preparing a large pot of soup, especially one as satisfying as this chicken and orzo soup, often means you will have leftovers to enjoy for a second or even third meal. 

        Here is how I like to store it to keep it tasting fresh.

        Storage: For any leftovers, allow your soup to cool to room temperature first. Then, store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

        Pro tip: If you know you’ll have leftovers, instead of cooking the orzo in the broth, cook it separately. This way, you won’t run into the issue of it “bloating”.

        Freezing: I honestly do not recommend freezing this soup once the orzo has been added, as pasta generally does not freeze well and tends to become soft and mushy once thawed. 

        However, if you are planning to make a large batch for meal prep, a better option is to prepare the chicken soup without the orzo, freeze the broth and chicken, and then add freshly cooked orzo when reheating.

        Reheating: Transfer the soup to a saucepan and warm it over medium heat, stirring occasionally.

        As the soup sits, the orzo will continue to absorb liquid, so it is normal for it to thicken. If needed, add a splash of water or chicken stock while reheating to thin the sauce and restore its original texture.

        Variations & Substitutions 

        There are a few simple swaps and additions you can make to adapt this easy chicken orzo soup based on what you have on hand.

        Here are a couple of ideas:

        Use leftover or rotisserie chicken: If you already have cooked chicken, such as leftover roasted chicken or rotisserie chicken, you can use it here. Simply skip cooking the raw chicken in the soup and stir the cooked, shredded chicken in toward the end, just long enough to warm it through.

        Regional Adaptations: Most people think of this soup as a Greek dish, but many countries across the Mediterranean region serve it with minor variations.

        For example, Italians add a Parmesan rind to the broth as it simmers, finish the soup with a sprinkle of grated Parmesan, and swap parsley or dill for fresh basil. 

        In Turkiye, we use a generous amount of fresh chopped dill instead of any other herb or spice.

        Add extra greens: If you like adding more vegetables to your meals, you can stir in a few handfuls of spinach or kale toward the end of cooking. The greens will wilt quickly in the soup without overpowering it.

        What to Serve with Chicken Orzo Soup

        While this easy lemon chicken orzo soup is satisfying enough to enjoy on its own, it also pairs well with:

        • A meal-worthy salad: A crisp salad is always a great contrast to a warm bowl of soup. I especially enjoy serving it with my Greek Cucumber Salad for a refreshing Mediterranean touch or my Kale Brussels Sprout Salad when I want something with a bit more substance.
        • Crusty bread: There’s nothing better than soaking up that flavorful broth with a good piece of bread. My go-to options are No Knead Artisan Bread for the classic crusty bread-and-soup pairing, or my Air Fryer Garlic Bread for an extra punch of flavor. 

        Other Mediterranean Brothy Soups

        A Turkish classic: Turkish Red Lentil Soup is another classic soup recipe from the region. Naturally vegan, this is the kind of soup you’d be served in a local restaurant in Istanbul.

        A vegan weeknight dinner: This French Lentil Soup is my go-to when I want something simple and dependable that holds up well for leftovers.

        All the Comfort, Less Work: If you love the idea of stuffed cabbage rolls but not the time commitment, this Stuffed Cabbage Soup delivers the same familiar taste in soup form.

        Chicken orzo lemon soup in a Dutch oven with a ladle, showing orzo pasta, carrots, shredded chicken, and fresh herbs in the broth.

        Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-orzo-soup/feed/ 0
        Beef Barley Soup Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/beef-barley-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/beef-barley-soup/#comments Wed, 15 Jan 2025 18:42:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79780 Ingredients for Beef Barley Soup While you can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, here…]]>

        Why This Version Succeeds Where Other Recipes Fall Short

        Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

        A big pot of beef soup on the stove is one of the coziest things during the colder months, and beef and barley soup is a true classic.

        The problem is that many versions end up with mushy barley, dry beef, or a soup that’s either too thick or a little bland.

        Over the last few years, I’ve made it my mission to develop a recipe that avoids those exact issues. After many tests, I am here with my version of the best beef and barley soup. Here are the reasons why:

        • Chuck roast stays tender during a long simmer. I cut a whole chuck roast myself (instead of buying precut stew meat made up of odds and ends of leftover cuts), so the pieces cook evenly, stay juicy, and taste consistent throughout the soup.
        • Barley is added later (after the meat is browned and veggies cooked) to prevent it from turning mushy. It gets just enough time to cook through while keeping a nice texture.
        • A splash of apple cider vinegar keeps the soup from tasting bland. It balances the richness of the beef and the earthiness of the barley.
        • Simmering with the lid slightly ajar helps control thickness. Keeping the lid ajar lets excess moisture escape slowly so the soup thickens naturally without becoming gluey or overly dense.
        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Ingredients for Beef Barley Soup

        While you can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, here are a few helpful notes to guide you as you prepare the soup and make it your own.

        Top-down view of Beef Barley Soup ingredients in small bowls, including cubed chuck roast, pearl barley, diced carrots, celery, onion, and fresh thyme on a blue tiled surface.

        Choosing The Right Meat

        Chuck roast: Chuck roast is my go-to cut for beef barley soup because it is well-suited for longer cooking times. Cut from the shoulder, it contains plenty of connective tissue that slowly breaks down as the soup simmers, resulting in fall-apart tender, rich bites of beef. 

        Wouldn’t it be better (and more time-saving) to buy already-cut stew meat instead? It might seem easier to buy pre-cut stew meat, and yes, it does save you a few minutes.

        But I still like to cut my own because most store-bought stew meat is usually a mix of different cuts that cook at different times. Some pieces turn tender while others stay tough.

        Starting with one cut, like chuck roast, and cutting it into ½-inch cubes yourself helps everything cook evenly and stay tender.

        Vegetable oil: You can use olive oil or any neutral oil, such as avocado oil, to sear the meat. The goal is to use an oil with a higher smoke point so the beef browns properly without burning.

        For the Soup + Tips on Buying Barley

        Pearl barley: When shopping for barley, be sure to choose pearl barley rather than hulled barley. Pearl barley differs in that its outer bran layer is removed, allowing it to cook more quickly and develop a tender, slightly chewy texture that works especially well in soups and stews. 

        Hulled barley can be used, but it takes much longer to cook.

        Vegetables: We are using chopped onion, carrots, and celery, the classic combination of veggies that pretty much any meat soup recipe like this uses. As you are chopping them, take your time to cut them into even pieces so they cook evenly.

        Beef broth: You can use homemade beef stock or buy it from the store. If you choose to use store-bought, get low-sodium beef broth so you can easily control the salt level in your soup.

        Selecting Your Broth: For the richest flavor, I recommend choosing a beef broth that lists real beef bones or beef stock as the first ingredient rather than “beef base” or artificial flavorings.

        I tested this recipe with Kettle & Fire, and it worked beautifully.

        Alternatively, you can use chicken stock. I have also tested this recipe with my homemade chicken stock, and while the color was slightly lighter, the soup was still delicious and satisfying.

        Red wine: A medium-bodied red wine, such as Pinot Noir or Merlot, enhances the soup’s subtle, earthy flavor.

        Can I make this soup without alcohol? Yes, for an alcohol-free barley beef soup recipe, you can substitute an equal amount of beef broth for wine.

        Diced tomatoes: I use one 14-ounce can of diced tomatoes (unsalted) to add just a hint of acidity and subtle sweetness to the soup without overpowering it.

        Worcestershire sauce: This classic seasoning adds a subtle umami depth to the soup. Its savory, slightly tangy notes help balance the richness of the beef.

        Fresh herbs: I use a few sprigs of fresh thyme, tied together with kitchen twine so they are easy to remove before serving. I also add a handful of fresh chopped parsley at the end for a vibrant finish. You can use dried herbs in a pinch, but I would use no more than a teaspoon of dried thyme as a substitute.

        Apple cider vinegar (optional): While optional, a splash of an acidic ingredient, such as vinegar or lemon juice, is my secret move to take this beef and barley soup from good to great. It adds a nice tang that helps balance the rich flavors of the beef and earthy flavors of all the veggies in the soup.

        How to Make Beef Barley Soup (Step-by-Step)

        This homemade beef barley soup comes together in one pot, making it both simple to prepare and easy to clean up. I highly recommend having all your ingredients ready before you start. Here is how I make it:

        A collage showing aromatics being sautéed with tomato paste, deglazing the pot with red wine, and adding diced tomatoes and beef back into the broth.

        Step 1 – Prepare the beef: Using a sharp knife, cut the meat into ½-inch cubes. You can cut them larger (about 1-inch cubes) if you prefer more stew-sized meat in your soup. It is a personal preference. 

        Then, pat the beef really well with paper towels on all sides so it browns instead of steaming, which is what gives you that deep, rich base in the soup.  Once it’s dry, season all sides with salt and pepper so every piece is properly seasoned from the start.

        Step 2 – Sear the meat: Heat the oil in a large Dutch oven (at least 5.5 quarts) over medium-high heat until it shimmers. Add the beef in an even layer. Since we’re using a large Dutch oven with a rather large surface area and the beef is cut into small pieces, we can add all the meat at once. 

        Spread it out in an even layer as much as possible. Let it cook undisturbed for a minute or two before stirring, which gives it a chance to brown, which is imperative for building that rich meat flavor that this soup is known for.

        But wait, there is so much liquid in the pan? During my recipe testing, I quickly found out that at this stage, the meat releases some of its juices as it cooks, and that’s okay.

        As you let it cook and stir, some of it cooks off, and the meat starts to brown. The key is to continue stirring every few minutes so all sides get a chance to brown. It takes about 6-10 minutes (depending on your meat), so be patient.

        Also, keep in mind that they will shrink as they cook.

        Once done, transfer the now-seared beef to a plate and cover it with foil to keep it warm. Do not wash the pot!

        Step 3 – Cook the vegetables: Using the same large pot, add the diced onion, sliced carrots, and sliced celery. Cook them over medium-high heat, stirring frequently, for about 10 minutes, or until they soften and start to release their natural sweetness.

        Pro Tip: I usually don’t add extra oil at this stage since chuck roast is well-marbled and leaves enough fat in the pot to cook the vegetables. That said, if the pot looks dry, feel free to add a tablespoon of olive oil to help them sauté evenly.

        A collage of images showing how to cook the vegetables and make the broth for this Dutch oven beef barley soup recipe.

        Step 4 – Add the aromatics: Add the minced garlic and sauté for about 30 seconds, just until fragrant. Keep an eye on it, as garlic can burn quickly. Stir in the tomato paste, salt, and black pepper and cook, stirring constantly, for about 1 minute.

        Step 5 – Deglaze the pot: Pour in the red wine, then use a wooden spoon to gently scrape up the browned bits from the bottom of the pot. Those bits hold a lot of flavor, and the wine helps lift them while adding depth to the soup. 

        Let it simmer for a minute or two, so some of the alcohol cooks off and further concentrates before we move on to the next part.

        Step 6 – Add the broth: Return the seared beef to the pot along with any juices collected on the plate (those juices are pure flavor, so don’t skip them). Add the beef broth, diced tomatoes, and the thyme sprigs tied together with kitchen twine.

        Give everything a good stir, then reduce the heat to medium-low. Let the soup simmer, partially covered, for 30–45 minutes, allowing the beef to slowly tenderize while the flavors come together.

        Step 7 – Add barley and finish cooking: Stir in the pearl barley and Worcestershire sauce, and let it simmer until the barley is tender, about 45-55 minutes. 

        You’ll notice the barley absorbs liquid as it goes, so check on the soup and give it a stir about every 15 minutes to prevent it from sticking to the bottom. The barley is ready when it’s tender but still has a slight bite.

        Step 8 – Season and serve: Remove the thyme bundle and stir in a splash of apple cider vinegar. Give it a taste and adjust the seasoning as needed, then finish with a sprinkle of fresh parsley and serve while hot.

        A cozy close-up of a bowl of Beef Barley Soup garnished with parsley, served with crusty sourdough bread and a glass of red wine.

        Expert Tips for the Best Beef Barley Soup Recipe

        Making beef barley soup doesn’t have to be complicated, but a few small details can make a big difference in the final result. These are the tips I rely on every time to make sure the soup turns out just right:

        Keep an eye on the consistency: As the soup simmers and the barley cooks, you might notice the liquid reducing quite a bit. This is completely normal. I usually keep the lid slightly ajar to minimize evaporation. You can also move the pot to the simmer burner (or to the smallest heat source on your stove top) and/or add more water or broth as needed. 

        Add warm broth, not cold: If you need to thin the soup while it’s cooking or reheating, use warm water or warm beef broth. Adding cold liquid can slow down the cooking process and affect the overall texture.

        Check the barley packaging: While pearl barley typically takes about 45-55 minutes to cook, different brands can vary slightly. It’s always a good idea to check the package and use the texture as your guide; the barley should be tender but still have a bit of bite.

        Taste at the end: The flavors concentrate as the soup cooks, so it’s best to do your final seasoning right before serving. A quick taste at the end lets you adjust salt or add a splash of acid if needed.

        Beef barley vegetable soup in a Dutch oven with a ladle full of soup.
        Print

        Beef Barley Soup Recipe

        Warm yourself from the inside out with this foolproof, one-pot Beef Barley Soup recipe! Meticulously tested to ensure tender beef and perfectly cooked barley, it's a rich, satisfying comfort meal you can count on. Never mushy or bland.
        Course Soup
        Cuisine American
        Diet Kosher
        Prep Time 30 minutes
        Cook Time 1 hour 50 minutes
        Total Time 2 hours 20 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 462kcal

        Equipment

        Ingredients

        For The Meat:

        • 2 lbs chuck roast
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
        • 2 tablespoons vegetable oil such as olive oil or avocado oil

        For The Soup:

        • 1 onion 340g/3 cups, roughly chopped
        • 3 carrots 180g/1 ½ cups, peeled and sliced thinly
        • 2 stalks celery about 1 cup, sliced thinly
        • 4 garlic cloves finely minced
        • 3 tablespoons tomato paste
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
        • ½ cup red wine
        • 7 cups beef broth plus more as needed
        • 1 14- ounce can diced tomatoes
        • 3-4 sprigs fresh thyme tied with kitchen twine
        • 1 cup pearl barley
        • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
        • 2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar optional
        • ½ cup fresh parsley roughly chopped plus more for garnish

        Instructions

        • Using a sharp chef’s knife, cut 2 lbs of chuck roast into ½-inch cubes. Pat them dry using a sheet of paper towel.
        • Season the cubed beef with 1 teaspoon kosher salt and ½ teaspoon of black pepper on all sides. Set aside.
        • Heat two tablespoons of olive oil in the Dutch oven over medium-high heat until it shimmers.
        • Add the beef cubes and brown them on all sides for about 6-7 minutes, about a minute or two per side. Transfer them onto a plate, cover it with aluminum foil, and set it aside. Do not wash the pot.
        • Add 3 cups chopped onion, 1 ½ cups of carrots, and 1 cup celery to the pot and cook on medium-high heat, until softened, stirring frequently, for about 10 minutes.
        • Add the 4 minced cloves of garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
        • Add 3 tablespoons of tomato paste and cook, stirring constantly for about a minute or so. Season with 1 teaspoon of kosher salt and ½ teaspoon of black pepper.
        • Stir in ½ cup of red wine and scrape any brown “bits” at the bottom of the pot using a wooden spoon.
        • Add the browned beef (with all the juices), 7 cups of beef broth, one 14-ounce can of diced tomatoes, and 3-4 sprigs of fresh thyme. Give it a stir, place the lid ajar, and bring it to a boil. Then, turn the heat down to medium-low and let it simmer for 30-45 minutes or until your meat is fully cooked and tender.
        • Next, stir in 1 cup pearl barley and 1 tablespoon of Worcestershire sauce.
        • Let it simmer, with the lid ajar, for 45-55 minutes, keeping a close eye on it and stirring occasionally, until the pearl barley is tender but has a slight “bite”.
        • Turn the heat off, remove the thyme bundle, and stir in 2 tablespoons of apple cider vinegar if using. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
        • Add ½ cup of chopped fresh parsley and serve right away.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 11-12 cups of soup, enough to serve 6 adults. The nutritional information below is per serving.
        • Consistency of the soup: As the soup simmers, you’ll see some of the liquid evaporate, resulting in a thicker soup. I recommend keeping the lid slightly ajar while simmering to prevent too much liquid from evaporating. This helps maintain the soup’s rich flavor without diluting it. Still, you can add more broth or water for a thinner consistency. However, be sure to add warm liquid to keep the soup’s temperature consistent.
        • Storage and freezing: You can store the leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4-5 days and in the freezer for up to 3 months. Just be sure to bring it to room temperature before storing it. Thaw it overnight in the fridge.
        • Reheating: Transfer the leftovers to a saucepan, add a cup (more or less) of water or broth, and warm on medium heat, stirring regularly.
        • Slow cooker beef and barley soup: If you’re looking for a more hands-off approach, or want to make it ahead, you can cook this soup in your crockpot. The process is similar but with a few key differences. Simply:
          • Sear the meat, set it aside, sauté the vegetables, and cook the wine while scraping up those browned bits. 
          • Store the meat and veggies separately in airtight containers in the fridge overnight. 
          • In the morning, transfer everything to a slow cooker, along with the rest of the ingredients. Cook it on low for 7-9 hours or high for 4-5 hours until the meat is tender. If you can, stir it a few times during the process. 
          • When done, stir in the apple cider vinegar and parsley right before serving.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 462kcal | Carbohydrates: 35g | Protein: 37g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 104mg | Sodium: 2069mg | Potassium: 1051mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 5700IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 89mg | Iron: 6mg

        Storage, Freezing, and Reheating

        One of the great things about this vegetable beef barley soup is that it tastes even better the next day as the flavors develop and meld, so you can make a big pot as a part of your meal plan and enjoy it throughout the week. 

        Here is how I do it:

        Storing leftovers: Let the soup cool to room temperature, then transfer it to an airtight container. It will keep well in the refrigerator for 4-5 days. As it sits, the soup will thicken since the barley continues to absorb liquid. When reheating, add a splash of broth (or water) to thin it out.

        Freezing: Once it comes to room temperature, transfer it to freezer-safe containers and freeze for up to 3 months. When you’re ready to enjoy it, thaw it overnight in the fridge for the best texture and flavor.

        Reheating: To reheat, transfer the soup to a saucepan and warm it over medium heat, stirring occasionally. Since it thickens as it sits, add a small amount (no more than ¼ cup) of water or beef broth as needed to loosen it.

        Pro-Tip for Meal Prepping: If you are making this as a part of your meal prep, I recommend slightly undercooking the barley (about 5 minutes). This way, it will reach perfect tenderness during reheating.

        Variations & Substitutions

        What I love most about this recipe for beef barley soup is that it is easily adaptable with whatever you have on hand. Here are some substitution and variation ideas to make this soup your own:

        Other types of beef: When it comes to meat choice, you have options:

        • Other cuts: Instead of chuck roast, you can also use boneless short ribs, beef shank, or brisket, all of which work for slow cooking.
        • Beef stew meat: You can use pre-cut packaged beef stew meat from most grocery stores, but be sure to check that it’s sourced from the same cut, such as chuck roast, rather than a mix of random trimmings from different leftover cuts. Doing so ensures that you end up with evenly cooked meat with a similar texture and taste.
        • Ground beef: You can use ground beef for a quick and easy beef barley soup. This version, often called hamburger barley soup, allows you to skip the longer cooking time required for tougher cuts. Simply sauté the ground beef (hamburger meat), then cook the vegetables in the same pot.
        • Already cooked (leftover) beef: If you have some leftover roast, prime rib, or beef tenderloin, you can cut them into bite-sized chunks and use them in this veggie beef barley soup. Since the leftover meat is already cooked, you can skip sautéing it at the beginning and add it when you add the broth.

        Additional vegetables: Parsnips, turnips, mushrooms, peas, green beans, or leeks would all be delicious additions. And if you want to sneak in some greens, you can stir in a handful of baby spinach or even kale at the very end. 

        Spices: While I kept the recipe simple with salt and pepper, you can enhance the flavors and bring warmth to your soup by adding a small amount of ground cumin, ground coriander, sweet paprika, and a few bay leaves. These additions add depth to the broth without overpowering the overall flavor.

        FAQs

        Why did my barley turn mushy?

        Barley usually turns mushy if it’s added too early or cooked for too long. Pearl barley needs time to soften, but it should still have a slight bite. To avoid this, add it after the beef has had time to tenderize and keep an eye on the simmer so it doesn’t overcook.

        What is the best cut of beef for beef barley soup?

        The best cuts of beef for beef barley soup are those that can handle longer cooking times, such as chuck roast, short ribs, beef shank, or brisket. These cuts contain connective tissue that breaks down as the soup simmers.

        How long does it take to cook barley in soup?

        If you are using pearl barley, it typically takes about 45-55 minutes to cook in soup. The exact timing can vary slightly by brand, so it’s best to check the packaging for exact timing and use its texture as your guide.

        Do you cook barley before adding it to soup?

        No, there’s no need to cook the barley beforehand. Pearl barley is added uncooked and cooks directly in the soup, absorbing flavor from the broth as it softens.

        Can I use quick-cooking barley?

        Yes, but keep in mind that quick-cooking barley has a much shorter cooking time, usually 10-15 minutes, since it’s partially pre-steamed. If using it, add it toward the end of cooking to prevent it from becoming overly soft or mushy.

        What to Serve With Beef Barley Soup

        While this barley vegetable beef soup is excellent on its own, here are my favorite pairings:

        Other Beef Soup Recipes You Might Like

        It is no secret that beef soups and stews are the classic winter comfort food. If you are in need of more inspiration, here are a few more recipes:

        • Freezer favorite: If you love slow cooker meals, try my Crockpot Vegetable Beef Soup. It’s a set-it-and-forget-it version of classic vegetable beef soup, made with similar ingredients. It’s great for meal prep and freezes well.
        • An Old-Fashion Classic: For a quicker but similar soup, try my Vegetable Beef Soup is an old-fashioned favorite that comes together in under an hour. 
        • Weekend Meal Prep Favorite: If you’re in the mood for a cozy weekend supper, my Eggplant Beef Stew is a slow-simmered stew with pull-apart beef and a rich sauce.

        This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/beef-barley-soup/feed/ 4
        Broccoli Feta Soup https://foolproofliving.com/30-minute-broccoli-and-feta-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/30-minute-broccoli-and-feta-soup/#comments Wed, 08 Jan 2025 15:02:32 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=11028 This vegetarian and gluten-free 30-Minute Broccoli and Feta Soup is a lifesaver when you are short on time. It is easy to make and a great way to incorporate vegetables into your diet. Once it is topped off with fresh Italian parsley and feta cheese you end up with a delicious and veggie packed soup that will warm your heart.]]>

        Nothing says fall and winter more than soup season. And this hearty and creamy broccoli feta soup recipe is surely a winner. So, make a big batch, enjoy leftovers throughout the week, or freeze them for more extended storage.

        And if you enjoy this dish, be sure to check out our Sweet Potato Soup, Turkish Lentil Soup, French Lentil Soup, Pumpkin Ginger Soup, and Carrot Ginger Soup recipes.

        Broccoli Feta Soup in a bowl garnished with croutons.

        Ingredients You Will Need

        The ingredient list for this healthy broccoli soup consists of olive oil, onions, celery, garlic cloves, Kosher salt, cracked pepper, large Yukon gold potato, vegetable broth, broccoli crowns, fresh parsley, and feta cheese.

        Ingredients for the recipe portioned out and photographed from the top view.

        Ingredient Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

        • Chicken Stock: Swap out vegetable broth for Homemade Chicken Broth if you are okay with it not being a vegetarian soup.
        • Fresh Herbs: Compliment the broccoli and feta with a small handful of fresh mint or fresh dill instead of parsley.
        • Make it more green and nutritious by adding a cup of baby spinach in the last 10 minutes before pureeing the soup.
        • Cheese: Top it with your favorite cheese, like mozzarella, cheddar, or freshly grated Parmesan cheese.
        • Seasoning: Finish with a sprinkle of red pepper flakes, sumac, a squeeze of lemon juice, or a drizzle of olive oil or heavy cream.
        • Vegan: Omit the feta cheese or swap it out for vegan feta.

        How to Make This Broccoli and Feta Soup?

        Broccoli feta cheese soup comes together in less than 30 minutes after a quick and gentle simmer on the stove. Puree right in the same pot, or use a countertop blender to blend in batches. Here’s how to do it:

        A collage of images showing how to make cream of broccoli soup.
        1. Saute aromatics: Warm olive oil over medium heat in a Dutch oven or large pot. Add onion and celery, and cook until translucent, about 5-7 minutes. Stir in the cloves of garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
        2. Add potatoes: Add potatoes and salt and pepper. Pour in vegetable stock. 
        3. Simmer: Bring it to a boil, then reduce it to a simmer and allow it to cook for 10 minutes or until the potatoes are soft.
        4. Add broccoli: Stir in the broccoli florets and cook briefly for 8-10 minutes over medium heat.
        Person pureeing and mixing soup in a collage of two images.
        1. Puree: Add the parsley. Then, using an immersion blender, puree the soup in the pot. Alternatively, you can puree it in batches in a blender.
        2. Garnish and serve: When ready to serve, ladle into bowls, and garnish with feta crumbles and more parsley.

        What To Serve it With?

        While you can enjoy this cream of broccoli soup all on its own, there are a few ways to jazz it up. You can try:

        How to Store, Freeze, Thaw and Reheat?

        What I love the most about this vegetable soup with feta is the fact that it stores well, so you can enjoy the leftovers in the following days. Here is how I store it:

        • Storage: You can store leftovers of this broccoli soup with feta in an airtight container for up to 5 days.
        • Freeze: If you plan to freeze this soup, I recommend not adding the feta to the soup, as dairy doesn’t freeze well.  Follow the recipe as written, cool completely, and store it in a freezer-safe airtight container. Label, date, and freeze for up to 3 months.
        • Thaw: Thaw the frozen broccoli soup overnight in the fridge.
        • Reheat: Reheat a bowlful of soup in the microwave in 30-second intervals, stirring each time in between, or reheat the whole batch on the stovetop over medium heat until bubbling and simmering. Top with feta cheese crumbles.
        Bowls of healthy broccoli soup garnished with parsley and croutons from the top view.

        Expert Tips

        • Use an immersion blender. This way, you can puree this feta cheese soup in the same pot with no extra dishes. This Kitchen Aid stick blender (affiliate link)  is the one I own and recommend.
        • If you do not own an immersion blender, you can blend the soup in a blender or food processor. However, whichever gadget you use, fill it about halfway full and be extra careful when blending hot liquids.
        • Puree to desired consistency. Keep a few chunks of broccoli intact or puree until silky smooth.
        • Mash with a potato masher. Rather than blending, mash the soup with a potato masher to keep it chunky.

        FAQs

        Can broccoli cheese soup be frozen?

        Yes, this soup freezes well. Omit the feta cheese before freezing, and top with the cheese once thawed, reheated, and ready to serve.

        Can you put feta in soup?

        Yes, you can, but putting it at the end is recommended.

        Other Broccoli Recipes You Might Like:

        This recipe is adapted (with minor changes) from Emilie Raffa’s The Clever Cookbook.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make this Broccoli and Feta Soup recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Broccoli Feta Soup in a bowl garnished with feta and parsley.
        Print

        Broccoli Feta Soup Recipe

        This vegetarian and gluten-free 30-Minute Broccoli Feta Soup is a lifesaver when you are short on time. It is easy to make and a great way to incorporate vegetables into your diet. Once it is topped off with fresh Italian parsley and feta cheese you end up with a delicious and veggie packed soup that will warm your heart.
        Course Soup
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Cook Time 20 minutes
        Total Time 30 minutes
        Servings 6 cups
        Calories 135kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 tablespoons olive oil
        • 1 medium onion chopped
        • 2 stalks celery chopped
        • 3 cloves garlic minced
        • 1/2 teaspoon Kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • 1 large Yukon Gold Potato peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes
        • 4 cups low-sodium vegetable stock plus more as needed
        • 6 cups broccoli florets rinsed and drained
        • 1/3 cup Italian parsley rinsed and chopped coarsely – plus more as garnish
        • 1/3 cup feta cheese crumbled – plus more as garnish

        Instructions

        • Heat olive oil in a Dutch oven (or any large, heavy bottom pot would work). Add in the onion and celery. Cook until they are soft, 5-7 minutes. Stir in the garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
        • Stir in the potatoes, salt, and black pepper. Pour in the vegetable stock. Bring it to a boil and let it simmer for 10 minutes or until the potatoes are soft.
        • Stir in the broccoli florets and cook briefly, 8-10 minutes, over medium heat.
        • Right before you are ready to puree the soup, add in the chopped parsley.
        • Using a hand blender, puree soup in the pot. Alternatively, you can puree it in batches in a blender. I prefer my soup rustic-style with chunks of broccoli, but if you prefer it to have a smooth texture, then puree it until it has a silky texture.
        • Taste for seasoning and add in more seasoning* if necessary.
        • When ready to serve, ladle some into bowls and garnish with feta crumbles and parsley leaves.

        Video

        Notes

        • *While we want the soup to be properly seasoned, be sure to taste your feta cheese before adding more.
        • It is optional, but you can finish it with a drizzle of olive oil and a sprinkle of sumac if you have it.
        • Storage of leftovers: Bring to room temperature, place in an airtight container, and store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
        • Freeze: Follow the recipe as written (except omit using crumbled feta in the end), cool completely, and store it in a freezer-safe airtight container. Label, date, and freeze for up to 3 months.
        • Thaw: Thaw it overnight in the fridge.
        • Reheat: Reheat a bowlful of soup in the microwave in 30-second intervals, stirring each time in between, or reheat the whole batch on the stovetop over medium heat until bubbling and simmering. Top with feta cheese crumbles and garnish with fresh parsley right before serving.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 135kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 7mg | Sodium: 949mg | Potassium: 458mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1217IU | Vitamin C: 93mg | Calcium: 99mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/30-minute-broccoli-and-feta-soup/feed/ 20
        Baked Goat Cheese Balls https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese/ https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese/#comments Sun, 29 Dec 2024 17:08:15 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15644 Is there anything better than tangy cheese coated in breadcrumbs and baked until crisp on the outside and creamy on…]]>

        Is there anything better than tangy cheese coated in breadcrumbs and baked until crisp on the outside and creamy on the inside? I think not. I also think that goat cheese makes some of the most flavorful dishes, so make sure to try any of our Goat Cheese Recipes if you are a fan as well. 

        On a side note, if you’ve ever been to Lisa Vanderpump’s restaurant, Sur, then you know all about their famous fried goat cheese balls. I know people who visit the restaurant just to order them! The good news? With our recipe, you can now recreate a baked version of the goat cheese balls at Sur right at home. They’re just as delicious but a bit lighter and perfect for any occasion.

        Baked Goat Cheese Balls served on a plate by a person.

        Ingredients

        This baked goat cheese ball recipe is made with just a handful of simple ingredients readily available in any grocery store. We will need:

        • Fresh herbs: I love the savory mix of fresh thyme and parsley. Other herbs that would be delicious include fresh rosemary or basil.
        • Panko bread crumbs: We love the extra crisp bite of plain panko breadcrumbs, but this is your chance to have fun with the coating. While it’s not traditional, you can use Italian-seasoned breadcrumbs, Melba toast crumbs, or even swap out half the breadcrumbs for crushed pecans or walnuts. For a gluten-free option, try almond flour crackers. Simply use your food processor to break them down into fine crumbs, making it easy to coat your goat cheese balls to perfection.
        • Garlic powder: Garlic powder adds a nice savory bite to the breadcrumb mixture. Toss in some lemon zest for a bright citrus flavor.
        • Egg: One large egg is needed to coat the goat cheese before dipping it into the breadcrumbs.
        • Dijon mustard: A hint of Dijon mustard adds a unique flavor to the egg mixture.
        • Seasonings: All you need is a sprinkle of Kosher salt and black pepper for each layer of the dipping station.
        • Goat cheese: We recommend buying a whole goat cheese log instead of goat cheese crumbles. You can buy them in 4 oz portions or a large 12 oz log.

        How to Make Goat Cheese Balls?

        Goat cheese bites are a quick and easy recipe that requires a quick setup of your breading station and a chill in the freezer. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

        1. Prep baking sheet: Line a small baking sheet (small enough to fit in your freezer) with parchment paper.
        2. Prepare dipping station: In a small shallow bowl, mix the fresh thyme and parsley. In another small bowl, whisk together the egg, mustard, salt, and pepper. Third, toss the panko breadcrumbs and garlic powder in another small bowl.
        3. Cut goat cheese: While you can use a sharp chef’s knife, we prefer unscented dental floss to cut the goat cheese into 12 equal goat cheese rounds. This works best if your goat cheese log is chilled, so do it right after you remove it from the fridge. To slice goat cheese using a dental floss:
          1. Using a knife, score the surface of the goat cheese log into 12 equal sections.
          2. Cut yourself a long (about 20 inches long) unscented dental floss and slide it under the log at the first score mark.
          3. Cross the ends of the floss over the log, pulling them in opposite directions to slice through the cheese cleanly. Repeat this process until you slice the whole log, wiping the floss with a paper towel as needed.
          4. Roll each piece into a small ball between the palms of your hands.
        4. Coat goat cheese balls: Start by dipping each goat cheese ball in the herb mixture. Then, roll them in the egg mixture and allow the excess liquid to drip off. Then, gently press them into the panko mixture to ensure they are fully coated.
        5. Freeze goat cheese balls: Transfer the goat cheese balls onto the parchment-lined baking sheet. Freeze for 30 minutes.
        6. Bake: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Bake the goat cheese balls for 8-10 minutes, or until golden brown.
        7. Serve: Cool slightly, drizzle with honey, and serve warm.

        Make Ahead and Storage Tips

        Talk about a goat cheese appetizer that’s a true make-ahead marvel. The best part? You can prepare these ahead of time, freeze them, and have them ready to pop in the oven whenever you need them. Frozen goat cheese balls that bake up in minutes are a lifesaver when you want something quick, effortless, and absolutely impressive.

        • Make Ahead and freezing instructions: Follow the recipe as written, flash freeze them (meaning place them on a sheet pan, freeze until hardened), transfer to a ziplock freezer bag, label, date, and freeze for up to 2 months. If baking from frozen, add 2 minutes to the baking time and keep an eye on them to ensure they are not burning.
        • Storage: While these goat cheese bites are best served the day they are made, leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 3 days.
        • Reheat: Reheat the balls of goat cheese in a low oven (300 degrees F) until warm, about 5 minutes.

        Expert Tips

        Here are some of my helpful tips for the best baked goat cheese balls recipe:

        • Cutting the goat cheese: The goat cheese is easiest to cut when it is cold. The best method is with unflavored dental floss. However, you can use a sharp knife, but make sure to wipe the knife clean with a paper towel after each slice.
        • Set your dipping station up before starting: It’s best to prep your ingredients before starting since the process happens quickly.
        • Dredge quickly: Go through the breading station quickly and thoroughly, then pop them right into the freezer.
        • Ensure they are cold before placing them in the oven: Even though it sounds like an extra step to freeze them before baking, it helps to make the outside crispy while the inside stays soft and creamy.
        • Fried goat cheese balls: While we love the baked version, you can certainly fry goat cheese balls for a crisp, golden treat. Heat 1–2 inches of vegetable oil in a shallow skillet over medium heat until it shimmers. Fry the goat cheese balls in batches (preferably two) for 1–2 minutes, turning frequently to ensure they cook evenly and achieve a beautiful golden-brown crust on all sides.
        • Double the recipe: This recipe makes 12 individual balls—double or triple the recipe, depending on the number of people you serve. Or, make them mini by cutting the goat cheese rounds in half and reducing the baking time to 5-6 minutes.
        • Bake them right before serving: If you’re serving these goat cheese balls as an appetizer, we highly recommend serving them warm for the best experience. We like to pop them in the oven just before our guests arrive so they’re greeted with the irresistible aroma of golden, creamy goat cheese oozing with tangy, melt-in-your-mouth goodness.

        Serving Suggestions

        When it comes to serving baked goat cheese balls, the possibilities are as delightful as the dish itself! Whether you are planning an elegant appetizer, a show-stopping salad, or just looking to add a little magic to your meal, these versatile bites have you covered. 

        Goat cheese appetizer balls served as a holiday cheese spread.
        • Appetizer: Serve them with a drizzle of honey or extra virgin olive oil. Or, add them to your Meat and Cheese Platter for a little pizzazz.
        • Salad: Enjoy a French classic and turn it into a Baked Goat Cheese Salad. This also does double duty as a delicious holiday appetizer salad or elegant weeknight dinner at home.
        • Croutons: Turn them into cheesy croutons to top off a warm, comforting bowl of soup, like creamy Butternut Squash Soup or velvety Zucchini Soup.
        • Pasta & grain bowls: Crumble them over pasta or add them to your favorite grain bowls for a tangy goat cheese twist that adds creamy texture and bold flavor.

        You Might Also Like

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        Baked goat cheese balls served on a plate by a person.
        Print

        Baked Goat Cheese Balls Recipe

        These Baked Goat Cheese balls are coated with herbs, dipped in an egg-mustard mixture, and then rolled in breadcrumbs. You can prep these ahead of time and freeze them until you are ready to serve. They make the perfect appetizer for any cheese board setup and usually disappear a few minutes after they come out of the oven.
        Course Appetizer
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 20 minutes
        Cook Time 10 minutes
        Cooling time 30 minutes
        Total Time 1 hour
        Servings 12 Goat Cheese Balls
        Calories 122kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh thyme
        • 2 tablespoons chopped fresh parsley
        • ¾ cup panko breadcrumbs
        • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
        • 1 large egg
        • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
        • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • 1 12-ounce log goat cheese
        • 2 tablespoons honey for drizzling (optional)

        Instructions

        • Line a small baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
        • Prep your dipping station: First, place fresh thyme and parsley in a small shallow plate and mix to combine. Second, place panko and garlic powder in a shallow bowl. Stir to combine. And third, whisk egg, mustard, salt, and pepper in a small bowl and set aside.
        • Cut the goat cheese into 12 pieces. You can slice them using (unscented) dental floss (see notes for more*) or a knife. Roll each piece into a small ball.
        • Dip each goat cheese ball in the herb mixture, ensuring it is coated on all sides. Next, roll them in the egg mixture (allowing the excess liquid to drip), then press the panko mixture gently to ensure it is fully coated with the panko breadcrumbs.
        • Transfer the goat cheese balls onto the parchment-lined baking sheet. Place in the freezer for 30 minutes.
        • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Remove the cheese from the freezer and bake in the oven for 8-10 minutes or until golden brown on top.
        • Let it cool for a few minutes, drizzle it with honey, if preferred, and serve while still warm.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 12 baked goat cheese balls, ideal for 6 servings (2 per person). The nutritional values below are per serving. 
        • Slicing the goat cheese: While you can use a sharp chef’s knife to slice the cheese, we find it easier to use an unscented dental floss to cut it into 12 equal goat cheese rounds. This works best if your goat cheese log is chilled, so do it right after you remove it from the fridge. To slice goat cheese using a dental floss:
          1. Using a knife, score the surface of the goat cheese log into 12 equal sections.
          2. Cut a long (about 20 inches) unscented dental floss and slide it under the log at the first score mark.
          3. Cross the ends of the floss over the log, pulling them in opposite directions to slice through the cheese cleanly. Repeat this process until you slice the whole log, wiping the floss with a paper towel as needed.
          4. Roll each piece into a small ball between the palms of your hands.
        • Make Ahead and freezing: The best part of this recipe is that you can prepare these ahead of time, freeze, and have them ready to pop in the oven whenever you need them. Frozen goat cheese balls that bake up in minutes are a lifesaver when you want something quick, effortless, and impressive. To freeze, follow the recipe as written, flash freeze them (meaning place them on a sheet pan, freeze until hardened), transfer to a freezer bag (or a freezer safe airtight container), label, date, and freeze for up to 2 months. If baking from frozen, add 2 minutes to the baking time and keep an eye on them to ensure they are not burning.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 122kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 54mg | Sodium: 171mg | Potassium: 39mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 391IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 58mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese/feed/ 2
        Christmas Fruit Salad https://foolproofliving.com/christmas-fruit-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/christmas-fruit-salad/#respond Mon, 23 Dec 2024 15:15:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79518 Making a fruit salad for Christmas is probably one of the easiest ways to bring a burst of color, freshness,…]]>

        Making a fruit salad for Christmas is probably one of the easiest ways to bring a burst of color, freshness, and flavor to your holiday table with minimal effort. While I focused on red and green fruits to keep it festive, the great thing about this recipe is that you can use virtually any fruits you have on hand.

        Christmas salad with fruit in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients and Substitutions:

        Like any great salad recipe, this fruit Christmas salad has two main components: the dressing and the fruit. To achieve the best flavor and texture, use ripe—but not overripe—fruits. Here’s everything you’ll need:

        For the Dressing:

        The dressing ingredients to make Christmas brunch fruit salad.
        • Maple Syrup: With its rich, caramel-like flavor, maple syrup adds a touch of natural sweetness to the salad. If you prefer, honey makes an excellent substitute.
        • Lemon zest: Be sure to zest the lemon before squeezing it, and whatever you do, do not skip using it, as it enhances the dressing by adding a concentrated burst of citrus flavor and aroma.
        • Lemon Juice: The bright, tangy flavor of lemon juice adds a refreshing tartness to the salad, while its acidity helps prevent the apples and pears from oxidizing and browning. However, you can use other citrus and fruit juices like lime juice, pineapple juice or orange juice.
        • Vanilla Extract
        • Spices: Ground cinnamon and a pinch of nutmeg add warm, spiced notes to the dressing, giving it a cozy, festive flavor perfect for the holiday season. 

        For the Fruit Salad:

        While I am listing a bunch of fruits, feel free to use this as a guide and a place to start to make your own winter fruit salad with whatever fruit you have on hand.

        The fruit used in the recipe in bowls.
        • Apples: I used a combination of green apples (such as Granny Smit) and red apples (Gala or Honeycrisp), but any other type of apple would be lovely.
        • Pear (Red, Anjou, or Bosc): Sweet and juicy pears balance the tartness coming from apples. 
        • Oranges: You can use a combination of navel oranges and mandarin oranges (if you can get your hands on them). I know it is an extra step, but take the time to segment the orange for a clean, membrane-free presentation that ensures each piece is tender, juicy, and easy to eat. Alternatively, you can use clementines as a substitute if you can get your hands on them.
        • Kiwis: I included kiwis for their green color and sweet and tart flavor. 
        • Red or green grapes: When buying grapes for making this Christmas day fruit salad, be sure to choose firm, seedless green or red grapes for the best texture and ease of eating.
        • Pomegranate seeds: Many Christmas recipes with fruit feature pomegranate arils, not just for their sweet-tart flavor but also for their vibrant, jewel-like pop of color they bring to the dish. Here is an easy way to cut pomegranate if you need a refresher.
        • Raspberries: I included raspberries for their vibrant red color and to add a delicate, softer texture that balances the crunch of the other fruits in the salad. Strawberries would be a great substitute if you can’t find raspberries.

        Optional Toppings:

        Many Christmas fruit dishes can end up looking like just a simple pile of fruit in a bowl. While optional, by adding a few thoughtful toppings, you can elevate the presentation and bring in extra pops of color and texture, making the salad as stunning as it is delicious. Try adding:

        • Coconut flakes: If you have the time, toast them to enhance their flavor with a warm, nutty aroma that adds even more depth to the salad.
        • Fresh mint: A few sprigs of fresh mint can add a refreshing aroma and a vibrant pop of green, making your salad look and taste even more festive.

        How To Make Christmas Fruit Salad?

        Yes, there’s a bit of chopping involved, but don’t let that intimidate you—this xmas fruit salad recipe is super simple to put together. It’s quick to assemble, making it a great choice for busy holiday mornings. Here’s how to do it:

        A collage of images showing how to make fruit bowl for Christmas.
        1. Make the Dressing: To keep cleanup simple, prepare the dressing directly in a large bowl. Whisk together the maple syrup, lemon juice, lemon zest, vanilla extract, ground cinnamon, and nutmeg until well combined.
        2. Chop the Fruit: Begin by chopping the apples and pears, then add them to the bowl with the dressing. Coating them in the acidic dressing immediately helps prevent browning. Continue peeling and chopping the rest of the fruit (except raspberries) and place them in the bowl. Give it a toss to ensure all the fruit is evenly distributed and coated with the dressing. If you have the time, chill it for an hour or for upto six hours before serving.
        3. Garnish and serve: Right before serving, top it off with raspberries and garnish with coconut flakes and/or fresh mint, if using. 

        How To Make Ahead, Store and Freeze?

        Once you’ve made this fruit salad for xmas, you won’t want any of it to go to waste. With a bit of planning, you can keep it fresh and delicious for longer. Here’s how:

        • Make ahead: Prepare the salad dressing and store it in a jar in the fridge for up to two days in advance. You can rinse, peel, and cut all the fruits—except the apples and pear—a day ahead. Keep in mind that pre-cut fruit will release some of their juices. When you’re ready to serve, chop the apples and pear, add them to a bowl with the other fruits, and drizzle everything with the dressing. Add the raspberries and serve.
        • Storage: Store leftovers of this holiday fruit bowl in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Keep in mind that the fruits will release their juices over time, but the salad will still taste great. Give it a good toss before serving.
        • Freezing: The leftovers of this Christmas fruit salad can be used to make smoothies. However, I recommend draining the juices (and the dressing) before freezing. Once drained, portion and place the leftover fruit in freezer-safe bags and freeze for upto 3 months.

        Expert Tips:

        • Uniform Cuts: Chop all fruits into similar-sized pieces for even mixing and easy eating. If you have the time, use cookie cutters (affiliate link) to cut apples and pears in fun shapes (like I did in the pictures). This is especially a fun way to make this salad with kids.
        A collage of images showing cutting of the fruit using cookie cutters and the finished dish.
        • Presentation: Use a clear trifle dish or a colorful holiday fruit bowl to show off the salad’s vibrant red and green colors, perfect for a Christmas morning fruit salad centerpiece.
        • Add Raspberries Last: I intentionally added the raspberries at the last minute as their soft texture can easily break.
        • Portion Planning: This recipe yields approximately 8 cups, suitable for a small Christmas dinner, but can be multiplied as needed. 
        • Make it your own: This recipe is a perfect starting point for creating your own signature fruit salad for any holiday! While the citrus-maple dressing is my go-to for Christmas, I love switching things up for other occasions. For Thanksgiving, I’ll often use my honey lime dressing for a bright, zesty twist that complements the autumnal flavors of the season. For Easter, I might add a splash of orange blossom water to the dressing for a festive springtime touch. No matter the holiday, this salad is versatile enough to adapt and impress every time!

        Serving Suggestions:

        This Christmas fruit salad recipe is wonderful when served on its own or as a refreshing side dish, but why not make it extra special for the holidays? Here are a few indulgent serving ideas to take it to the next level:

        You Might Also Like

        If you make this festive fruit salad recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        Christmas fruit salad in a bowl.
        Print

        Christmas Fruit Salad Recipe

        Celebrate the holidays with this easy Christmas Fruit Salad recipe. Red and green fruits, drizzled with a citrus-maple dressing, make it a light and refreshing addition to your holiday table.
        Course Dessert
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 15 minutes
        Servings 8 servings
        Calories 277kcal

        Ingredients

        For the dressing

        • 2 tablespoons maple syrup or honey
        • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
        • ¼ cup lemon juice freshly squeezed or lime juice
        • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
        • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon
        • Pinch of nutmeg

        For the fruit salad

        • 1 green apple (about 1 ½ cups) peeled, cored and cut into ½ -inch cubes – such as Granny smith apples
        • 1 red apple about 1 ½ cups, peeled, cored and cut into ½ -inch cubes – such as Honey Crisp, Gala or Fuji
        • 1 pear (180g/1 ½ cups) peeled, cored and cut into ½ -inch cubes – such as Red, Anjou or Bosc
        • 2 oranges (140g) peeled and segmented or mandarin oranges
        • 2 kiwis (142g/1 cup) peeled, quartered, and cut into ½- inch cubes
        • 1 cup green grapes 190g cut in half
        • 1 cup pomegranate arils (160g)
        • 6 ounces raspberries (170g)

        Optional Garnish

        • Sprigs of mint optional topping

        Instructions

        • To make the dressing: In a large salad bowl, whisk together the maple syrup, lemon juice, lemon zest, vanilla extract, cinnamon and nutmeg.
        • To make the salad: Add the apple, pear, orange segments, kiwis, grapes and pomegranate arils. Toss to coat thoroughly. Chill for at least an hour or up to 6 hours in the refrigerator.
        • Right before serving, top it off with raspberries and garnish with fresh mint leaves, if using. Serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 8 cups of fruit salad, ideal for 8 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Make ahead: Prepare the salad dressing and store it in a jar in the fridge for up to two days in advance. You can rinse, peel, and cut all the fruits—except the apples and pear—a day ahead. When you’re ready to serve, chop the apples and pear, add them to a bowl with the other fruits, and drizzle everything with the dressing. Add the raspberries and serve.
        • Storage: Store leftovers of this holiday fruit bowl in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. 
        • Freezing: The leftovers of this fruit salad can be used to make smoothies. However, I recommend draining the juices (and the dressing) before freezing. Once drained, portion and place the leftover fruit in freezer-safe bags and freeze for up to 3 months.
        • Uniform Cuts: Chop all fruits into bite-sized pieces for even mixing. If you have the time, use cookie cutters to shape the apples and pears into fun designs (like I did in the pictures). It’s a great way to make the salad more festive and a fun activity to enjoy with kids!
        • Presentation: You can serve this salad in a large salad bowl or transfer it into a trifle dish, if you have one. Alternatively, you can place it in a large platter as well.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 277kcal | Carbohydrates: 57.1g | Protein: 2.8g | Fat: 5.4g | Sodium: 6mg | Potassium: 405mg | Sugar: 40.4g | Calcium: 100mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/christmas-fruit-salad/feed/ 0
        Marron Glace Recipe (Candied Chestnuts) https://foolproofliving.com/marron-glace-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/marron-glace-recipe/#comments Wed, 04 Dec 2024 17:52:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79176 Humans have relished in candied chestnuts, or marron glacés, since the 16th century. Marron glacé (sometimes also referred to as…]]>

        Humans have relished in candied chestnuts, or marron glacés, since the 16th century. Marron glacé (sometimes also referred to as Marron Lyonnaise) originated in Northern Italy and France, where chestnuts thrive in the autumn and winter months. While preparing this French chestnut delicacy does take four days, the hands-on time is surprisingly minimal once your chestnuts are peeled.

        If you love roasting chestnuts in the oven or over an open fire but are looking to expand your chestnut repertoire, this European classic is a must-try. Yes, the prep time for this marrons glacés recipe may be a bit lengthy, but the process is straightforward and requires no advanced skills. Plus, making these candied chestnuts at home is far more budget-friendly than purchasing them at the store—without compromising that irresistible sweetness!

        Candied chestnuts in a gift box.

        What is marron glacé made of? The Ingredients List:

        Our recipe for candied chestnuts uses just four basic ingredients. However, the success of the end product will significantly depend on the quality of the ingredients you choose. 

        Below is everything you need to look for when buying them:

        Chestnuts:

        It is no secret that the chestnuts are the star ingredient in this recipe. When buying chestnuts, there are a few things to pay attention to:

        • Get the freshest chestnuts you can find: If possible, we recommend hand-selecting your chestnuts to ensure they are equal in size. Look for those that are plump, smooth, shiny, and without any blemishes or mold. Feel it between your fingers to ensure the skin is not dry. Once you’re back at home, one way to test freshness is to drop your chestnuts in a bowl of water. If any float, discard them, as they’re likely hollow inside the shell.
        • Not all chestnuts are created equal: In terms of chestnut variety, the French ‘marrons’ are superior in quality as they tend to be larger in size and more tender in texture. However, it’s hard to find them here in the US. A great alternative is Italian chestnuts, sold at national supermarkets like Whole Foods and Trader Joe’s during the holiday season. For this recipe, we recommend avoiding Chinese chestnuts. While they tend to be cheaper, we find them more challenging to peel.
        • Store-bought pre-cooked and peeled chestnuts are a great shortcut: If you’re short on time or don’t have access to fresh chestnuts, you can buy them (affiliate link) from the store. One important thing to remember is you need to ensure that the only ingredient used is chestnuts. Store-bought, already-sweetened chestnuts won’t work in this recipe. 
        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

        For The Syrup:

        • Water: You need a ratio of 1 part water to 1 part sugar to make the sugar syrup the peeled chestnuts soak in.
        • Vanilla Bean: Use a whole vanilla pod sliced in half to flavor the sugar syrup. The vanilla beans infuse into the syrup for maximum flavor. We advise you against using vanilla extract if you can avoid it. While it won’t ruin the recipe, we found that much of it evaporates along with the water as the syrup reduces.
        • Sugar: Since we do our best to use natural sugars in our recipes, we sweetened the syrup with cane sugar, but granulated white or brown sugar can also be used.

        How to Make Marron Glace?

        Below are the step-by-step instructions detailing the process of making glazed chestnuts. At first glance, the process might look intimidating, but once you’re done with boiling and peeling the chestnuts, the rest will take no more than 5 minutes a day.

        If you’re new to boiling chestnuts, we recommend you first review our guide on How To Boil Chestnuts, as we go into all the nitty gritty details there.

        1. Score the chestnuts: Use a small, sharp knife (or a paring knife, chestnut knife, or a sharp serrated knife) to score a cross outside the shell, right across the middle or “belly” of the chestnuts. Turn it 90 degrees and cut another one, creating an X. Don’t go too deep with your cuts—you want to pierce through the outer shell and the inner fuzzy skin, but do your best not to cut through the flesh too much.
        2. Boil the chestnuts in water: Place two cups of cold water into a medium-sized saucepan and boil over medium heat. Carefully drop the chestnuts into the boiling water and cook for 15-20 minutes. Towards the end, you’ll see the cut part start opening up as they cook, revealing the fuzzy skin on the inside. To check for doneness, carefully remove one chestnut and peel to check if the yellow flesh is fully cooked. If the pulp is soft and creamy, it is cooked. Remove the pan from the heat once they are all (mostly) open.
        Person peeling chestnuts and images showing sugar syrup.
        1. Peel your chestnuts while they are still warm: Carefully remove chestnuts one at a time from the hot water and hold them using a clean dish towel if they’re too hot. Using a sharp knife, peel off the shell and fuzzy skin underneath. If you’re having difficulty removing it, place it back in hot water for a few more minutes.
        2. Make the sugar syrup: Place the chestnuts in a colander and rinse them under cool water. Add the sugar and water to a saucepan and bring to a simmer. Stir continuously until the sugar is fully dissolved. Continue simmering for another five minutes until the sugar syrup turns golden brown. If you are using granulated sugar, the syrup should remain clear.
        Chestnuts in sugar syrup with vanilla bean.
        1. Cook the chestnuts in the sugar syrup: Add the chestnuts and halved vanilla bean into the syrup. Simmer your marrons in syrup for 10 minutes while stirring gently, being careful not to break up the chestnuts. 
        2. Set aside for 24 hours: After 10 minutes, take the saucepan off the heat, put the lid on, and let it sit on the counter for 24 hours. The chestnuts will cool down in the syrup and soak up some of the liquid as they rest.
        3. Cook the chestnuts in syrup a second time: The next day, place the saucepan back on the stovetop and gently heat the syrup until it is simmering. Continue to simmer for another 3 minutes. Remove from the heat, place the lid back on, and set aside to cool.
        Marron glaces drying on a wire rack.
        1. Cook the chestnuts in syrup two more times: Repeat the process of cooking the chestnuts in syrup two more times, waiting 24 hours between each time.
        2. Place chestnuts on a wire rack: After the 4th and final round of simmering in syrup, using a slotted spoon, remove the chestnuts one at a time, draining off excess liquid. Place them onto a baking tray fitted with a wire rack. Continue with the rest of the chestnuts one by one and spread them evenly on the wire rack. Make sure you lift out any little bits that may have broken off.
        3. Dry out the chestnuts in the oven: Preheat the oven to 120F (or as low as it will go) and place the chestnut tray in it. Cook the chestnuts for an hour. Remove the tray from the oven if the nuts have dried and hardened. If they’re still a bit sticky, prop the oven door open and leave the tray inside until thoroughly dried out. 
        4. Serve your marrons glaces: This French confection took effort to make and thus deserves a presentation worthy of your efforts! The best way to serve them is to individually wrap the chestnuts in parchment paper, paper cases, or place them in mini cupcake liners (affiliate link). 

        How To Store and Freeze Candied Chestnuts?

        • To store: Wrap each candied chestnut individually in parchment paper. Place in a sealed container and refrigerate for up to a week.
        • To freeze: Store the individually wrapped chestnuts in an airtight container and freeze for up to 1 month. Defrost at room temperature.

        Ways To Use Marron Glaces

        This candied chestnut recipe is incredibly versatile. Once you’ve made your marrons glacés, there are many ways to enjoy these delicacies:

        • Dessert: Make a Coupe Marron. This is a French classic that, I think, is worthy of your caramelized chestnuts. Add a scoop of vanilla ice cream to a tall glass, add your candied chestnuts, and then top it with a spoonful of whipped cream. It’s a simple yet decadent dessert, perfect for holiday entertaining.
        • Breakfast: Crumble marrons glacés over your favorite oatmeal, porridge, granola, or stack of pancakes
        • Meat and Cheese Board: Adding a sweet element to a cheese and charcuterie board is perfect alongside savory bites. The nutty, sweet earthiness from these chestnuts makes a beautiful, elevated addition to your serving platter.

        Expert Tips

        While making this glazed chestnuts recipe is fairly simple, there are a few important details to remember. Here are some helpful tips we’ve learned along the way to ensure your first attempt is a success:

        • Patience is key when scoring and peeling chestnuts: Take your time to carefully score the outer shell and fuzzy skin, aiming to pierce the skin without cutting too deeply into the flesh. Once cooked, peel the chestnuts while they’re still hot, as the skin becomes much harder to remove once they cool. Keep a paring knife nearby to help with any stubborn bits of skin that get stuck in the folds of the chestnut.
        • Save the broken pieces: Store them in a jar; they will taste just as good. Use them as a topping for ice cream or oatmeal.
        • Heat the syrup gently: Keep the sugar syrup at a gentle simmer rather than letting it boil. Also, it is best to stir regularly to prevent the chestnuts from sticking to the bottom of the pan and ensure they’re evenly coated throughout the whole process.
        • Watch the sugar syrup level: Towards the end, if your syrup reduces too much, the chestnuts will start sticking to the bottom of the saucepan. If that happens, feel free to add a small amount of water (¼ cup or less) to thin it out and maintain consistency.
        • Keep the sugar syrup: Don’t discard the syrup after removing the chestnuts. Pass it through a sieve and store it in an airtight container in the fridge. It’s a great alternative to maple syrup. I love it when poured into cocktails and drizzled over oatmeal and ice cream.
        Candied chestnuts on a plate.

        FAQs

        What is marron glacé in English?

        In English, marron glacé translates to candied chestnuts. It is a French candy made by simmering chestnuts in a sugar syrup until they become tender and coated with a glossy, sugary glaze.

        What do marrons glacés taste like?

        Marrons glacés are sweet through the center with a hard, sugared exterior and tender, nutty, sweet-tasting flesh.

        Why are candied chestnuts so expensive?

        Marron glacé is expensive because making them is labor-intensive and time-consuming. Each chestnut must be carefully scored, peeled, and cooked in sugar syrup over several days, requiring precision and attention to detail. Additionally, high-quality chestnuts add to the cost, making it a luxury treat.

        Other Chestnut Recipes

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make this recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Marron Glace (Candied chestnuts) on a plate from the top view.
        Print

        Marron Glace Recipe (Candied Chestnuts)

        Marron Glacé, or candied chestnuts, are a luxurious French treat you can make at home. Sweet, nutty, and delicious, but cheaper than store-bought yet just as decadent!
        Course Dessert, Snack
        Cuisine French
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 1 hour
        Cook Time 15 minutes
        Resting/cooling time 4 days
        Total Time 4 days 1 hour 15 minutes
        Servings 12 servings
        Calories 240kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 ½ lbs fresh chestnuts should give you 1.25lb/570g when peeled
        • 2 cups water more to boil chestnuts
        • 2 cups cane sugar or granulated sugar
        • 1 vanilla bean cut in half lengthwise

        Instructions

        • Place the chestnut on a cutting board flat side down. Hold it firmly between your index finger and thumb and make a horizontal slit and then turn the chestnut 90 degrees and make a second cut forming an “X.” Make sure to score through the hard outer shell and the fuzzy skin underneath. Do your best not to cut any deeper into the chestnut flesh. Repeat the same process for all of the chestnuts.
        • Fill a saucepan with cold water and bring it to a boil. Carefully place the chestnuts into the boiling water and cook for 15-20 minutes. The cut part will start opening up as they cook, revealing the fuzzy skin on the inside. To check for doneness, carefully remove one chestnut and peel to check if the yellow flesh is fully cooked. If the pulp is soft and creamy, it is cooked. Remove the pan from the heat once they are all (mostly) open.
        • Using a slotted spoon, remove one to two chestnuts at a time, as they will be hot. If needed, use a kitchen towel to protect your hands. Carefully peel away the hard outer shell and the fuzzy inner skin, taking care not to break the chestnut. If the fuzzy skin is stuck in the folds of the chestnut, use the tip of a knife or a toothpick to remove it. If the skin is stubborn, return the chestnuts to the hot water for a minute to loosen it, then try peeling again. Once done, you can discard the shells, skins, and cooking water.
        • Place the now-boiled chestnuts into a colander and give them a quick rinse. Set aside.
        • To make the sugar syrup, add 2 cups of water and sugar to a medium-sized saucepan and bring it to a simmer over medium heat. Stir it continuously until the sugar dissolves. This should take no more than 7-9 minutes.
        • Carefully add the vanilla bean and chestnuts to the sugar syrup. Let them simmer for 10 minutes, stirring once every 2-3 minutes.
        • Turn the heat off. Carefully remove the vanilla bean and discard it. Put the lid on and let it sit at temperature for 24 hours.
        • After 24 hours, return the pan to the stove and bring the sugar syrup to a simmer, cooking the chestnuts for 3 minutes. Stir the syrup and chestnuts every few seconds to keep them from sticking to the pan. Once again, remove the pan from the heat, cover with a lid, and set aside at room temperature for 24 hours.
        • Repeat this process twice, heating and cooling every 24 hours (it should be 4 times in total).
        • Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and place a wire rack over it. Preheat the oven to 120F (or as low as your oven can go.)
        • After the final time, carefully remove them one at a time with a slotted spoon. Let the syrup drip off as much as possible. Spread the chestnuts on the wire rack.
        • Transfer the baking sheet to the preheated oven. Bake low and slow for 1 hour*. The chestnuts should be dry and hardened on the outside. If they’re still sticky, turn the oven off, open the door, and leave the chestnuts to continue drying inside.
        • To serve, individually wrap the chestnuts in parchment paper or cellophane or place them in mini cupcake liners. Gift and/or enjoy.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 18-20 candied chestnuts, depending on the size of your chestnuts. I listed the serving as 10 (2 per person) and the nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Short on time? If you are planning to gift these candied chestnuts and make a bigger batch, you can save time by buying already cooked and peeled chestnuts. Just make sure that the only ingredient listed on the packaging is chestnuts.
        • Heat the syrup gently: As you warm up the sugar syrup, keep the sugar syrup at a gentle simmer rather than letting it boil. Also, it is best to stir regularly to prevent the chestnuts from sticking to the bottom of the pan and ensure they’re evenly coated throughout the whole process.
        • To store: Wrap each candied chestnut individually in parchment paper or mini cupcake liners. Place in a sealed container and refrigerate for up to a week. 

        Nutrition

        Calories: 240kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Sodium: 3mg | Potassium: 275mg | Sugar: 33g | Vitamin A: 15IU | Vitamin C: 23mg | Calcium: 12mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/marron-glace-recipe/feed/ 2
        Butternut Squash Bruschetta https://foolproofliving.com/herbed-goat-cheese-bruschetta-with-butternut-squash-and-cranberry-jam-2/ https://foolproofliving.com/herbed-goat-cheese-bruschetta-with-butternut-squash-and-cranberry-jam-2/#comments Fri, 25 Oct 2024 15:11:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=8033 The best Thanksgiving hors d’oeuvres have it all, and this fall bruschetta is no different. The butternut squash cubes roast up…]]>

        The best Thanksgiving hors d’oeuvres have it all, and this fall bruschetta is no different. The butternut squash cubes roast up beautifully, leaving you with sweet, caramelized bits of squash. Layer that on top of a toasted baguette slice slathered with herbed goat cheese and cranberry sauce, and you will have a butternut squash crostini worthy of an elegant dinner party or casual finger food.

        If you are like us, a big fan of butternut squash appetizers, be sure to check out our Butternut Squash Salad and Butternut Squash Soup, as well.

        Thanksgiving bruschetta with butternut squash and cranberry sauce from the top view.

        Ingredients

        This easy butternut squash appetizer is easy to make with a few simple ingredients from the grocery store. We will need the following ingredients:

        • Butternut squash: Look for a medium-sized whole butternut squash heavy for its size. I prefer cutting butternut squash at home into small cubes rather than buying the precut packages. Alternatively, acorn squash, delicata squash, or any pumpkin variety can also be used in this recipe.
        • Olive oil: Go for extra-virgin olive oil for the fruity flavor.
        • Ground cinnamon: Ground cinnamon powder adds an extra background warmth.
        • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper enhances all those butternut squash flavors.
        • Goat cheese: I love creamy goat cheese here (check out any of my Goat Cheese Recipes), but you could also use Ricotta Cheese, cream cheese, or mascarpone cheese.
        • Heavy cream: Heavy cream adds extra richness and loosens the goat cheese to a spreadable consistency. Whole milk is a good substitute.
        • Scallions: Green onions add extra color and a mild onion flavor.
        • Garlic: Garlic gives us that punchy bite.
        • Fresh herbs: I love fresh parsley, but fresh thyme is a great option.
        • Crusty Bread: Hearty, thick slices of sourdough bread are divine, but you can also make No Knead Artisan Bread if you have the time or use slices of baguette for smaller bruschetta.
        • Cranberry sauce: I love to use my Maple Cranberry Sauce, which I always have in the fridge this time of year, but any leftover cranberry sauce will work.
        • Nuts: Toasted sliced almonds or walnuts add a layer of crunch and texture.
        • Honey: Floral honey elevates the butternut and cranberry with sweetness, but it is optional. Maple syrup can also be used.
        • Toppings: Feel free to add toppings such as flaky sea salt, red pepper flakes, chopped sage leaves, or rosemary for extra flavor.
        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

        Optional Add-Ins

        There are several additions to this butternut appetizer, such as:

        • Balsamic glaze: Omit the honey and finish it with a tangy and sweet balsamic glaze instead.
        • Caramelized onions: Give the butternut squash an extra layer of savory flavor with rich and delicious Caramelized Onions.
        • Apple: Butternut squash and apples go so well together, so roasting some cubed apples with the squash is a delicious addition. Good apples for cooking include Fuji, Granny Smith, Pink Lady, and Gala.
        • Pomegranate seeds: Sprinkle on some pomegranate seeds for additional color and sweet, tart flavor.

        How to Make Bruschetta with Butternut Squash?

        This autumn bruschetta is easy to make. I like to mix the goat cheese while the butternut squash is roasting in the oven. Here’s how to do it:

        1. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper.
        Steps showing how to roast butternut squash and prepare goat cheese mixture.
        1. Season butternut squash: Add the small chunks of butternut squash cubes to the prepared sheet pan. Toss the butternut with olive oil, cinnamon, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, and black pepper and redistribute into a single layer.
        2. Roast squash cubes: Roast for 30 – 35 minutes, until fork tender and golden brown. Toss them halfway through for even browning.
        3. Whip goat cheese: In a small bowl, whisk together the goat cheese and heavy cream until smooth. Stir in the other teaspoon of Kosher salt, scallions, garlic, and parsley.
        4. Toast bread: Lightly toast the bread slices in the oven, toaster oven, or toaster.
        A collage of images showing how to assemble butternut squash bruschetta recipe.
        1. Assemble bruschetta: Spread 1-2 tablespoons of the goat cheese mixture on each slice of bread, followed by 1-2 tablespoons of cranberry sauce.
        2. Add roasted squash: Add the butternut squash mixture and sliced almonds or walnuts. Drizzle with honey, sea salt, and fresh sage, if using.

        Make Ahead and Storage

        Following the right storage instructions allows you to make this butternut crostini ahead of time. This allows you to get one step ahead if serving it as a party appetizer or as part of your Thanksgiving spread.

        • Make Ahead: Roast the squash and prepare the goat cheese mixture. Store each component separately in the refrigerator for 4-5 days.
        • Storage: The assembled butternut squash bruschettas will keep for one day. After that, the bread becomes soggy and soaks up too much moisture.
        Butternut bruschetta being drizzled with honey.

        If you try this Butternut Squash Bruschetta recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

        Butternut squash bruschetta with goat cheese from the top view.
        Print

        Butternut Squash Bruschetta Recipe

        A festive and colorful butternut squash bruschetta recipe featuring cinnamon-spiced roasted squash cubes atop layers of sourdough bread, goat cheese, and cranberry sauce. This is the perfect recipe to serve as an appetizer or use up the leftovers the day after Thanksgiving.
        Course Appetizer
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 20 minutes
        Cook Time 1 hour
        Total Time 1 hour 20 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 466kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Roasted Butternut Squash

        • 1 medium sized butternut squash peeled, deseeded, and cut into ½ inch cubes
        • 2 tablespoons olive oil
        • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
        • 2 teaspoon Kosher salt divided
        • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

        For The Goat Cheese Spread

        • 8 ounces goat cheese at room temperature
        • 2 tablespoons heavy cream
        • 3 stalks scallions chopped
        • 1 clove garlic finely chopped or pressed
        • ¼ cup parsley chopped

        For The Bruschetta

        • 6 slices sourdough bread or any other crusty bread
        • 1 cup maple cranberry sauce
        • ½ cup sliced almonds or chopped walnuts
        • 1 tbs Honey (or more) optional drizzle
        • Sea salt optional sprinkle to finish
        • Handful of sage leaves chopped (optional)

        Instructions

        • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper.
        • Spread the butternut squash cubes on the prepared baking sheet. Drizzle with the olive oil and sprinkle with the ground cinnamon, 1 teaspoon kosher salt and pepper. Toss to combine.
        • Roast for 30 – 35 minutes, turning halfway through until tender. Remove from the oven and set it aside to cool.
        • Place the goat cheese and heavy cream in a bowl. Using a fork, stir and “whip” until smooth.
        • Stir in the other teaspoon of Kosher salt, scallions, garlic, and parsley.
        • Lightly toast the bread slices in the oven, toaster oven, or toaster.
        • Spread the bread with 1-2 tablespoons of the goat cheese mixture, followed by 1-2 tablespoons of cranberry sauce.
        • Add some roasted squash cubes and sprinkle each slice with almonds or walnuts.
        • Drizzle with honey, a pinch of sea salt, and chopped sage, if using.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 6 bruschettas, which is ideal for 6 servings. We roasted the butternut squash but you can use leftover squash as well. 
        • Enjoy warm or cold: You can enjoy the roasted squash bruschetta warm, just as all the components come out of the oven, or chilled if the squash and goat cheese have been made ahead. If you prefer it warm, rewarm leftover squash on a baking sheet in a low oven (300 degrees F) for 8-10 minutes, until warm.
        • Smear garlic on bread: For that traditional bruschetta approach, you have two options. You can smear a raw garlic clove over the surface of the toasted bread slices, or make a paste with roasted garlic and spread it on instead.
        • Storage: While you can store the leftovers in an airtight container for one day, we think this bruschetta tastes best on the day it is made.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 466kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 16g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.002g | Cholesterol: 23mg | Sodium: 1306mg | Potassium: 197mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 756IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 125mg | Iron: 4mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/herbed-goat-cheese-bruschetta-with-butternut-squash-and-cranberry-jam-2/feed/ 10
        Muhammara Recipe (Roasted Red Pepper Dip) https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/#comments Mon, 26 Aug 2024 23:12:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=27123 If you are a fan of similar Middle Eastern dips and sauces, be sure to check out my Eggplant Yogurt…]]>

        If you are a fan of similar Middle Eastern dips and sauces, be sure to check out my Eggplant Yogurt Dip, Roasted Carrot Hummus, Mediterranean Hummus, Baba Ganoush, and Roasted Vegetable Dip recipes.

        What is Muhammara?

        Muhammara is a traditional Middle Eastern red pepper dip or condiment typically served a dip or sauce with warm pita bread. It is claimed by many countries, but the actual origin is the Syrian city of Aleppo.

        Also called Muhumra, Hamara, or Marmara, the dip is popular throughout Lebanon, Turkey, Armenia, the Middle East, and Meditteranean. It’s one of those recipes widely adapted according to the region and personal taste.

        Muhammara is served in a large bowl and garnished with walnuts, scallions, and dill.

        If you’ve never made this Middle Eastern pepper sauce, prepare to be amazed! Similar to its simpler version, roasted red pepper walnut dip, it is robust in flavor with sweet red peppers, nutty walnuts, and pomegranate molasses added to it to make it closer to its traditional version. All you need is a food processor and 30 minutes for a Meditteranean-inspired dip that is bright in color and flavor! Intrigued? Let’s break it down.

        My aunt was the queen of Muhammara sauce! This a delicious dip I grew up eating. We put it on everything – pasta, eggs, vegetables – and brought it to all our special occasions. Being one of the popular recipes of the Turkish Cuisine, pita chips and muhammara dip was our version of bread and butter.

        Key Ingredients:

        To make this Mediterranean red pepper sauce, you will need the following ingredients:

        All of the ingredients are photographed from the top view
        Walnuts are roasted in a baking sheet
        • Red Bell Peppers – Purchase fresh, organic, sweet red bell peppers the day you are going to prepare the dip for the best flavor. If you’re in a pinch, jarred roasted red peppers can be substituted; however, it’s worth noting that the flavor of homemade roasted red peppers is much sweeter than using ones from a jar, and the texture is softer.
        • Raw Walnuts – Toasting walnuts beforehand brings out more of their nutty, creamy flavor. I like to purchase a bulk of walnuts and toast them in a single layer on a large baking sheet in a 350-degree oven until light golden brown (about 7 minutes) as soon as I get home from the store, then cool completely and store them in an airtight container in the freezer. That way I have toasted walnuts ready whenever I need them!
        • Crackers – The authentic muhammara recipe is made with bread crumbs. In this modern version, I followed in the footsteps of the authors of the Vegetable Illustrated and used crackers instead. You can use any type of lean crackers, such as the simple water cracker. However, for even more flavor variation, use a cracker scented with rosemary, thyme, flax seeds, or sesame seeds. For best results, gently crack the crackers in a zip-top bag and finish crushing with a rolling pin.
        • Scallions – Use both green and white parts and be sure to roughly chop prior to adding to the bowl of your food processor.
        • Extra Virgin Olive Oil – This is a raw, uncooked sauce, so a good-quality Extra Virgin Olive Oil makes all the difference. My favorite is California Olive Ranch (affiliate link).
        • Pomegranate Molasses – If you are unfamiliar with pomegranate molasses, it is a slightly sweet, slightly tart syrup made from boiling down pomegranate juice (similar to how balsamic glaze is prepared). It gives the dip its signature sweet and tangy taste, adding an extra depth of flavor. It is a very popular ingredient in Middle Eastern cuisine and an authentic ingredient for this red pepper spread. Most supermarkets sell pomegranate molasses, but you can also purchase it online. If you need a suggestion, this pomegranate molasses (affiliate link) is the brand I use.
        • Lemon Juice – A hint of fresh acidity goes a long way and locks in the color of those beautiful roasted red peppers.
        • Paprika – I prefer sweet paprika over hot since the spice factor will come from the cayenne.
        • Cumin – Although not typically included, I like the punch of savory, smoky goodness cumin brings to this dip.
        • Kosher Salt – Use the amount called for in the recipe and adjust the taste to your liking at the very end. I also recommend finishing it off with some flaky sea salt.
        • Cayenne Pepper (or red pepper flakes) – A slight kick from the cayenne pepper transforms it into a healthy spicy capsicum dip (capsicum is another word for pepper). If you are not into spiciness, you can simply omit it. Alternatively, if you can get your hands on it, you can swap cayenne pepper with Aleppo pepper.

        How to make Muhammara?

        To make this Middle Eastern pepper sauce, simply:

        Red peppers are roasted and charred
        1. Roast bell peppers. Prepare the bell peppers by slicing off the stem end, removing the seeds and core with a spoon, slice in half and cut each half in three pieces. Remove the stem from the end and slice the end into large chunks. Transfer to a parchment-lined baking sheet and broil for 10 minutes, or until skins are well charred, making sure to rotate halfway through.
        2. Steam the bell peppers. Once roasted and charred, transfer the red bell peppers to a large bowl and cover with plastic wrap to steam for 10 minutes (this makes it easier to remove the skins). At this point, you can either leave the skins on for extra charred flavor or remove them.
        3. Crush the crackers. Place the crackers in a plastic bag, seal tight and gently crush with your hands. Finish crushing the crackers into coarse crumbs by rolling over with a rolling pin.
        Ingredients are placed in a food processor and photographed from the top view
        Dip is photographed in the food processor after it is processed
        1. Process all the ingredients. In the bowl of a food processor, add the roasted red peppers, walnuts, crackers, scallions, olive oil, pomegranate molasses, lemon juice, paprika, cumin, salt, and cayenne and process until smooth, about 15-20 seconds, scraping down the sides of the bowl halfway through.
        2. Garnish and serve. Transfer to a small bowl, spread it with the back of a spoon, garnish with fresh dill, scallions, sesame seeds, and a drizzle of olive oil. Serve with more crackers, pita or crudites.

        Expert Tips:

        • Don’t have crackers on hand? Substitute ¼ cup plain breadcrumbs, which is actually more traditional. The crumbs are necessary to absorb extra moisture so the finished dip isn’t runny.
        • Want an even more smoky flavor? Replace the sweet paprika with an equal amount of smoked paprika. Also, if you can handle the heat, be sure to sprinkle it with Aleppo chili flakes.
        • For a vegan red pepper dip, make sure to purchase crackers that are vegan compliant.
        • Add a clove of garlic: While it is not a traditional ingredient, I sometimes add in a clove of minced garlic into the food processor for additional garlicky flavor as I did in this Vegan Red Pepper Dip recipe.

        FAQs

        How do you pronounce Muhammara?

        Muhammara is the formal pronunciation and it sounds like it is written (though the “h” is slightly sibilant, almost as if you are exhaling through a sore throat). Not so easy to get right! Mm’hamara is a more idiomatic version. It also means roasted or burnt (made red), sharing the same etymological root as the word red (Ahmar).

        Is Muhammara Similar To Harissa?

        Not quite. Muhammara has a mildly spicy, tangy and sweet flavor and usually served as a dip, spread or a sauce, whereas Harissa is more of condiment that is usually used as a flavoring agent for soups, stews, marinades with rich spicy flavors.

        Can I Use Jarred Roasted Red Bell Peppers?

        You sure can. Just be sure to drain all the liquid before placing the peppers into the food processor or blender.

        Can I Substitute The Pomegranate Molasses?

        While it won’t be the same thing, you have a few options when it comes to substituting pomegranate molasses when making this Middle Eastern red pepper dip. You can use balsamic glaze, cranberry juice concentrate, or you can mixa few teaspoons of lemon juice with a tablespoon of honey to get a similar sweet and tangy flavor.

        How Many Calories?

        This recipe makes 1 1/2 cups and easily serves 6 people. And one serving of it is only 176 calories! When you pair the dip with fresh sliced vegetables, it’s even better for you. So go ahead, eat your veggies!

        Can I Make Muhammara Without A Blender/Food Processor?

        Yes, you can. You can first start by chopping all of the ingredients finely using a sharp chef’s knife and then mix them in a bowl. Alternatively, you can use a mortar and pestle for a smoother texture.

        Is This Recipe Spicy?

        The authentic Muhammara is usually mildly spicy. However, the spiciness level depend on the recipe you are using. Usually the spiciness comes from Aleppo pepper (or red pepper flakes). When making muhammara at home, you can easily adjust the amount of red pepper flakes you use according to your preference.

        Storage Instructions:

        • To store your roasted bell pepper dip: Place muhammara in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 5 days. Alternatively, drizzle it with a thin layer of olive oil to extend its shelf life. Doing so helps prevent air from reaching the roasted red pepper dip and, as a result, keeps it fresh longer.
        • Freezing: If you prefer to store it for a longer period of time, you can freeze this red bell pepper spread. Simply place it in an airtight container (or a freezer bag) remove the air out as much as you can and freeze for up to 2 months.
        • Thawing: Thaw it in the fridge overnight and give it a good stir before serving.

        Ways to serve this Syrian pepper sauce recipe

        There are a number of ways to serve this muhammara dip recipe, such as:

        • Dip: Definitely the most authentic, serve it as a dip with seed crackers, pita bread, or fresh sliced vegetables as a part of your mezze platter.
        • Spread: Slather it on sandwiches, fresh pita bread, wraps, or your morning toast. In my opinion, leftover muhammara makes the best sandwich spread.
        • Pasta Sauce: Prepare your favorite pasta and toss it in a large bowl with the muhammara and a bit of pasta water – no additional cooking required!
        • Pizza Sauce: Replace the tomato sauce on pizza with muhammara – such a fun, Meditteranean twist!
        • Topping: A scoop of muhammara makes an excellent topping for homemade CAVA bowls and pairs beautifully with other Mediterranean sauces like tzatziki and hummus.
        A bowl of the dip is served with crackers on the side

        Other sauce/dip recipes you might also like:

        If you try this Muhammara dip recipe or any other Middle Eastern Dip recipes mentioned in this post, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        muhammara dip in a bowl from the top view
        Print

        Muhammara Recipe

        Muhammara is a traditional Syrian red pepper dip made with roasted red peppers, walnuts, and pomegranate molasses. This recipe is easy to make, vegan and gluten-free. Serve as a dip, spread, or even as a pasta sauce. It is deliciously addictive!
        Course Appetizer
        Cuisine Middle Eastern
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 20 minutes
        Cook Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 30 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 176kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 red bell peppers medium-sized
        • ½ cup walnuts lightly roasted
        • cup crackers any type of lean cracker can be used*
        • 3 scallions chopped (both green and white parts)
        • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
        • 1 ½ tablespoons pomegranate molasses*
        • 4 teaspoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
        • 1 ½ teaspoons paprika
        • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • teaspoon cayenne pepper

        Instructions

        • To roast the bell peppers: Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper. Slice the tops of the bell peppers and remove the stems from the tops. Using a paring knife (or a spoon) take out the core. Cut the bell pepper into three pieces. Place them on the sheet pan skin side up. 
        • Adjust oven rack 3 to 4 inches from the broiler element (or at the top rack) and heat broiler. Broil until the skin is well charred, 10 minutes. Be sure to rotate the sheet pan halfway through.
        • Place the now-charred peppers in a bowl, cover with plastic wrap and let it steam for 10 minutes. At this point, it is up to you to whether or not remove the skin. If you like the charred flavor, feel free to keep the skins on. If not remove and discard them. You should end up with approximately 1 cup of roasted bell peppers.
        • Place crackers into a ziplock bag and crush them with a rolling pin.
        • Place roasted peppers, walnuts, cracker crumbs, scallions, olive oil, pomegranate molasses, lemon juice, paprika, ground cumin, salt, and cayenne pepper into the bowl of a foods processor. 
        • Process until pureed, 15-20 seconds scraping down the sides of the bowl halfway through processing. 
        • Transfer to a bowl and serve with crackers, pita bread, and/or crudites.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 1 1/2 cups of muhammara, which is ideal for serving 6 people as an appetizer/dip. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Best way to store: You can store this roasted red pepper dipping sauce recipe in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
        • * If you don’t have crackers on hand, substitute ¼ cups of plain breadcrumbs, which is actually more traditional.
        • Want an even more smoky flavor? Replace the sweet paprika with an equal amount of smoked paprika.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 176kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 227mg | Potassium: 149mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 1358IU | Vitamin C: 55mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg

        This recipe has been adapted (with minor changes) from Vegetables Illustrated (affiliate link).

        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/feed/ 17
        Eggplant Caprese https://foolproofliving.com/eggplant-caprese/ https://foolproofliving.com/eggplant-caprese/#respond Tue, 06 Aug 2024 11:59:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77481 It is no secret that Caprese is a summer classic. With all the fresh and colorful summer tomatoes and fresh…]]>

        It is no secret that Caprese is a summer classic. With all the fresh and colorful summer tomatoes and fresh basil abundant in the garden, it is the easiest yet most delicious summer recipe. While I make my Burrata Caprese often, this summer, I have been loving this grilled eggplant caprese. 

        If you are a fan of eggplant recipes, this easy recipe is a great way to use them in your daily cooking.

        Eggplant Caprese on a plate garnished with basil leaves.

        Ingredients

        The list below includes two sets of items: what you’ll need to grill the eggplant and what you’ll need to make the eggplant Caprese salad.

        Ingredients for the recipe with text on each ingredient.
        • Eggplant: The widely available globe eggplants work beautifully in this recipe. However, if you can get your hands on other eggplant varieties, like Italian Graffiti eggplants, you can use them as well. Keep in mind that each variety offers a slightly different flavor and texture, but all will work beautifully in this recipe. There is no need to peel the eggplant as the skin is edible. 
        • Olive Oil: This is used both for the marinade and the final drizzle. Choose an extra virgin olive oil that offers a rich but subtle flavor.
        • Balsamic Vinegar: We are using balsamic vinegar both in the marinade and in the assembled dish. I recommend a good-quality aged balsamic vinegar (affiliate link), but any of your favorite brands would work.
        • Garlic: Freshly minced or pressed garlic adds a pungent, savory depth to the marinade.
        • Seasonings: Kosher salt (or flaky sea salt) and ground black pepper are all you need for seasoning this eggplant recipe.
        • Tomatoes: If you can find them, use sweet, ripe heirloom tomatoes. However, any type of tomato would work in this caprese salad with eggplant. For even layering, try to choose tomatoes that are similar in size.
        • Fresh mozzarella cheese: Sliced thickly, fresh mozzarella pairs perfectly with the tomatoes and eggplant. While it is not traditional, you can take things up a notch by using burrata instead.
        • Fresh Basil Leaves: Fresh basil is key for that authentic Caprese taste. We recommend tearing larger leaves by hand instead of chopping them with a knife, which will bruise them.
        • Balsamic Glaze – Optional: This is an optional ingredient, but if you have it on hand, drizzle it over the salad for a touch of sweetness and acidity.

        How to make this recipe?

        Creating this eggplant Caprese is simple and straightforward. It starts with grilling the eggplant and then assembling the salad. Below are the step-by-step instructions:

        1. Fire up the grill: Preheat your grill to medium-high heat, approximately 400 degrees F.
        Person showing how to prepare eggplant to make caprese with eggplant.
        1. Prepare the eggplant: Slice eggplant into ½-inch thick rounds and place them in a single layer on a baking sheet.
        2. Make the marinade: In a shallow baking dish, whisk together olive oil, balsamic vinegar, garlic, kosher salt, and pepper until combined.
        3. Marinade the eggplant: Place the sliced eggplant in the marinade and make sure that they are coated on both sides. Let them rest for 10 minutes. 
        4. Grill: Place the eggplant slices directly on the grill grate for 4-5 minutes, flip, and cook for an additional 2-3 minutes just until tender to maintain its structure and avoid a mushy texture. 
        A collage of images showing how to assemble the caprese with eggplant and tomatoes.
        1. Assemble: Arrange the grilled eggplant slices with sliced mozzarella, tomato slices, and fresh basil leaves on a large serving platter.
        2. Season and garnish: Drizzle with olive oil and balsamic vinegar (or balsamic glaze) and sprinkle with salt and black pepper. Garnish with fresh basil leaves and serve immediately.

        How To Serve Caprese Eggplant?

        The beauty of this Italian classic is that it can be served in many different ways, making it a versatile summer dish that you can prepare on a moment’s notice. Here are some serving suggestions:

        • A light meal or appetizer: Serve it with a loaf of crusty bread for an impressive summer appetizer that is great for serving a crowd.
        • A vegetarian dinner: Place eggplant caprese stacks on top of a bowl of a hearty grain like quinoa or wild rice for a complete vegetarian meal.
        • Side Dish with grilled meats and seafood: If you are wondering what to serve with eggplant caprese, know that any grilled protein would work. I especially like to pair it with my Grilled Wild Salmon and Shrimp and Vegetable Kabobs.
        • Make it a sandwich or a wrap: Use the eggplant mozzarella stacks to make a quick sandwich with Italian bread or a wrap with flour tortilla for a quick lunch.
        Person serving eggplant Caprese salad along with wine.

        Other Eggplant Recipes You Might Like

        If you make your own Eggplant Caprese following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Eggplant caprese on a plate from the top view.
        Print

        Eggplant Caprese Recipe

        Grilled eggplant slices layered with mozzarella cheese and juicy tomatoes garnished with basil leaves. If you are a fan of the classic Italian Caprese, be sure to try this eggplant version.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine American/Italian
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Cook Time 8 minutes
        Resting Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 28 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 279kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Eggplant

        • 1 large eggplant or two medium eggplant (approximately 1 lb)
        • ¼ cup olive oil
        • ¼ cup balsamic vinegar
        • 2 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

        For The Caprese

        • 1 lb. fresh tomatoes any tomatoes would work (we prefer heirloom or cherry tomatoes) sliced 1/2 inch thick
        • 8 oz. fresh mozzarella sliced ½ inch thick
        • ¼ cup fresh basil leaves
        • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
        • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar or balsamic glaze optional
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt or flaky sea salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

        Instructions

        • Preheat your grill to medium-high heat, approximately 400 degrees F.
        • Slice the eggplant into ½-inch thick rounds—place as a single layer on a baking sheet.
        • To make the marinade, whisk together olive oil, balsamic vinegar, garlic, kosher salt, and pepper in a shallow baking dish (9X13) until combined.
        • Place the eggplant slices in the marinade, coating them fully on both sides. Let them rest for 5-10 minutes. When ready to grill, remove them onto a platter shaking the excess marinade.
        • Place the eggplant slices directly on the grill grate and cook for 4-5 minutes until lightly golden brown. Using a spatula, flip and cook for an additional 2-3 minutes or until tender.
        • To assemble the eggplant caprese, arrange grilled eggplant, sliced juicy tomatoes, and mozzarella in an overlapping pattern on a large serving platter. Alternatively, you can layer them in stacks starting with eggplant slices followed by mozzarella cheese, sliced tomatoes and fresh basil leaves.
        • Drizzle with olive oil and balsamic vinegar (or balsamic glaze, if using). Sprinkle with salt and pepper.
        • Garnish with fresh basil leaves and serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 7-8 (loose) cups of eggplant caprese, which is ideal for serving 6 people as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Cooking Eggplant: We made this recipe using grilled eggplant since it’s perfect for the summer months. However, you can enjoy this eggplant dish all year round. You don’t have to stick to grilling; try air-frying, sautéing in a skillet, or baking in the oven your eggplant for equally delicious results.
        • Crispy Eggplant: Another alternative to grilling eggplant could be my Baked Crispy Eggplant or Breaded Eggplant in Air Fryer. Coating sliced eggplant with a mixture of panko breadcrumbs, parmesan cheese, garlic powder, and other seasonings adds yet another layer of flavor to the eggplant caprese.
        • Salting eggplant: It is not necessary to salt eggplant if you buy it from a supermarket during the summer months when it is in season. Thanks to the advancements in eggplant farming, farmers have bred out much of that signature bitterness, especially in the globe eggplants you find in US supermarkets. However, if you prefer to salt it, you can do so by following our guide on salting eggplant.
        • Serve at room temperature: While you can make this salad a few hours in advance, I find that it is best when served at room temperature. For the best results, simply take it out of the fridge 30 minutes before serving.
        • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 279kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Cholesterol: 30mg | Sodium: 827mg | Potassium: 405mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 957IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 213mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/eggplant-caprese/feed/ 0
        Greek Cucumber Salad https://foolproofliving.com/greek-cucumber-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/greek-cucumber-salad/#comments Tue, 30 Jul 2024 15:36:15 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77332 This Greek cucumber tomato feta salad is the perfect way to enjoy fresh produce on a hot summer day. Bursting…]]>

        This Greek cucumber tomato feta salad is the perfect way to enjoy fresh produce on a hot summer day. Bursting with summer’s bounty while staying traditional, I serve this salad throughout the warm weather season.

        If you are a fan of fresh summer salads, make Tomato Cucumber Caprese Salad, Mediterranean Quinoa Salad with Feta, and Strawberry Spinach Salad.

        Tomato cucumber Greek salad in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients for Greek Tomato Cucumber Salad

        You will need just a few simple ingredients to make this Greek tomato and cucumber salad with feta. Feel free to experiment with substitutions and tips provided to suit your taste and what you have on hand. Below is what you’ll need:

        The dressing Ingredients:

        • Olive oil: Use extra virgin olive oil for a buttery, fruity and smooth flavor.
        • Lemon juice: Fresh lemon juice makes a light, bright dressing. If you prefer more acidity, you can also use red wine vinegar.
        • Garlic: Fresh garlic gives us an extra punchy bite. If you do not have any fresh garlic cloves on hand, swap them out for ¼ – ½ teaspoon garlic powder.
        • Oregano: Fresh oregano is deliciously aromatic and makes you feel like you’re on the cobblestone streets of the Mediterranean. If you grow oregano in your backyard, this is a great use for it. If you prefer a mild oregano taste, use half the amount of dried oregano.
        • Seasonings: An easy and simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper enhances those fresh summer vegetables.
        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

        Salad Ingredients:

        • Fresh Cucumbers: I love Persian cucumbers for their delicate flavor, crunchy texture, and thinner skin. That being said, English cucumbers have fewer seeds and can also be used in this cucumber tomato feta cheese salad recipe. If you can’t find either one, regular cucumbers can also be used.
        • Fresh Tomatoes: This recipe would work with any type of tomato. During the summer months, I usually use cherry tomatoes, grape tomatoes, or colorful heirloom tomatoes. However, other tomatoes, such as vine-ripened or Roma tomatoes, would also work.
        • Onions: Thinly sliced red onion provides color and flavor. If you do not prefer the taste of raw onion, thinly slice one bunch of green onion for a milder onion flavor.
        • Olives: Greek Kalamata olives are a classic when making this Mediterranean cucumber tomato salad, but black olives are a great substitute. If you are not a fan, you can leave them out.
        • Fresh herbs: I kept it simple with fresh parsley, but you can toss in any fresh herb available in your kitchen, including fresh mint, fresh dill, or fresh basil.
        • Crumbled feta cheese: Tangy feta cheese is the crowning glory of this healthy feta salad and it adds a creamy, salty brininess. Fresh feta can be found in the cheese section of the grocery store. If you are not a fan of salads with feta cheese, you can leave it out.

        Optional Add-Ins and Variations

        As it is with any iconic recipe, the authentic Greek Salad everyone seems to love can be customized with various (optional) add-ins and substitutions. Below are a few that I tried and recommend:

        • Dressing: While my Greek cucumber salad dressing is pretty basic, you can take it up a notch by using my Lemon Salad Dressing (with Dijon mustard), Red Wine Vinaigrette, or Lemon Balsamic Dressing.
        • Sweetener: Adding a small amount of sugar helps with balancing out the acidity. I like adding a small amount of honey or maple syrup. If that sounds good to you, make this recipe with my Mediterranean Salad Dressing.
        • Bell pepper: Toss in thinly sliced green or red bell peppers, or roasted red peppers.
        • Capers/Pepperoncini: Toss in a handful of drained and rinsed capers or sliced pepperoncini.
        • Salad greens: While leafy greens are not traditionally added to classic Greek salad, you can certainly pile all the ingredients on top of your favorite salad greens, such as romaine lettuce, mixed greens, or baby spinach.

        How to Make Greek Cucumber Salad?

        I love making this Greek cucumber tomato feta salad because all it takes is a quick whisk of the easy homemade Greek salad dressing and a few minutes of chopping the fresh veggies. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

        A collage of images showing how to make the tomato cucumber Greek salad recipe.
        1. Make the salad dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together olive oil, lemon juice (or vinegar), garlic, oregano, salt, and pepper until combined. Alternatively, you can place everything in a mason jar and shake vigorously.
        2. Assemble salad ingredients: In a large mixing bowl, place sliced cucumbers, tomatoes, red onion, olives, parsley, and crumbled feta cheese.
        3. Toss: Drizzle it with the dressing and gently toss to combine.
        4. Serve: Enjoy immediately or cover and store in the fridge until ready to serve.

        Make Ahead and Storage Instructions

        This tomato cuke feta salad is great for making ahead as long as you store the ingredients properly. Prep the ingredients a couple of hours (or up to a day) ahead of time to maintain the integrity of the vegetables. Here’s how I do it:

        • Make Ahead: Dice the vegetables into bite-sized pieces, then store them separately in an airtight container in the fridge. Crumble or cube the feta and store it in a separate container in the refrigerator. Assemble the dressing and keep it refrigerated in a mason jar. When ready to serve, assemble the prepared veggies and cheese, give the dressing a good shake, toss, and enjoy.
        • Storage: Leftover dressed cucumber Greek salad can be stored for 2-3 days in an airtight container in the refrigerator.

        What to Serve with this Cucumber Tomato Greek Salad?

        This is a great side dish to bring to all your summer barbecues, yet equally delicious to enjoy at home as a main course with grilled protein for a full meal. Some of my favorite ways to serve this cucumber tomato and feta salad include:

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        While this recipe is pretty straightforward and easy, I’d like to point out a few helpful tips for the best results on your first try:

        • Cut vegetables roughly the same size: Slicing and dicing the vegetables about the same size ensures you get each one of the vegetables in every bite.
        • Rest for 15 minutes: For the best flavor, let the cucumber and tomato salad rest for 15 minutes before enjoying it to allow the ingredients to meld together.
        • Pay attention to feta cheese and salt: Different brands of feta cheese will be saltier than others. I like to make the dressing, add the feta, toss it all together, then taste and add any additional salt, if necessary.
        • Tomatoes and cucumbers will release their juices: The water from the fresh tomatoes and cucumbers will naturally release when you add the dressing. If you prefer, you can serve the salad with a slotted spoon to hold back the excess water.

        FAQs

        What is the dressing made of in a traditional Greek salad?

        The traditional Greek salad dressing is made with good-quality extra virgin olive oil, lemon juice (or red wine vinegar), fresh garlic, fresh oregano, salt, and black pepper.

        What is the difference between Greek salad and Italian salad?

        Greek salad focuses on simplicity, using fresh vegetables, a simple dressing, salty feta cheese, and olives. Italian salad is more herbaceous and savory, thanks to a wider variety of vegetables, a more complex dressing, and different cheese options.

        Similar Salad Recipes You Might Like:

        If you make this Easy Greek Cucumber Salad recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Greek cucumber tomato salad in a bowl with serving spoons on the side.
        Print

        Greek Cucumber Salad Recipe

        This vibrant Greek Cucumber salad recipe combines crunchy cucumbers, juicy tomatoes, and creamy feta cheese with a zesty dressing, perfect as a refreshing side or light meal.
        Course Salad, Side Dish – Salad
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 15 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 311kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Dressing:

        • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
        • 3 tablespoons lemon juice or red wine vinegar
        • 1 clove garlic minced or pressed
        • 1 teaspoon fresh oregano or ½ teaspoon dried oregano
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

        For The Salad:

        • 6 Persian cucumbers peeled and diced or 1 English cucumber
        • 3 cups cherry tomatoes cut in half or 4-5 Roma tomatoes – 15 oz.
        • ¼ cup sliced red onion thinly sliced
        • 1 cup Kalamata olives pitted and sliced
        • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped
        • 1 cup feta cheese crumbled

        Instructions

        • To make the salad dressing, whisk together olive oil, lemon juice (or vinegar), garlic, oregano, salt, and pepper in a small bowl until well combined. Alternatively, you can put everything in a mason jar and shake vigorously.
        • Place cucumbers, tomatoes, red onion, olives, parsley, and feta cheese in a large bowl.
        • Drizzle it with the dressing and give it a gentle toss to combine.
        • Serve right away or store in the fridge until ready to serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe (depending on the size of your vegetables) makes about 6-7 cups of cucumber and tomato salad, which is ideal for four servings. The nutritional information below is per serving.
        • Adding Salt: Be sure to taste your feta cheese before adding more salt to the recipe. Some brands tend to be saltier than others, so it is best to give it a taste.
        • Storage: Leftovers can be kept in an airtight container for up to 2 days. 

        Nutrition

        Calories: 311kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Cholesterol: 33mg | Sodium: 1553mg | Potassium: 463mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1252IU | Vitamin C: 38mg | Calcium: 247mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/greek-cucumber-salad/feed/ 1
        Pesto Vinaigrette https://foolproofliving.com/pesto-vinaigrette/ https://foolproofliving.com/pesto-vinaigrette/#comments Wed, 17 Jul 2024 18:46:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=52273 Why Should You Make This Recipe? Basil pesto dressing is a mouthwatering yet simple recipe you can’t get enough of.…]]>

        Why Should You Make This Recipe?

        Basil pesto dressing is a mouthwatering yet simple recipe you can’t get enough of. This vinaigrette is easy, fresh, and pairs well with dozens of delicious dishes. 

        • This 5-minute pesto vinaigrette recipe is a great way to use fresh basil, especially if you’re growing your own fresh herbs. Who can resist natural ingredients?
        • Elevate any dish with ease when you top it with this herby and robust dressing. Whether you use pesto sauce for salad (or pasta salad!), to drizzle on pizza, or even to top grilled meat, your tastebuds will thank you.
        Basil Pesto Salad dressing in a jar

        Ingredients

        For this pesto dressing recipe, you will need:

        • Fresh basil leaves: It goes without saying your basil should be fresh and free of any bruises. I used green basil here, but you can use purple basil if you prefer.
        • Pine nuts: If you have the time, toasting your pine nuts in an empty skillet for 3-4 minutes will produce a rich, earthy vinaigrette.
        • Fresh garlic cloves
        • Acid: White wine vinegar and fresh lemon juice
        • Parmesan cheese
        • Kosher salt and black pepper
        • Extra virgin olive oil
        Sweetgreen pesto vinaigrette ingredients from the top view.

        Substitutions & Variations

        • Nuts: Don’t have any pine nuts on hand? No problem! Swap out your pine nuts for almonds or walnuts for an easy substitution.
        • Vinegar: Give your pesto vinaigrette sweeter, sharper, or more robust undertones by swapping out which vinegar you use. Simply substitute your white wine vinegar with an equal amount of red wine vinegar or balsamic vinegar for a delectable Pesto Balsamic Dressing.
        • Make it a 3-ingredient pesto vinaigrette: You can make this pesto vinaigrette with store-bought or homemade pesto, white wine vinegar, and parmesan cheese. For measurements, I recommend mixing ½ cup prepared pesto with ¼ cup vinegar and ¼ cup parmesan cheese.
        • Copycat Sweetgreen Pesto recipe: If you have ever dined at one of the Sweetgreen restaurant locations, you probably already know about their pesto dressing. It seems like Sweetgreen’s Pesto Vinaigrette recipe is very similar to mine, except that they use red wine vinegar instead of white wine vinegar and add a teaspoon of dDijon mustard to your basic lemon pesto dressing.
        • Make it vegan: To make a vegan version of this delicious recipe, all you need to do is use vegan parmesan. For a homemade substitution, I suggest using this recipe for vegan parmesan or an equal amount of nutritional yeast.
        • Sweetener: A teaspoon of honey or maple syrup can be added to balance out the acidity and earthy flavors coming from the vinegar and fresh basil leaves.

        How to Make Pesto Vinaigrette

        This 5-minute recipe for classic basil pesto dressing is as easy as it is fresh, and it comes together in just three steps.

        a collage of photos showing how to make pesto vinaigrette
        1. Chop/Pulse the ingredients in a food processor: Place all the ingredients except the olive oil (i.e., fresh basil leaves, pine nuts, garlic, vinegar, lemon juice, parmesan cheese, salt, and black pepper) into a food processor (or a blender). Pulse the mixture 4-5 times for a rough chop.
        2. Add the olive oil: Turn on the food processor and, while it runs, drizzle the olive oil through the tube. Stop the machine 1-2 times while mixing to scrape the bowl’s sides. Continue running your food processor until the salad dressing is creamy (approx. 45 seconds).
        3. Season and serve: Taste your pesto salad sauce and add any additional seasoning. Give the mixture one more pulse, and then serve.

        How to Store

        This pesto salad dressing recipe is a delicious addition to any meal. With these simple storage tips, you can keep your leftover vinaigrette fresh for days.

        • Storage: To store lemon pesto vinaigrette, place it in an airtight container (like a mason jar) in the refrigirator. Your dressing will stay fresh for up to 5 days.
        • Freeze: You can freeze this vinaigrette for up to 2 months in an airtight container.
        • Thaw: To thaw your pesto dressing, let it sit on the counter for 2 hours before using.

        Recipe Ideas to Use

        Basil pesto vinaigrette is a delicious dressing that goes with just about anything. This topping adds a sumptuous flavor to countless dishes, from leafy green salads to hearty mains.

        pasta salad in bowl using this basil salad dressing

        Expert Tips

        • Texture: Feel free to adjust the consistency and texture by processing (or blending) longer or shorter. I like it to have a pourable consistency, but you can always process it less if you prefer it to be more like a sauce.
        • Emulsify: You can process everything all at once, but taking the time to drizzle the olive oil over the tube after processing the rest of the ingredients will help the dressing blend well and result in a creamier vinaigrette.
        • Taste for seasoning: Be sure to taste it before serving and adjust the amount of acid and seasoning as needed.

        FAQs

        Pesto vinaigrette dressing is easy enough for even beginner chefs to prepare. Still, you can become an expert saucier in no time with these helpful FAQs!

        What is pesto vinaigrette?

        Pesto vinaigrette is a dressing that combines the classic elements of a pesto recipe (e.g., fresh basil, pine nuts, and parmesan cheese) with vinegar and lemon juice.

        How to turn pesto into salad dressing?

        For an easy pesto vinaigrette salad dressing, mix ½ cup of leftover pesto, ¼ cup of white wine vinegar, and ¼ cup of parmesan cheese. It’s that easy!

        What is in Sweetgreen pesto vinaigrette?

        Sweetgreen pesto vinaigrette is made with apple cider vinegar, fresh basil, garlic, dijon mustard, parmesan cheese, pine nuts, and salt and pepper.

        What is pesto dressing made of?

        This basil pesto salad dressing recipe consists of fresh basil leaves, pine nuts, minced garlic, white wine vinegar, lemon juice, parmesan cheese, salt, pepper, and olive oil.

        Other Homemade Salad Dressing You Might Like:

        If you try this Pesto Vinaigrette recipe or any other one of my homemade salad dressing recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Pesto Vinaigrette in a spoon
        Print

        Pesto Vinaigrette Recipe

        Learn how to make pesto vinaigrette recipe to use in salads, sandwiches, and more. Made with basic pantry staples, this basil salad dressing is easy and quick to make.
        Course Salad Dressing
        Cuisine American/Italian
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 10 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 254kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 ½ cups fresh basil leaves loosely packed
        • cup pine nuts or sliced almonds
        • 2 small cloves garlic minced
        • 2 tablespoons white wine vinegar
        • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
        • 2 tablespoons shredded parmesan cheese
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt*
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • cup extra virgin olive oil

        Instructions

        • Place fresh basil leaves, pine nuts, garlic, vinegar, lemon juice, parmesan cheese, salt, and black pepper into the bowl of a food processor*. Pulse 4-5 times to give them a rough chop.
        • Turn the machine on and while it is running drizzle the olive oil through the tube. Stop and scrape once or twice and continue running the machine until the salad dressing is creamy, 45 seconds or so.
        • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary. Give it one more pulse and serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe yields 2/3 cup pesto salad dressing that is ideal for 4 servings (about 3 tablespoon each.)
        • Amount of salt used: This is one of those recipes that you want to taste as you go. I listed 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt, but please give it a taste before serving to make sure that it is properly seasoned to your taste.
        • Blender: If you do not have a food processor, you can use a blender.
        • Make it a 3-ingredient pesto vinaigrette: You can make this pesto vinaigrette with store-bought pesto. For measurements, I recommend mixing ½ cup prepared pesto with ¼ cup vinegar and ¼ cup parmesan cheese.
        • Pesto Vinaigrette Sweetgreen Recipe: For a version similar to Sweetgreen’s pesto vinaigrette recipe, use red wine vinegar instead of white wine vinegar and add a teaspoon of Dijon mustard.
        • Storage: To store lemon pesto vinaigrette, place it in an airtight container (like a mason jar) in the fridge. Your dressing will stay fresh for up to 5 days.
        • Freeze: You can freeze this vinaigrette for up to 2 months in an airtight container.
        • Thaw: To thaw your pesto dressing, let it sit on the counter for 2 hours before using.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 254kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Cholesterol: 2mg | Sodium: 336mg | Potassium: 121mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 501IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 45mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/pesto-vinaigrette/feed/ 2
        Red Wine Vinaigrette https://foolproofliving.com/red-wine-vinaigrette/ https://foolproofliving.com/red-wine-vinaigrette/#comments Wed, 17 Jul 2024 14:48:29 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77071 If you are ready to skip the store-bought dressings and dive into the homemade salad dressings made from scratch with…]]>

        If you are ready to skip the store-bought dressings and dive into the homemade salad dressings made from scratch with basic pantry staples, you have come to the right place. This red wine vinegar dressing recipe is super versatile and exceptionally delicious. It is the dressing you would find at your favorite Italian restaurant or even bigger chain restaurants like Quiznos or Sweetgreen.

        If you love making homemade dressings as much as we do, be sure to check out our Lemon Vinaigrette and Maple Dijon Dressing.

        Salad dressing with red wine vinegar and olive oil in a jar with a spoon.

        Ingredients

        The secret to a good vinaigrette is to use good-quality ingredients. Most store-bought dressings fall short because they use canola oil and artificial flavors. Conversely, our classic red wine vinaigrette recipe requires six simple ingredients that are easy to find at the grocery store if you don’t already have them in your kitchen. Here’s a look at the ingredient list:

        Ingredients for olive oil red wine vinegar dressing.
        • Red wine vinegar: I have found the best red wine vinegar for salad dressing is one that is not too acidic (with an acidity level of 6-7%), made with natural ingredients without any artificial flavors, and offers a rich and complex flavor with slightly tangy and sweet notes. My favorite red wine vinegar brand is Napa Valley (affiliate link). It is made from organic oak-aged red wines. With that being said, any red wine vinegar that you enjoy using in your cooking would work in this recipe. Feel free to use your favorite brand based on your taste preference and price point.
        • Fresh garlic cloves: Fresh minced garlic provides the best flavor, but you can use ¼ – ½ teaspoon garlic powder instead.
        • Dijon mustard: Dijon mustard is the secret ingredient that helps emulsify the olive oil red wine vinegar dressing. Dijon mustard is a classic, but you can also use regular, country-style, or whole-grain mustard.
        • Honey: Honey adds a touch of natural sweetness, which helps to balance the acidity. Real maple syrup or agave nectar are great vegan options.
        • Oregano: This red wine vinegar vinaigrette recipe can be made with fresh or dried oregano. Some people consider fresh oregano quite potent and sometimes hard to come by. If you feel that way, ¼ teaspoons of dried oregano is a delicious alternative.
        • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper allows the red wine vinegar to shine.
        • Extra-virgin olive oil: For the best flavor in this homemade dressing, use good-quality extra virgin olive oil. 

        Optional Add-In’s & Variations

        While this red wine vinegar salad dressing recipe is delicious as written, you can swap out one or two ingredients or amp up the flavor based on your taste preferences. You could try:

        • Other kinds of vinegar: For a tangy flavor, you can swap a portion of red wine vinegar (perhaps half and half) for some balsamic vinegar. If you prefer the crisp flavors of white wine vinegar, you can substitute it for red wine vinegar. For a lighter (no alcohol) version, you can also use apple cider vinegar.
        • Parmesan cheese: If you like the classic Italian flavors, add ¼ cup of finely grated Parmesan cheese for a delicious, cheesy addition.
        • Fresh herbs: While I think fresh oregano complements this red vinegar salad dressing best, use any fresh herbs in your fridge, including fresh basil, fresh parsley, or fresh chives.
        • Citrus: Add even more tang with fresh lemon juice or orange juice for a bright, citrusy flavor.
        • Additional seasonings: To make it even more Italian, replace the oregano with ¼ – ½ teaspoon Italian seasoning blend.
        • Mayo / Greek yogurt: Add 1-2 tablespoons of mayo or Greek yogurt to make it creamy.

        How to Make Red Wine Vinaigrette?

        Homemade red wine vinaigrette can be made in one of two ways. Either using a bowl and a whisk or shaking it up in a mason jar. Here are the step-by-step instructions for each method:

        Steps showing how to make salad dressing with red wine vinegar.
        1. Whisk ingredients: In a small bowl, whisk together the red wine vinegar, garlic, Dijon mustard, honey, oregano, Kosher salt, and pepper until combined.
        2. Add olive oil: While still whisking, slowly add the olive oil in a steady stream. Continue whisking until slightly thickened, silky, and smooth. Alternatively, you can place all the ingredients in a mason jar, seal it with a tight-fitting lid, and shake vigorously until it is silky smooth.
        3. Taste test: Taste for seasoning, adding more salt or vinegar as needed.

        Ways to Use This Red Wine Vinegar Dressing

        I must admit that a salad dressing made with red wine vinegar and olive oil compliments nearly any kind of salad. Whip up a recipe, and this dressing will make it shine. But because it is so versatile, there are so many different ways you can use this red wine dressing, including:

        • Fresh Greens: Toss it over simple green salads like Spring Mix Salad or a sweet and salty salad combo of baby arugula, sliced red onion, dried cherries, walnuts or pecans, and feta cheese.
        • Vegetable Salads: Use it as the dressing component for Turkish Bean Salad or Greek Cucumber Salad for extra zing and tang.
        • Pasta Salad / Grain Salads: Go for a heartier side dish by tossing this red vinaigrette dressing over pasta salads and grain salads, such as my Quinoa Feta Chickpea Salad or Avocado Quinoa Salad.
        • Roasted or Grilled Vegetables: Drizzle over any cooked veggies to brighten and season them with tangy flavors. Try it on my Grilled Eggplant, Roasted Asparagus, or Air Fryer Green Beans.
        • Marinade for Meat or Tofu: Use it for your favorite protein, such as beef, pork, lamb, chicken, or tofu. Allow it to sit for a few hours in the refrigerator to allow the zippy, tangy flavors to sink in.
        • Brush onto Seafood or Fish: Use it as a fast and flavorful sauce by brushing onto fish filets, grilled shrimp skewers, or scallops before (or after) cooking.
        • Sandwiches and Wraps: Drizzle it on top of any sandwich or wrap for a tangy kick. It’s especially delicious when served on Chicken Caprese Sandwiches or Chicken Pita Wraps (instead of tzatziki).

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        Here are some of my expert tips for the best red wine vinaigrette recipe:

        • Emulsifying: While shaking all the ingredients in a mason jar is a simple approach, achieving a perfectly creamy red wine vinaigrette requires a bit more technique. When using Dijon mustard, it’s best to whisk the vinegar and mustard together first. Then, gradually drizzle in the oil while continuing to whisk constantly. This method allows the natural compounds in the mustard to effectively bind with both the water and oil, stabilizing the emulsion and preventing the dressing from separating.
        • Shake well before using: With that being said, the vinegar and oil will naturally separate as it sits over time, so it is best to give it a good shake or whisk before serving.
        • Serve at room temperature: The flavors and viscosity of the olive oil are best enjoyed at room temperature. If the salad dressing has been in the refrigerator for a while, take it out 5-10 minutes before using it in your recipe.
        • Olive oil red wine vinegar dressing ratio: After testing this recipe multiple times, we found the best ratio of oil to vinegar was 2:1 (½ cup olive oil to ¼ cup vinegar).
        Red wine vinegar oil salad dressing in a jar with a spoon on the side.

        FAQs

        Does red wine vinaigrette have alcohol?

        Yes, it does, but it contains a very tiny amount of alcohol. According to American Vinegar Works, during the production of red wine vinegar, bacteria eat away at the wine to convert it to vinegar, consuming most of the alcohol in the process. However, in the end, a small amount of alcohol might still remain.

        What is the difference between red wine vinaigrette and vinegar?

        Red wine vinaigrette is an emulsified dressing with olive oil, mustard, and additional seasonings like garlic and herbs. On the other hand, red wine vinegar is plain vinegar on its own.

        How long does red wine vinaigrette last in the fridge?

        Our homemade red wine vinegar salad dressing will keep for 1 week in the fridge when stored in an airtight container or mason jar with a tight-fitting lid.

        If you make this red wine vinegar oil salad dressing recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Red wine vinaigrette recipe with a spoon.
        Print

        Red Wine Vinaigrette Recipe

        This is an all-purpose red wine vinaigrette recipe that you can use as a salad dressing, drizzle for roasted or grilled veggies, marinade for meat (or tofu), and more. All you need is 5 minutes and 6 basic ingredients.
        Course Salad Dressing
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 167kcal

        Ingredients

        • ¼ cup red wine vinegar
        • ½ cup olive oil
        • 1 clove garlic grated or pressed
        • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
        • 1 teaspoon honey
        • 1 teaspoon fresh oregano finely chopped – I used ¼ teaspoon dried
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon fresh ground black pepper

        Instructions

        • In a small bowl (or a mason jar), whisk the red wine vinegar, garlic, Dijon mustard, honey, oregano, kosher salt, and pepper until combined.
        • While still whisking, slowly add the olive oil and continue whisking until fully incorporated*.
        • Taste for seasoning and adjust as needed before using it in your recipe.

        Notes

        • Yields: This red wine vinaigrette dressing recipe makes ¾ cups and is ideal for six servings, each serving around two tablespoons.
        • Make it in a jar: While I think whisking oil into the red vinegar and mustard mixture produces the most creamy dressing, you can also put everything in a mason jar, cover it tightly with the lid and shake vigorously.
        • Storage: You can store your vinaigrette in a mason jar (or an airtight container) for up to one week. The olive oil will naturally solidify in the refrigerator, so give it a good stir or whisk before serving.
        • Freeze: Freeze the dressing in a freezer-safe container for up to 1 month. Thaw to room temperature on the kitchen counter.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 167kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.1g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Sodium: 398mg | Potassium: 12mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 6IU | Vitamin C: 0.2mg | Calcium: 8mg | Iron: 0.3mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/red-wine-vinaigrette/feed/ 7
        Harissa Vinaigrette https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-vinaigrette/ https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-vinaigrette/#comments Tue, 09 Jul 2024 22:26:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=76802 In this simple guide, I’ll teach you how to make a restaurant-quality harissa vinaigrette dressing, including preparation tips, tasty uses,…]]>

        In this simple guide, I’ll teach you how to make a restaurant-quality harissa vinaigrette dressing, including preparation tips, tasty uses, and storage guides.

        Cava copycat hot harissa vinaigrette in a glass jar with a spoon.

        What is Harissa Dressing Made Of?

        The best way to capture the bright flavors of CAVA’s hot harissa vinaigrette is by using the right ingredients—fresh, flavorful, and already in your pantry!

        Ingredients for the recipe in small bowls from the top view.
        • Olive oil: Though a little more expensive, high-quality extra virgin olive oil is excellent for vinaigrettes due to its richness and depth. (Remember: Olive oil plays a big part in vinaigrette recipes!) Still, any olive oil will work as long as you like its flavor.
        • Lemon juice or vinegar: I recommend using fresh lemon juice due to its bright, citrusy overtones. However, if you want sharper, more acidic notes in your harissa vinaigrette, you can use red wine vinegar or white wine vinegar instead.
        • Harissa: This recipe works with both harissa sauce (or paste) and harissa powder. You can also make harissa paste from powder. Regardless of your choice, I suggest making them from scratch due to their more vibrant, fresh, and customizable flavors. However, you can also purchase store-bought versions for simpler meal prep. In particular, I love brands like NY Shuk, Mina, and Whole Foods, though you should be able to find more harissa products in the “international” or “ethnic” sections of local grocery stores.
        • Honey: Honey is the key to giving harissa salad dressing a beautiful balance of “heat and sweet,” though you may also use maple syrup or agave syrup for a vegan version.
        • Garlic: Be sure to grate or press your fresh garlic before adding it to your recipe. Otherwise, the garlic won’t properly infuse the dressing with its flavors.
        • Seasoning: Kosher salt and ground black pepper are all that’s necessary to bring out the savory tones of this all-natural harissa vinaigrette recipe.

        Optional Add-Ins

        How you customize your harissa salad dressing depends on your brand of harissa. Some store-bought brands—like Trader Joe’s—tend to have a hotter flavor profile, while others—like Whole Foods—are a little milder. 

        In short, taste your harissa sauce and consider your final dish before adjusting your recipe!

        • Spicier: Want to kick up the heat of this CAVA copycat recipe? Try adding a pinch of cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes to your mix. Depending on the brand of harissa you are using, you can also add cumin for an added layer of warmth. If you are making it from scratch following our recipe, I do not recommend adding more, but of course, you can give your harissa a taste and decide for yourself.
        • Herbal flavors: If you prefer an earthier, lighter taste in your harissa dressing, try adding a shake of dried oregano or dried mint to your recipe.
        • Greek yogurt: Though not traditional, you can make a creamy harissa dressing by adding Greek yogurt to your recipe. Not only does this ingredient lend the mixture a nice tang, but it’s also a great way to lighten up its flavor profile for those who want a not-too-spicy harissa vinaigrette.

        How to Make Harissa Vinaigrette?

        You can make hot harissa vinaigrette in three simple steps, bringing spicy, Middle Eastern flavors to any meal. And the best part, you ask? It takes less than 5 minutes to make.

        A collage of images showing how to make harissa vinaigrette.
        1. Add the ingredients: Place the olive oil, lemon juice, harissa sauce (or powder), honey, garlic, kosher salt, and black pepper to a mason jar with a tight-fitting lid.
        2. Mix: Cover the jar and shake it for 30 seconds or until emulsified. Taste for seasoning and adjust as necessary.
        3. Serve or store: Refrigerate the vinaigrette or use it immediately in your desired recipe. Be sure to shake the mixture after storage to ensure a well-integrated mixture.

        How to Store, Freeze, and Thaw?

        • Store: You can store your harissa vinaigrette in an airtight container or glass jar in the refrigerator for up to one week. Remember to shake the mixture well before using it to help reintegrate any separated ingredients.
        • Freeze: For extra-long storage, freeze this recipe in a freezer-safe, airtight container for up to one month. Leave enough room in your chosen container for the vinaigrette to expand.
        • Thaw: To thaw your frozen harissa dressing, put it in the refrigerator overnight.

        How to Use Harissa Vinaigrette?

        Lighter and tangier than traditional harissa, this delicious condiment works pretty much anywhere you want that hot harissa taste. Below are a few of my favorite ways to add a bold flavor to any weekday menu.

        • Salad dressing: No one can resist a classic. Using harissa dressing for salad is a no-brainer, especially since it strikes such a tasty balance with the crispness of leafy green salads. This vinaigrette pairs impeccably with the refreshing cucumber and tomatoes in my Spring Mix Salad. Or, you can balance this spicy condiment with the rich creaminess of my Butter Lettuce Salad or Massaged Kale Salad with Avocado—especially when topped with a crumble of feta cheese.
        • Grain bowls: Want to learn how to make CAVA at home? Grain bowls are a staple of this Mediterranean restaurant chain—a clear reason why I love using this copycat vinaigrette for dishes like my vegan Quinoa Power Bowl and gluten-free Quinoa Sweet Potato Bowl.
        • Sandwiches and wraps: This harissa vinaigrette doesn’t just work in bowls. It’s also a mouthwatering blend for sandwiches and wraps—whether you drizzle it over the spread or use it as a dipping sauce.
        • Roasted vegetables: Equal parts nutritious and flavorful, this easy vinaigrette makes the perfect addition to roasted veggies. Drizzle it over tender dishes like Baked Eggplant Slices, sweet Roasted Maple Carrots, and hearty Air Fried Red Potatoes, and you’ll never have a bland side dish again.
        • Roasted and grilled meats & seafood: You can lend any protein a delicious spice by serving this vinaigrette with dishes, such as my succulent Grilled Salmon, Steak Kabobs in Oven, and Baked Bone-In Chicken Breast. Use this dressing like your other go-to dips and serve it on the side, or use it as a drizzle for a well-infused smokiness.
        • Use it as a marinade: Out of all the CAVA dressing recipes, this is one of my favorites for meat marinades. Simply add ¼ cup of harissa vinaigrette to your favorite marinade recipe (especially my tangy Chicken Marinade with Yogurt, zesty Shrimp Marinade, and savory Turkey Tenderloin Marinade!) and add more as necessary.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        If you want the flavors of the authentic hot harissa vinaigrette, below are a few helpful tips for getting the best flavor, consistency, and use from this five-star dressing.

        • Powder vs. sauce: Though both will work, during our recipe testing, we thought the harissa sauce performed better when making this vinaigrette. Powder tends to sink at the bottom as it sits, while sauce blends better (depending on the brand you use, of course). If your only option is harissa powder, be sure to shake it vigorously before using it in your recipe.
        • Adjust seasoning and sweetness: Because this dressing recipe can be customized in many ways, you must taste it for seasoning. Consider, too, what kind of dish you plan to make, and adjust your dressing’s ingredient ratios to make the best match. For instance, you can make a sweet honey harissa vinaigrette by increasing the amount of honey you use.
        • Shake well before use: Letting your harissa dressing rest for 20 minutes is an easy way to help its flavors infuse and develop. However, as with any vinaigrette, this recipe’s ingredients tend to separate as it sits. Therefore, you must whisk or shake it well before using it.

        FAQs

        What is harissa dressing?

        Harissa dressing is a spicy, light vinaigrette popularized by the Mediterranean restaurant chain CAVA. This dressing gets its primary flavors from harissa—a chili-based condiment that originated in Tunisia. However, it also contains rich, citrusy notes from other ingredients like lemon juice and garlic.

        What is the difference between harissa sauce and harissa vinaigrette?

        Of course, both recipes boast a hot, smoky taste due to their use of chili peppers, spices, and herbs. However, harissa sauce is an ingredient in harissa vinaigrette, with a more concentrated flavor and thicker consistency. The vinaigrette version is a thinner, lighter, and less intense mixture, as it has an olive oil base and other ingredients like lemon juice, vinegar, and honey.

        Other CAVA-Inspired Dressing Recipes

        If you make this hot harissa vinaigrette recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Harissa vinaigrette in a jar with a spoon.
        Print

        Harissa Vinaigrette Recipe

        Hot harissa vinaigrette is the ultimate condiment for anyone craving the spicy and smoky flavors of harissa. In just five minutes and with a handful of ingredients, you can take any dish—grain bowls, veggies, salads, and beyond—to the next level.
        Course Salad Dressing
        Cuisine Mediterranean, Middle Eastern
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 146kcal

        Ingredients

        • ¼ cup olive oil
        • 3 tablespoons lemon juice or red wine vinegar
        • 2 tablespoons harissa sauce or 1 tablespoon harissa powder
        • 1 tablespoon honey or maple syrup or agave nectar for a vegan option
        • 1 clove garlic grated or pressed
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground

        Instructions

        • Combine the olive oil, lemon juice, harissa sauce (or powder), honey, garlic, kosher salt, and pepper in a mason jar.
        • Cover and shake until emulsified, about 30 seconds. Adjust seasoning to your desired taste.
        • Use right away or store in the fridge until ready to use. Be sure to shake before serving.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 1/2 cup harissa vinaigrette. I listed 4 servings because you can use it in a salad or grain bowl recipe that serves 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Storage: Place leftovers in a mason jar (or any other airtight container) and keep them in the fridge for up to a week.
        • Freeze: You can freeze this dressing in a freezer-safe container for up to a month. Thaw it in the fridge overnight.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 146kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 0.3g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 392mg | Potassium: 47mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 52IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 5mg | Iron: 0.2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-vinaigrette/feed/ 4
        Elote Dip https://foolproofliving.com/elote-dip/ https://foolproofliving.com/elote-dip/#comments Mon, 01 Jul 2024 20:45:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=76149 Tender, flavorful, and fresh, corn appetizer recipes make a great addition to any savory meal. My Mexican Street Corn Salad…]]>

        Tender, flavorful, and fresh, corn appetizer recipes make a great addition to any savory meal. My Mexican Street Corn Salad strikes an irresistible balance between heat and tanginess, while Corn Black Bean Salad has all the garden-fresh, zingy undertones you could want in a side dish.

        Elote corn dip in a bowl garnished with lime with chips on the side.

        What is Elote Dip?

        Elote dip is a creamy, corn-based appetizer that gets its flavors from traditional Mexican street corn. This recipe’s original “street food version” starts by grilling corn on the cob and slathering it with a rich mixture of mayonnaise, sour cream, and lime juice. People then sprinkle it with ingredients like cilantro and chili powder to enhance its fresher, spicier notes.

        The “dip form” of this recipe takes all of the same ingredients and flavors, transforming it into a scoopable appetizer—often served with a side of tortilla chips, as a condiment for tacos, or on top of other savory mains.

        Ingredients You’ll Need

        Wondering why this recipe for elote dip is so irresistible? With only a few simple ingredients, this dish packs all the creamy, fresh, and spicy flavors you love in Mexican street food.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Corn: Nearly any type of corn will work in this elote dip recipe. When fresh sweet corn is in season in the summer, I prefer buying it fresh. However, you can also make this dish with canned or frozen corn if it is out-of-season (like when serving it as a part of your Cinco de Mayo spread) or if you want to simplify your meal prep. 
        • Olive oil: We used extra virgin olive oil because of its milder flavor, but you can also use an equal amount of unsalted butter.
        • Fresh garlic cloves: To ensure an even infusion of flavor, finely mince or press your garlic before adding it to your recipe.
        • Mayonnaise: Most recipes for this sweet corn dip use mayo as the base when making the creamy elote dressing. However, if you want a more decadent option, you can also make this Mexican corn dip with cream cheese instead, though your recipe will likely have a thicker consistency.
        • Sour cream: Sour cream is vital to this recipe’s cool tanginess. However, you can make a more authentic elote dip recipe with Mexican crema or use plain Greek yogurt for a lighter version.
        • Fresh lime juice and zest
        • Seasonings: I opted for a basic mix of kosher salt, ground pepper, and chili powder to season my elote dip. However, you can use an authentic Mexican Tajin seasoning or Trader Joe’s Everything But the Elote Seasoning Blend (affiliate link) for a zestier, more robust chili taste. And if you like your dip spicier, a pinch of cayenne pepper would be a welcome addition.
        • Red onion: If you prefer a milder “onion” flavor, use green onions instead of red for this recipe.
        • Jalapeno: One fresh, finely chopped jalapeno is all you need to add fresh heat to this elote cheese dip. Though I prefer removing the seeds from my jalapenos before cutting, you can achieve a spicier blend by leaving some seeds in.
        • Cotija cheese or queso fresco: These two kinds of cheese are classic choices for this dip, but almost any Mexican cheese will work. Though not traditional, you can also use feta cheese, pepper jack cheese, or Parmesan cheese if you’re in a pinch.
        • Cilantro: Fresh, chopped cilantro is an easy way to give your dip a touch of freshness and color, but you can substitute it for parsley or omit it altogether if preferred.

        How to Make Street Corn Dip?

        This easy elote dip comes together in five simple steps, making it a boon for first-time cooks and expert chefs alike.

        A collage of images showing how to make elote dip.
        1. Saute the corn: Pour the olive oil into a large, heavy-bottom skillet and heat over medium-high heat. Add the sweet corn kernels and, stirring frequently, saute until they turn a light golden color (7-10 minutes). Note: You may need to saute your corn in two batches to ensure you don’t overcrowd the skillet. Then, add the garlic to the pan and saute for 30 seconds, stirring constantly. Remove the garlic-corn mixture from the skillet, set it aside, and let it cool for 10-15 minutes.
        2. Make the dressing: Add the mayonnaise, sour cream, lime juice, lime zest, chili powder, kosher salt, and ground pepper to a large mixing bowl. Whisk the ingredients until thoroughly combined.
        3. Assemble the dip: Add the cooled corn, red onion, jalapeno, and cilantro to the bowl with the dressing. Toss to combine, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary.
        4. Serve: Transfer the dip to a serving bowl, garnish with cotija cheese, and serve with a side of your favorite chips.

        How to Serve this Mexican Street Corn Dip Recipe?

        One of the best parts about this easy Mexican street corn dip is its versatility. It’s good enough to eat with a spoon, but you can also pair it with countless other dishes to make a flavorful, filling meal.

        • Chips on the side: An undeniable crowd-pleaser, this elote chip dip makes the perfect party appetizer when served alongside a bowl of tortilla chips. (Warning: Don’t expect to have any leftovers!)
        • Tacos and burritos: This creamy elote dip tastes amazing with taco recipes, balancing their savory flavor with a bright, smooth tang. In particular, I love serving it with juicy Flank Steak Tacos, smoky Brisket Tacos, and vegan Black Bean Quinoa Tacos. You can even use this easy dip as a burrito topping for an equally delicious Mexican meal.
        • Vegetable platter: Another delectable way to enjoy this roasted street corn dip is one of the healthiest. Serve this creamy dish alongside a platter of fresh veggies—especially bell peppers, carrot sticks, and cherry tomatoes—for an equally delicious and colorful snack platter.
        • Salads and taco bowls: This recipe is more than a tasty dip. When mixed into taco bowls and salads, it also makes a delicious elote salsa.
        • Grilled seafood: In the mood for a light, seaside menu? This easy elote corn makes an incredible topping for dozens of fresh fish mains, whether you’re craving savory-sweet Grilled Mahi Mahi, umami-rich Grilled Sockeye Salmon, or smoky Grilled Shrimp.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        It’s a cinch to make the best Mexican street corn dip recipe with these tasty tips. Below, you’ll find out how to prepare this dish just as you like—with maximum flavor and zero hassle.

        • Other ways to cook corn: In the recipe below, I sauteed my corn on the cob because it’s an easy way to achieve rich, tender flavors. However, you can also lend your elotes dip bolder, smokier notes by cooking your corn on the grill or in the oven. Alternatively, you can try Air Fryer Corn on the Cob or cook it in the microwave for a quick, indoor option.
        • Can be served warm, room temperature, or cold: You can serve this dish at any temperature you prefer. When served right away while the corn is still warm, hot elote dip is delicious with chips. Equally, after resting in the fridge for a few hours, its cold version makes a great appetizer.
        • It gets better as it sits: If you have time, I highly recommend making this recipe a day in advance and storing it in the fridge until it’s ready to eat. Just be sure to add fresh, delicate ingredients (like cilantro and cheese) right before serving to maintain their texture and taste.
        Person serving a chip with Mexican elote dip.

        You Might Also Like:

        If you are a fan of the classic elote recipe and flavors, you might also like:

        If you make this Elote Dip recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Corn elote dip in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Elote Dip Recipe

        Tangy, creamy, and smoky, this elote street corn dip will immediately add fresh, Mexican flavor to any menu. The best part is that you can make this authentic dish in less than 30 minutes with only a handful of ingredients!
        Course Appetizer, Condiment – Dip
        Cuisine Mexican Cuisine
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 25 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 196kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Corn

        • 1 tablespoon olive oil
        • 6 ears of corn husks remove and kernels cut from the cob*, about 4-5 cups
        • 2 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed

        For The Creamy Elote Dressing:

        • 3 tablespoons mayonnaise
        • 3 tablespoons sour cream or Greek yogurt or Mexican crema
        • 3 tablespoons lime juice
        • 1 teaspoon lime zest
        • ½ teaspoon chili powder
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

        For The Dip:

        • ¼ cup red onion or green onions finely chopped
        • 1 jalapeno seeded and finely chopped
        • ½ cup crumbled cotija cheese or queso fresco
        • cup fresh cilantro chopped

        Instructions

        • To cook the corn: In a large heavy-bottom skillet (such a cast iron skillet), heat olive oil over medium-high heat. Add the corn kernels and saute for 7-10 minutes, stirring frequently until lightly golden. Do not overcrowd the skillet. Saute in 2 batches if needed. Add the garlic and saute, stirring constantly, for 30 seconds. Remove from the heat and set aside to cool for 5-10 minutes.
        • To make the dressing: Whisk together the mayonnaise, sour cream, lime juice, lime zest, chili powder, kosher salt, and black pepper in a large bowl (big enough to mix the whole dip) until thoroughly combined.
        • To assemble: Add the now-cooled corn, onion, jalapeno, cotija cheese, and cilantro to the bowl and toss to combine. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
        • Transfer to a serving bowl and garnish with more cilantro. Serve with your favorite chips on the side.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 4 cups of dip that is ideal for serving 6 people as an appetizer. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Corn: During the summer months, I prefer using fresh sweet corn for this recipe. On the other hand, when corn is not in season, I use canned (and drained corn) or frozen corn kernels. If using frozen corn, there is no need to thaw it. Either way, you will need 4-5 cups of corn kernels to make this recipe.
        • Adding Salt: Be sure to taste your cheese before adding it to your Mexican street dip. Some varieties are saltier than others, so you might alter your seasoning depending on your cheese’s flavor profile. 
        • Adjust spiciness: My recipe for street taco dip is relatively mild, as I remove the seeds of my jalapenos before adding them to my mix. However, if you’re looking for an extra kick of heat, leave some seeds in or add a dash of your favorite hot sauce.
        • Storing leftovers: You can store this elote corn dip recipe in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. I don’t recommend freezing your dip, however, as the extreme temperatures will interfere with the dressing’s texture and taste.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 196kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 589mg | Potassium: 296mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 398IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 76mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/elote-dip/feed/ 1
        Mango Avocado Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mango-avocado-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mango-avocado-salad/#respond Sat, 29 Jun 2024 15:28:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=54258 Once you try a bite of this refreshing, vibrant salad, you’ll be adding avocado to all your summer fruit salads.…]]>

        Once you try a bite of this refreshing, vibrant salad, you’ll be adding avocado to all your summer fruit salads. While I think that creamy avocado and ripe mango are a match made in heaven, avocado is also the perfect addition to other fruit salads. Try this Peach Avocado Salad or Watermelon and Avocado Salad for a refreshing twist. Readers also love my Kale Avocado Salad or this Avocado Quinoa Salad for a more savory option. 

        And if you have some leftover mangoes, try our Pineapple Mango Salsa.

        Avocado Mango Salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

        Why You’ll Love This Mango Salad?

        I know you’ll love this mango and avocado salad as much as I do! Here’s why:

        • Quick, easy, and nutrient-dense: Healthy has never been easier! Throw this simple salad together in 15 minutes for your daily dose of essential fatty acids and vitamin-C
        • The ideal accompaniment to grilled favorites: This salad pairs perfectly with fish tacos, grilled seafood, meats, and other main dishes. Or, serve it as a mango salsa with your favorite tortilla chip as a quick appetizer! 
        • Bursting with refreshing summer flavor: Like our other summer salads, this fresh fruity salad is the perfect way to cool off on a hot summer day. 

        Ingredients for Avocado Mango Salad

        To make this mango salad with avocado, you’ll need two sets of simple ingredients. The dressing consists of a few well-loved, familiar pantry items and the salad consists of a handful of fresh produce from your local farmer’s market or grocery store. 

        Avocado mango dressing ingredients from the top view.

        For the chili lime dressing, you will need:

        • Extra virgin olive oil
        • Lime juice and lime zest
        • Fresh garlic cloves: Be sure to mince it finely.
        • Spices & seasonings: Ground cumin, chili powder, and kosher salt.
        • Sweetener: You can use honey or maple syrup interchangeably in this mango avocado salad dressing.
        Mango salad ingredients from the top view.

        To make the recipe for mango salad, gather:

        • Avocados: Use ripe but firm avocados. This way, they won’t get mushy when cut into cubes and incorporated into the salad.
        • Mangoes: I recommend using juicy ripened mangoes for this recipe. I usually buy them a few days before I plan to make it and keep them on the counter to ripen.
        • Red Onion: You need only a small, thinly sliced red onion. For a lighter taste, you can also use green onions.
        • Jalapeno peppers: Deseed and chop your peppers finely. If you prefer your mango salad to be spicy, you can incorporate some of the seeds into the salad. Alternatively, you can also use a red bell pepper.
        • Fresh cilantro: I know that Mango Salad with cilantro might not be everybody’s cup of tea. If that is you, feel free to swap it with other fresh herbs like parsley or mint to pack an aromatic punch. 

        Substitutions and Possible Additions

        • Dressing: If a spicy mango avocado salad isn’t your thing, try this Balsamic Lemon Dressing for a tangy, balsamic vinegar-based salad addition with fresh lemon juice.
        • Nuts & Seeds: For a salty crunch that beautifully balances the sweetness of the mango, try adding a handful of pumpkin seeds or chopped walnuts. 
        • Other produce: Create endless salad varieties with any fresh summer produce you have on hand. Turn this recipe into a Mango Avocado Tomato Salad by tossing in a cup of cherry tomatoes, or throw in a cup of diced English cucumber for some extra crunch. 
        • Salad greens: To turn this into a green salad with mango and avocado, add spring mix, butter lettuce, arugula, or any of your favorite leafy greens. 
        • Cheese: Top it off with 1/2 cup of cotija cheese, feta or even goat cheese for some salty umami flavor.
        • Add in some protein: Looking for a good protein source to make this salad more filling? Try adding a few grilled or baked chicken breasts for a delicious copycat version of the fan-favorite Cheesecake Factory salad with mango and avocado. Or if you have the grill on, top it off with grilled shrimp on top.

        How to Make Mango Salad?

        With a little bit of chopping and a gentle toss of the ingredients, this delicious avo mango salad comes together in the blink of an eye and is sure to impress at any summer gathering. Simply:

        Person showing how to make mango avocado salad in a collage of images.
        1. Make the dressing: Add all ingredients into a mason jar. Screw on the lid tightly and shake until thoroughly combined. 
        2. Assemble the salad: Grab a large bowl and add in your cubed avocado, chunks of fresh mango, sliced red onion, chopped jalapeño (optional), and freshly chopped cilantro. 
        3. Add the dressing: Drizzle the dressing over the salad and toss it gently until just combined. 
        4. Season: Season to taste with salt and black pepper, if necessary. Enjoy!

        How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers

        • Dressing: To make this recipe come together quickly, you can make the dressing a day in advance. Simply combine all ingredients in a mason jar and place in the fridge. 
        • Prep: Avocado is difficult to prep ahead of time because it can quickly turn an unappealing brown color once cut. I recommend chopping up the ripe avocado and the rest of the ingredients as soon as you’re ready to assemble the salad. You can, however, prep the mango and jalapeño in advance, but be sure to store them in an airtight container in the fridge. 
        • Storage: You can store the salad in an airtight container in the fridge and enjoy it for up to two days. 

        What to Serve it With?

        A salad this versatile, refreshing, and vibrant is sure to brighten up your favorite summer main dish. Here are some serving suggestions:

        • Serve it as a great addition to taco night: Looking for ways to amp up your Taco Tuesday? Impress your family by pairing this salad with Brisket Tacos, Flank Steak Tacos, Black Bean Quinoa Tacos, Blackened Mahi Mahi, or your favorite fish tacos. 
        • Pair it with your favorite grilled seafood: A seafood dish isn’t complete without a refreshing salad! Serve the salad on the side with some of my seafood favorites, such as Grilled Salmon, Shrimp Kabobs, or Grilled Mahi Mahi
        • With chips on the side: Serve the salad with tortilla chips, pita chips, or crackers for a refreshing and flavorful dip perfect for entertaining.
        Salad with mango and avocado in a bowl from the front view.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        While this recipe for avocado and mango salad is super simple and easy, follow these helpful tips to achieve maximum results and flavor!

        • Use ripe fruit: Avocados and mangoes have the best texture and flavor when they’re ripe. Also, it is best if you cut them in bite-sized pieces.
        • Prevent Browning: To prevent the avocado from browning, cut it right before incorporating it into the salad and drizzle it with the lime-based dressing immediately. This not only preserves the color but also enhances the flavor.
        • Ensure your prepped fruit is similar in size: Make sure every bite of your salad is consistent by cutting your mango and avocado into equal-sized cubes or chunks. 
        • Toss gently: Avocado tends to turn mushy if over-handled, so be sure to toss your salad gently when combining.

        FAQs

        How do you know if a mango is ripe?

        To tell whether a mango is ripe, use your thumb to apply pressure to the skin gently. If it feels soft or gives slightly, it’s ready! If you’re not quite sure, locate the fruit’s stem and give it a whiff. If it gives off a sweet, fruity aroma, it’s ripe. 

        Is mango skin edible?

        Mango skin is edible, and studies show that the skin contains a variety of health and nutritional benefits. However, keep in mind that eating mango skin may cause allergic reactions or lead to ingesting pesticides or harmful chemicals. The skin is also generally bitter and tough to chew.

        Can you eat this like a mango avocado salsa?

        You sure can. If you prefer it as salsa, I recommend cutting the mango and avocado into smaller cubes so that you can easily scoop them out with a tortilla chip.

        Other Fruit Salads You Might Also Like

        If you loved this mango summer salad, here are some other fruity salad recipes you need to try!

        If you try this delicious Summer Mango Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        mango salad with avocado in a bowl from the top view
        Print

        Mango Avocado Salad Recipe

        This Mango Avocado Salad recipe is made with fresh mango, ripe avocados, and chili lime dressing. Ready in 15 minutes, it is the perfect side dish for the grilling season.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine Mexican/Southwestern
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 15 minutes
        Servings 4 people
        Calories 358kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Chili Lime Vinaigrette:

        • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
        • 1 teaspoon of lime zest
        • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
        • 1 clove garlic minced
        • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
        • ½ teaspoon chili powder
        • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon maple syrup/honey

        For The Salad:

        • 2 ripe avocados cut into cubes
        • 2 ripe mangos cut into 1-inch chunks
        • ½ cup red onion thinly sliced – from a small red onion
        • 1 small jalapeno pepper seeded and chopped (optional)
        • ½ cup chopped fresh cilantro

        Instructions

        • Make the dressing by combining everything in a mason jar. Close the lid tightly and give it a shake until all ingredients are thoroughly mixed.
        • Place the cubed avocados, mango chunks, red onion slices, jalapeno, and cilantro in a salad bowl.
        • Drizzle it with the dressing and give it a toss to combine.
        • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: The finished salad is about 4 cups with 1 cup per serving.
        • Storage: You can store the salad in an airtight container in the fridge and enjoy it for up to two days.
        • Cut them in similar bite-size chunks: For best results, cut avocado and mango cubes in similar sizes.
        • Toss gently: Avocado tends to turn mushy if over-handled, so be sure to toss your salad gently when combining. 

        Nutrition

        Calories: 358kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Sodium: 452mg | Potassium: 743mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 1528IU | Vitamin C: 59mg | Calcium: 38mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/mango-avocado-salad/feed/ 0
        Mediterranean Nachos https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-greek-nachos/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-greek-nachos/#comments Thu, 20 Jun 2024 13:13:56 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=14175 You know those cravings when you want to munch on something extra delicious? Well, say hello to Mediterranean nachos. They’re…]]>

        You know those cravings when you want to munch on something extra delicious? Well, say hello to Mediterranean nachos. They’re the perfect combination of fresh ingredients and crispy pita chips, and they’ll keep you coming back for more.

        Vegan Greek nachos on a plate from the top view.

        Ingredients You’ll Need

        Mediterranean-style nachos require a mix of fresh produce and pantry staples. While the topping has a medley of fresh vegetables, you can simplify it even more with Greek Cucumber Salad. But to make it as I did here, we will need:

        Pita chips and oil for the base of the recipe.

        For The Pita Chips:

        • Pita: I used whole wheat pita, but you can use regular pita if that is all that’s available at the grocery store. Alternatively, you can make our homemade pita recipe using a DIY approach. If you are short on time, store-bought baked pita chips can be used in a pinch.
        • Olive Oil: Use extra virgin olive oil for the most fruity flavor.
        • Kosher Salt
        Topping ingredients for Greek nachos.

        For The Topping:

        • Chickpeas: Chickpeas (or garbanzo beans) give it that Mediterranean style, but you can also use white cannellini beans or navy beans.
        • Tomatoes: Small and juicy cherry tomatoes provide both acidity and sweetness. Grape tomatoes, Roma tomatoes, or heirloom tomatoes all work too.
        • Cucumbers: I love small, thin-skinned Persian cucumbers, which you don’t need to peel. If you are using regular cucumbers or English cucumbers, be sure to peel and remove the watery seeds.
        • Green Onions: Mild scallions give it a savory bite. Red onion is another good option.
        • Olives: Greek Kalamata olives provide a delicious briny bite. Black olives or green olives will also work, or a mix of all three for a more complex flavor. Not a fan of olives? Omit them altogether.
        • Lemon Juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice offers the best citrus flavor. We will need it for the topping and the tahini sauce.
        • Garlic: Garlic gives the salad an extra bite. Use one fresh garlic clove for the best flavor.
        • Seasonings: Kosher salt and black pepper are all we need, just make sure to season the pita chips, salad topping, and tahini sauce and taste as you go.
        Tahini dressing for nachos.

        For The Herbed Tahini Sauce:

        • Fresh Herbs: Fresh parsley keeps it simple, but you can amp up the flavor even more with fresh dill, fresh basil, or fresh mint. Don’t have any fresh herbs on hand? Make this Lemon Tahini Sauce instead.
        • Tahini: Look for a runny tahini, and make sure to mix it well before using.
        • Fresh Garlic
        • Water: Water helps thin out the tahini dressing to the right consistency. Start with 2 tablespoons, then add more water, one tablespoon at a time, until a dressing-like consistency is reached.

        Optional Add-Ins

        For a few twists and different variations, add one, two, or all of the following:

        How to Make Mediterranean Nachos?

        If you think that you can not make nachos without cheese, think again! Here are the step-by-step instructions and photos to make this Greek nachos recipe:

        1. Prep: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper.
        Steps showing how to prep Mediterranean nachos pita bread and topping.
        1. Prepare pita: Brush both sides of the pita bread lightly with olive oil. Stack them on top of each other and cut them into 8 triangles. If it is hard to cut it, you can do it in two batches.
        2. Bake pita chips: Spread the pita wedges into one single layer on the prepared sheet pan. Season with salt. Bake for 9-10 minutes, flipping halfway through. Remove from the oven and set aside while you prepare the topping.
        3. Make the topping: In a medium bowl, combine chickpeas, tomatoes, cucumber, green onions, olives, parsley, lemon juice, garlic, olive oil, salt, and pepper. Stir to combine.
        A collage of images showing how to make the tahini dressing and assemble the nachos.
        1. Make the tahini sauce: In the bowl of a food processor with the blade attachment, add the tahini, lemon juice, garlic, parsley, water, and salt. Process until smooth and creamy. If the sauce is too thick, add water, one tablespoon at a time.
        2. Assemble nachos: Spread the toasted pita chips on a large platter. With a slotted spoon, scoop the tomato and cucumber mixture over the pita bread. Drizzle it with the tahini sauce. Garnish with more parsley, if desired. Enjoy!
        Vegan Turkish nachos drizzled with tahini dressing from the top view.

        FAQs

        Can Mediterranean nachos be prepared ahead of time?

        If you want to get ahead, components of the nachos can be prepared and stored separately. Dice the vegetables and make the tahini sauce up to 3 days in advance. Store all components separately. I recommend baking the pita chips right before assembling the nachos. 

        How do you layer nachos so they don’t get soggy?

        Start with a base of thick pita chips and layer evenly so that the toppings and sauce are evenly distributed. Also, use a slotted spoon for the salad topping, as we don’t want the extra juices.

        Similar Appetizer / Party Food You Might Like:

        Reprinted (with minimal changes) from the Love Real Food by Kathryne Taylor, Vegan Nachos Recipe by permission of Rodale Books.

        Mediterranean Nachos recipe on a plate drizzled with herbed tahini sauce.
        Print

        Mediterranean Nachos Recipe

        This Mediterranean Nachos recipe is a 20-minute vegan appetizer made by layering toasted pita chips with a quick tomato chickpea salad. Drizzled with homemade herbed tahini dressing, this is an easy recipe that is not only delicious but also visually impressive.
        Course Appetizer
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Cook Time 9 minutes
        Total Time 19 minutes
        Servings 6 Servings
        Calories 246kcal

        Ingredients

        For the toasted pita chips:

        • 4 whole wheat pitas 7-inch
        • 2 tablespoons olive oil
        • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

        For The Toppings:

        • 1 can chickpeas drained and rinsed (15-ounce can)
        • 1 cup cherry tomatoes sliced
        • 1 Persian cucumber peeled (or not peeled), sliced thinly or half of an English cucumber
        • 2 stalks green onions chopped
        • ¼ cup black olives pitted and sliced (such as Kalamata olives)
        • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped
        • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
        • 1 garlic clove minced
        • 1 tablespoon olive oil
        • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        For The Herbed Tahini Sauce:

        • cup tahini shaken well
        • ¼ cup lemon juice
        • 1 garlic clove minced
        • ¼ cup fresh parsley leaves plus more as garnish
        • 2 tablespoons water plus more as needed
        • ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt

        Instructions

        • To make the pita chips, preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
        • Brush both sides of the pita bread lightly with olive oil. Stack them on top of each other and cut them into 8 small wedges. If it is hard to cut them at the same time, you can do it in two batches.
        • Spread the pita wedges in an even layer on the prepared sheet pan and sprinkle them with salt. Bake for 9-10 minutes, flipping halfway through. You want them to be crispy, but they burn quickly, so keep a close eye on them as they bake. Remove them from the oven and set aside to cool for a few minutes.
        • Meanwhile, prepare the topping. In a medium bowl, combine chickpeas, tomatoes, cucumber, green onions, olives, parsley, lemon juice, garlic, olive oil, salt, and pepper. Stir to combine and set aside.
        • To make the herbed tahini sauce, place the tahini, lemon juice, garlic, parsley, water, and salt in the bowl of a food processor fitted with the blade attachment. Blend* until smooth. It should have a creamy consistency, so if needed, add more water in one-tablespoon increments.
        • To assemble: Spread the toasted pita chips on a large plate in an even layer. Using a slotted spoon, scoop the tomato and cucumber mixture over the pita bread. Drizzle it with the tahini sauce.
        • Garnish with more parsley, if desired. Serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 8-10 (loose) cups of nachos which is ideal for serving 6 people in appetizer portions. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Not a fan of olives? You can omit them.
        • No food processor?* You can make the tahini sauce by hand by finely chopping the parsley and vigorously whisking it until smooth.
        • Evenly distribute all the toppings: Make sure the toppings are scattered throughout the entire layer of pita chips. This way, each bite is just as delicious as the last.
        • Storage: While the nachos are best enjoyed the moment they are made, leftovers can be stored in an airtight container for an additional day. 

        Nutrition

        Calories: 246kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 749mg | Potassium: 290mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 458IU | Vitamin C: 19mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-greek-nachos/feed/ 15
        Turkish Green Beans https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-style-green-beans/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-style-green-beans/#comments Wed, 19 Jun 2024 13:57:49 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=6266 There is a classification of recipes in Turkish cuisine called zeytinyağlı, which translates as “dishes braised in olive oil”. Simply…]]>

        There is a classification of recipes in Turkish cuisine called zeytinyağlı, which translates as “dishes braised in olive oil”. Simply put, it is seasonal vegetables like green beans, zucchini, or leeks are cooked in a good amount of olive oil along with summer tomatoes and onion and served at room temperature when their flavor is most prominent.

        This Turkish beans recipe is essentially stewed string beans cooked in a warm skillet until soft, juicy, and melt-in-your-mouth tender. The result is very satisfactory as the low and slow cooking time produces super flavorful beans.

        Turkish stewed green beans drizzled with yogurt sauce in a bowl.

        I know many people enjoy making classic green bean dishes like Air Fryer Green Beans and Garlic Butter Green Beans, but I hope you give this version a try.

        Ingredients You’ll Need

        Turkish style braised green beans require just a handful of simple ingredients. We will need the following:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.
        • Fresh Green Beans: I used regular green beans you can easily find at the grocery store. However, the most popular green beans in Turkey are runner beans (çalı fasulye) and romano beans or flat beans (Ayşekadın fasulye). If you are lucky, you may be able to spot them at your local farmer’s market during the summer months. But you can use any green bean, including long beans, string beans, or Haricots Verts (French beans), in this recipe.
        • Olive Oil: Use extra virgin olive oil for a rich, fruity flavor.
        • Onion: Diced onion adds a delicious savory flavor. Feel free to replace the onion with washed and diced leeks instead.
        • Tomato Paste: This is optional, but tomato paste adds a depth of flavor, and it’s how my mom always made them.
        • Garlic: Fresh garlic cloves give these string beans an extra punchy bite.
        • Tomatoes: I used canned diced tomatoes with their own juices, which is why this recipe doesn’t include any water. However, if you are using fresh tomatoes (about 2 medium-sized tomatoes), add about ¼ cup water.
        • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper keeps the green beans front and center.
        • Sugar: Do not skip the sugar. This is the secret ingredient that brightens all the flavors and balances the bitterness in the vegetables.
        • Fresh Herbs: Fresh dill is classic, but fresh mint or parsley can be used instead.
        • Lemon Juice: A squeeze of lemon juice right before serving is optional but a welcome addition to brighten up the dish.

        Optional Add-Ins

        • Meat: If you prefer more of a warm one-pot summer meal, you can brown ½ pound ground beef along with the onion and follow the rest of the recipe as written. Alternatively, you can use stew meat. If you go in that direction, be sure to dry the meat thoroughly, season it with salt and pepper, and sear it in the pot using a few tablespoons of olive oil until lightly browned but not fully cooked, 7-8 minutes. Remove onto a platter and follow the recipe as written. Add the browned stew meat back in after adding the green beans, and cook as directed.
        • Beans: It is not traditional, but you can toss in a can of drained and rinsed chickpeas (garbanzo beans) or white beans for an extra dose of plant protein.
        • Spices: You can add additional spices like cumin, red pepper flakes, Aleppo pepper, or paprika.
        • Cinnamon: Some variations of this Turkish bean dish include cinnamon, about ¼ teaspoon or so. My mom never added cinnamon, but I think a small amount would be a welcome addition.
        • Cheese: There is a similar recipe in Greece called fasolakia, which is often served with salty and tangy crumbles of feta cheese. We mostly serve it with a side of thick yogurt, but if you want to follow in the footsteps of the Greeks, you can crumble some feta on top.

        How to Make Turkish Green Beans?

        If you are ready to try something new, I can not imagine a better dish than this stewed green beans recipe. Luckily, it comes together in one pot in just a few easy steps. Simply:

        A collage of images showing how to make Turkish style green beans recipe.
        1. Saute onion: In a medium saute pan or heavy pot (such as a Dutch Oven), heat olive oil over medium-high heat until warm but not smoking. Add the onion, and cook, stirring occasionally, until softened, about 5-6 minutes.
        2. Add aromatics: Stir in the tomato paste and garlic and cook for 1 minute.
        3. Add tomatoes and green beans: Next, stir in the diced tomatoes, green beans, kosher salt, black pepper, and sugar. Give it a gentle stir to ensure that the green beans and tomatoes are evenly distributed.
        4. Cook low and slow: Cover and bring it to a boil, then reduce the heat to medium-low and simmer until the beans are softened but still tender, 35-45 minutes. Be sure to stir it a few times while cooking.
        Two images showing the finished dish.
        1. Garnish: Stir in the dill. Serve with yogurt and lemon wedges on the side.

        Serving Suggestions

        In Turkish tradition, braised green beans and accompanying vegetable dishes are served as a course themselves, before or after a meaty main dish. However, the rich and luxurious textures and flavors from this green bean dish can be served with any of the following:

        Turkish Green Beans served on an oval plate.

        FAQs

        What are Turkish green beans?

        Turkish green beans, also known as zeytinyağlı taze fasulye, are fresh green beans cooked in a tomato sauce made of tomatoes, onions, garlic, and olive oil and slow-simmered until tender.

        What type of green beans should I use?

        Fresh, tender green beans are ideal, but any variety will work, such as string beans, haricots verts, runner beans, or flat beans. For this recipe, avoid frozen and canned green beans.

        Is this dish vegan?

        Yes, Turkish green beans are naturally vegan and vegetarian as they are made with extra virgin olive oil, green beans, tomatoes, onions, garlic, fresh herbs, and seasonings.

        Other Mediterranean Recipes You Might Also Like

        If you try this Turkish Style Green Beans recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

        Turkish green beans on a plate garnished with dill.
        Print

        Turkish Green Beans Recipe

        This Turkish-style green beans recipe (Zeytinyagli Taze Fasulye) is a classic Turkish summer dish made by braising green beans with onions, tomatoes, and garlic in plenty of olive oil. It can be served as a side dish with meat or as a light meal by itself.
        Course Appetizer
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 45 minutes
        Total Time 1 hour
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 226kcal

        Ingredients

        • 5 tablespoons olive oil
        • 1 medium-sized onion chopped (~1 cup)
        • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
        • 2 cloves garlic minced
        • 1 cab diced tomatoes (15-ounce can) or 2 medium tomatoes cut into small cubes
        • 1 pound fresh green beans trimmed and cut in half
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • 1 tablespoon granulated sugar or cane sugar or coconut sugar
        • ¼ cup fresh dill or parsley

        For Serving (Optional)

        Instructions

        • Heat the oil in a medium-size saute pan or a heavy bottom pan (such as a Dutch oven) over medium-high heat.
        • Add the onion, and cook, stirring occasionally, until softened, 5-6 minutes.
        • Stir in the tomato paste and garlic and cook for another minute or so.
        • Add the diced tomatoes, green beans, kosher salt, black pepper, and sugar.
        • Give it a gentle stir to ensure that the green beans and tomatoes are evenly distributed in the pan. Put the lid on, bring it to a boil, turn the heat to medium-low, and cook until the beans are softened but still tender, 35-45 minutes. Be sure to stir it a few times during the cooking process.
        • Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary. Stir in the dill and serve with yogurt and lemon wedges on the side.

        Notes

        • Yields: This dish makes 6-7 cups of braised green beans, which is ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Preparing the green beans: We used fresh string beans from supermarkets. To prepare them for cooking, simply cut the stem ends off first, then cut them in half, making sure all the beans are roughly the same size. If you are lucky enough to find romano beans or flat beans, you will need to remove the string from the bean. First, snap one end off and pull it all the way down to remove the string. Then repeat on the other side.
        • Cooking times may vary: Keep in mind that the cooking duration may be different depending on the type of green beans you use. Start checking around 25-30 minutes. If they are still crisp, keep cooking until tender.
        • The best part of this recipe is that it stores well and can be made ahead making it ideal for your summer meal prep. Here are my best make-ahead and storage tips:
          • Make Ahead: The dish can be made up to 2 days in advance and stored, covered, in the fridge. They often taste better the next day. Simply remove from the refrigerator 30 – 45 minutes before serving.
          • Storage: Leftover green beans will keep for up to 4 days in an airtight container in the fridge. Enjoy them cold as a salad or at room temperature.
          • Reheat: If you prefer the green beans warm, reheat them in a skillet over medium heat until warm.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 226kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Sodium: 622mg | Potassium: 366mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 851IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 61mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-style-green-beans/feed/ 12
        Lemon Tahini Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-tahini-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-tahini-sauce/#comments Wed, 12 Jun 2024 14:53:52 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75894 Rich, smooth, and zesty, this tahini sauce recipe is an easy way to elevate any menu. Looking for more recipes…]]>

        Rich, smooth, and zesty, this tahini sauce recipe is an easy way to elevate any menu. Looking for more recipes with tahini? You’ll love my smoky, savory Baba Ganoush and creamy Hummus—perfect additions to a mezze platter, Mediterranean appetizer, or sandwich spread.

        A spoonful of lemon tahini sauce being drizzled in a jar.

        Lemon Tahini Sauce Ingredients

        This easy tahini sauce recipe requires only five simple ingredients. Below, you’ll discover everything you need to make the creamiest, most vibrant condiment in your cookbook.

        Ingredients for the sauce from the top view.
        • Tahini (aka sesame seed paste): High-quality tahini is essential when making this delicious sauce recipe. You should be able to find premade tahini paste in the Middle Eastern section of your local grocery store, or you can purchase it online (my favorite store-bought tahini is from Soom Foods!). Before using, stir or shake your tahini to avoid unwanted settling, and then store the rest in the refrigerator for up to one week.
        • Lemon juice: I always use fresh lemon juice in this recipe due to its rich, bright taste. However, you can also use store-bought lemon juice, depending on what you have on hand.
        • Garlic: I recommend using finely minced or pressed garlic to ensure its flavors distribute evenly throughout the mixture.
        • Salt
        • Water: Cold water is the key to adjusting this sauce’s consistency.

        Optional Add-Ins

        Turning this simple tahini sauce into a culinary masterpiece is easy with a few optional add-ins. Here are a few that we recommend:

        • Lemon herb tahini sauce: To create a more herbaceous blend, add ½ cups of fresh herbs, such as cilantro or parsley, to your tahini sauce. This variation has an extra-bright flavor and makes an incomparable addition to my vegan Mediterranean Nachos.
        • Seasonings: To make a flavored tahini sauce, add a pinch of other spices. For instance, you can make a turmeric tahini sauce by adding ¼ teaspoon of turmeric powder or play around with different flavors by adding ingredients like cumin, paprika, dill, or black pepper.
        • Sweet tahini cream sauce: Although it’s not a traditional ingredient, you can give this sauce a sweeter finish by adding a tablespoon of honey or maple syrup to the mix.
        • Dijon mustard: Add a teaspoon of Dijon mustard for a nice zing that complements the zesty flavors of this tahini garlic sauce.
        • Olive oil: Tahini paste provides a creamy consistency, but a teaspoon of olive oil can be added to mellow its robust flavor.

        How to Make Tahini Sauce

        There’s no need to stress when learning how to prepare this simple sauce. This iconic Middle Eastern recipe is a cinch, whether you’re a gourmet chef or a kitchen novice.

        A collage of images showing how to prepare tahini sauce.
        1. Mix the ingredients: Place the tahini, lemon juice, garlic, and salt into a small bowl. Whisk the ingredients to the best of your ability, knowing that the mixture will be thick.
        2. Add water: Pour the water into the bowl while still whisking until smooth. You may use more or less water to achieve your desired consistency.
        3. Serve: Taste the mixture for seasoning and add more if necessary. Store it in a mason jar in the refrigerator or use it right away.

        Tahini Sauce Uses

        When deciding what to make with tahini sauce, the options are endless. Below, I’ve listed my favorite uses, from light vegetable sides to hearty main dishes.

        • Dipping sauce: This tahini dip recipe is a must when serving mezze platters and veggie trays. Try serving it alongside a plate of fresh vegetables—like cucumber, carrots, and tomatoes—and you’ll never have to stress over party appetizers again.
        • Shawarma: Since they’re both packed with rich Middle Eastern taste, I love using tahini sauce for shawarma recipes, such as my spiced Chicken Shawarma and succulent Beef Shawarma. You can even use this classic Mediterranean tahini sauce for gyros—the Greek version of shawarma—or transform it into a tahini spread for a flavor-packed wrap or pita pocket. 
        • Grilled meat and fish: This easy recipe pairs beautifully with grilled meat and fish dishes. Try using this tahini sauce for roasted or grilled chicken, lamb, salmon, or your favorite white fish, and prepare for an explosion of earthy, zesty flavors.
        • Drizzle over roasted veggies: Roasted veggies taste out of this world with a drizzle of this lemon tahini recipe. In particular, this sauce makes a delectable addition to savory-sweet dishes like my Baked Butternut Squash Cubes, Roasted Eggplant, Roasted Cauliflower, and Roasted Butternut Squash and Sweet Potatoes.
        • Salads and grain bowls: Another great way to use this creamy sauce is in fresh salads and grain bowls. This sauce works exceptionally well when bringing out the zingy, garden-fresh taste of my Butternut Squash Tahini Salad and Sweet Potato Quinoa Bowl.
        • Falafel: Using sesame tahini sauce for falafel balls is a fantastic option to complement the dish’s herby, nutty taste.

        Aysegul’s Expert Tips

        Learning to make tahini sauce from scratch is easy. However, if you want to make the best tahini sauce, these top-notch tips will ensure your recipe is as creamy, flavorful, and rich as possible.

        • Stir tahini before using: Like other natural seed and nut butters, tahini tends to separate during storage, with its oils rising to the top and its solids sinking to the bottom. Therefore, just like you would do with peanut butter, it’s necessary to stir your tahini before adding it to your recipe.
        • Adjust the sauce’s consistency: One of the best ways to make this lemon garlic tahini sauce as versatile as possible is to adjust its consistency. Add more water to your mixture if you want a thinner tahini drizzle—similar to other creamy salad dressings—or use less liquid for a thicker, creamy tahini sauce.
        • Food processor: If you are making a large batch of this sauce, we recommend using a food processor (or a blender) to achieve the ultimate creamy consistency.
        • Resting time: If you have time, I suggest letting the sauce rest for a few minutes before serving. This way, all the ingredients will have time to mix, develop, and infuse the mixture.
        • Experiment with seasoning and add-ins: With so many uses for this easy lemon tahini sauce, I highly recommend playing around with its flavor and consistency to complement your main dish.

        FAQs

        What is tahini sauce made of?

        Traditional Mediterranean tahini sauce comes together with a few main ingredients: tahini (a creamy paste made from ground sesame seeds), lemon juice, salt, and water. However, there are many variations on this classic Middle Eastern condiment, including those that add extra flavors with fresh garlic, cumin, parsley, cilantro, and more.

        What does tahini sauce taste like?

        Tahini sauce has a deliciously complex flavor profile, making it an ideal condiment for countless dishes. Tangy, savory, earthy, and mildly bitter, this classic Middle Eastern sauce tastes as great alongside shawarma as it does with a bowl of greens.

        What does tahini sauce look like?

        Generally, tahini sesame sauce has a light tan color with a yellowish tint, depending on the amount of lemon juice or garlic added to the mixture. The sauce is also known for its smooth, creamy texture, though its thickness may vary from liquidity to a thicker, dip-like consistency, depending on the amount of water you add.

        Is tahini good for you?

        Though everything is good in moderation, tahini has many health benefits, including improving cardiovascular health, reducing cancer risk, and helping with inflammation.

        Other Sauce Recipes You Might Also Like:

        If you make your own Lemon Tahini Sauce following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        A spoon of lemon tahini sauce drizzling in a jar showing how creamy it is.
        Print

        Lemon Tahini Sauce Recipe

        This Lemon Tahini Sauce is perfect for salads, falafel, shawarma, and more! Ready in 5 minutes, this classic Middle Eastern condiment is creamy, nutty, and delicious.
        Course Condiment/Sauce
        Cuisine Middle Eastern
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 183kcal

        Ingredients

        • ½ cup tahini paste stirred well
        • ¼ cup lemon juice
        • 2 cloves garlic minced finely or pressed
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt more as needed
        • ¼ cup cold water more as needed

        Instructions

        • Place tahini, lemon juice, garlic, and salt in a bowl. Whisk (as much as you can) until combined. It will be thick, and that is normal.
        • Pour in the water and continue whisking until it is smooth. You can adjust the consistency by adding more (or less) water.
        • Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 2/3 cup tahini sauce, which is ideal for serving 4-6 people, depending on the dish you plan to use this recipe. The below nutritional values are per serving for 4 people.
        • Adjust consistency and seasoning: Use this recipe as a starting point and adjust consistency based on your preference or the recipe you plan on pairing it with. You can make it thinner by adding more water and vice versa.
        • Storing, freezing, and thawing the leftover sauce: Garlic lemon tahini sauce is the perfect condiment for anyone who enjoys no-fuss meal prep. Here is how I store leftovers:
          • Storing: Transfer the prepared tahini sauce to an airtight container or tightly sealed mason jar and store it in the refrigerator for up to one week. Keep in mind that this sauce tends to separate and thicken during storage, so you might have to whisk a little cold water into the mixture before serving.
          • Freezing: Technically, you can freeze tahini sauce, although extreme temperatures might mess with its consistency. Still, you can freeze this recipe by pouring it into an airtight container and freezing it for up to one month. Or, for easier portioning, you can place the garlic lemon tahini sauce into the compartments of an ice cube tray, freeze until solid, then transfer the individual cubes into a freezer-safe Ziploc bag.
          • Thawing: Place your frozen tahini sauce in the refrigerator overnight to thaw. Because separation is inevitable during freezing, remember to stir it well to regain its creamy, well-incorporated texture before serving.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 183kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 7g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Sodium: 302mg | Potassium: 159mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 21IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 47mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/lemon-tahini-sauce/feed/ 1
        Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-street-corn-pasta-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-street-corn-pasta-salad/#comments Sun, 02 Jun 2024 17:12:10 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=25252 If you are a fan of the flavors of elote, one of the most popular Mexican street foods, you have…]]>

        If you are a fan of the flavors of elote, one of the most popular Mexican street foods, you have come to the right place! We have already shared Mexican Street Corn On The Cob, Mexican Street Corn Salad with Avocado, Air Fryer Elotes, Mexican Street Corn Soup and Elote Dip. This Mexican street corn pasta recipe is the newest addition to the collection.

        A person is drizzling the elote pasta salad with chili lime dressing.

        While I usually make this street corn macaroni salad during the summer months when sweet corn is in season, you can also make it using canned or frozen corn during the cooler months (i.e., during the football season and Cinco de Mayo celebrations). In this post, we cover everything you need to know, including ingredient substitutions, variations, making it with grilled (or sauteed) corn, and expert tips to guide you through the process.

        Ingredients for Mexican Pasta Salad with Chili Lime Dressing:

        The ingredients list for this pasta corn salad consists of a mix of fresh and store-bought ingredients. You will need two sets of ingredients: First, for the salad and second, for the chili lime dressing: 

        For The Salad:

        • Sweet corn on the cob: You can make this salad by cooking the corn on the grill (or using a grill pan), sauteeing it in a skillet, or even cooking it in an air fryer. Our recipe below covers both methods of cooking. However, during the cooler months, when corn is not in season, you can use canned or frozen corn as well. 
        • Oil: You can use any vegetable oil, like olive oil or avocado oil, but unsalted butter would also work.
        • Pasta: When making pasta salads, my favorite pasta shapes are fusilli, farfalle(bow-tie pasta), or cellentani. However, any pasta shape that can hold onto the dressing and mix well with other ingredients in the recipe would work here. If you are following a gluten-free diet, you can also use your favorite gluten-free pasta.
        • Jalapeno pepper: If you like the heat, keep the seeds on. If not, remove them before chopping the pepper into small pieces. Alternatively, you can use bell peppers if you prefer a milder flavor.
        • Onion: I used red onion, but green onions would also work for a lighter flavor. If you have them on hand, my Mexican pickled onions would also be a great addition.
        • Cilantro: Chopped fresh cilantro is a classic ingredient in any Mexican corn recipe, but if you are not a fan, you can use other fresh herbs like parsley or omit using it.
        • Cheese: The authentic elote recipe uses cotija cheese, so we used that, but you can also use queso fresco, shredded cheddar, or even crumbled feta cheese in a pinch.
        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

        For The Dressing:

        • Mayonnaise: Use a brand you like or make it at home
        • Sour cream: If you can find it, you can use Mexican crema (aka Mexican sour cream) instead of sour cream. 
        • Seasonings: I used a small amount of chili powder to complement the smoky and charred flavors of the corn, but it is optional. You will also need salt and pepper to season the recipe. If preferred, a cayenne pepper can also be added for some heat.
        • Lime zest and Lime Juice: I highly recommend using freshly squeezed lime juice for the freshest flavors.

        Optional Additions:

        • Cherry tomatoes: While it is not traditional, a handful of cherry tomatoes would be a lovely addition and make this grilled corn pasta salad a true summer salad. 
        • Garlic: A clove of minced garlic can be added to the creamy dressing, if preferred. If you prefer a lighter (less pungent) alternative, you can use a teaspoon of garlic powder as well.
        • Black Beans: Again, it is not traditional, but adding a can of drained and rinsed black beans would make this even more wholesome and filling.
        • Avocado: If you are an avocado lover, add a cubed ripe avocado to take this  Mexican corn pasta salad to the next level.
        • Grilled chicken: You can turn this sweet corn pasta salad into a delicious summer meal by adding some grilled chicken on top.

        How To Make Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad?

        While I prefer using grilled corn, you can make this street corn macaroni salad by sauteeing corn kernels in a skillet. Below are the steps to making it both ways:

        Steps showing how to make elote pasta salad.
        1. Cook corn:
          1. Grill Corn: Heat a gas grill to 400 degrees F. Peel back the husks of the corn and remove the silk. Brush them with the oil on all sides. Place them on the grill and cook for about 15-20 minutes, until lightly charred, turning them every 5 minutes to ensure even cooking. Let it cool for a few minutes, and then cut the corn kernels from the cob using a sharp knife.
          2. In a skillet: Heat a tablespoon of olive oil (or butter) in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Using a sharp knife, remove the corn kernels from the cob. Transfer them to the skillet and cook for 8-10 minutes or until slightly caramelized and charred in spots.
        2. Cook the pasta: Meanwhile, season a big pot of water with a generous amount of salt and bring it to a boil. Add the pasta and cook until al dente, following the package instructions. Drain and set aside. You can reserve some pasta water just in case, but during our recipe testing, we didn’t think that it was necessary. Transfer the now-cooked pasta to a large bowl. Add the now-cooked corn into the same bowl.
        3. Make the chili lime dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together mayo, sour cream, chili powder, lime juice, salt, and pepper. Taste and adjust your seasonings as necessary, keeping in mind that the cotija cheese for garnish is slightly salty!
        Steps showing how to assemble Mexican pasta salad with corn recipe.
        1. Assemble the salad: Drizzle the dressing over the corn and pasta and toss to ensure they are evenly coated. Add in the jalapenos, onion, and cilantro. Stir to combine and garnish with chopped cilantro, if using. Taste your elote corn pasta salad for seasoning and add more if necessary.

        Serving Suggestions:

        You can serve this grilled corn pasta salad by itself for a delicious pasta lunch or as a side dish with many of your vegetarian and meat dishes. Below are a few of my favorite dishes that you can pair it with:

        • Grilled seafood: The light and smokey flavors of Grilled Shrimp complement the creamy, spicy flavors of the salad. However, if you are feeding a crowd, you can also try my Grilled Sockeye Salmon for a well-rounded meal.
        • Tacos: The robust flavors of Grilled Flank Steak Tacos pair beautifully with this Mexican corn side dish, making it a summer feast. But if I am serving this salad during the cooler months, I pair it with my Slow Cooker Brisket Tacos for a meal that is perfect for a crowd.

        Other Mexican recipes you might like:

        If you make this Easy Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad recipe, I would appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Mexican street corn pasta salad in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad Recipe

        This Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad is bursting with the flavors of fresh summer corn, jalapenos, red onion, and a creamy chili lime dressing. Ready in just 30 minutes, it's the perfect dish for feeding a crowd!
        Course Side Dish
        Cuisine Mexican
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 30 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 353kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Corn:

        • 1 tablespoon vegetable oil or melted butter
        • 6 ears corn – Husks removed – approximately 4 ½ to 5 cups of corn kernels or frozen or canned corn (see notes below)
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

        For the Pasta:

        • 8 oz. dry uncooked pasta such as fusilli and farfalle (bowtie pasta)

        For The Creamy Dressing:

        • ¼ cup mayonnaise
        • 3 tablespoons sour cream or Mexican crema
        • ½ teaspoon chili powder
        • 1 teaspoon lime zest from one lime (optional)
        • ¼ cup lime juice freshly squeezed from 1 ½ to 2 limes
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

        For The Salad:

        • 2 medium jalapeno seeded and sliced/chopped
        • ½ cup red onion chopped finely
        • ¼ cup fresh cilantro chopped – more to use as garnish
        • ½ cup cotija cheese crumbled

        Instructions

        • When it comes to cooking the corn, you have two options:
          Grill Corn: Heat a gas grill to 400 degrees F. Peel back the husks of the corn and remove the silk. Brush them with the oil on all sides. Place them on the grill and cook for about 15-20 minutes, until lightly charred, turning them every 5 minutes to ensure even cooking. Let it cool for a few minutes, and then cut the corn kernels from the cob using a sharp knife.
          Cook it in a skillet: Heat a tablespoon of olive oil (or butter) in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Using a sharp knife, remove the corn kernels from the cob. Transfer them to the skillet and cook for 8-10 minutes or until slightly caramelized and charred in spots.
        • Cook the pasta: While the corn is cooling, season a big pot of water with a generous amount of salt and bring it to a boil. Add the pasta and cook until al dente, following the package instructions. Drain and set aside. Transfer the now-cooked pasta to a large bowl.
        • Add the now-cooked corn into the same bowl.
        • Make the Mexican Corn Dressing (Chili Lime Dressing): In a small bowl, whisk together mayo, sour cream, chili powder, lime juice, lime zest, salt, and pepper. Taste and adjust seasonings as necessary, keeping in mind that the cotija cheese for garnish is slightly salty.
        • Assemble the roasted corn pasta salad: Drizzle the dressing over the corn and pasta and toss to ensure they are evenly coated. Add in the jalapenos, onion, and cilantro. Stir to combine and garnish with chopped cilantro, if using. Taste your elote corn pasta salad for seasoning and add more if necessary.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 6-8 cups of pasta salad (the shape of the pasta you are using will change the volume), which is ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • What if I don’t have fresh corn? While I am a big fan of any pasta salad with fresh corn, to make this recipe year-round and still get that sweet corn flavor, you can use canned or frozen corn in place of the fresh. If you decide to do so, you can use:
          • Canned corn: For this recipe, you will need 3 (15 oz) cans of drained and rinsed corn.
          • Frozen corn kernels: You will need three (10 oz) bags. I like this option because the corn kernels are already off the cob, which saves you a step. Even better, there is no need to thaw. Simply add 1-2 minutes extra cooking time when sauteing the frozen corn in a skillet.
        • Be sure to salt the pasta water: Salting the cooking water allows the pasta to absorb some salt as it cooks, enhancing its flavor from the inside out so do not skip this step.
        • Toss while it is still warm: I know it’s tempting to add everything to the bowl and simply drizzle with dressing, but we’ve discovered that tossing the dressing with the corn and pasta while they’re still slightly warm allows them to better absorb the tangy, spicy flavors.
        • Serve it cold or warm: Like most pasta salads, this Mexican corn pasta salad can be served at room temperature, warm or cold. 
        • Make-Ahead: You can make this fresh corn pasta salad a day in advance. Simply assemble the pasta salad, but do not garnish with the cotija cheese or cilantro. Bring it to room temperature and store it in an airtight container. On the day you are going to serve, give it another gentle toss and let it come to room temperature. Add the cotija cheese and cilantro right before serving.
        • To Store Leftovers: Bring your Mexican pasta salad to room temperature and transfer it to an airtight container. As long as it is kept in the fridge, it should be good for up to 4 days.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 353kcal | Carbohydrates: 49g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 14mg | Sodium: 605mg | Potassium: 386mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 403IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 81mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-street-corn-pasta-salad/feed/ 26
        Ayran – Turkish Salty Yogurt Drink https://foolproofliving.com/ayran-turkish-yogurt-drink/ https://foolproofliving.com/ayran-turkish-yogurt-drink/#comments Wed, 15 May 2024 20:46:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75384 What is Ayran? If you have visited Turkey or been to a Turkish restaurant, you have probably heard about the…]]>

        What is Ayran?

        If you have visited Turkey or been to a Turkish restaurant, you have probably heard about the popular Turkish yoghurt drink, ayran. It is one of the most popular drinks we serve with any spicy meal, whether kabob or vegetables. Made up of only three ingredients: yogurt, water, and salt, a serving of Turkish ayran is considered one of the best ways to treat yourself on a hot summer day.

        A glass of froth ayran in a glass from the front view.

        While it originated from Turkey, many Balkan, Central Asia, Middle East, and Mediterranean countries, such as Greece, Bulgaria, Armenia, Iran, Lebanon, and Iraq, also serve this salted yogurt drink with minor variations. For example, the Iranian version of ayran, called doogh, is often served with fresh mint, while the Arabs make a similar version and call it laban. The Greek version, ariani, is also very similar to ayran.

        If you are familiar with Indian lassi, you might recognize the similarity in the texture of both drinks. However, unlike ayran, lassi is usually served sweet, often flavored with sugar, honey, or fresh fruit. 

        Ayran Ingredients

        The good news is that this Turkish yogurt drink recipe uses only 3 simple ingredients you probably already have on hand. You will need:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Plain Yogurt: I recommend using plain whole milk yogurt with no added sugars. You can also use low-fat or no-fat yogurt, but low-fat yogurt may not achieve the traditional creamy consistency. On the other hand, you can use plain Greek yogurt (also known as strained yogurt), but since it is thicker, you will need to use more water to adjust its consistency.
        • Cold Water: To keep this Mediterranean yogurt drink super refreshing, using cold water is essential. Some recipes suggest using ice, but I don’t recommend it as it can dilute the drink, affecting its consistency and texture.
        • Salt: You can use kosher, table, or sea salt. 

        Optional Add-Ins & Substitutions:

        • Mint: During the summer months, I usually add a few leaves of chopped fresh mint to my ayran recipe. You can, however, also use dried mint if that is all you have.
        • Sparkling water: Growing up, we never added sparkling water to ayran, but with carbonated drinks becoming more popular, I see many people making this yogurt drink with sparkling water instead of regular water. This simple substitution for water can make it more palatable for people who enjoy carbonated beverages and are looking for a unique twist on the classic Ayran Turkish drink recipe.
        • Cucumber: Again, it’s not traditional, but I’ve seen a few slices of cucumber added as a garnish to make it look appetizing and reiterate that it is a salty drink.

        How To Make Turkish Ayran?

        The best part about making this Turkish yogurt recipe is that it takes no more than 5 minutes. I prefer a whisk, but you can also use an electric blender. Whipping it up in a blender is especially handy if serving it to a crowd or making a large batch. Below are the steps to make it both ways:

        A collage of images showing how to make ayran drink.
        1. Ensure a smooth texture: Place yogurt in a large bowl or measuring cup and whisk until it is smooth and free of lumps. 
        2. Whisk: Add water and salt to the bowl and whisk vigorously until combined. Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary. Alternatively, you can put all of the ingredients in a blender and blend until fully combined.
        3. Chill: Tightly cover your yogurt milk drink in a glass bottle with a lid (or stretch film). Store in the fridge until ready to serve or for up to 2 days.
        4. Garnish & serve: Give it a good shake before pouring it into glasses, and garnish with fresh mint leaves if desired.

        What To Serve with Ayran?

        This Middle Eastern yogurt drink pairs wonderfully with several dishes, especially those with bold flavors and spices. Whether you’re having a meaty feast, a vegetarian delight, or a simple snack, ayran enhances the flavors and provides a refreshing balance to any dish it’s served with. Here are some delicious options to serve alongside this refreshing yogurt drink:

        • Kabobs: Whether you serve Shish Taouk, Chicken Shawarma, Doner Kebab, or Oven-Baked Beef Kabobs, ayran is the perfect accompaniment, providing a cooling and balancing effect.
        • Meat dishes: Popular Turkish dishes like Turkish Stuffed Eggplant (aka Karniyarik), Turkish Kofta Meatballs, Roast Rack of Lamb, Turkish Pasta, or lahmacun pair beautifully with this ayran yoghurt drink. The cold and refreshing drink cut through the richness of these hearty meat dishes (and spicy foods in general), enhancing the overall flavors.
        • Vegetarian Dishes: This drinkable yogurt drink pairs well with vegetarian dishes like Bulgur Wheat Pilaf, Spinach Borek, and Turkish Tabbouleh. Its tangy flavors complement the savoriness of these dishes, adding a refreshing touch to your meal.
        • Snack: If you want to transport yourself to Turkey within seconds, you need to do what Turks do: Serve ayran with simit (also known as Turkish bagel) for a simple yet satisfying snack. The chewy, sesame-coated bread and the cool, salty yogurt drink are delightful at any time of the day.
        Middle eastern yogurt drink served in glasses and in a glass jar.

        FAQs

        What does ayran taste like?

        Ayran has a refreshing, tangy flavor with a slight saltiness. The yogurt gives it a creamy texture, while the added water makes it light and easy to drink. 

        Are ayran and kefir the same thing?

        No, ayran and kefir are not the same things. Kefir is a fermented milk drink made using kefir grains, which contain a mix of bacteria and yeast, while ayran is made by mixing yogurt, water, and salt. They both have a tangy taste, but kefir offers a slightly effervescent texture due to the fermentation process.

        What are the benefits of drinking ayran?

        The traditional Turkish drink offers several health benefits. Since it is yogurt-based beverage, it is high in protein and a great source of essential nutrients, including calcium, potassium, and vitamin B12. Additionally, its salt content can help replenish electrolytes lost through sweat, making it particularly beneficial during hot weather or after physical activity. Lastly, the yogurt in ayran provides probiotics, improving gut health and aiding digestion.

        Other Must-Try Turkish Recipes

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you make this recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        A glass of Ayran Turkish yogurt drink from the front view.
        Print

        Ayran Recipe – Turkish Yogurt Drink

        Enjoy the deliciously refreshing Ayran, a Turkish salted yogurt drink made from yogurt, water, and a pinch of salt. Serve it as an accompaniment to your favorite kabobs and meat dishes, or treat yourself to a healthy midday snack to cool off on a hot day.
        Course Non Alcoholic Drink
        Cuisine Turkish
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Total Time 5 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 75kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 cups whole milk plain yogurt unsweetened
        • 1 cup cold water
        • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt

        Optional Add-Ins

        • A few leaves fresh mint chopped or dried mint

        Instructions

        • Place yogurt in a bowl and whisk until smooth and no lumps remain.
        • Add water and salt to the bowl and whisk vigorously until combined and the texture is creamy and smooth.
        • Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary.
        • If preferred, add in some chopped mint for flavor. Pour into a glass jar, cover tightly with a lid, and chill until ready to serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 4-5 cups of ayran, ideal for 4 servings. The nutritional information below is per serving.
        • Yogurt: While I highly recommend using whole milk yogurt, you can also use low- or nonfat yogurt, though it won’t be as creamy. Greek yogurt can also be used, but you should use more water (about 1/2 to 3/4 cup) to get the right consistency. 
        • Storage: This yogurt drink will keep fresh in the fridge for up to 2-3 days as long as it is kept in an airtight container (such as a glass jar with a tight-fitting lid). Be sure to shake well before serving.
        • Foam on top: The ayran served in most kebab restaurants has a layer of foam on top, filled with visible air bubbles. Many Turkish people consider frothy ayran a sign of freshness and consider it the best part of the drink. When making it at home, the way to achieve bubbles on top is to whisk or shake it vigorously.
        • Adjust consistency and taste: The ideal yogurt-to-water ratio is 2 to 1. In other words, to make 4 servings of this yogurt drink, I use 2 cups of yogurt and 1 cup of water. However, you can adjust the consistency to your preference by adding more or less of each ingredient. The same goes for the amount of salt you use.
        • Serve it chilled: This drink is best served cold. For the best results, make a batch and store it in a glass jar in the fridge. You can also put the ingredients in a cocktail shaker with a few ice cubes, shake it vigorously, and strain it into a glass. Be sure to strain out the ice to avoid diluting the drink.
        • Keep it in the fridge: Since ayran is a dairy-based drink, it should be stored in the fridge (At or below 40°F (4°C)) to prevent bacterial growth and spoilage.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 75kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 16mg | Sodium: 205mg | Potassium: 190mg | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 121IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 150mg | Iron: 0.1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/ayran-turkish-yogurt-drink/feed/ 1
        Black Bean and Corn Salad https://foolproofliving.com/black-bean-and-corn-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/black-bean-and-corn-salad/#comments Fri, 26 Apr 2024 13:44:28 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=19714 Below, I’ll show you how to make this corn and black bean salad ahead of time (just what you need…]]>

        Below, I’ll show you how to make this corn and black bean salad ahead of time (just what you need to prepare for a big gathering!), as well as how to make a homemade lime dressing you’ll want to add to all your favorite salads, veggie sides, and proteins.With such a vibrantly fresh, citrusy flavor, it’s no wonder why this black bean corn salad is such a hit.

        Mexican black bean and corn salad in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients

        Packed with fresh and bright flavors, every element of this simple bean salad will delight your taste buds, from its zingy lime vinaigrette to its crisp veggie base.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • For the Dressing:
          • Fresh lime juice
          • Lime zest
          • Garlic: You’ll need one fresh garlic clove to give this dressing a delectably bold, complex finish. After peeling your garlic, press or finely mince it to ensure it thoroughly and evenly infuses the mixture.
          • Olive oil
          • Seasoning: I use a savory, earthy mix of ground cumin, kosher salt, and black pepper to season this simple corn and bean salad recipe. If preferred, a pinch of chili powder can also be added.
        • For the Salad:
          • Black beans: You can cook raw black beans from scratch or use canned black beans for this salad. If you opt for a canned version, be sure to drain and rinse them under cold water before adding them to your mixture.
          • Corn: Any type of corn will work for this easy bean and corn salad recipe. If you’re making this dish during the summer, you can use fresh sweet corn off the cob, air-fried corn (be sure to cut the kernels after cooking), or grill the corn beforehand if you’re in the mood for a smokier flavor profile. Also, if you’re in a pinch and don’t have any fresh corn on hand, you can use frozen corn or canned corn kernels—as long as you thaw, drain, and rinse them beforehand.
          • Cherry tomatoes
          • Bell peppers: You can use any color of bell pepper for this recipe. Though I used red peppers, yellow, orange, or green bell peppers would also add a deliciously fresh crispness to your mixture.
          • Red onion: Chopped red onion is my favorite way to bring out the subtle Mexican flavors of this dish. However, if you’re aiming for a milder taste, you may also use scallions.
          • Avocado: Creamy avocado is there to balance the crisper taste of this recipe’s fresh produce. However, you can omit it from your recipe if you’re not a fan.
          • Fresh cilantro: I love using cilantro leaves to add a fresh, peppery edge to my corn and black bean salad recipe. However, you’re welcome to omit this ingredient (or substitute it with fresh parsley!) if you don’t like its taste.
          • Cotija cheese (optional): If you want to add more light, creamy notes to your salad ingredients, cotija cheese offers a soft, milky flavor you’ll love. Sprinkle your salad with this cheesy addition after mixing.

        How to Make Black Bean Salad with Corn

        It takes almost no time to whip up this avocado corn black bean salad. In just four steps, you’ll have a crowd-pleasing dish you can use as a side, appetizer, or quick snack any day of the week.

        Steps showing how to make mexican corn and black bean salad.
        1. Prepare the lime dressing: In a small bowl, add the lime juice, lime zest, garlic, olive oil, cumin, kosher salt, and black pepper. Whisk the ingredients until thoroughly combined.
        2. Make the corn and bean salad: Place the black beans, corn, cherry tomatoes, bell pepper, red onion, avocado, and chopped cilantro into a large mixing bowl.
        3. Drizzle and toss: Drizzle the bean salad with the lime dressing and gently toss it until evenly combined.
        4. Taste and serve: Taste the salad for seasoning, add more if necessary, and serve.

        How to Make Ahead and Store?

        There’s a reason why this simple black bean and corn salad is one of my favorite foods. Not only can you make it ahead of time, but you can also store it throughout the week for stress-free meal prep.

        • Make ahead: You can make this quick black bean and corn salad one day in advance. Not only does this early prep minimize kitchen hassle, but it also gives the salad ingredients enough time to mix and infuse their flavors. That said, I still recommend adding the avocado just before serving so the ingredient maintains its color, taste, and texture.
        • Storage: Have leftovers? Don’t worry! You can store this easy salad in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days. Just be sure to stir the mixture and taste it for seasoning, as the ingredients may separate or change flavor during storage.

        Serving Suggestions for this Corn Salad with Beans

        Like my other salad recipes, this easy black bean salad is a great side dish for any meal, from summer BBQs to Mexican dinners. Plus, it also works as a hassle-free snack or appetizer if you need a quick addition to your weekday menu.

        Below are just a few of my favorite ways to serve this fan-favorite recipe.

        • With chips on the side: Easy and quick, I love serving this simple salad alongside a bowl of tortilla chips—perfect for weeknight get-togethers or midday munching. Or, if you’re in the mood for a heartier snack, my Cheesy Spinach Quesadilla exquisitely balances this salad’s bright flavors with rich, gooey deliciousness.
        • Grilled fish: If you plan to serve this dish as a summer corn and bean salad, it’s time to fire up the outdoor grill! My Grilled Shrimp Skewers and Grilled Mahi Mahi strike a delectable balance between buttery, smoky, and light flavors—an ideal pairing for this salad’s zesty undertones.
        • Grilled chicken or beef: Looking for a meatier meal? This recipe makes a great black bean and corn side dish for all your favorite meaty mains. In particular, this tender-crisp side is a delectable accompaniment for my creamy yet savory Avocado Burger and tangy Yogurt Marinated Chicken.
        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        Other Corn Salads You Might Also Like:

        Black bean corn avocado salad in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Black Bean and Corn Salad Recipe

        This colorful, fresh, and festive Black Bean and Corn Salad is loaded with vegetables and drizzled with a delicious lime dressing. Ready in 15 minutes, it can be served as a side dish or a light lunch that you can make as a part of your meal prep.
        Course Side Dish
        Cuisine Mexican
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 20 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 143kcal

        Ingredients

        For the lime dressing:

        • cup lime juice freshly squeezed; from 3 limes
        • 1 teaspoon lime zest from one lime
        • 1 clove garlic minced
        • 3 tablespoons olive oil
        • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        For the salad:

        • 2 cans black beans rinsed and drained – (15 oz each)
        • 3 ears fresh corn shucked; ~ 2 ¾ cups (or 1 8.5-oz. can whole kernels, drained)
        • 1 cup cherry tomatoes halved
        • 1 red bell pepper chopped; 1 cup/120 g
        • ½ medium red onion chopped; 1 cup/88 g
        • 1 avocado cubed
        • cup cilantro divided and chopped

        Instructions

        • To make the dressing, combine the lime juice, lime zest, garlic, olive oil, cumin, kosher salt, and black pepper in a bowl and whisk until fully combined.
        • To make the corn and bean salad, place black beans, corn, cherry tomatoes, bell pepper, red onion, avocado, and chopped cilantro in a large salad bowl.
        • Drizzle the salad with the prepared dressing and give it a gentle toss.
        • Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This black bean salad recipe makes 5-6 cups of salad ideal for serving six people as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Chop everything small: The key to making the best black bean and corn salad recipe is to chop all your veggies into small, uniformly-sized pieces. Not only will your salad be easier to eat, but this small, even size will also ensure that each bite has a more even balance of flavors. This is especially important if you plan to serve it with chips on the side or a topping for tacos.
        • Let it marinate: If you have the time, I highly recommend letting it rest for a few hours before serving (or even waiting until the next day!). Doing so will give the lime dressing time to fully infuse the vegetables and let the veggies’ flavors mix with each other. Just wait until the last moment to add your cubed avocado.
        • Serve it chilled or at room temperature: I prefer this recipe to be served cold, so I usually refrigerate it for a few hours before serving. But you can also serve it at room temperature.
        • Corn: You can use any corn you like. During the summer months, I usually use fresh sweet corn. I like them raw, but if you want, you can also sauté it lightly. If your grill is on, feel free to grill your corn after spreading it with oil (butter and olive oil would work). Of course, you can also use a can of corn (drained and rinsed) and frozen corn (thawed.)
        • Storage: You can store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days. Just be sure to stir the mixture and taste it for seasoning, as the ingredients may separate or change flavor during storage.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 143kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 432mg | Potassium: 334mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 923IU | Vitamin C: 40mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/black-bean-and-corn-salad/feed/ 30
        Raw Carrot Salad https://foolproofliving.com/raw-carrot-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/raw-carrot-salad/#comments Thu, 18 Apr 2024 17:31:57 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=74840 The original raw carrot salad became virtually famous based on the teachings of Dr. Ray Peat. According to Dr. Peat’s…]]>

        The original raw carrot salad became virtually famous based on the teachings of Dr. Ray Peat. According to Dr. Peat’s research, raw carrots contain a unique fiber that, when mixed with a touch of healthy fats (like coconut oil) and vinegar, can bind to excess estrogen and safely eliminate it from the body. This is good for hormone balance and gut health. And with this raw carrot salad recipe, it’s so easy to incorporate this health trend into your diet.

        If you are wondering what to do with grated carrots, check out a few of our other raw carrot recipes, including Kale and Apple Slaw and Yogurt Coleslaw.

        A bowl of shaved raw carrot salad in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients

        The good news is that this vegan carrot salad uses just a handful of ingredients you probably already have on hand:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Carrots: If possible, use organic carrots, as these will provide the highest nutritional content and a good source of fiber. You will need about 3 large carrots (or 10 oz total). I simply cut off the ends, remove the outer layer, and slice them lengthwise with a vegetable peeler. You can also slice your carrots with a julienne peeler, grate them on a box grater, or use the large grating attachment on your food processor.
        • Fresh herbs: I love a ton of fresh parsley in this carrot vinegar salad, but you can also try any of your favorite soft herbs, such as fresh cilantro, mint, or dill.
        • Oil: I use extra-virgin olive oil, but you can also use coconut oil or avocado oil.
        • Vinegar: I love the slightly sweet tang of apple cider vinegar, but other options include rice vinegar, white wine vinegar, or red wine vinegar. The flavor profile will change based on what type of vinegar you use.
        • Sweetener: I like to use maple syrup to keep it vegan, but a touch of honey or agave could also work.
        • Seasonings: Go for a simple blend of ground cumin, sea salt, and black pepper.
        • Nuts and Seeds: I like a final sprinkle of sesame seeds, which I find adds a subtle crunch and nutty flavor. Other options include sunflower seeds, sliced almonds, or pumpkin seeds (raw pepitas).

        Optional Add-Ins

        • Lemon juice or lime juice: A squeeze of fresh citrus juice is an easy way to brighten up this peeled carrot salad recipe. You can use this addition in place of the vinegar or in addition to vinegar.
        • Dijon mustard: To give the salad a little kick, add a very small amount, maybe about ½ teaspoons.
        • Soy sauce: To give this carrot salad an Asian twist, you can use soy sauce instead of salt.
        • Green onions: If you can’t imagine a salad without onions, a small amount of (¼ cup) chopped scallions would be a great addition.

        How to Make Raw Carrot Salad?

        This healthy carrot salad comes together in a few easy steps. Here’s how I like to make it:

        A collage of images showing how to make raw carrot salad.
        1. Shred carrots: Cut off the ends of your carrots, then peel the outer skin with a vegetable peeler. Then, continue to slice them into carrot ribbons as evenly as possible. Transfer the sliced carrots to a large bowl.
        2. Make the dressing: Add the olive oil, apple cider vinegar, maple syrup, cumin, salt, and ground black pepper to a small bowl or mason jar. Whisk or shake until combined.
        3. Toss: Drizzle the dressing over the shaved carrots and give it a gentle toss.
        4. Garnish: If using, sprinkle with chopped fresh parsley and sesame seeds. Serve cold or at room temperature.

        How to Make Ahead and Store?

        After testing the carrot salad with vinegar several times, we found the salad was better the next day, making it a great make-ahead recipe. Here are my best make-ahead and storage tips for this raw carrot recipe:

        • Make Ahead: Prepare the salad up to 1 day in advance and store it in an airtight container in the fridge. This gives a chance for all the flavors to marry together.
        • Storage: The dressed carrot salad will keep for up to 3 days in an airtight container in the fridge. Give it a good toss just before serving.
        Person sprinkling fresh carrot salad with sesame seeds.

        Serving Suggestions

        According to dieticians, it is best to eat this cold carrot salad on an empty stomach to reap its benefits, which is why I usually eat it as a light lunch. That being said, it makes a great side dish with any of the following:

        Aysegul’s Recipe Tips

        If you look at the recipe below, you’ll see that this shaved carrot salad recipe is easy to make with minimal ingredients. However, we learned a few tips as we were testing this recipe.

        • Best way to slice carrots: I prefer to shred carrots lengthwise using a vegetable peeler to make this simple carrot salad. However, you can also use a julienne peeler for a more French-style salad, the large holes of a box grater, or the shredding blade on your food processor to achieve different textures.
        • Let it rest before serving: The natural sweetness of the carrots and dressing tastes better the longer they have a chance to mingle together, so I recommend making this grated carrot salad for at least a few hours, or up to two days, ahead of time.
        • Taste for seasoning: Start with the recommended amount of salt, pepper, and cumin, and then add more to your liking. I added a good dose of salt right before serving.

        FAQs

        How do you cut carrots for raw carrot salad?

        First, cut off the ends, then peel away the outer skin. Then, slice evenly but thinly with a vegetable peeler, julienne peeler, large holes of a box grater, or the grating attachment on your food processor.

        What are the benefits of raw carrot salad?

        According to Dr. Ray Peat, the benefits of eating raw carrot salad regularly include improved digestive health and optimal liver and thyroid function. The fiber in raw carrots promotes bowel regularity and enhances digestion. Additionally, by aiding in the removal of excess estrogens and endotoxins, consuming this salad regularly helps reduce the burden on the liver, thereby supporting both liver and thyroid health.

        If you make this Raw Carrot Salad recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a wonderful way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

        Raw carrot salad in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Raw Carrot Salad Recipe

        Here's a Raw Carrot Salad that you can make in under 10 minutes. Vegan and gluten-free, this healthy salad is perfect for a light lunch or side dish with any of your main dishes.
        Course Lunch, Dinner
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 10 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 72kcal

        Ingredients

        • 3 medium-sized carrots washed, ends trimmed (10 oz/287 g)
        • ½ cup parsley roughly chopped (can substitute with cilantro or mint)
        • 1 tablespoon olive oil or coconut oil
        • 2 tablespoon apple cider vinegar or rice vinegar
        • 1 tablespoon maple syrup
        • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
        • 1 teaspoon sea salt or kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
        • 1 teaspoon sesame seeds optional

        Instructions

        • Using a vegetable peeler, peel the outer skin of your carrots. Then continue to to grate them into ribbons. Transfer them to a large salad bowl.
        • Add the parsley to the bowl.
        • Prepare the dressing: Place the olive oil, apple cider vinegar, maple syrup, cumin, salt, and ground black pepper in a mason jar. Put the lid on and shake. Set aside.
        • Drizzle the shaved carrots with the dressing and give it a gentle toss using tongs.
        • Sprinkle with sesame seeds, if using. Serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 3-4 cups of carrot salad, which is ideal for 4 servings as a side dish and 2 servings as a light meal. The nutritional values below are per serving (of 4.)
        • Slicing carrots: While I shave the carrots into ribbons, you can shred it using a box grater or a food processor.
        • Let it rest: If you have the time, let the salad rest in the fridge for a few hours before serving. Resting time allows the flavors to meld together and make it even more delicious.
        • Storage: You can store leftovers in the fridge for up to 3 days.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 72kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 619mg | Potassium: 213mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 8279IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/raw-carrot-salad/feed/ 3
        Kale Brussel Sprout Salad https://foolproofliving.com/brussels-sprout-kale-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/brussels-sprout-kale-salad/#comments Tue, 16 Apr 2024 17:34:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15238 Transform raw Brussels sprouts into one of your new favorite fall salads—alongside my Kale Waldorf Salad and Apple Kale Slaw.…]]>

        Transform raw Brussels sprouts into one of your new favorite fall salads—alongside my Kale Waldorf Salad and Apple Kale Slaw.

        You can serve restaurant-quality eats for any weeknight dinner, green side dish for thanksgiving, or quick lunch with this crowd-pleasing dish. Inspired by the classic brussel sprout and kale salad recipe featured by popular sites like Bon Appetit, Whole Foods, NY Times, and Epicurious, my recipe will delight your tastebuds whether you’re a beginner or an expert chef.

        A kale Brussel sprout salad in a bowl with spoons from the top view.

        Ingredients

        This kale Brussel sprouts salad comes together in three sets of basic ingredients:

        ingredients for a kale salad with Brussels sprouts from the top view.
        • For the salad ingredients, you’ll need:
          • Tuscan Kale: Because of its mild flavor and popularity in grocery stores, lacinato kale is my go-to for this easy recipe. If you’d like to try other Types of Kale, curly kale has a sharp, peppery flavor that will work great in your kale Brussel salad.
          • Brussels Sprouts: You can shred brussels sprouts like I do it here or buy packaged and already shaved sprouts from the store.
          • Grated Parmesan Cheese: I love the salty and umami flavors of parmesan cheese, but Pecorino Romano goat cheese, blue cheese, and feta cheese would also work.
          • Dried or fresh fruit: I used dried cranberries, but pomegranate seeds, fresh apples, raisins, and craisins also make the perfect additions to this simple kale and Brussels sprouts salad.
        • To make the dressing, gather:
          • Olive oil
          • Fresh lemon juice
          • Vinegar: I used apple cider vinegar, but balsamic vinegar or white wine vinegar would also work. If you are a fan of Cracker Barrel’s brussel sprout and kale salad recipe you can use my Dijon Maple Vinaigrette instead.
          • Dijon mustard
          • Fresh minced garlic cloves
          • Onion: I used a minced shallot, but you can use red onions as well.
          • Kosher salt and black pepper. 
        • For the nuts: I suggest using sliced almonds, chopped walnuts, or chopped pecans. Alternatively, you can use candied nuts like candied pecans! You could also swap out the nuts for seeds, like pumpkin seeds or sunflower seeds, to accommodate nut allergies.

        Variations & Optional Add-Ins

        Take this shaved brussel sprout and kale salad to the next level with countless tasty additions.

        • For meat lovers: Turn your veggie-packed side into a healthy meal by adding a nutritious protein. Top your salad with Turkey Bacon for a kick of crispy bacon flavor, or add Baked Chicken Breasts for a succulent addition.
        • Serve it warm: If you prefer a warm kale and Brussel sprout salad, you can sautee the vegetables in a large skillet until they are lightly cooked. Simply heat a tablespoon of oil in a large skillet, add the chopped kale and sautee until lightly warmed. Transfer it to a bowl and follow the same steps for the Brussel sprouts.

        How to Make this Recipe?

        Kale brussel sprout cranberry salad is among my favorite easy salad recipes to whip up on busy weeknights and special occasions alike. You can even hone your veggie prep by checking out my foolproof guide on How to Cut Kale.

        A person showing how to make a kale salad with dressing from the top view.
        1. Prepare the kale: Wash and rinse the kale leaves under cold water, and dry them in a salad spinner. Then, use a sharp knife to remove the stems and thinly slice kale leaves. Place them in a large bowl.
        2. Shave the Brussels sprouts: Rinse the Brussel sprouts under cold water using a colander, dry them, and remove their outermost leaves. Then, place them in a food processor fitted with a slicing blade. Switch on the machine and feed the Brussels sprouts into the tube. Once shaved, transfer the Brussels sprouts from the food processor into the salad bowl with the kale. 
        3. Make the lemon vinaigrette: Whisk together the olive oil, lemon juice, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, garlic, shallot, salt, and black pepper in a small bowl.
        4. Drizzle the vegetables: Gently pour the dressing over the kale and Brussel sprouts. Toss the mixture such that each leaf has an even coating of the dressing. This even layer will help soften the kale, but if you want, you can also massage kale and sprouts gently to ensure they are fully mixed with the dressing. Set the vegetables aside and let them rest.
        A person showing how to assemble a kale salad with toasted almonds from the top view.
        1. Toast the almonds: Place the almonds in a small skillet over medium heat. Toast the nuts for 4-5 minutes, frequently stirring, until they turn fragrant and lightly golden brown. Alternatively, you can toast them in a preheated 350-degree F. oven on a baking sheet for 5-7 minutes, turning once during the process.
        2. Add the toppings: Top the shaved brussel sprout salad with Parmesan cheese, toasted almonds, and cranberries if using. Toss the mixture until evenly combined, then serve.

        How to Make Ahead and Store

        This Lemony brussel sprout salad is as easy to make ahead and store as it is to prepare (hello, easy kale storage!). Here’s how I do it:

        • Make ahead: To make this kale Brussels sprouts salad ahead of time, prepare each component (i.e., salad, dressing, and toppings) one day in advance. Begin by washing, chopping, and shaving the kale and Brussel sprouts, and store them in an airtight container in the fridge. Then, mix and cover dressing and store it in a separate airtight container, such as a mason jar, in the refrigerator. Toast the almonds and store them at room temperature. Lastly, shred the Parmesan cheese and store it in the fridge. Combine the ingredients just before serving.
        • Store: To store your salad with Brussel sprouts, place it in an airtight container in the fridge. If you have not yet added the dressing, the veggies will stay fresh for 3-4 days. However, if you have already added the dressing, your salad mixture will last up to two days. You may also extend your salad’s storage time by storing each salad component separately and dressing individual servings as needed.

        What to Serve with this Salad

        With so many tantalizing flavors, this Brussel sprout and kale recipe makes the ultimate side dish for dozens of tasty mains. Here are just a few delicious recipes to try with your new favorite salad:

        • Meat Dishes: My favorite way to serve this kale Brussels sprouts salad is with a savory, meaty main. Ground Turkey Meatloaf is a flavorful classic even picky eaters love, while Baked Chicken Parmesan and Chicken Fricassee will perfectly complement your light salad with rich and succulent flavor.
        • Vegetarian Dinners: Fill your plate with nutritious and eco-conscious foods by pairing your brussel sprout salad with tasty vegetarian recipes. Quinoa Chili and Mexican Quinoa will balance your kale salad with hearty spice, and Stuffed Acorn Squash is a festive, gluten-free option everyone can enjoy.
        A salad with kale and Brussel sprouts in a bowl from the side view.

        FAQs

        Can brussel sprouts be eaten raw in a salad?

        Absolutely! Just be sure to shred your raw brussel sprouts before adding them to your recipe.

        Do you rinse off brussel sprouts before cooking?

        Yes, I recommend rinsing your brussels sprouts under cold water before cooking with them. I also recommend removing each sprout’s dark, outermost leaves to ensure maximum freshness.

        Similar Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this Kale Brussels Sprout Salad recipe or any other salad recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        A bowl of brussels sprouts and kale salad recipe from the top view
        Print

        Kale Brussels Sprout Salad Recipe

        This nutrient-dense Kale Brussel Sprout Salad is packed with hearty greens, toasted almonds, cheese, and sweet cranberries, all tossed in a tangy homemade Dijon dressing. Enjoy it for a light meal or serve it as a fall-inspired side dish.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine American
        Diet Vegetarian
        Prep Time 20 minutes
        Total Time 20 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 438kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Salad:

        • 1 bunch Tuscan Kale or Curly Kale ~1 lb
        • 1 pound Brussels sprouts finely chopped – I used my food processor
        • 1 cup grated Parmesan cheese
        • ½ cup dried cranberries or pomegranate seeds optional

        For The Dressing:

        • ½ cup extra virgin olive oil
        • ¼ cup lemon juice
        • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar
        • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
        • 1 clove garlic minced
        • ½ small shallot minced (about 2 tablespoons) or red onion
        • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

        For The Nuts:

        • 1 cup sliced or whole almonds or chopped walnuts or pecans

        Instructions

        • Prep the kale: Wash and rinse the kale leaves under cold water. Dry in a salad spinner. Remove the leaves from the center ribs and chop thinly. Place it in a large salad bowl.
        • Shave Brussel sprouts*: Place Brussel sprouts in a food processor fitted with the shredding blade. Turn the machine on and feed brussels sprouts into the tube and let the machine do all the work for you. Transfer the now-shaved Brussels sprouts into the bowl with kale.
        • Make the dressing by whisking together olive oil, lemon juice, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, garlic, shallot, and salt and pepper in a small bowl.
        • Drizzle the vegetables with the dressing and give it a toss to make sure all the leaves are evenly coated with the dressing. Set aside and let it rest.
        • Place almonds in a small empty skillet over medium heat. Toast for 4-5 minutes, keeping a very close eye on and stirring frequently, until fragrant and lightly browned. Chop them up into large bite-size pieces.
        • To assemble, sprinkle the brussel sprout and kale salad with toasted almonds, parmesan cheese, and cranberries (or pomegranate arils), if using. Toss to combine and serve.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 8-7 cups of salad that is ideal for serving 6 adults as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • When it comes to shredding brussels sprouts, you have two other options:
          • Use a sharp pairing knife and slice one by one as thinly as you can. This takes around 10-15 minutes for a pound of raw brussels sprouts.
          • Use a mandolin. This method produces evenly sliced Brussels spouts and takes about 8-10 minutes to shred a pound of brussels sprouts. If you need advice on a good mandoline, I just purchased this one (affiliate link), and I love it.
        • To make ahead: To make this salad ahead of time, prepare each component (i.e., salad, dressing, and toppings) one day in advance. Assemble it right before serving.
        • To Store: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container for up to 2 days. You may also extend your salad’s storage time by storing each salad component separately and dressing individual servings as needed.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 438kcal | Carbohydrates: 24g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 35g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 22g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 535mg | Potassium: 537mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 901IU | Vitamin C: 70mg | Calcium: 253mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/brussels-sprout-kale-salad/feed/ 28
        Deviled Egg Potato Salad https://foolproofliving.com/deviled-egg-potato-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/deviled-egg-potato-salad/#comments Fri, 22 Mar 2024 13:36:35 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=18519 There are so many versions of potato salad, like Red Potato Salad and Potato Caper Salad. But I like to…]]>

        There are so many versions of potato salad, like Red Potato Salad and Potato Caper Salad. But I like to think this deviled potato salad recipe is a step above the rest. Thanks to layers of flavors, textures, and unmatched tanginess, it’s an old-fashioned potato salad recipe with the volume turned up.

        If you are a serious potato salad fan and you’ve always loved Resers Deviled Egg Potato Salad, now is your chance to make it right at home.

        Potato salad with hard boiled eggs and chives in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients

        This recipe for deviled egg potato salad combines the main ingredients for deviled egg filling and creamy boiled potatoes. Here’s a look at what we need:

        Ingredients for the dish from the top view.
        • Potatoes: The best potatoes for potato salad are waxy potatoes, like Yukon gold, red potatoes, or baby potatoes, which hold their shape better than starchy potatoes like russet potatoes. Avoid potatoes with green spots or sprouts, as this indicates potatoes that are old and have lost their flavor and moisture.
        • Hard-boiled eggs: Hard-boiled egg yolks create the base for the deviled egg dressing, and the cooked egg whites are added to the salad. Keep reading to learn how to make perfect hard-cooked eggs at home.
        • Green onions: We are using scallions for the filling and bright green chives for garnish. Both provide that extra layer of savory flavor.
        • Celery: Celery gives the potato salad crunch and color. 
        • Sweet relish: Sweet pickle relish is a classic in salads like this, so that’s what we used. The sweet, tangy, and briny flavor is impossible to replicate. If you prefer a less sweet flavor, use dill relish, finely chopped dill pickles, or olives.
        • Paprika: A final sprinkle of paprika or smoked paprika celebrates the deviled egg and it adds such beautiful color.
        • Mayonnaise: I like to use avocado oil mayonnaise, which gives it a creamy, slightly sweet flavor.
        • Greek yogurt: Greek yogurt lightens up the dressing so the eggs and potatoes are not weighed down. In a pinch, sour cream can be a good substitute.
        • Garlic: One fresh garlic clove adds a punchy bit, but if you like your potato salad garlicky you can up it to two cloves.
        • Apple cider vinegar: We used apple cider vinegar, but white wine vinegar would also work.
        • Dijon mustard: Dijon mustard adds a zesty punch and elevates the dressing even further. Yellow mustard can also be used if that is all you have on hand.
        • Seasonings: A simple blend of Kosher salt and black pepper allows the rest of the ingredients to shine. Feel free to add a dash of cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes for a little kick. Or, have fun with different things like celery seed, old bay seasoning, or creole seasoning.

        Optional Add-Ins & Substitutions

        • Lemon juice: Replace the apple cider vinegar with lemon juice for a fresh citrus kick.
        • Pickled red onion: Pickled Red Onions add another layer of tangy sharpness and a vibrant pop of color.
        • Bacon: Although the recipe is vegetarian, the addition of chopped Baked Turkey Bacon or regular bacon would be nice.
        • Herbs: Fresh herbs like parsley would be a nice addition, too.
        • Peppers: If you have it, a small amount of diced red bell pepper or pimento peppers would also work nicely in this recipe.

        How to Make Hard Boiled Eggs for Potato Salad?

        The key to deviled egg potato salad vs regular is the eggs, of course. We want fresh, high-quality eggs with deep orange-yellow yolks that promise a rich flavor. For easy-peel hard-boiled eggs, follow these steps:

        1. Place the eggs in a large pot with cold water, ensuring that they are submerged in water by about 1 inch.
        Steps showing how to cook and peel hard boiled eggs to use in this recipe.
        1. Set the pot on medium-high heat and bring to a boil, then immediately turn the heat off, cover, and let sit for 11-13 minutes.
        2. Next, carefully remove the eggs from the pot to an ice bath, letting them chill for 5-10 minutes, and drain. 
        3. When ready to peel, lightly tap each egg on a flat surface to crack the eggshell. Then, gently begin peeling the egg, starting from the bottom, where there is typically an air pocket. Continue with the rest of the eggs.

        How to Make Deviled Eggs Potato Salad?

        Now, the fun begins! Here are the step-by-step instructions on how to make this potato salad deviled egg recipe:

        Steps showing how to cook potatoes and prepare egg yolks to use in the recipe.
        1. Boil potatoes: In a large pot, place the cubed potatoes and cover with cool water by 1-inch. Bring to a boil over medium-high heat, then reduce the heat to medium, and cook until the potatoes are fork tender, about 15-20 minutes.
        2. Drain potatoes: Drain the cooked potatoes in a colander and place them into a large mixing bowl to cool.
        3. Mash egg yolks: Slice the eggs in half lengthwise. Remove the cooked egg yolks and place them in a small bowl. Mash with the back of a fork until completely smooth, breaking up any large lumps.
        A collage of images showing how to make deviled egg potato salad.
        1. Prep egg whites: Cut the cooked egg whites into 1-inch cubes.
        2. Make the dressing: Into the bowl with the mashed egg yolks, add the mayonnaise, Greek yogurt, garlic, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, Kosher salt, and pepper. Whisk until thoroughly combined. 
        3. Assemble the salad: Place the now-cooled potatoes, chopped egg whites, scallions, celery, and sweet relish into a serving bowl. Gently stir to combine.
        4. Add dressing: Drizzle generously with the dressing and give it a gentle toss. Adjust the seasoning to your desired taste. If you have the time, cover it with stretch film and chill it for an hour in the fridge.
        5. Garnish: Sprinkle the salad with paprika and chives. Enjoy!

        How to Make Ahead & Store Leftovers?

        Hard-boiled egg potato salad is a delicious make-ahead recipe, and leftovers are stored beautifully in the fridge. Here are my best make-ahead and storage tips:

        • Make Ahead: Prepare the recipe as instructed, but do not add the paprika or chives. Store it for up to 2 days in an airtight container with a tight-fitting lid. When ready to serve, transfer to a serving dish, garnish, and enjoy.
        • Storage: Leftover potato salad with boiled eggs will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. The potatoes will absorb the dressing over time, so you may need to adjust the seasoning or add a touch more yogurt or mayo to bring it back to its original consistency.

        Expert Tips

        While the recipe is pretty straightforward, we learned a few things during our recipe testing.  Below are a few helpful tips on how to make the best-deviled egg potato salad recipe:

        • Don’t overcook the potatoes: We want the potatoes to still hold their shape for optimal taste and texture. Overcooking the potatoes will result in a mushy potato salad.
        • Option to toss the dressing while the potatoes are still warm: During testing, we found that you can toss the dressing with the potatoes while they are still warm since warm potatoes better absorb all the flavors. 
        • Be gentle when mixing the potatoes: Since we’ve done our best not to overcook the potatoes, it’s important to have a gentle hand when mixing so that they don’t smush or lose their texture.
        • Make it ahead of time: Boiled egg and potato salad is a wonderful make-ahead recipe as the flavors get better the longer they have to marry together. Allow the salad to sit in the refrigerator for at least 1 hour, or up to 2 days, before serving.
        • Enjoy cold or room temperature: I like it at cool room temperature, not fridge cold but also not warm. For best results, remove it from the fridge 30 minutes before serving.
        • Taste before serving: As with all homemade recipes, taste and adjust the seasoning before serving.
        • Garnish before serving: Just before serving, gently and evenly garnish with paprika and fresh chives to keep the garnishes’ color and integrity. Otherwise, they will get lost with the rest of the ingredients.
        • Keep it cool: If serving it during the summer (i.e., as a part of your Memorial Day or Labor Day menu), make sure it is kept chilled, whether this is over a large bowl of ice, in a cooler, or indoors. This is a mayo and egg-based dish, so we want to keep the ingredients as cool as possible in the hot summer months for optimal food safety.
        Person mixing the potato salad from the top view.

        FAQs

        How long is deviled egg potato salad good for?

        Homemade deviled egg potato salad will keep for up to 3 days in an airtight container in the fridge. If the potato salad thickens slightly, adjust the consistency with a spoonful of mayo.

        Can you freeze deviled egg potato salad?

        I do not recommend freezing potato salad with deviled eggs, as this will alter the texture of the potatoes and make the dressing runny.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this Deviled Egg Potato Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

        Deviled egg potato salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
        Print

        Deviled Egg Potato Salad Recipe

        This deviled egg potato salad recipe combines the rich, savory flavors of deviled eggs with creamy potatoes, drawing inspiration from Southern-style potato salads. It is made lighter by substituting some of the dressing with Greek yogurt. Perfect as a side dish for Easter, summer cookouts, or winter potlucks.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 20 minutes
        Cook Time 20 minutes
        Total Time 40 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 364kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Salad:

        • 2 pounds Yukon Gold potatoes peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes (or yellow potatoes)
        • 8 hard-boiled eggs
        • 2 stalks green scallions chopped
        • 2 stalks celery finely chopped
        • 2 tablespoons sweet relish
        • ½ teaspoon paprika or smoked paprika
        • 1-2 tablespoons chives or green onions or parsley – chopped

        For The Dressing:

        • ½ cup mayonnaise
        • ½ cup full-fat Greek yogurt
        • 1 garlic clove minced
        • 2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar
        • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

        Instructions

        • Place the cubed potatoes in a large saucepan and cover with water. Put the lid on and bring the mixture to a boil over medium-high heat. Once boiled, turn the heat to medium and cook until the potatoes are fork-tender, 15-20 minutes.
        • Drain the potatoes thoroughly, place them into a large salad bowl, and set aside to cool.
        • Halve the hard-boiled eggs. Remove the cooked egg yolks and place them in a bowl. Using the back of a fork, mash them to break down any lumps.
        • Cut the cooked egg whites into 1-inch cubes and transfer them into a small bowl. Set aside.
        • To make the dressing, into the bowl containing the mashed egg yolks, add the mayonnaise, Greek yogurt, garlic, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, kosher salt and pepper. Whisk until thoroughly combined.
        • To assemble the salad, place the now-cooled potatoes, chopped egg whites, scallions, celery and sweet relish into the serving bowl.
        • Drizzle the dressing over everything and give it a gentle toss. Adjust the seasoning to your desired taste.
        • Sprinkle the salad with paprika and chives (if using). Serve!

        Notes

        • Yields: The recipe makes approximately 6-7 cups of potato salad which is ideal for 6 servings as a side dish. The nutritional values below is per serving.
        • Make-Ahead Instructions: Prepare the recipe as instructed, but do not add the paprika or chives. Store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. When ready to serve, transfer to a serving dish and garnish with paprika and chives.
        • Storage: Leftover potato salad can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. The potatoes will absorb the dressing over time, so you may need to adjust the seasoning or add a touch more yogurt or mayo to bring it back to its original consistency.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 364kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.002g | Cholesterol: 250mg | Sodium: 672mg | Potassium: 808mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 618IU | Vitamin C: 31mg | Calcium: 83mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/deviled-egg-potato-salad/feed/ 18
        Stuffed Cabbage Soup https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-cabbage-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-cabbage-soup/#comments Fri, 15 Mar 2024 01:05:17 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=17720 When it is this chilly outside, I can’t imagine anything better than a big pot of hearty soup for dinner,…]]>

        When it is this chilly outside, I can’t imagine anything better than a big pot of hearty soup for dinner, which is exactly why I have so many soup recipes on my blog. The newest addition to the collection, this stuffed cabbage soup recipe, is inspired by the world-famous Golabki soup, which is made with ingredients used in Polish stuffed cabbage rolls.

        Now, before we continue, let’s clarify the name because this weeknight soup/stew goes by many names. While traditionally called stuffed cabbage soup, many people refer to it as unstuffed cabbage roll soup and deconstructed cabbage soup. Why? Well, there’s no stuffing involved! To make matters a bit more confusing, since it is made with ground beef, some people refer to it as beef cabbage soup or even hamburger soup with cabbage.

        A bowl of cabbage roll soup garnished with yogurt from the top view.

        Ingredients You’ll Need:

        The good news is that this easy soup recipe is made with simple ingredients that you probably already have on hand. If not, you can customize it based on the recommendations below. To make it, you will need:

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Vegetable oil: I usually use olive oil but avocado oil or ghee would also work.
        • Onions and garlic: You will need one medium-sized yellow onion and two small fresh garlic cloves. Be sure to chop them finely.
        • Ground meat: You can make this cabbage soup with any ground meat. In my version here, I used lean ground beef, but you can also use an equal amount of ground chicken or ground turkey (my favorite – Turkey Cabbage Soup is also a regular in our house.) The flavor will be lighter, but I think ground turkey is a wonderful substitution for a leaner cabbage casserole soup recipe.
        • Spices: Paprika is a classic spice used in pretty much all versions of this beef cabbage tomato soup. However, I love the addition of ground cumin, which adds a new layer of flavor, but it is optional.
        • Tomato sauce and diced tomatoes: You’ll need one small (8-ounce) can of tomato sauce and one large (28-ounce) can of diced tomatoes.
        • Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper
        • Sweetener: A small amount of sugar helps balance the savory flavors. I used a tablespoon of honey, but an equal amount of granulated sugar or brown sugar would also work.
        • Chicken Stock: You can make homemade chicken stock or buy low-sodium chicken broth from the store. Alternatively, beef broth, vegetable stock, or water can be used in a pinch.
        • Head of cabbage: To make this recipe, you will need approximately 2 pounds of green cabbage, which should yield 6-7 cups of cored and thinly sliced cabbage. As you are buying green cabbage, be sure to get regular cabbage rather than the milder Napa or Savoy cabbage. Additionally, slicing the cabbage is the most time-consuming part of the whole process, so if you are short on time, you can use an equal amount of packaged coleslaw mix. However I would pick a brand that uses only green cabbage.
        • Rice: Half a cup of white rice helps thicken the soup. Brown rice can also be used but keep in mind that it takes longer to cook.
        • Vinegar: A glug of apple cider vinegar or white wine vinegar added at the last minute brings all the flavors together and adds a nice tanginess to the soup.
        • Fresh herbs: I used fresh Italian parsley to finish it off but chopped fresh thyme leaves would also work.

        Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

        • Quinoa or cauliflower rice: If you prefer a gluten-free version, you can substitute rice with an equal amount of rinsed quinoa or 1 ½ cups of cauliflower rice (about 1 package.) The cauliflower rice will hold its shape during cooking, so add it at the same time you add the rice.
        • Ground pork: The traditional cabbage roll soup recipe uses a combination of ground beef and ground pork. If you prefer, you can use half pork and half beef in your cabbage roll stew.
        • Greens and Vegetables: To increase the nutritional content, add a few handfuls of baby spinach or sliced kale at the very end when you add the garnish. The residual heat from the soup will naturally warm the vegetables, so no need to extend the cooking time.
        • Worcestershire sauce: It is optional but you can add a tablespoon of Worcestershire sauce for a welcome earthy and umami flavor.
        • Tomato: During my recipe research, I have seen several versions of this recipe made with various tomato-based ingredients, such as tomato soup (Southern versions use canned tomato soup) and spaghetti or marinara sauce. Honestly, I prefer the basic tomato sauce and diced tomatoes, but if you are in a pinch (and are okay with flavors being slightly different), you can use those ingredients instead.

        How to Make This Recipe?

        This healthy cabbage roll soup is prepared on the stovetop in a few easy steps. Simply:

        Person showing how to make stuffed cabbage soup in a collage of images.
        1. Sweat the aromatics: Heat the olive oil over medium-high heat in a large soup pot or heavy-bottomed pot, such as a Dutch oven. Sautee the onion until translucent.
        2. Brown the meat: Add the ground beef, ground cumin and paprika and cook, breaking up any larger pieces of meat using a wooden spoon, until browned, about 5-7 minutes. Add the minced garlic to the beef mixture and cook for an additional 30 seconds.
        3. Add the tomatoes and seasonings: Stir in the tomato sauce, diced tomatoes, salt, pepper, honey, and chicken stock.
        4. Stir in the cabbage and rice: Add the shredded cabbage and white rice. Cover it with the lid and bring the cabbage rice soup to a boil. 
        Cabbage roll stew being garnished with fresh herbs.
        1. Simmer: Once boiled, reduce the heat to a simmer and let it simmer for 25-30 minutes or until the rice is fully cooked and the cabbage is tender to your liking. Make sure to stir a few times during the cooking process.
        2. Garnish and Serve: Remove from the heat, add the vinegar, and garnish with parsley. Ladle into soup bowls and serve it while still warm.

        How To Make It In a Crock Pot? 

        If you prefer a more hands-off approach, you can make this ground beef cabbage soup in your slow cooker. Here is how to do it:

        1. Saute onion and ground beef: Heat olive oil in a large skillet and add onion. Saute for 5-7 minutes or until softened. Add the ground beef and cook, breaking the large chunks, for 7-8 minutes or until no longer pink.
        2. Add everything to the slow cooker: Transfer the onion and meat to the bowl of your slow cooker, along with all the other ingredients except vinegar and parsley.
        3. Stir to combine: Give it a good stir to ensure that cabbage leaves are thoroughly mixed with the rest of the ingredients.
        4. Slow cook: Set it on low heat setting for 4 hours or high heat setting for 2 hours.
        5. Garnish and serve: Once the cooking is completed, stir in the vinegar and garnish with parsley. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Ladle into bowls and serve.

         How To Store, Freeze, Thaw, and Reheat?

        My favorite thing about this homemade cabbage soup recipe is that the leftovers store and freeze well. Below are my tips for storing and freezing. However, keep in mind that the soup thickens as it sits, so when it is time to reheat it, you may have to add a cup (or two) of additional stock or water as necessary. Also, I recommend giving it a taste and adjusting the seasoning if needed.

        Here is how I do it:

        • Storage: Bring your soup to room temperature and transfer it into an airtight container. Store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
        • Freezing: Transfer the soup to 4-5 individual freezer-safe containers (affiliate link) or a large freezer bag. Seal tight, label and date, and put in the freezer for up to 2 months.
        • Thawing & Reheating: To reheat, thaw the frozen soup in the fridge overnight. Transfer to a large pot (or smaller pot for smaller portions), cover, and bring to a boil over medium heat, stirring a few times in between. 
        A pot of unstuffed cabbage roll soup with rice with a wooden spoon on the side.

        What To Serve It With?

        This stuffed cabbage stew is a wonderful dinner on its own. However, you can easily take it to the next level by serving it with some of the below recipes:

        • Bread: I cannot imagine a better accompaniment to this stew than a loaf of crusty bread. You can buy a French baguette from the store or make my No Knead Bread
        • Toppings: I love to finish this soup with a spoonful of yogurt dill sauce or tzatziki. Alternatively, you can also top it off with a dollop of sour cream for a tangy finish.
        • Salad: You can turn it into a whole meal by serving it with a simple salad such as my Spring Mix Salad or Yogurt Cucumber Salad.

        Expert Tips:

        While the recipe for unstuffed cabbage soup is pretty straightforward and easy, there are a few important things that I’d like to share to help you succeed on your first try:

        • Slice the cabbage thinly: Taking the time to slice your cabbage as thinly as possible will help the soup cook faster. Feel free to chop the longer slices into smaller pieces to make sure they are small and thin.
        • Use a large pot: Initially, when you place all of the ingredients in the pot, it may seem like a large amount, but as the cabbage cooks, it will shrink in volume. Nevertheless, it’s crucial to use a large pot (I used a 5 qt Dutch oven – affiliate link) to facilitate easy mixing of all the ingredients.
        • Keep an eye on it: Cabbage cooks quickly and loses its volume. To ensure everything is cooking evenly, it is best to give it a stir a few times during the process.
        • Taste for seasoning: The seasoning (both salt and vinegar) I listed below is minimal, so I recommend tasting it and adjusting accordingly before serving.

        FAQs

        What is stuffed cabbage soup?

        Stuffed cabbage soup is a hearty and comforting soup recipe inspired by the traditional ingredients and flavors of stuffed cabbage rolls, a popular meal in Eastern European countries like Poland and Hungary. It is a deconstructed version of the original recipe, where instead of wrapping meat and rice filling in cabbage leaves, this soup brings all the key components together in a single pot. People in the US referred to it mostly as Rolled Cabbage Soup, Unstuffed Cabbage Soup, and even cabbage soup with hamburger and rice because it is usually made with ground beef.

        Can stuffed cabbage soup be frozen?

        Yes, it can be. Simply bring it to room temperature, place it in an airtight container, label, date, and freeze for up to 2 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator.

        Similar Recipes You Might Also Like:

        Other Cabbage Recipes You Might Also Like:

        Other Heartwarming Soup Recipes You Might Like:

        If you try this Stuffed Cabbage Soup recipe or any other soup recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

        Stuffed cabbage roll soup in a bowl.
        Print

        Stuffed Cabbage Soup Recipe

        Stuffed Cabbage Soup recipe that tastes just like the stuffed cabbage rolls, but done in one pot and in less than 45 minutes. This dish freezes well and is a great way to feed a crowd.
        Course Dinner
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 30 minutes
        Total Time 45 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 449kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 tablespoon olive oil
        • 1 large onion chopped
        • 1 pound ground beef *
        • 1 teaspoon cumin
        • 1 tablespoon paprika
        • 2 cloves of garlic minced
        • 8 oz. tomato sauce
        • 1 28 ounce can diced tomatoes
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon black pepper
        • 1 tablespoon honey or granulated, cane or brown sugar
        • 3 cups homemade chicken stock
        • 3 cups water
        • 1 medium-sized head of cabbage approximately 6-7 cups, cored and sliced thinly
        • ½ cup white rice
        • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar or white wine vinegar
        • ¼ cups fresh Italian parsley chopped – more as garnish

        Instructions

        • Heat olive oil in a large pot (with a lid) over medium-high heat. Add in the onion and cook until translucent.
        • Stir in the beef, cumin, and paprika. Cook, breaking the large pieces of the meat with the back of a wooden spoon, for 5-7 minutes.
        • Stir in garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
        • Add in the tomato sauce, diced tomatoes, salt, pepper, and honey and give it a stir.
        • Pour in the stock and water. Stir in the cabbage and rice.
        • Put the lid on and bring it to a boil. Keeping the lid ajar, turn down the heat to medium, and let it simmer for 25-30 minutes or until rice is fully cooked and cabbage is tender to your liking. Be sure to stir it a few times during the cooking process.
        • Right before serving, stir in the vinegar and parsley. Taste for seasoning and add more if ncessary.
        • Serve immediately with crusty bread and, if preferred, with a dollop of yogurt or Tzatziki sauce.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes a big pot of soup (7-8 cups) ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Meat: If you want to switch things up, you can substitute ground beef with ground turkey or ground chicken. While they taste slightly different, I like both versions.
        • Liquid: I love using a blend of chicken stock and water as the cooking liquid for this recipe. While chicken stock adds depth of flavor, I find that incorporating some water helps balance the richness, creating a lighter and more enjoyable dish. Of course, if you prefer a richer flavor profile, you can certainly omit the water and use all chicken stock.
        • A very forgiving recipe: I used a medium-sized green cabbage, which yielded 6-7 cups of sliced cabbage, but there are no rules here. If you have a bit more cabbage, add in a little bit more liquid and vice versa.
        • Freezing: This dish freezes well. If you have leftovers, feel free to put them in an airtight container and freeze them for up to two months. A day before you want to serve, thaw them in the fridge overnight.
        • Reheating: Place the thawed soup in a large pot and reheat it on the stove. The soup thickens as it sits, so you may need to add 1-2 cups of additional stock or water. Also, be sure to taste for seasoning and adjust it as necessary.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 449kcal | Carbohydrates: 43g | Protein: 24g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 57mg | Sodium: 1053mg | Potassium: 886mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 12g | Vitamin A: 611IU | Vitamin C: 66mg | Calcium: 128mg | Iron: 4mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-cabbage-soup/feed/ 35
        Seed Crackers https://foolproofliving.com/seed-crackers/ https://foolproofliving.com/seed-crackers/#comments Tue, 12 Mar 2024 12:20:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=74092 If you’re like me, you can’t get enough of the super-crisp, nutty taste of homemade seed crackers. If you want…]]>

        If you’re like me, you can’t get enough of the super-crisp, nutty taste of homemade seed crackers. If you want to try more gluten-free recipes, I highly recommend whipping up my protein-packed Seed and Nut Bread—an ideal pick for an easy breakfast or a quick midday snack. Or, try out my Buckwheat Millet Bread for a foolproof loaf that tastes as good by itself as it does when topped with your favorite jam.

        Person cracking seed crackers on a sheet pan.

        Ingredients You Will Need

        In my opinion, the best way to make healthy crackers is by using this tasty variety of seeds. These simple ingredients—many of which are also superfoods!—are delicious, nutritious, and usually available at the local grocery store.

        Ingredients for healthy crackers recipe in small bowls.
        • Chia seeds: Packed with fiber, protein, and antioxidants, chia seeds are a must-have ingredient in this recipe for crackers with seeds. Not only do they have a mild nuttiness that’s undeniably delicious, but they’re also helpful in supporting bone health and aiding weight loss.
        • Raw & Unsalted Sunflower seeds: One of the most classic types of seeds, sunflower seeds lend these homemade crackers a nuanced sweetness and delicate crunch—but that’s not all! Sunflower seeds also transform this basic recipe into “anti-inflammatory crackers,” as their high levels of vitamin E and other plant compounds help reduce inflammation and boost heart health. When selecting sunflower seeds for this recipe, look for all-natural, raw ones to ensure they don’t have any added salt.
        • Unsalted Pumpkin seeds: Pumpkin seeds are also a great source of healthy fats, magnesium, antioxidants, and fiber, which may have other beneficial effects, such as regulating blood sugars and getting a good night’s sleep. I recommend buying pumpkin seeds that don’t have any additional salt—in other words, look for raw pumpkin seeds when shopping for this recipe.
        • Sesame seeds: Crunchy and buttery, sesame seeds taste fantastic in this recipe’s seed mixture. However, they also boast a range of other health benefits. For example, their high levels of B vitamins, calcium, and protein contribute to good vascular, muscular, and nerve health.
        • Ground flaxseeds (aka Flax meal): Flaxseeds are among the greatest superfoods to eat when you want to boost your digestive health. In particular, they contain high levels of fiber and omega-3 fatty acids that help relieve constipation and promote digestive regularity. During my recipe research, I found variations of this recipe where others used whole flaxseeds, but I chose to use ground flaxseeds (AKA flax meal) because they’re easier to digest and help work as a binder—similar to how flour works in bread recipes. Other versions may also use psyllium husk as a binder, but I found this unnecessary, given my use of ground flax seeds.
        • Hemp seeds: The addition of hemp seeds gives these seed crackers earthy and nutty undertones. This tiny seed also contains essential nutrients and minerals, such as fatty acids and manganese, which help maintain healthy skin, joints, and bones through collagen production.
        • Kosher or sea salt: Salt helps with flavoring the crackers and helps them achieve more of a store-bought savory flavor, so do not skip it.
        • Olive oil: I used olive oil to give these crackers their rich, full-bodied taste and golden-brown exterior, but you could also use avocado oil if preferred.
        • Water: If you’ve seen other seeded crackers recipes, you might find that some ask you to use boiling water—particularly when making psyllium husk crackers. However, I’ve found that the temperature of your water doesn’t affect seed crackers that don’t use psyllium husk as a binder. Therefore, room-temperature water will work just as well as warm water when following my flaxseed cracker recipe.

        Variations with Optional Add-Ins

        One bite of these sunflower seed crackers, and you’ll want to whip up a batch every week. Once you get the hang of it, you can even put your own spin on this basic recipe, giving it nutty, herby, or even cheesy undertones. The following are just a few of my go-to additions:

        • Seasonings and herbs: If you want to give your crunchy seed crackers bright, garden-fresh notes, I highly recommend adding some of your favorite herbs, like dried rosemary or thyme. Or, if you want a more robustly flavored chip, seasonings like garlic powder, onion powder, black pepper, and paprika will lend your seed cracker recipe irresistibly savory flavors. You can even make an easy everything bagel crackers recipe by adding a pinch of everything bagel seasoning!
        • Nuts: Filling, protein-packed, and oh-so-delicious, nuts make a great addition to this seeded cracker recipe. Depending on your desired flavor profile, I recommend using finely chopped nuts such as walnuts, pecans, or pistachios. You can also use a few tablespoons of almond flour (or even Homemade Almond Flour!) to reduce your prep time while still getting that classic “nut and seed crackers” taste. No matter which nuts you use, just be sure to use less of another dry ingredient to ensure a consistent ratio of wet-to-dry additions.
        • Nutritional yeast: No one can resist the savory, rich taste of a cheesy cracker. Simply add a bit of nutritional yeast to your recipe to give it a cheesy—yet vegan-friendly!—flavor.

        How to Make Seed Crackers?

        If you’ve never tried making crackers at home, you’re in luck! It’s a cinch to make these healthy crackers, and my step-by-step instructions will ensure they always come out with that satisfying “crunch.”

        1. Heat the oven: Preheat the oven to 325 degrees F. (162 degrees C.), line a baking sheet with parchment paper, and set it aside.
        A collage of images showing how to make seed crackers.
        1. Mix the dry ingredients: Add the chia seeds, sunflower seeds, pumpkin seeds, sesame seeds, ground flaxseeds, hemp seeds, and salt to a large mixing bowl. Stir the ingredients until thoroughly combined.
        2. Add the wet ingredients: Pour the olive oil and water into the same bowl and stir to combine. Let the mixture sit for five minutes—but no more than 7-8 minutes—until it thickens slightly. Too much resting time will result in an overly thick cracker.
        3. Transfer to pan: Scoop the mixture onto the prepared baking tray and use an offset spatula or large spoon to spread it into a single, even layer. Alternatively, you can place another piece of parchment paper on top of the mixture and spread it with your hands.
        Freshly baked crackers on a baking sheet from the top view.
        1. Bake: Bake the sesame seed crackers in the preheated oven for 50-55 minutes or until the edges turn a light brown. Then, remove them from the oven and let the crackers cool before serving.

        How to Store & Freeze?

        One of the best parts about this gluten-free cracker recipe is its easy storage. With long-lasting crispiness and hearty flavor, these crackers will stay fresh whether you store them in the pantry or the freezer.

        • Store: These keto seeded crackers can be stored in an airtight container at room temperature for up to ten days.
        • Freeze: For extra-long storage, you may freeze your crackers in a freezer-safe container until ready to eat. However, keep in mind that the low temperatures may make the seed chips more brittle, so you should store them in a flat orientation to avoid breakage.

        Ways to Serve These Seeded Crackers

        Homemade crackers are a must-try for anyone who loves versatility in their snacks. While they’re absolutely wonderful by themselves (literally, they’re such a great stand-alone snack!), they also make a fantastic spread when paired with other tasty recipes.

        • Dips: Easy, filling, and nutritious, this sesame crackers recipe makes a great snack alongside classic Mediterranean dips. Hummus is a zesty, creamy classic that pairs great with the earthy undertones of this easy cracker. You can also serve your recipe with smokier, savory-sweet dips, like Baba Ganoush or Muhammara.
        • Serve it as a flatbread: My favorite way to enjoy this recipe for seed crackers is as a flatbread topped with avocado, sliced eggs, and pickled red onions. You can also spread this cracker with cream cheese and smoked salmon for a quick morning fix. Or, if you’re in the mood for a sweeter variation, try spreading your crackers with nut butters, like peanut butter or almond butter, for a satisfying yet healthy dessert.
        • Cheese: No one can resist a five-star Meat and Cheese Board brimming with crisp crackers, flavorful cheeses, and savory meats. These multi-seed crackers make the perfect addition to any charcuterie board, but if you’re short on time, they also make an unbelievably delicious pairing with your favorite cheese.
        • Topping for salads: This sesame seed cracker recipe is the ultimate choice when you want to add a light crunch to your salad. You can crumble these crackers on top of any bowl of greens, from a sweet and tangy Apple Kale Slaw to a creamy Cauliflower Broccoli Salad.
        • With soups: Healthier and more flavorful than oyster crackers, these pumpkin seed crackers are an excellent topping for soup when crushed into small, crunchy bits. I especially love using this cracker recipe with my smooth-yet-zingy Carrot and Ginger Soup and creamily spiced Sweet Potato Soup.
        Avocado and egg toast made using homemade crackers with seeds.

        Expert Tips

        These gluten-free seed crackers are a foolproof recipe for beginners and experienced chefs alike. Check out the below pro-level tips for the crunchiest, most flavorful crackers, regardless of your skill level.

        • Rest timing: Though resting is essential in making this recipe, don’t let the mixture rest for more than five minutes. Too much resting time will cause the chia seeds to swell, giving you a “doughier” mix that’s harder to spread. As a result, your seed crackers will be thicker and less crisp.
        • Spread it evenly: Even spreading is vital to ensuring your super seed crackers come out with a thin, crisp, and uniform texture. You can use a spatula, a spoon, or the back of a ramekin to spread your mixture effectively. Or, for easier clean-up, you can also place an additional sheet of parchment paper on top of the cracker mixture and use your hands (or a rolling pin) to press it into an even layer—as long as you remove this second piece of parchment paper before baking, of course.
        • Sheet pan size: I suggest using an 18 x 13-inch pan to make these chia crackers, as this large pan size will allow for a very thin layer of batter. However, if your baking sheets are smaller, I recommend baking your crackers in two batches to ensure the mixture doesn’t lay too thickly.
        • Parchment paper: Lining your sheet pan is critical to easy cracker removal post-baking. If you’re a baker, you can also use a silpat to line your pan due to its reusable, non-stick silicone base.
        • Cutting: I usually choose to “cut” this multi-seed crackers recipe by cracking it, giving each cracker a rustic, aesthetically pleasing shape. However, you can also use a pizza cutter or a sharp knife to cut individual crackers if you prefer a less hands-on splitting method. If you want more uniformly shaped crackers, remove them halfway through baking and score the sheet with a sharp knife. That way, your keto crackers will split into more uniform portions once fully cooked.

        FAQs

        Have more questions about this healthy cracker recipe? This handy FAQ has everything you need, from nutritional information to term definitions.

        What are seed crackers?

        Seed crackers are a crispy, thin “flatbread” type of cracker that uses seeds—sesame, pumpkin, sunflower, chia, and more—as its primary base. In addition to these seeds, this cracker often uses other natural ingredients, like salt, water, and herbs, to give it texture and taste. These low-carb crackers also tend to be gluten-free, paleo-, and keto-friendly, as they use flour-alternative binders, like psyllium husk or ground flaxseeds. Furthermore, they often have a greater nutritional content due to their seeds’ high levels of fiber, vitamins, and antioxidants.

        What’s the difference between seeded crackers and Norwegian flatbread crackers?

        Also known as Norwegian crispbread, Norwegian flatbread crackers are similar to seeded crackers due to their thin, crispy consistency and several core ingredients. However, the Norwegian variation—popular at specialty grocery stores like Trader Joe’s—is thinner and more delicate, and it also includes ingredients like oat flakes, rice bran, sugar, and rye flour. Meanwhile, seed crackers don’t traditionally include flour, and they boast a slightly thicker, seed-based body.

        Are flaxseed crackers healthy?

        Definitely—in moderation, of course! Unlike store-bought crackers, this healthy crackers recipe includes nutrient-rich superfoods, like chia and sesame seeds, which have higher levels of protein and fewer carbs than flour-based alternatives. 

        How many calories in a seeded cracker?

        There are approximately 204 calories in each of these seed crackers.

        If you try this Seed Crackers recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        Person cracking freshly made seeded crackers from the top view.
        Print

        Seed Crackers Recipe

        Once you try these superfood-packed homemade crispy seed crackers, you’ll never want to buy crackers from the store again. This easy cracker recipe is vegan, gluten-free, low-carb, nut-free, and keto-friendly. Serve it as a snack, in place of bread (for avocado toast), or as a crunchy topping for salads and soups.
        Course Healthy Snacks
        Cuisine American, American Vegan
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 55 minutes
        Total Time 1 hour
        Servings 8 servings
        Calories 204kcal

        Ingredients

        • ½ cup chia seeds
        • ¼ cup sunflower seeds raw and unsalted
        • ¼ cup pumpkin seeds raw and unsalted
        • ¼ cup sesame seeds both white or black sesame seeds would work
        • ¼ cup ground flaxseeds (aka flax meal)
        • 3 tablespoons hemp seeds optional
        • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt or sea salt
        • 2 tablespoons olive oil
        • 1 cup water

        Instructions

        • Preheat oven to 325 degrees F. (162 degrees C.). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
        • In a large bowl, combine chia seeds, sunflower seeds, pumpkin seeds, sesame seeds, ground flaxseeds, hemp seeds, and salt. Stir to combine.
        • Pour in olive oil and water. Mix to combine. Let it sit for 5 minutes or until it is slightly thickened (gel-like consistency.) Do not let it sit for more than 7-8 minutes, or otherwise, your crackers will be thicker.
        • Transfer the mixture to the prepared sheet and spread it evenly throughout the sheet pan using an offset spatula or a large spoon. Alternatively, you can place another parchment paper on top and spread it using your hands or a rolling pin.
        • Bake for 50-55 minutes or until the edges turn light brown. Remove from the oven and let it cool before serving.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes a large sheet of crackers, ideal for 8 servings. The nutritional values listed below are per cracker.
        • Source: This recipe has been adapted from my dear friend Alexandra of Occasionally Eggs’ wonderful cookbook. I made a few minor changes to her original recipe, but all credit goes to her.
        • Water: Some versions of this multi-seed crackers recipe use boiling water. I tested it using both boiling and room-temperature water and decided that room-temperature water works just fine.
        • Make it your own: After you make this recipe (as written) a few times, feel free to experiment with different flavors by adding other ingredients like poppy seeds, fennel seeds, garlic powder, onion powder, nutritional yeast, and more.
        • Store: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container at room temperature for up to ten days.
        • Freeze: For extra-long storage, you may freeze leftovers in a freezer-safe container until ready to eat. However, keep in mind that the low temperatures may make them more brittle, so you should store them in a flat orientation to avoid breakage.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 204kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.02g | Sodium: 296mg | Potassium: 149mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 38IU | Vitamin C: 0.3mg | Calcium: 139mg | Iron: 3mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/seed-crackers/feed/ 21
        Shredded Chicken Nachos https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-nachos/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-nachos/#comments Tue, 06 Feb 2024 16:36:33 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=16128 No party menu is complete without this chicken nachos recipe. However, suppose you want to take this dish to the…]]>

        No party menu is complete without this chicken nachos recipe. However, suppose you want to take this dish to the next level. In that case, you can pair it with dozens of other delectable Mexican recipes, such as my creamy Basic Guacamole Recipe or my sweet-and-spicy Easy Street Corn.

        Or, if you’re in the mood for another savory and succulent meat dish, my Slow Roasted Chicken Wings strike the perfect balance between crispy, flavorful skin and tender meat. No matter what you choose, you can easily spice up the day with a pitcher of my Easy Pineapple Margarita Recipe.

        Pulled chicken nachos garnished with corn, avocados, and tomatoes on a sheet pan.

        Chicken Nachos Ingredients

        There’s no need to empty out your wallet to make this easy shredded chicken nachos recipe. You only need a handful of pantry-ready ingredients to make this authentically delectable, restaurant-quality dish.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Chicken: Nearly any shredded chicken would work when making pulled chicken for nachos, whether you want to use boneless chicken thighs or boneless chicken breasts. In terms of preparation, I roasted my chicken in the oven with a coating of spices, then shredded them while warm to achieve the most attuned seasoning profile. However, if you prefer a more hands-free method, you can also make nachos with rotisserie chicken or cook your chicken in a crock pot.
          You can even use leftover chicken if you have some on hand or make a grilled chicken nachos recipe for a smokier, summer-fresh flavor. Regardless of your cooking process, just be sure you have 4-5 cups of shredded chicken before assembling your nachos. That being said, however, you can also substitute this recipe’s chicken for sauteed ground beef if you’d prefer a savorier, more pronounced meat flavor.
        • Oil: Though I use olive oil to cook chicken for nachos, any other flavorless vegetable oil, such as avocado oil, would work.
        • Seasoning: I’ve found that the best seasoning for chicken nachos is a basic, smoky, and piquant mix of chili powder, ground cumin, salt, and pepper. Alternatively, you can use your favorite pre-made taco seasoning if you’re in the mood for a quicker seasoning solution.
        • Enchilada sauce: Though an optional addition, I love adding enchilada sauce to my shredded chicken nachos, as it adds a savory, light richness to the mixture. You can use any store-bought brand you prefer (my favorite is Siete Red Enchilada Sauce -affiliate link) or make your enchilada sauce from scratch.
        • Tortilla chips: When selecting a chip for this chicken nacho bake, I highly recommend picking thick, sturdy, restaurant-style tortilla chips. This chip style better withstands baking and won’t get as soggy as other varieties. Furthermore, if you have the time, you can also make homemade tortilla chips for a fresher, more customizable taste. However, I don’t recommend making chicken nachos with Doritos and any other commercially seasoned chips, as they are relatively flimsy and won’t withstand the moisture of the wetter ingredients.
        • Cheese: To ensure an even distribution of cheese throughout your nachos, you must use shredded cheese. I use Monterey Jack cheese due to its buttery flavor and highly meltable composition. However, you can use Pepper Jack cheese, mozzarella, or Colby Jack, as well, to achieve a spicier, creamier, or tangier flavor profile. Or, you can even use a blend of cheeses for a more full-bodied taste, with some of my favorites being a Mexican blend cheese and Cheddar Jack (a mix of cheddar cheese and Monterey Jack).
        • Black beans: Black beans are a great way to add a tender, mildly sweetheartiness to chicken and cheese nachos. Don’t have any black beans in the pantry? You can use pinto beans instead, giving your nachos a creamier, earthier taste.

        What to Put on Chicken Nachos?

        The sky’s the limit when it comes to toppings and customizing this loaded chicken nachos recipe. However, these classic toppings—zesty, creamy, and bright—are my favorite ingredients to give this dish an authentic Mexican taste.

        Topping ideas for homemade nachos with chicken from the top view.
        • Salsa with Cherry Tomatoes: This easy salsa recipe is my go-to when making easy chicken nachos. Not only does this sauce boast robustly bright flavors, but it also comes together in just ten minutes! No time to make salsa? Sliced or diced tomatoes would also work.
        • Guacamole: Creamy, garlicky, and tangy, guacamole is a no-brainer when it comes to nachos. One taste of this simple side and the entire bowl will disappear in seconds.
        • Jalapenos: If you’re a fan of heat, jalapenos are just what you need to lend a kick of spice to your chicken cheese nachos. If you prefer a crisper, fresher, and more colorful topping, I recommend using fresh jalapeños. However, if you’re in the mood for a softer texture and a more tart flavor, pickled jalapenos are the way to go.
        • Sour cream: Sour cream—smooth, light, and tangy—makes an excellent addition to the savory, meatier base of this Mexican chicken nachos recipe. Serve this ingredient as a dippable side or a dollop on top, and your guests will be licking their fingers clean.
        • Corn: This mildly sweet and tender addition adds a beautiful pop of color to these sheet pan nachos.
        • Olives: If you’ve ever found yourself reaching for the table salt to add extra flavor to your meal, this ingredient is for you. Black olives are briny, salty, and brilliant at giving these chicken nachos a savory depth. 
        • Squeeze of lime juice: My favorite way to balance the hearty composition of pulled chicken nachos is to add a little bit of lime juice to the mixture. This addition adds a bright, acidic element to the recipe, ensuring every ingredient comes to life.
        • Mexican Pickled Red Onions: Tangy, citrusy, and oh-so-flavorful, pickled onions are a great way to enliven your nachos with equal tenderness and crunch.

        How to Make Chicken Nachos with Shredded Chicken?

        There’s a reason why this easy nachos recipe is such a classic. My step-by-step instructions take the stress out of menu planning, requiring minimal effort and zero hassle. If you are using leftover or rotisserie chicken, you can skip the first six steps and start assembling your nachos.

        1. Prep the oven: Preheat your oven to 400 degrees F.
        A collage of images showing how to prepare and cook chicken to make nachos.
        1. Dry the chicken: Use paper towels to pat dry the chicken, then transfer them onto a baking sheet. I use a 13 x 18-inch baking sheet (also known as a half-sheet pan) to fit all my poultry comfortably.
        2. Season the chicken: Drizzle the chicken with olive oil and sprinkle both sides with chili powder, ground cumin, salt, and pepper.
        3. Bake: Add the seasoned chicken to the oven and let it roast for 15-20 minutes or until its internal temperature reaches 165 degrees F.
        4. Shred: Remove the cooked chicken from the oven, then shred it using two forks.
        Images showing how to assemble shredded chicken, tortilla chips and cheese to make nachos.
        1. Add enchilada sauce (optional step): Drizzle the shredded chicken with the enchilada sauce, and broil the mixture for two minutes. When done, remove the chicken from the oven and set it aside.
        2. Prepare the baking sheet: Turn down the oven’s temperature to 350 degrees F., and line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
        3. Assemble the first layer: Spread your first layer of tortilla chips on the lined pan. Top them off with half of the shredded cheese, black beans, and shredded chicken.
        4. Build the second layer: Place a second layer of chips on top of the first, followed by the remaining black beans and shredded chicken.
        5. Bake: Put the chicken nachos in the oven and bake them for 15-18 minutes or until the cheese melts thoroughly.
        Chicken cheese nachos topped of with nacho toppings from the top view.
        1. Add the toppings: Top off your baked nachos with your preferred toppings and serve while still hot.

        How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat? 

        It’s no secret that homemade chicken nachos—crunchy, flavorful, and melty—taste best on the day you make them. Therefore, I recommend assembling the dish right before serving to achieve maximum crispiness.

        Need more time for day-of preparation? Not to worry: These expert make-ahead and storage tips will ensure you can cut your prep time in half and don’t have to forfeit a single bite of this chicken nacho recipe.

        • Make ahead: The best way to kickstart your meal prep is by making the shredded chicken for nachos ahead of time and cooking and shredding it in advance. That way, you only need to assemble and bake the nachos just before you want to serve it. Also, you can plan out and prepare your toppings ahead of time to simplify serving the day of.
        • Storage: To store your pulled chicken nachos, first let them come to room temperature. Then, either transfer them to an airtight container or tightly cover them with stretch film. You can then put them in the fridge until ready to reheat.
        • Reheat: I recommend reheating these chicken nachos in the oven under low heat—about 300 degrees F.—or until the cheese melts and the remaining ingredients heat through. I also suggest removing any fresh toppings from the dish before heating, as they won’t withstand the higher temperatures of the oven, thereby losing their freshness. Then, you can re-add them to the nachos when ready to serve.

        What Tastes Good with Chicken Nachos? 

        Versatile, snackable, and utterly irresistible, chicken black bean nachos are one of the best dishes to make if you love putting your unique spin on new recipes. Below, I’ve assembled essential recipes to serve with your savory bake, transforming this simple dish into a five-star menu.

        • Dips and salsas: One of the most iconic pairings, salsa exquisitely balances the heartier base of roast chicken nachos with light, bright, and tomatoey flavors. Pico de gallo is an effortless go-to for this dish, though you can also add notes of tropical, juicy flavors by making my Pineapple Mango Salsa or Peach Salsa. Or, you can whip up an easy Hummus Dip for an even creamier, umami-rich condiment.
        • Tacos: When you think of Mexican cuisine, chances are you immediately think of tacos—a savory, fresh, and flavor-filled dish anyone can customize to their liking. With my recipe for Brisket Tacos, you can fill your plate with smoky, melt-in-your-mouth flavors. Or, try pairing your nachos with Quinoa Black Bean Tacos for a vegan-friendly dish that has all the zesty, creamy taste you could want from your favorite Mexican food.
        • Salads: Want to add a lighter, more nutritious edge to your nachos? Serve them alongside a bowl of Black Bean and Corn Salad for a zesty, veggie-packed side, or spoon out a serving of Mexican Street Corn Salad (AKA “esquites”) for a dish that’s equal parts spicy, tangy, and creamy.
        • Margaritas: What party menu is complete without a sweet, boozy treat? My Easy Pineapple Margarita and Blueberry Margaritas are just what you need to give this classic drink a sweet, fruity spin. You can even blend up a Strawberry Basil Margarita to balance your juicier notes with a gourmet, herby finish.
        Person with a chunk of pioneer woman nachos in her hand.

        Expert Tips

        Authentic Mexican chicken nachos are at your fingertips when learning from these pro-level tips. Below, you’ll find everything you need to make crisp, gooey, and savory nachos, from proper layering to serving suggestions.

        • Layer evenly: When making sheet pan chicken nachos, it’s vital that you evenly distribute the cheese across the chips to prevent uneven and/or soggy nachos. If you plan on making more than two layers, I recommend keeping the middle layer to a minimum (except for the cheese, of course!). I also suggest draining your black beans and chicken before adding them to your nachos to keep them from becoming soggy.
        • Don’t skimp on shredded cheese: The secret to making restaurant-style nachos is to be generous when it comes to the cheese. Though four cups of cheese may sound like a lot, it’s the key to giving each chip a balance of crisp, gooey, and rich flavors so you don’t end up with bland or topping-less bites in your final dish.
        • Make it your own: The beauty of making homemade nachos with chicken is that you can customize it any way you like. Use this easy recipe as a starting place, and then feel free to mix and match the dish with what you have on hand. Remember, too, that this recipe is pretty forgiving, so it’s up to you what you want to add to your mixture.
        • Drain properly: I think it’s safe to say that no one enjoys soggy nachos. Therefore, the best way to prevent sogginess is to thoroughly drain each of your ingredients (besides the cheese and chips) before layering them into your recipe. In particular, I recommend draining the shredded chicken, beans, and wet toppings before making this simple chicken nachos recipe.
        • Add the toppings right before serving: For best results, I recommend adding your fresher toppings to your dish right before serving. Otherwise, these additions (like guacamole or pico de gallo) may lose their texture and flavor, resulting in a wet, flavorless layer.
        • Serve right away: Gooey, succulent, and flavorful, baked chicken nachos taste stellar when they’re warm. That’s why I always suggest serving this dish immediately when the cheese is still melty, and the ingredients are hot.

        FAQs

        You don’t have to be a professional Mexican chef to make chicken nachos in the oven. I answer all your remaining questions in this easy guide, ensuring your dish comes out exquisitely layered and delightfully crisp.

        How do you layer nachos so they don’t get soggy?

        The best chicken nachos recipe is one that doesn’t turn soggy after adding your favorite toppings. To ensure your nachos remain as dry and crisp as possible, fully drain all the ingredients—besides the cheese and the chips—before adding them to your recipe. You may also consider keeping any wet ingredients to a minimum to reduce their chances of releasing excess liquid. Finally, using a sturdy chip—such as a restaurant-style tortilla chip—is the key to reducing sogginess, as they tend to be thicker and less absorbent than other varieties.

        What order do you layer nachos in?

        In general, I recommend beginning each layer of your nachos with chips, topped with cheese, and other heat-friendly toppings (such as black beans). Then, each layer should have the same combination of chips, cheese, and beans. After removing your nachos from the oven, you may then add your fresh toppings—such as guacamole and tomatoes—to ensure they maintain their flavor and texture. Despite these instructions, however, remember that this dish is highly forgiving, so don’t worry if you miss an ingredient in a layer or want to play around with your ingredients.

        Other Game Day Recipes You Might Also Like

        Once you learn how to make shredded chicken nachos, you’ll be itching for more tasty dishes to serve at your next game-day party. These lip-smacking recipes will ensure everyone gets their fill with a perfectly savory, seasoned, and snackable taste.

        If you try this Shredded Chicken Nachos recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Sheet-Pan Chicken Nachos Recipe Photographed from the top view from a closer view.
        Print

        Healthy Game Day Recipe Idea – Shredded Chicken Nachos

        Here is a reader-favorite football food recipe idea: Tortilla chips layered with cheese, black beans, tomatoes, avocado, and other veggies for a drool worthy Shredded Chicken Nachos perfect for any party. Take it out of the oven, serve warm, and accept the compliments.
        Course Appetizer
        Cuisine Mexican
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 45 minutes
        Total Time 1 hour
        Servings 8 servings
        Calories 998kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Chicken

        • 1 ½ lb boneless skinless chicken thighs or breasts
        • 2 tablespoons olive oil
        • 1 tablespoon chili powder
        • 1/2 teaspoon ground cumin
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
        • ½ cup enchilada sauce

        For The Nachos

        • 8 cups tortilla chips
        • 4 cups shredded Monterey Jack cheese or mozzarella
        • 1 14 oz can black beans, drained and rinsed

        As Toppings (optional)

        • 1 cup guacamole
        • 1 cup tomatoes diced or sliced
        • 1 cup fresh or canned corn drained if using canned
        • 1/4 cup jalapenos fresh/sliced or pickled

        Instructions

        • Preheat oven to 400 degrees.
        • Pat dry chicken with paper towels. Transfer them onto a baking sheet (I used a half-sheet—AKA a 13 x 18-inch baking sheet.).
        • Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with chili powder, ground cumin, salt, and pepper on both sides.
        • Roast in the oven for 15-20 minutes or until the internal temperature reaches 165 degrees Fahrenheit.
        • Remove from the oven. Shred the now-cooked chicken using two forks.
        • Drizzle them with the enchilada sauce and broil for 2 minutes. Remove from the oven and set it aside.*
        • Turn the oven temperature down to 350 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
        • Spread tortilla chips on a sheet pan in a single layer. Top them off with half of the cheese, black beans, and shredded chicken ensuring that they are distributed evenly.
        • Continue with a second layer of chips, cheese, beans, and shredded chicken.
        • Bake for 15-18 minutes or until the cheese is fully melted.
        • Right before serving, top it off with your favorite nacho toppings and serve while still hot.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe yields nachos that is ideal for 8 servings when served as an appetizer. The below calorie information is per serving and does not include any of the optional toppings.
        • Chicken: While we roasted the chicken to make nachos, this recipe would also work with any cooked leftover chicken or store-bought rotisserie chicken. All you have to do is to shred it before assembling. You’ll need about 4-5 cups of shredded chicken to make this easy chicken nachos recipe. Additionally, if you are cooking your own chicken, you can use skinless chicken breasts instead of chicken thighs as well.
        • Enchilada Sauce: Broiling chicken with enchilada sauce is an optional step and can be skipped if you want to make it faster or you do not have enchilada sauce on hand. 
        • Drain: To prevent your nachos from becoming soggy, be sure to drain black beans very well before layering with chips and cheese.
        • Make Ahead: This recipe tastes best on the day that it is made. However, you can make the chicken ahead of time and have it ready for assembly. Once you have the chicken cooked, all you need to do is to layer it as written in the recipe.
        • Storage: Before refrigerating your nachos, be sure to bring them to room temperature. Then, either transfer them to an airtight container or tightly cover them with stretch film or aluminum foil and store them in the fridge for up to 2 days.
        • Reheat: We recommend reheating these chicken nachos in the oven under low heat—about 300 degrees F.—or until the cheese melts and the remaining ingredients heat through. Be sure to remove any fresh toppings from the dish before heating, as they won’t withstand the higher temperatures of the oven, thereby losing their freshness.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 998kcal | Carbohydrates: 84g | Protein: 35g | Fat: 60g | Saturated Fat: 18g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 16g | Monounsaturated Fat: 22g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 121mg | Sodium: 1213mg | Potassium: 608mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1128IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 560mg | Iron: 3mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-nachos/feed/ 15
        Leftover Prime Rib Sandwich https://foolproofliving.com/prime-rib-sandwich/ https://foolproofliving.com/prime-rib-sandwich/#respond Wed, 31 Jan 2024 19:13:28 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=73428 Don’t you just love a delicious Prime Rib Roast with its juicy, perfectly pink center? I know I do, and…]]>

        Don’t you just love a delicious Prime Rib Roast with its juicy, perfectly pink center? I know I do, and I never want to see any prime rib leftovers go to waste. Since it is such a large meal with lots of leftovers, I am always in search of new recipes.

        Enter leftover prime rib sandwiches! It’s a fun way to transform an elegant dinner into a casual meal.

        Leftover Prime Rib Sandwich from the top view.

        Ingredients You’ll Need

        Leftover prime rib sandwiches start with the meat, of course. After that, it’s your typical toppings of condiments, cheese, greens, and more. As always, use these ingredient quantities as a guide, and feel free to use more or less based on your preference and whatever other fixings you prefer.

        Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
        • Bread: I love classic French bread or baguette, but you can use ciabatta bread, Italian bread, or even a hoagie roll to make it more of a prime rib sub.
        • Prime rib: Use leftover Prime Rib that’s thinly sliced or shaved (more on this below) or even smoked prime rib. While prime rib is the meat of choice today, you can use this same recipe for any slow-roasted meat, like Pot Roast, corned beef, pastrami, or leftover roast beef.
        • Condiments: Creamy Horseradish Sauce with Sour Cream is classic, or go for a healthier approach with Horseradish Yogurt Sauce. Or, keep it simple by whipping together a horseradish mayo, or simply use plain mayonnaise, stone ground, or Dijon mustard.
        • Cheese: I love slices of provolone cheese, but you can also use Havarti, Swiss cheese, mild white cheddar cheese, or Pepper Jack cheese as well.
        • Baby arugula: Peppery arugula cuts through the richness of the meat and cheese, but feel free to use thinly sliced romaine, iceberg lettuce, or even mixed greens.
        • Sweet caramelized onions: Rich caramelized onions take this prime rib leftover sandwich up a notch, but you can keep it simple with sliced onions, Pickled Red Onions, sautéed onion, or Sauteed Shiitake Mushrooms.

        How to Make Prime Rib Sandwiches

        This leftover prime rib sandwich recipe comes together in a few easy steps. Here’s how I like to do it:

        1. Preheat the oven: Preheat the broiler to High. Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper. 
        2. Slice prime rib: Remove any excess fat from the roast, then slice the prime rib thinly with a sharp knife.
        A collage of photos showing how to prepare bread for standing rib roast sandwich.
        1. Cut bread: Cut the baguette into four equal pieces. Then, slice each piece in half lengthwise, ensuring not to cut all the way through.
        2. Spread with horseradish cream sauce: Open the bread and spread two tablespoons of horseradish sauce on each side.
        Photos showing how to assemble Prime rib sandwiches.
        1. Layer with meat and cheese: On one side of the bread, layer a few slices of leftover meat and one slice of cheese. Repeat the same process with the remaining sandwiches. Transfer them to the prepared baking sheet.
        2. Broil: Broil for 2 minutes or just until the cheese melts.
        3. Finish and serve: Remove from the oven and finish each sandwich with a handful of fresh arugula, caramelized onions, and some freshly cracked black pepper, if desired. Enjoy!

        How to Store and Reheat Leftovers?

        Since leftover rib roast sandwiches have so many components, it’s best to assemble them fresh the day you are going to serve or up to 1 day in advance. And to ensure none of that delicious prime rib meat goes to waste, proper storage is key. For the best storage and reheating, simply:

        • Storage: Wrap the leftover prime rib roast (or assembled sandwiches) tightly in plastic wrap or keep it in an airtight container. Store the sandwiches in the fridge for 1 day and the prime rib for up to 3 days.
        • Reheat sandwiches: If reheating the entire sandwich the next day, remove the arugula and wrap the sandwich in foil. Then, reheat sandwiches in a low oven (250 – 300 degrees F) for 10-15 minutes or until warmed to your liking.

        Variations

        Thinly sliced prime rib is just as delicious served open-faced, pressed, wrapped, or mini. Some of my favorite variations for rib roast sandwiches include:

        • Open Face Prime Rib Sandwich: Slice the bread all the way through and serve it open-faced with an extra slice of cheese on each side.
        • Prime Rib Panini: Use sliced sourdough or ciabatta and press it on a panini press. Or, press the sliced prime rib sandwiches down in a large skillet with a baking sheet weighed down with a skillet or small saucepan. You can also use a panini press if you have one.
        • Prime Rib Wrap: Wrap all the workings of a prime rib sandwich in your favorite flatbread, like Lavash Bread, pita bread, or corn tortillas.
        • Leftover Prime Rib Sliders Recipe: Purchase a package of slider buns or make Homemade Brioche Rolls and assemble the sandwiches as directed.
        Person holding a shaved prime rib sandwich in her hand.

        What to Serve with Prime Rib Sandwiches?

        Whether you want a sauce for prime rib sandwiches or some extra side dishes to make it more filling, here are my favorites ways to serve:

        • Au Jus Sauce: Serve a classic French Dip sandwich by simply having some warm Au Jus Sauce in a small bowl on the side. Dip and enjoy!
        • Horseradish Sauce: Serve with extra horseradish sauce on the side to wake up your taste buds.
        • Gravy: If you have some leftover beef gravy, it would make a good dipping sauce or a drizzle.
        • Coleslaw: Give it some crunch with some Yogurt Coleslaw or No Mayo Coleslaw on the side.
        • Roasted Vegetables: Balance this hearty meal with some roasted vegetables, like Roasted Asparagus or Air Roasted Red Potatoes, served on the side – or right on top of the sandwich!
        • Green Salad: Keep it light with a simple green leafy salad such as my Spring Mix Salad or Butter Lettuce Salad.
        • Pickle Spears: I love any type of sandwich with pickle spears, and it gives it that special deli appeal. Go for traditional pickles or Gherkins.

        Expert Tips

        • Slicing the meat: When cutting the prime rib into thin slices, patience and a steady grip are key, but there are a few extra techniques to pay attention to:
          • Chill: Keep the prime rib roast chilled and in the fridge until the moment you are ready to slice. Cold meat is sturdy, with all the muscle fibers held in place, and as a result, it is easier to slice.
          • Use a sharp knife: While I’m sure many of us do not have a meat slicer lying around, the key to achieving super thin slices is to use a sharp knife and sturdy work surface. A long, sharp chef’s knife or a serrated knife will produce even cuts without turning the meat into shreds.
          • Trim the fat: If there is an extra thick layer of fat on the outside, trim it down a bit, but make sure to keep some for extra flavor.
          • Control thickness: Slice the meat about ⅛ to ¼ inch in thickness, and always against the grain (slice perpendicular to the direction of the muscle fibers).
          • Storage: If you are not enjoying the slices of prime rib right away, store them in an airtight container in the fridge with pieces of parchment paper between every few slices.
        • Reheating the prime rib slices: It is optional, but if you want, you can reheat the shaved prime rib before assembling the sandwiches. To do so, place ½ cup of leftover au jus or beef broth in a small skillet over medium heat and bring to a simmer. Add the leftover prime rib slices and heat for 2-3 minutes or until warm. Remove the meat slices with tongs and allow the excess liquid to drip off before assembling the sandwiches.
        • Keep an eye on it when broiling: Keep the oven rack in the middle, and watch closely as the cheese can burn easily!
        • Fresh bread: Some say that a sandwich is as good as its bread, and this one is no exception. Regardless of the type of bread you use, the freshest bread is the best bread for prime rib, so make sure to stop at your local bakery for a freshly baked baguette just before assembling.

        FAQs

        How to shave prime rib for making prime rib sandwiches?

        Thinly sliced prime rib is easy with a long, sharp chef’s knife, a steady work surface, and cold meat. This ensures whole, even slices without turning the meat into shreds.

        How to reheat prime rib sandwich?

        Reheat a prime rib sandwich in a low heat oven (250 – 300 degrees F) wrapped in foil for 10-15 minutes. The low heat prevents overcooking the meat, while the foil wrap keeps the bread crispy.

        What cheese for prime rib sandwich?

        The best cheese for prime rib sandwich is your preference, but a classic pairing can be either provolone, Havarti, Swiss, mild Cheddar, or even Pepper Jack.

        Other Sandwich Recipes You Might Also Like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this Shaved Prime Rib Sandwich recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Prime rib sandwiches served with au jus on the side.
        Print

        Leftover Prime Rib Sandwich Recipe

        Make this Prime Rib Sandwich, and never let leftover prime rib go to waste. Thinly sliced prime rib layered with horseradish sauce (or mayo), provolone cheese, caramelized onions, and fresh arugula, this easy sandwich is the best way to use leftover rib roast.
        Course Lunch, Sandwich
        Cuisine American
        Diet Halal
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 2 minutes
        Total Time 17 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 446kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 crusty bread such as baguette*, French bread, or Ciabatta
        • ½ cup horseradish sauce or mayonnaise
        • 1 pound cooked prime rib
        • 4 slices Provolone cheese
        • 2 cups arugula rinsed and drained
        • 1 cup caramelized onions or sliced red onions (optional)
        • Salt and pepper to taste

        Instructions

        • Arrange your oven rack in the middle position. Preheat the broiler. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set aside.
        • Using a sharp chef’s knife, slice the prime rib thinly, making sure to remove any excess fat.
        • Divide the baguette into four equal sections. Slice each section lengthwise, ensuring not to cut completely through, keeping the halves attached.
        • Open the bread and evenly distribute two tablespoons of horseradish sauce (4 tablespoons in total per sandwich) on both interior sides.
        • Layer a few slices of prime rib and one slice of cheese on top. Repeat the same process to assemble the rest of the sandwiches. Transfer them onto the prepared baking sheet.
        • Broil for 2 minutes or until the cheese is melted.
        • Remove from the oven and top each sandwich with fresh arugula or caramelized onion (if using).
        • Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
        • Serve while they are still warm.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 4 sandwiches. The calorie information below is per sandwich.
        • Slicing the prime rib: We find that it is easier to slice meat when it is cold using a sharp knife. This way, you can get equally cut slices based on your desired level of thickness.
        • Horseradish Sauce: We used our horseradish sauce here but you can substitute it with mayo. Alternatively, you can also make horseradish sauce with yogurt for a lighter option. 
        • Warming up the meat: It is optional, but if you prefer, you can warm up the meat. To do so, place half a cup of leftover au jus or beef broth in a small skillet and bring to a simmer. Add the rib roast slices and heat for 2-3 minutes or until warm. Remove the meat slices with tongs and allow the excess liquid to drip off before assembling the sandwiches.
        • Storage: This sandwich is best on the day it is made, but you can store leftovers in the fridge for up to one day. Simply wrap the leftover sandwiches tightly in plastic wrap or keep them in an airtight container before placing them in the fridge.
        • Reheating: To reheat, remove the arugula and wrap the sandwich in foil. Then, reheat sandwiches in a low oven (250 – 300 degrees F) for 10-15 minutes or until warmed to your liking.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 446kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 36g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Cholesterol: 82mg | Sodium: 321mg | Potassium: 474mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 406IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 199mg | Iron: 2mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/prime-rib-sandwich/feed/ 0
        Chicken Noodle Soup with Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-potato-noodle-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-potato-noodle-soup/#comments Thu, 11 Jan 2024 00:31:07 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=12430 If you never thought to put potatoes in chicken noodle soup, think again. The potatoes add that much more comfort,…]]>

        If you never thought to put potatoes in chicken noodle soup, think again. The potatoes add that much more comfort, fiber, and creamy consistency, much like my Chicken Vegetable Soup and Lemon Chicken Orzo Soup.

        If you love soup season and are a fan of chicken soups in general, be sure to also try my Tomatillo Chicken Soup, Butternut Squash and Chicken Soup, and Hearty Chicken and Wild Rice Soup.

        Hearty chicken soup with noodles and potatoes in a bowl from the top view.

        Ingredients

        This chicken and potato noodle soup is full of pantry staples and ingredients easy to find at the grocery store. You will need:

        • Olive oil: I used olive oil, but you can use any vegetable oil. An equal amount of unsalted butter can also be used for a richer flavor.
        • Vegetables: A classic base of carrots, celery, and onions (known as mirepoix) provides maximum flavor. Cut the vegetables all roughly the same size for even cooking.
        • Garlic: Garlic cloves give it that extra punch of savory flavor.
        • Chicken Stock: Homemade Chicken Stock or store-bought broth will both work. If store-bought, go for low-sodium chicken broth.
        • Chicken: I love using pre-cooked chicken, and it’s a sure time saver. Pick up a rotisserie chicken at the supermarket. Or, you can use any leftover chicken you have in your fridge. I usually make a batch of my Baked Bone-In Chicken Breasts over the weekend and keep it in the fridge to use in recipes like this. If you prefer dark meat, feel free to shred some cooked skinless chicken thighs instead. 
        • Potatoes: I used russet potatoes, but Yukon gold potatoes or red potatoes would also be delicious. The key is to have about 3 cups of cubed potatoes.
        • Seasonings: A simple mix of Kosher salt, fresh black pepper, and fresh thyme gives it all the flavor we need. For a low-sodium version, reduce the salt to 1 teaspoon
        • Egg noodles: Go for wide egg noodles or medium, whichever you can find. Another short-cut pasta shape, like orzo or ditalini, would also work.
        • Lemon juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice added at the very end adds a nice pop. If you do not have lemon juice, you can substitute it with apple cider vinegar (or any other vinegar you have on hand.)
        • Fresh herbs: I love a final garnish of fresh parsley, but you could also try fresh dill or fresh chives.
        Chicken noodle potato soup ingredients from the top view.

        Substitutions and Optional Add Ins

        • Herbs: A pinch of oregano will add a special woodsy flavor. Bay leaves would add even more depth of flavor.
        • Extra Veggies: Toss in a handful of baby spinach at the end of cooking, or stir in ½ cup frozen green peas or frozen corn during the last 5 minutes of simmering.
        • Rice: Omit the egg noodles and stir in ½ cup white rice. Simmer for 15 minutes or until the rice is tender.
        • Heavy Cream or Greek Yogurt: A few swirls of heavy cream or Greek yogurt at the end would make for an extra special richness.
        • Gluten-Free: You can substitute egg noodles with any of your favorite gluten-free pasta. Alternatively, you can spiralize potatoes using a spiralizer and use it in place of pasta and omit using it altogether.

        How to Make Chicken Noodle Soup with Potatoes?

        This chicken noodle soup recipe with potatoes is ready in under one hour, thanks to leftover chicken and minimal prep time and cooking time. Here’s how to make it:

        A collage of photos showing how to make the recipe.
        1. Saute vegetables: In a Dutch oven or large pot, heat the olive oil over medium heat. Add the carrot, celery, and onion and saute for 8-10 minutes, until softened. Then, stir in the garlic and saute for an additional 30 seconds.
        2. Add chicken and potatoes: Pour in the chicken stock, then add the shredded chicken, potatoes, Kosher salt, black pepper, and thyme. Cover and bring it to a boil, stirring occasionally. Once it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to medium-low and let it simmer for 10-12 minutes or until the potatoes are fully cooked.
        3. Add egg noodles: Stir in the egg noodles and simmer for 10-12 minutes or until the noodles are cooked to your liking. Stir in the lemon juice. 
        4. Serve: Cool for a few minutes, then ladle into bowls and garnish with parsley. Serve with additional lemon wedges on the side.

        How to Meal Prep, Store, & Reheat?

        Soup recipes are one of the greatest meal prep masterpieces because the flavors get better the next day, and this chicken noodle potato soup is no different. Simply:

        • Meal Prep: Portion into individual meal prep containers and keep in the refrigerator. Enjoy it as a light lunch or cozy dinner.
        • Storage: Cool completely, then store leftover chicken noodle and potato soup in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. I do not recommend storing the soup in the freezer as the potatoes and pasta will become mushy when it’s time to thaw.
        • Reheat: Reheat the entire batch of soup in a large soup pot over medium heat until bubbly and warm. Or, reheat bowls in the microwave in 30-second increments until warmed through.

        Serving Suggestions

        Warm up with a bowl of chicken noodle soup with potatoes alongside some crusty bread, fresh salad, or even a sandwich. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

        Chicken noodle soup with potatoes in a big pot with a wooden spoon on the side.

        Expert Tips

        • Shred chicken:  If trying to shred a large volume of chicken, cut from the bone and remove the skin. Place the chicken in a deep bowl if using a handheld mixer or stand mixer with a paddle attachment. Shred on low speed until your desired size is reached.
        • Store cooked noodles separately (for meal prep): If you know you will be enjoying the soup for lunches and dinners during the week, cook and store the egg noodles separately so that they don’t become mushy over time and soak up too much broth from the soup.

        FAQs:

        Can you put potatoes in chicken noodle soup?

        You certainly can. As a matter of fact, potatoes not only make it more filling but also turn it into a hearty and comforting dish. Their starchy goodness thickens the broth slightly, adding a delightful texture and depth of flavor.

        What kind of noodles for chicken noodle soup?

        Egg noodles are classic, but any short-cut noodle of your choice will do, like orzo, ditalini, or mini rigatoni.

        What to add to chicken noodle soup?

        Chicken noodle soup is deliciously creamy and hearty with carrots, celery, onions, garlic, fresh thyme, and plenty of potatoes and egg noodles for an extra comforting bite.

        What seasoning for chicken noodle soup?

        Keep the seasoning for chicken potato noodle soup simple and clean so that the flavors of the chicken and vegetables will shine. I like a simple mix of Kosher salt, black pepper, and fresh thyme.

        How to thicken chicken and noodles?

        To thicken chicken potato and noodle soup, start with a roux by mixing 2 tablespoons flour with the olive oil, add a slurry of 1 tablespoon cornstarch mixed with cold water at the end of cooking, or remove some of the vegetables and puree them.

        When to add potatoes to chicken soup?

        Potatoes should be added at the beginning of cooking, right after sauteeing the mirepoix and aromatics. This ensures enough time for tender potatoes.

        Other Comforting Chicken Recipes You Might Also Like:

        Got some chicken you don’t know what to do with? I’ve got you! If you enjoyed this homemade chicken noodle soup recipe, you might also like the recipes below:

        If you try this easy Chicken Noodle Soup with Potatoes recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
        Chicken noodle soup with a spoon in the pot.
        Print

        Chicken Noodle Soup with Potatoes Recipe

        Classic Chicken noodle soup but made more filling and satisfying with the addition of potatoes. This Chicken Noodle Soup with Potatoes is the perfect meal on a cold winter day.
        Course Soup
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 35 minutes
        Total Time 50 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 309kcal

        Ingredients

        • 2 tablespoons olive oil
        • 3 medium sized carrots peeled and diced into ½-inch cubes
        • 3 stalks of celery diced into ½-inch cubes – (~ 1 ½ cups)
        • 1 medium sized onion diced into ½-inch pieces
        • 3 cloves garlic minced
        • 8 cups chicken stock
        • 2 cups shredded cooked chicken
        • 1 large russet potato diced into ½ inch cubes (yield = 3 cups)
        • 1 ½ teaspoons Kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
        • 4 sprigs fresh thyme chopped
        • 3 ounces dried wide egg noodles * medium size – ~ 2 cups
        • 4 tablespoons fresh lemon juice plus lemon wedges to serve
        • ¼ cup fresh chopped parsley optional garnish

        Instructions

        • Heat the olive oil in the stock pot over medium heat. Add the carrot, celery, and onion and saute for 8-10 minutes until softened.
        • Add the garlic and saute for an additional 30 seconds.
        • Pour in the chicken stock, chicken, potato, kosher salt, pepper, and thyme. Cover and bring it to a boil, stirring occasionally. Once it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to medium-low and let it simmer for 10-12 minutes or until the potatoes are fully cooked.
        • Add the egg noodles, turn the heat down to medium-low, and let it simmer for 11-12 minutes or until the noodles are cooked to your liking, stirring occasionally.
        • Stir in the lemon juice. Taste for seasoning and add more seasoning if necessary.
        • Ladle into bowls and garnish with parsley. Serve with additional lemon wedges.

        Notes

        • Yield: This recipe makes a bit pot of soup that is about 8-9 cups, ideal for serving 6 people. The calorie information below is per serving.
        • Noodles: If you can’t find wide egg noodles, you can use other pasta like orzo or ditalini. Alternatively, if you have one, you can use a spiralizer and spiralize a potato and use it in place of noodles. 
        • Meal Prep: Portion into individual meal prep containers and keep in the refrigerator. Enjoy it as a light lunch or cozy dinner.
        • Storage: Cool completely, then store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. I do not recommend storing the soup in the freezer as the potatoes and pasta will become mushy when it’s time to thaw.
        • Reheat: Reheat the entire batch of soup in a large soup pot over medium heat until bubbly and warm. Or, reheat bowls in the microwave in 30-second increments until warmed through.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 309kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 49mg | Sodium: 1102mg | Potassium: 762mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 5381IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 47mg | Iron: 2mg

        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-potato-noodle-soup/feed/ 26
        Air Fryer Chestnuts https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-chestnuts/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-chestnuts/#comments Wed, 03 Jan 2024 21:01:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=73027 If you’re like me, you can’t resist eating these delicious air fryer chestnuts the moment you peel them. However, there…]]>

        If you’re like me, you can’t resist eating these delicious air fryer chestnuts the moment you peel them. However, there are countless other ways to use this delectable recipe—a handy way to make the most of the chestnut season. Air fryer roasted chestnuts make an excellent base for my silky Chestnut Cream Soup, and they fit flawlessly into any Christmas dinner when you prepare my five-star Chestnut Dressing. Or, try whipping up my Chestnut Puree Recipe for an irresistibly creamy dish perfect for pastries, parfaits, and so much more.

        Air fryer roasted chestnuts on a kitchen cloth.

        Ingredients

        When it comes to recipes with simple ingredients, air fried chestnuts are hands-down the easiest for your grocery list. All you need to make this toasty dish is one ingredient: chestnuts!

        However, as with all one-ingredient recipes, the key to getting the best results is to begin with high-quality chestnuts. Here are just a few things to keep in mind when selecting your nuts:

        Fresh chesnuts from the top view.
        • Type of chestnuts: For this recipe, I highly recommend using Italian chestnuts (also known as European chestnuts) or American chestnuts, as they peel easily and are altogether easier to work with. Chinese chestnuts—the most popular variety in Asia—also taste good, but I find that they are harder to peel, so I don’t suggest using them in this recipe.
        • Choose equally sized chestnuts: If possible, try to hand-pick chestnuts of an equal size, as they’ll roast the most evenly in the air fryer.
        • Ensure your chestnuts are of high quality: When looking for chestnuts, try to find ones that are smooth, plump, and shiny—especially those without blemishes or mold. I also encourage you to handle the chestnuts in your hand to ensure the skin isn’t dry.
        • Where to buy: You should be able to find fresh chestnuts in most U.S. grocery stores. However, they also crop up in farmer’s markets during fall and winter, should you prefer a locally grown alternative.
        • Avoid chestnut mix-ups: Though similar in name, be careful not to accidentally purchase horse chestnuts (which are toxic) or water chestnuts. These two are not the same as regular chestnuts and will drastically change the taste and texture of your recipe.

        How to Prepare Chestnuts for Cooking in the Air Fryer?

        Proper preparation is a must when getting ready to air fry chestnuts. These three steps will ensure your nuts are clean, tasty, and easily peelable when they come out of the air fryer.

        A collage of images showing how to prepare chestnuts for air air frying.
        1. Rinse the chestnuts: Add the raw chestnuts to a colander and rinse them under cold running water. Drain them when thoroughly rinsed.
        2. Score: Lay the flat side of a chestnut on a cutting board, ensuring the rounded side (AKA the belly side) faces up. Hold the chestnut firmly with one hand and use the other to cut horizontally across the rounded face with a sharp paring knife or chestnut knife. Then, rotate the chestnut 90 degrees and make a second cut, forming an “X” on its top. Repeat the scoring process for the remaining chestnuts, trying not to score their inner skin.
        3. Soak chestnuts: Transfer the cut chestnuts to a bowl, cover them with cold tap water, and let them rest for 30-60 minutes.

        How to Roast Chestnuts in an Air Fryer?

        Air frying chestnuts is a great way to enjoy nutty, easy-to-peel treats in no time. With this easy cooking method, your chestnuts will be on the table in less than 20 minutes.

        1. Prepare your air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 350 degrees F.
        A collage of images showing how to cook chestnuts in air fryer.
        1. Dry the chestnuts: Drain the soaked chestnuts, transfer them to a clean kitchen towel, and dry them as much as possible. Alternatively, you may line a baking sheet with paper towels and pat them dry.
        2. Fill the air fryer basket: Arrange the scored chestnuts in your air fryer basket so that their cut sides face up. Be careful not to overcrowd the basket, as your nuts should fit comfortably in a single layer. If necessary, you may air fry your chestnuts in two batches to ensure proper air circulation.
        3. Cook the chestnuts: Roast the chestnuts in the air fryer for 17 minutes, shaking the basket once or twice during their cooking time.
        4. Steam the cooked chestnuts: Once roasted, transfer the (very hot!) chestnuts onto a clean kitchen towel. Draw the edges of the cloth toward their center, turn the towel into a small pouch, and let the chestnuts steam for about five minutes. For an alternate steaming method, place your air-fried chestnuts in a paper bag and roll down the top so the steam gets trapped inside. Again, let the nuts steam for five minutes or for up to 30 minutes.
        Images showing how to peel air fried chestnuts.
        1. Peel: After the chestnuts steam, grasp the pouch in your hand and gently squeeze it to loosen the chestnut shells. Then, carefully peel off the outer shell of the nuts while they’re still hot by lightly pulling back on their scored “X.” Be sure you’re removing the papery skin to expose the yellow flesh inside. If you can’t remove the fuzzy inner skin by hand, you may use a small sharp knife to assist you, being careful not to pierce the yellow inner nut.
        2. Serve: Enjoy your air fryer roasted chestnuts while they’re still warm.

        How to Store Air Fryer Roasted Chestnuts?

        After roasting chestnuts in an air fryer, the last thing you want to do is let a single one go to waste. With these easy tips, you can store this delectable recipe to snack on throughout the week or for long-lasting meal prep.

        • Store: When ready for storage, let your air roasted chestnuts reach room temperature and then transfer them to an airtight container. You can then store them in the refrigerator for up to four days.
        • Freeze: To freeze your peeled air fryer chestnuts, transfer them to a freezer bag and remove as much air as possible. Then, tightly seal the bag and freeze your chestnuts for up to three months.
        • Thaw: When ready to thaw, remove your chestnuts from the freezer and defrost them in the fridge overnight.

        Expert Tips

        The best way to cook chestnuts in an air fryer is by preheating it to 350°F (175°C), scoring each chestnut, and roasting them for 17 minutes or until the shells open and the insides are tender.  However, I learned a few lessons during my recipe testing and would like to share them with you:

        • Scoring: Because chestnuts can be slippery, it’s important to be safe when scoring them, which is essential for easy peeling later on. Therefore, I recommend placing your chestnuts on a cutting board with their flat sides facing down and rounded sides facing up. Then, firmly secure the chestnut with one hand and use a sharp, serrated, or chestnut knife to score the rounded edge in the shape of an “X.”
        • Soaking: Though popular belief holds that you must soak your chestnuts in hot water (or warm water) for hours on end, I’ve found that a quick soak in cold tap water (30-60 minutes) is more than sufficient.
        • Air fryer temperature: When making this recipe, you may consider speeding up the roasting process by increasing your air fryer temperature. However, we found that cooking chestnuts in the air fryer at higher temperatures (like 400 degrees F. and 375 degrees F.) led to a fully cooked exterior and uncooked interior. Therefore, we recommend keeping your cooking temperature low—ideally 350 degrees F. for 17 minutes—to ensure the whole chestnut roasts at an even rate.
        • Don’t overcrowd: As with all air fryer recipes, you mustn’t crowd your air fryer basket while cooking, as proper air circulation is essential for thoroughly roasting your chestnuts. We were able to fit a pound of chestnuts into our basket, though this amount may change depending on the size of your air fryer and individual chestnuts. No matter how many chestnuts you can fit into your basket, just be sure to arrange them so that their scored “X” faces up.
        • Look for visual cues: If you’re not sure whether you’ve fully roasted your chestnuts by the end of their cooking time, I recommend looking for the following visual cues: When ready to steam and peel, your chestnuts’ scored edges should begin opening up, and their exteriors should lightly brown. However, because every air fryer behaves differently, I suggest testing a chestnut at the 15-minute mark to see whether it’s ready to serve or needs more roasting time.
        • Peel while still warm: If you want a chestnut with a smooth, nutty taste, you must remove its fuzzy skin before serving. Therefore, I suggest using either of my five-minute steaming methods (either by a wrapped towel or paper bag) to loosen the nuts’ outer and inner skins before peeling, making the process much easier.
        • Buy more than you need: It’s inevitable when buying chestnuts that some of them will be “bad,” whether they’re moldy, blemished, or otherwise spoiled—with special consideration to their time of harvesting. Therefore, I highly advise purchasing more chestnuts than you need to eliminate these undesirable picks and still end up with a whole serving.
        • A word on easy peeling: My step-by-step instructions are a foolproof way to ensure easy peeling and excellent taste for high-quality chestnuts. However—no matter how closely you follow the steps—it won’t be possible to get good results if you’re using chestnuts of poor quality. Plus, keep in mind that the age and size of the chestnuts matter, so I recommend getting the most 
        Peeled chestnuts in a bowl from the top view.

        How to Season?

        Making roasted chestnuts in the air fryer gives you the freedom to play around with all your favorite flavorings. With these mouthwatering seasoning ideas, you can transform your chestnuts into everything from a decadent dessert to a savory snack.

        • Honey and vanilla: If you want your air fryer chestnuts to have an irresistibly dessert-like finish, mix two tablespoons of honey with a teaspoon of vanilla. Once thoroughly combined, drizzle the honey mixture over your cooked chestnuts for a great holiday season treat.
        • Melted butter and maple syrup: Richly sweet and easy to customize, try drizzling your chestnuts with a mixture of melted butter and maple syrup. You can even sprinkle ground cinnamon over your nuts if desired for a warmer, woody flavor.
        • Balsamic glaze with a sprinkle of sea salt: Coating your air-roasted chestnuts with a rich balsamic reduction is an easy way to give your recipe complexly sweet notes—a flavor profile that tastes straight out of Europe. Finish this tasty variation with a sprinkle of sea salt, and every bite will explode with flavor.
        • Asian style: To give your air fried chestnuts a zingy, Asian-inspired flavor, coat them with a blend of soy sauce, a hint of sesame oil, and a sprinkle of sesame seeds. This umami-packed recipe transforms sweet chestnuts into a savory treat perfect for all-day snacking.

        FAQs

        Want to know more about how to roast chestnuts in an air fryer? This beginner-friendly guide will answer any remaining questions, from ideal cooking times to expert peeling suggestions.

        How long to cook chestnuts in an air fryer?

        To ensure your chestnuts develop warm, tender insides without burning their exterior, I recommend cooking them at 350 degrees F. for 17 minutes and shaking the basket 1-2 times during the process.

        Can you eat the brown skin on chestnuts?

        Yes, chestnuts’ brown skin is technically edible. However, it has a fuzzy texture and bitter taste that may interfere with the overall flavor of your roasted chestnuts. Therefore, I recommend removing them before eating.

        How to know if my chestnuts are fully cooked?

        When checking your chestnuts for doneness, look for a few easy visual cues: The outside of your nuts should turn lightly brown, their scored edges should begin opening up, and their insides should be warm and soft by the time they’re ready to remove from the air fryer.

        If you try this Air Fryer Chestnuts recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Air fried chestnuts from the top view.
        Print

        Air Fryer Chestnuts Recipe

        This air fryer roasted chestnuts recipe is a quicker alternative to roasting chestnuts in the oven. With this easy recipe, you can make air fryer roasted chestnuts half the time, serve it as a snack, or use it in your favorite chestnut recipes.
        Course Snack
        Cuisine American/Italian
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Cook Time 17 minutes
        Total Time 27 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 222kcal

        Equipment

        Ingredients

        • 1 lb Chestnuts preferably Italian (or European)
        • 3 cups Water

        Instructions

        • Place chestnuts in a colander and rinse under cold running water. Drain.
        • Place the flat side of the chestnut down on a cutting board, making sure that the rounded side (aka the belly side) is facing up. Hold the chestnut firmly and cut horizontally across the rounded side using a sharp paring knife (or a chestnut knife, if you have one.) Then, turn the chestnut 90 degrees and make a second cut, forming an X. As you are cutting, do your best not to score the inner skin. Continue with the rest of the chestnuts.
        • Transfer the now-cut chestnuts into a bowl. Cover it with cold tap water and let them sit for 30 minutes to an hour.
        • Preheat your air fryer to 350 °F.
        • Drain chestnuts and transfer them onto a clean kitchen towel. Dry them off as much as you can.
        • Place them in the air fryer basket, making sure that the cut side is facing up. Do not overcrowd the basket. If needed, you can bake it in two batches.
        • Air fry them for 17 minutes, shaking the basket halfway through the air-roasting process.
        • Once the air frying is completed, transfer the now-very hot chestnuts onto a clean kitchen towel. Collect the edges of the cloth in the middle and turn it into a small pouch. Let them steam in the “pouch” for 5 minutes or so. Alternatively, you can use a paper bag to do this. Simply place the hot roasted chestnuts in it, roll the bag to trap the steam inside, and let it steam for 5 minutes.
        • Holding the pouch in your hand, give it a gentle squeeze to loosen the shells. Then, carefully remove the outer shell of the chestnuts when they are still hot by gently pulling back on the scored “X,” peeling away the papery skin and exposing the yellow flesh inside. If you are unable to remove the fuzzy inner skin by hand, use a small sharp knife to peel it, being careful not to pierce the yellow nut inside.
        • Enjoy while still warm.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes a little less than a pound of chestnuts. If you are serving it as a snack, you would likely end up with 7-8 chestnuts (depending on their size) per person if you are serving it to 4 people. The calorie information below is per serving.
        • Air frying temperature: Don’t be tempted to increase the temperature of the air fryer to roast them faster. I have tried air frying chestnuts in higher temps to shorten the cooking time, but ended up with chestnuts that were burned on the outside and raw on the inside.
        • Soaking: Though popular belief holds that you must soak your chestnuts in hot water (or warm water) for a long time (8 hours or so), I’ve found that a quick soak in cold tap water (30-60 minutes) is more than sufficient.
        • Chestnuts: There is a direct correlation between the age, size, and origin of the chestnuts and the quality of the end result. Over the years of cooking chestnuts, I learned that chestnuts from Europe and the US tend to peel easier than chestnuts from China. Needless to say, it is best to buy the freshest chestnuts you can get your hands on for the best results.
        • Store: Bring cooked chestnuts to room temperature and then transfer them to an airtight container. You can then store them in the refrigerator for up to four days.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 222kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Sodium: 11mg | Potassium: 549mg | Vitamin A: 29IU | Vitamin C: 46mg | Calcium: 27mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-chestnuts/feed/ 10
        Air Fryer Red Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-red-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-red-potatoes/#respond Mon, 13 Nov 2023 17:05:17 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71802 It’s no secret that air-fried red potatoes are an easy way to fill your table with savory, expertly seasoned taste.…]]>

        It’s no secret that air-fried red potatoes are an easy way to fill your table with savory, expertly seasoned taste. If you can’t get enough of the subtle sweetness and creamy texture of red-skinned potatoes, get out your recipe book! My Red Potato Salad combines savory bacon, crisp dill pickles, and fresh dill with a creamy mayo dressing guaranteed to wow all your dinner guests.

        Air fried red potatoes garnished with parsley in a bowl.

        Ingredients

        Cooking new potatoes in the air fryer requires only a handful of ingredients you likely already have in your pantry.

        Ingredients needed for cooking red potatoes in air fryer on a marble.
        • Red potatoes: Small, creamy, and mildly sweet red potatoes (also known as red skin and new potatoes) are a must for this air fryer recipe. Though I use small red potatoes for this dish, other small, tender potatoes, such as Yukon Gold potatoes, would also work. However, avoid using potatoes with too much starch—such as russet potatoes—as they won’t crisp up or tenderize as well as other potato types.
        • Oil: I use olive oil to give my little red potatoes their irresistible crispiness and well-seasoned exterior. However, you may substitute olive oil with any other mild-flavored oil, like avocado oil or ghee.
        • Seasonings: I chose to season my air-fried new potatoes with a basic, savory mix of dried thyme, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and ground black pepper. To give your potatoes extra smoky undertones, you may also use smoked paprika.

        Other Seasoning Ideas

        Want to take your air fryer roasted red potatoes to the next level? Though optional, these expert seasoning ideas allow you to customize your red potatoes with dozens of other tasty flavor profiles.

        • Favorite spice mixtures: One of the best parts about air fryer potato recipes is how easy they are to customize based on the dish with which you serve them. For a sweet and peppery flavor profile, Italian seasoning makes a delicious seasoning mix. Or, you can enhance this dish’s spice and savoriness by opting for authentic Cajun seasoning, which you can easily make using my Blackened Seasoning recipe. Or, you can give your new potatoes a herby, warm, and bright finish using Mediterranean SeasoningBaharat Spice Mix, or Ranch Seasoning.
        • Spices: If you love spicy food, a few simple additions can give your air-fried potatoes a hot kick. Depending on what you serve with your potatoes, curry powder, red pepper flakes, cayenne pepper, chili powder, onion powder, and more can transform your red potatoes into a piquant side fit for even the biggest spice fans.
        • Fresh herbs: Enliven your air fryer new potatoes with fresh, gourmet flavor by finishing them off with a sprinkle of chopped fresh thyme, fresh parsley, fresh basil, or fresh rosemary.
        • Parmesan cheese: A great way to give your little red potatoes a rich, umami flavor is to sprinkle them with parmesan at the end of cooking. Cheesy and salty, these garlic parmesan air fryer potatoes will have the whole table asking for your recipe.

        How to Cook Red Potatoes in the Air Fryer?

        Making baked red potatoes in the air fryer is one of the quickest, simplest ways to delight your tastebuds and cut your kitchen prep in half. Six steps and twenty minutes are all you need to make this mouthwatering side.

        1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
        A collage of images showing how to season new potatoes and cook them in the air fryer.
        1. Combine the seasonings: Take out a large bowl and add the olive oil, dried thyme, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and pepper. Whisk until thoroughly combined.
        2. Toss potatoes: Add the baby red potatoes to the seasoning mixture and toss until each potato has an even coating.
        3. Arrange the cut potatoes: Place the seasoned potatoes in the air fryer basket, arranging them in a single even layer without overcrowding.
        4. Air fry the red potatoes: Cook the potatoes for about 15 minutes, shaking the basket every five minutes, until the potatoes are tender when pierced with a knife. If the potatoes aren’t fork-tender at the end of 15 minutes, continue cooking them in one-minute increments until done.
        5. Serve: Transfer your fresh air-fried red potatoes onto a serving platter and serve with your favorite sauce on the side.

        How to Store and Reheat?

        To ensure maximum crispiness, I recommend eating them on the day of cooking. However, you can store your leftover potatoes in a pinch with these pro storage tips.

        • Storage: These air fryer mini red potatoes will stay fresh for up to three days when you store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator.
        • Reheat: To reheat your red potatoes, place them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until warmed through.

        Serving Suggestions:

        This simple air fryer side is one of the tastiest, most versatile potato recipe ideas in my cookbook. Hassle-free and quick, this simple side dish takes the stress out of complicated meal prep. 

        • Side dish with meat dishes: Hands-down, these bite-size potatoes make for the perfect weekday dinner side dish. Serve them with your favorite chicken main—like my effortless Baked Chicken Kabobs or perfectly portioned Air Fried Cornish Hens—for a menu the whole family can enjoy. Or, try a savory beef recipe, such as Reverse Sear Tenderloin or classic Pot Roast, to make a meal worthy of a gourmet dinner spread.
        • Serve as finger food: Not only are air fryer red potato wedges a perfect side dish for countless mains, but they’re also excellent finger food! Serve a plate of air-roasted potatoes with a side of your favorite dipping sauce—like my Blue Cheese Dip and Yogurt Ranch Dip, and watch them disappear in minutes.

        Expert Tips

        Preparing baby red potatoes in the air fryer is a surefire way to fill your plate with savory, crisp, and creamy flavors. These pro tips will guarantee your potato side is as delicious as possible—with none of the hassle!

        • Wash and dry: Washing your red potatoes is essential to removing bacteria and debris before cooking. After washing, though, dry the potatoes thoroughly with paper towels or a clean kitchen towel before adding them to your recipe. Otherwise, the seasoning will not stick to the potato skin, and they won’t come out as crispy.
        • Cut them evenly: When cutting new potatoes for this dish, slice them into uniform sizes to ensure even cooking. If they’re small enough, you may cook whole red potatoes in the air fryer, but if you have larger potatoes, I recommend cutting them into even, bite-sized pieces for the best results.
        • Don’t overcrowd: When cooking small red potatoes in the air fryer, it’s vital that you don’t overcrowd the basket to ensure proper air circulation and even cooking. I found that my 6-qt. air fryer (affiliate link) was large enough to accommodate one pound of red potatoes. However, if you have a smaller air fryer, you may need to cook your potatoes in two batches to ensure they lay in a single even layer.
        • Toss a few times while cooking: To ensure even roasting, I recommend tossing your potatoes a few times during the air frying process, preferably every five minutes.
        • Check for doneness: The best way to tell the doneness of your red skin potatoes is by using the “knife test.” Pierce the center of a potato with a knife or fork. If the blade enters and exits the flesh easily, you may remove your potatoes from the heat. If the blade encounters resistance, continue air frying the potatoes in one-minute increments until done.
        • Every air fryer is different: As you prepare your red baby potatoes, remember that different air fryers result in different heat levels and cooking times. I tested this recipe using an Instant Pot (affiliate link) and a Ninja Air Fryer (affiliate link), but if you have a different model, be sure to check your potatoes throughout the cooking process to avoid under or over-cooking.

        FAQs

        There’s no reason to stress over this simple air fryer recipe. This easy FAQ will answer all your remaining questions, from how long to cook red potatoes in the air fryer to nutritional information.

        Can you air fry red potatoes?

        Definitely! Air frying red potatoes results in expertly seasoned, delectably crisp, and lusciously tender potatoes in half the time as regular frying. All you need to do is season and oil your potato slices, air fry them at 400 degrees F. for 15-17 minutes (tossing occasionally), and enjoy.

        Should you boil potatoes before air frying?

        No, there’s no need to boil your potatoes before air-frying them. Boiling them first will make them mushy, and they won’t maintain their shape while eating.

        What temperature to air fry potatoes?

        Though you may air fry red skin potatoes at 350 and 375 degrees F., we found that 400 degrees F. for 15 minutes resulted in the crispiest, most tender potatoes. Remember, however, that you must adjust your cooking time should you choose a different temperature.

        Are air-fried red potatoes healthy?

        Air-frying is generally healthier than traditional frying methods, as it uses less oil, reduces calories and trans fats, and helps retain more nutrients in your main ingredient. However, it’s also important to note that potatoes—no matter your preparation method—are high in carbohydrates and low in protein, though they also contain vitamins and minerals, like Vitamin C and potassium (source.) Therefore, I encourage you to customize your menu depending on your dietary needs and the dishes with which you plan to pair your air-fried potatoes.

        How long to air fry red potatoes at 400 degrees F.?

        I recommend cooking your small red potatoes for 15-17 minutes at 400 degrees F., shaking the basket every five minutes to ensure even cooking.

        How to make French fries with red potatoes in the air fryer?

        To make air fryer red potato French fries, begin by washing, drying, and slicing your potatoes into thin, even-sized strips (i.e., into the shape of a French fry). Then, place potatoes in a large bowl of cold water and soak for 30 minutes. Once done, drain and dry the potatoes with a clean kitchen towel, toss them in olive oil and your desired seasonings until evenly coated. Next, arrange your seasoned potato slices in a single even layer in your air fryer basket and cook them at 375 degrees F. for 12-15 minutes, shaking the basket halfway through. When the air fryer red potato fries reach your preferred level of crispness, remove them from the heat, sprinkle them with any additional seasoning, and serve.

        Other Potato Side Dishes You Might Also Like

        Making crispy red potatoes in the air fryer is one of my favorite ways to please a crowd. For even more fan-favorite potato dishes, these tasty recipes will fill your menu with creamy, savory goodness every night of the week.

        If you try this crispy Air Fryer Red Potatoes recipe or any other one of our Air Fry Recipes, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Air fryer roasted red potatoes in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
        Print

        Air Fryer Red Potatoes Recipe

        Get ready to tantalize your taste buds with this Air Fryer Red Potatoes recipe! In just 20 minutes, you can transform simple ingredients into a delectably crispy and flavorful weeknight dinner side dish or snack. Use this easy recipe to make a delicious side dish or a quick snack that is guaranteed to impress.
        Course Vegan side dish
        Cuisine American Vegetarian
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan, Vegetarian
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 20 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 113kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 pound baby red potatoes washed, blemishes removed and halved (no need to peel)
        • 1 tablespoon olive oil
        • ½ teaspoon dried thyme
        • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
        • ¼ teaspoon paprika
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

        Instructions

        • Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
        • In a large mixing bowl, whisk together the olive oil, dried thyme, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and pepper.
        • Add the baby red potatoes and toss to combine.
        • Place the potatoes in a single layer into the air fryer basket, being sure not to overcrowd them.
        • Cook the potatoes until tender when pierced with a knife, about 15 minutes, shaking the basket every 5 minutes. If not tender after 15 minutes, continue to cook in 1-minute increments until done.
        • Transfer the air-roasted potatoes onto a serving platter and serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 1 pound air fried red potatoes that are ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Rinse and dry: It is important to make sure the potatoes are dry before tossing them in the olive oil mixture to ensure that the potatoes are evenly coated and can crisp up during the cooking process. 
        • Do not overcrowd your air fryer: Cook in batches, if needed, so that the heat is evenly distributed and they have enough room to crisp up.
        • Sprinkle it while it is still hot: Though optional, you may sprinkle your air-fried small red potatoes with additional salt, herbs, and parmesan cheese directly after cooking (while the potatoes are still hot). Doing so ensures that the baby red potatoes heat and develop the new flavors—making them as rich and savory as possible—while also melting any additional cheese.
        • Storage: To ensure maximum crispiness, I recommend air frying them right before serving. However, you can store your leftover potatoes in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
        • Reheat: To reheat, place them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until warmed through.
        • Oven roasting: If you do not have an air fryer, you can roast your red potatoes in the oven. Simply use 2 tablespoons of oil (instead of one), transfer the cut potatoes onto a parchment-lined baking sheet, and roast in a preheated 450-degree oven for 25-30 minutes.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 113kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 312mg | Potassium: 526mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 75IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 15mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-red-potatoes/feed/ 0
        Chicken Butternut Squash Soup https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-butternut-squash-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-butternut-squash-soup/#comments Tue, 10 Oct 2023 20:34:19 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71101 Zoup! Good, Really Good® provided me with the product for the purpose of this post, as well as compensation for my…]]>

        Zoup! Good, Really Good® provided me with the product for the purpose of this post, as well as compensation for my time. As always, all opinions expressed in this post are my own.

        On a cold day, nothing satisfies me more than a yummy soup full of great flavors. While I adore the more standard Vegan Butternut Squash Soup or globally inspired Butternut Squash Thai Soup (Zoup! also makes a creamy, heat-and-eat butternut squash soup), there is something so special about a healthy chicken soup with butternut squash.

        Butternut Squash Chicken Soup in a bowl garnished with parsley and pumpkin seeds.

        Creamy or chunky, made entirely from scratch using the most delicious Zoup! Good, Really Good® Chicken Bone Broth, I have got you covered with plenty of ways to make this creamy chicken and butternut squash soup your own. 

        Ingredients

        Butternut squash soup with chicken requires nothing more than a few simple ingredients. We will need:

        Ingredients for the recipe in small portions from the top view.
        • Olive oil: You can also use avocado oil or clarified butter (aka ghee) in this recipe.
        • Vegetables: Go for an aromatic background of yellow onions, red bell pepper, and garlic cloves. 
        • Spices + seasonings: Ground cumin adds depth and complexity to this butternut chicken soup. You could also try ground coriander or turmeric to celebrate that orange color and make it even more nutritious.
        • Chicken: Go for boneless, skinless chicken thighs for a richer flavor, but leaner chicken breasts can also be used.
        • Butternut squash: Pick up a butternut squash that is heavy for its size and prep when you get home. If working with butternut squash is new to you, check out my post on the Best Way to Cut Butternut Squash before you get started.
        • Chicken broth: While you can make your own Homemade Chicken Stock when I am short on time, I reach for Zoup! Good, Really Good® Chicken Bone Broth. I love purchasing Zoup! as it has the same complex, homemade taste with a balanced flavor. While it is widely available in retailers across the country, you can also purchase it online at ZoupBroth.com, Amazon, and Walmart.com. Plus, Zoup! has a number of different broths to choose from, but in this instance, I would stick to the Chicken Bone Broth, Original Chicken Broth, or Low Sodium Chicken Broth.
        • Lemon juice: A squeeze of freshly squeezed lemon juice is a last-minute addition to brighten up the flavors.
        • Fresh herbs: Fresh parsley gives the slowly simmered soup a nice pop at the end. Reserve some on the side for garnish, too. For even more depth of flavor, consider adding fresh thyme or sage while the soup simmers on the stove.
        • Optional toppings: Pumpkin seeds add a wonderful crunch, but they are optional.

        Variations and Substitutions

        If you find yourself short on time or are looking to make this squash soup recipe on a busy weeknight, here are some short-cut suggestions to save you some time in the kitchen:

        • Rotisserie chicken: It is no secret that rotisserie chicken or cooked leftover chicken is a great shortcut when you are short on time, and this chicken soup with squash is no different. If you use either one of these options, simply shred them and add them to the soup at the same time as you are adding the butternut squash. You will need about 4-5 cups of shredded or cubed chicken.
        • Roasted butternut squash: Use leftover Roasted Butternut Squash to add extra depth and caramelized flavor, thanks to all those natural sugars.
        • Winter squash: Can’t find butternut squash? Use any winter squash that is available, like roasted acorn squash, roasted delicata squash, or pumpkin. Alternatively, you can swap out half the squash for some diced carrots and sweet potatoes for a slightly different flavor texture or flavor that is just as delicious.
        • Lime juice and cilantro: Give it a unique twist by swapping out the lemon juice and parsley for lime juice and fresh cilantro.
        • Add grains: Make it a complete meal with the addition of leftover cooked quinoa, brown rice, or pasta. Toss it right into the soup near the end of cooking.
        • Coconut milk: If you want an even more luxurious creamy texture, consider finishing it with a touch of coconut milk or heavy whipping cream.
        • Extra toppings: Add even more contrast to flavor and texture by topping it off with croutons, a swirl of yogurt or sour cream, fresh herbs like chives, basil or tarragon, or a sprinkle of red pepper flakes.

        How to Make Butternut Squash Chicken Soup?

        I like to think of this as a high-protein butternut squash soup, thanks to the addition of chicken. It is also a great soup to make on a cold night in chilly weather. Not to mention, it is easy to make. Here’s how I like to make it in a few easy steps on the stovetop:

        A collage of images showing how to make chicken and squash soup.
        1. Saute aromatics: Heat olive oil in a large Dutch oven or large soup pot over medium to medium-high heat. Add onion, bell pepper, and cumin. Cook, stirring occasionally, until vegetables are softened, 5-6 minutes. Add the garlic and cook, stirring constantly, for 1 minute.
        2. Simmer soup: Add the chicken, butternut squash, chicken stock, salt and pepper. Give it a good stir. Cover and bring to a boil. Then, reduce to low heat, put the lid back on, and let it simmer for 15-20 minutes or until the chicken is fully cooked. Feel free to stir it once or twice during the cooking process.
        3. Shred chicken: With a large slotted spoon or tongs, remove the chicken and allow to cool slightly. Shred it with two forks or cut it into cubes.
        4. Blend half of the soup: Ladle 4-5 cups of the soup into a large heatproof bowl. Blend until smooth with an immersion blender.
        A collage of images showing how to make chicken and butternut squash soup.
        1. Finish: Carefully transfer the pureed soup back into the pot (be careful, it will still be hot!) along with the shredded chicken. Bring the soup to one last boil. Finish with lemon juice and parsley.
        2. Garnish and serve: Ladle into bowls, top with pumpkin seeds and more parsley. Serve with lemon wedges on the side.

        How to Store, Freeze, and Reheat Leftovers?

        This Chicken squash soup stores beautifully in both the fridge and freezer. Just like so many soup recipes, the flavors get better the longer they have time to marry together. To store and reheat, simply:

        • Store: Cool completely and transfer to a large airtight container. Store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
        • Freeze: Cool completely and ladle soup into freezer-safe airtight containers, leaving some room at the top to allow for expansion. Freeze for up to 3 months.
        • Reheat: If frozen, thaw the soup overnight in the refrigerator. When ready to reheat, place a pot over medium heat, add the soup, and bring to a gentle simmer. Or, reheat individual servings in a microwave-safe bowl, covered, in 30-second intervals in the microwave. Stir each time in between and continue until warmed through.

        What to Serve with this Butternut Squash Soup?

        Butternut squash and chicken soup is a meal all its own, but I love to serve it with crusty bread or winter greens on the side to round it out as a complete meal. You could try:

        Expert Tips

        • Save on time: The majority of the prep work comes from peeling and cubing the butternut squash, so if you are short on time, you can prep the vegetables the day before or buy pre-cut vegetables from the grocery store.
        • Blending is personal: I really want you to make this soup your own, so you can blend half the soup as I do in the recipe card, skip the blending altogether, or blend the entire soup for a creamy, thick consistency. Just make sure to remove the chicken prior to blending.
        • If you do not own an immersion blender, blend until smooth in a high-powered blender or food processor, or use a potato masher to puree it. However, keep in mind that when blending hot liquids, always make sure to fill no more than halfway, remove the measuring cap, and partially cover with a kitchen towel so the steam will be able to escape.

        More about Zoup!

        Zoup! was created by the founders of Zoup! Eatery, which served soup face-to-face to consumers for over two decades. In other words, they really know their soup! In addition to their expertise and knowledge, I always pick up a jar of Zoup! Broth (packaged in recyclable glass jars, by the way) whenever I get a chance because:

        • The Zoup! Good, Really Good® Broth lineup includes original and low-sodium chicken broths, veggie broth, seafood broth, and chicken and beef bone broths.
        • The broth is kettle-cooked in small batches using the freshest and finest ingredients.
        • It is low in calories, paleo-friendly, and completely free of artificial ingredients, preservatives, gluten, GMO’s, fat, trans fat, and saturated fat. 
        • Zoup! has also introduced Culinary Concentrates™, gourmet broth bases available in Chicken Bone Broth and Beef Bone Broth, plus Savory No Chicken Vegan Broth, offering a space-saving solution for home cooks.
        • And for when you crave soup but want something you can just heat and eat, Zoup! makes shelf-stable soups in nine flavor-forward recipes, including Chicken Potpie, Garden Vegetable, and Butternut Squash with Brown Butter and Sage.

        If you are interested in learning more, visit ZoupBroth.com and follow @ZoupGoodReallyGood on Facebook, Instagram, and TikTok and @ZoupGoodReallyGoodBroth on Pinterest.

        As a reader of Foolproof Living, Zoup! is offering 20% off your first order of Zoup! Products on Amazon. Use the code, 20FOOLPROOF at checkout (under the payment section.) The code is valid until November 6, 2023.

        A collage of photos showing the squash chicken soup in a bowl and while it is being poured.

        FAQs

        What herbs go with butternut squash soup?

        Hearty herbs such as rosemary, thyme, sage, and bay leaf add depth and herbal complexity, while fresh herbs like parsley, cilantro, basil, tarragon, and chives give it the finish of fresh flavor.

        Can you use chicken broth in butternut squash soup?

        Yes, both chicken broth and chicken stock can be used to make butternut squash soup. The delicate meaty flavor is a nice addition to an otherwise vegetarian soup.

        Is butternut squash soup good when sick?

        According to Healthline, butternut squash has many health benefits. It contains high amounts of powerful vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants, most notably vitamin A and vitamin C, making it an ideal choice to keep a sore throat at bay. So, yes, butternut squash soup is a good way to soothe yourself when you are feeling under the weather.

        Do you need to peel butternut squash for soup?

        We do recommend peeling butternut squash when making soup, as doing so will result in a creamy and smooth texture.

        What protein goes with butternut squash soup?

        Butternut squash pairs well with a variety of animal and plant-based protein resources. Chicken, beef, quinoa, and tofu are just a few to name.

        Other Comforting Soup Recipes for Fall and Winter:

        If you try this Chicken Butternut Squash Soup, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Butternut squash chicken soup in a bowl from the top view.
        Print

        Chicken Butternut Squash Soup Recipe

        Butternut Squash chicken soup combines the heartiness of chicken thighs with the warmth of homemade soup. Great for a chilly evening, this one-pot meal is both nourishing and flavorful.
        Course Soup
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 30 minutes
        Total Time 45 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 284kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 tablespoon olive oil
        • 1 medium onion chopped (~2 cups)
        • 1 medium red bell pepper chopped (~1 cup)
        • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
        • 4 cloves garlic minced or pressed
        • 1 pound boneless skinless chicken thighs or chicken breasts
        • 6 cups butternut squash* peeled and cut into cubes (2 pounds)
        • 5 cups Zoup! Good Really Good® Chicken Bone Broth
        • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt more to taste
        • ½ teaspoon black pepper
        • 4 tablespoons lemon juice
        • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped, plus more for garnish
        • 2 tablespoons pumpkin seeds optional, for garnish

        Instructions

        • Heat olive oil in a large, heavy bottom pot over medium-high heat. Add in onion, pepper, and cumin. Cook, stirring occasionally, until vegetables are softened, 5-6 minutes.
        • Stir in the garlic and cook, stirring constantly, for 1 more minute.
        • Add in the chicken, cubed butternut squash, chicken stock, salt and pepper. Give it a stir.
        • Put the lid on and bring it to a boil. As soon as it comes to a boil, turn down the heat to low, put the lid back on, and let it simmer for 20-25 minutes or until the chicken is fully cooked. Feel free to stir it once or twice during the cooking process.
        • Using a slotted spoon, remove the chicken from the soup and shred it (or cut it into cubes). Set the now-shredded chicken aside.
        • Ladle 4-5 cups of the soup mixture into a large heatproof bowl. Using an immersion blender, blend until smooth.
        • Transfer the pureed soup back into the pot along with the shredded chicken. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
        • Bring the soup to one last boil.
        • Stir in the lemon juice and parsley. Ladle into bowls, garnish with the additional parsley and pumpkin seeds (if desired), and serve with lemon wedges on the side.

        Notes

        • Yields: This soup makes 6-7 cups of soup, which is ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
        • Storage: To store leftovers, cool completely and transfer to a large airtight container. Store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
        • Squash: While we used butternut squash in this recipe, you can pretty much use any squash you have on hand, including pumpkin, acorn squash, kabocha squash, and even delicata squash.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 284kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 23g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 78mg | Sodium: 750mg | Potassium: 1018mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 15646IU | Vitamin C: 63mg | Calcium: 97mg | Iron: 3mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-butternut-squash-soup/feed/ 8
        Tuna Melt Sandwich https://foolproofliving.com/tuna-melt-sandwich/ https://foolproofliving.com/tuna-melt-sandwich/#comments Fri, 06 Oct 2023 22:22:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=18745 I like to think that tuna melt sandwiches mean the tuna will be the star of the show. However, I…]]>

        I like to think that tuna melt sandwiches mean the tuna will be the star of the show. However, I find that the bread and cheese transform it into something spectacular. Because of this, I have done my research on what makes an unforgettable tuna melt. In other words, I have got you covered with plenty of variations for the bread, cheese, and cooking style. So don’t be shy and have some fun with this tuna melt recipe!

        If you love the convenience of canned tuna recipes, be sure to try Chickpea Tuna Pita Sandwich or Chickpea Salad with Tuna.

        Homemade tuna melt sandwich from the front view.

        Ingredients – What’s in a Tuna Melt?

        I find the best tuna melt recipe starts with quality ingredients. The recipe starts with making a classic tuna salad, which is used to layer with cheese in between two pieces of bread before baking it in the oven or cooking it on the stovetop. Here is what you will need to make the tuna salad, along with the bread, cheese, and toppings:

        Tuna Salad Ingredients

        • Tuna: Look for 5-ounce cans of high-quality wild-caught Albacore tuna packed in water. If you are concerned about mercury, go for skipjack tuna (sometimes labeled light tuna), which has lower mercury levels than larger albacore or yellowfin tuna.
        • Celery stalk
        • Pickles: Go for your favorite pickles, such as Kosher, dill pickles, or bread and butter pickles. Or swap out the pickles for pickle relish instead.
        • Hard-Boiled Egg: I follow this recipe on how to make hard-boiled eggs, which works every time.
        • Parsley: Fresh herbs, like parsley, give it a refreshing bite. Experiment with other herbs, like tarragon or dill, or give it a final sprinkle of fresh chives.
        • Mayonnaise: Mayonnaise brings the tuna salad together. Feel free to use vegan mayo or swap out half the mayo for plain Greek yogurt for a nice protein boost or sour cream for some tang.
        • Lemon juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice will provide the best flavor.
        • Kosher Salt
        • Black Pepper
        Ingredients for tuna melt recipe laid out from the top view.

        Tuna Sandwich Ingredients

        • Buns / Bread Slices: I used Brioche Buns for their buttery richness, but plain, sesame seed, or poppy seed hamburger buns will also do. If you want to go more on the traditional hot tuna melt, you can use ½-inch slices of white bread. However, sourdough bread, whole grain bread, ciabatta, or even English muffins would also work.
        • Cheese: Sharp cheddar cheese makes a classic tuna fish melt, which is why most people say that it’s the best cheese for a tuna melt. However, you can also use provolone, mozzarella, Swiss cheese, or Havarti in this sandwich recipe. If you want to take things up a notch, feel free to experiment with different types of cheese, like pepper jack, Monterey jack, Gruyere, fontina, or smoked gouda. You can use slices of cheese from the deli counter or grate a whole block of cheese when you get home.
        • Cucumber: Fresh cucumber slices offer a nice crunch and color.
        • Avocado: Peel, seed, and slice a fresh avocado just before serving to add some healthy fats and extra richness.
        • Tomato Slices: Use ripe tomatoes for the best flavor, such as Roma, tomatoes on the vine, or heirloom tomatoes. Once sliced, lay them out on paper towels to absorb excess moisture so your tuna and tomato sandwich doesn’t get too soggy.
        • Salad Greens: Salad greens, baby arugula, or chopped romaine lettuce offer a nice crunch and contrast to the creamy tuna salad.
        • Cornichons: Optional, but I love the extra gourmet touch of cornichons as garnish if you so choose.

        Optional Add-Ins:

        • Onion: Finely dice half of a red onion or some green onion to add to the tuna salad for an extra savory bite.
        • Dijon Mustard: Add 1 tablespoon of Dijon mustard to the tuna salad mixture.
        • Spicy Peppers: Give the tuna salad a little kick with a pinch of cayenne pepper or a seeded and diced jalapeno or Fresno chile.
        • Butter / Olive Oil: When I do not have buns on hand and decide to go for sliced sandwich bread, I love to slather one side of the bread with butter or drizzle with extra virgin olive oil for extra richness (keep reading to learn more!).

        How to Make a Tuna Melt Sandwich in the Oven?

        This recipe for tuna melt sandwich starts with homemade tuna salad. Once you have that prepped and ready, the rest is so easy. Follow these step-by-step directions to make the tuna fish sandwich in the oven:

        Tuna salad in a bowl with the rest of the sandwich ingredients around it.
        1. Make the tuna salad: In a medium bowl, mix together the tuna, celery, pickles, hard-boiled egg, parsley, mayonnaise, lemon juice, salt and pepper. Taste and adjust the seasoning to your liking.
        2. Prep the sandwiches: Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper. Place all 4 buns open-face on the baking tray. Top each bottom bun with 1 slice of cheese, followed by ½ cup of the tuna filling. Place another slice of cheese on the top bun.
        A person is layering tuna melts from the top view.
        1. Bake: Bake in the oven for 8-10 minutes or until the cheese melts. Remove from the oven and allow to cool slightly.
        2. Assemble: Layer each bottom bun (the one with the tuna mixture) with sliced cucumber, avocado, tomato, and a handful of salad greens. Top with the top bun. Garnish with a cornichon (if desired) and enjoy!

        How to Make Tuna Melt on the Stove?

        Alternatively, you can make this tuna salad melt in a large skillet on the stove. It is really not much different than making a grilled cheese sandwich. I find this works best if you are using white sandwich bread or English muffins. If you decide to go for the stovetop method, here’s how I like to do it:

        1. Butter Bread: Butter one side of 8 slices of bread or the outside of 4 English muffins.
        2. Assemble: Flip the bread or English muffins over, and place 1 slice of cheese on each unbuttered side. Add ½ cup of the tuna mixture to 4 slices of bread or the 4 bottom halves of the English muffins. Top with avocado and tomato, followed by the top slice of bread or English muffin (buttered side out).
        3. Toast: Heat a large skillet over medium to medium-low heat. Place 2 tuna melts in the skillet and cook until the bread is golden brown on the first side, about 4-5 minutes. Flip and continue to cook until the cheese is melted, about 3-4 minutes more. Remove from the skillet and continue with the remaining 2 tuna melt sandwiches.
        4. Cool and serve: Let them cool for a few minutes and serve.

        How to Make Ahead and Store?

        The most time-consuming part of this recipe is making the tuna salad. So if you want to get ahead, I recommend prepping the tuna salad in advance. With that out of the way, the tuna melts come together in less than 15 minutes. Here are my best make-ahead and storage tips:

        • Make Ahead: Prepare the tuna salad and store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. The tuna and veggies will leach out a bit of water the longer it sits in the fridge, so give it a good stir just before using.
        • Storage: The recipe makes 4 sandwiches, so if you are only serving 1-2 people, I recommend storing leftover tuna salad and toppings in separate airtight containers in the fridge. Assemble and bake the sandwiches just before serving.

        With that being said, if you end up with leftovers of this melted tuna sandwich, you can store them in an airtight container after they come to room temperature. Keep them in the fridge for up to 2 days. Reheat in a low heat (300 degrees F.) oven until heated through.

        How to Serve

        Think of this as a tuna cheese sandwich with all the fix-ins. Because of this, I like to serve it a bit more casually, either as a light lunch or simple dinner, with any of the following:

        Expert Tips

        While the recipe for this easy tuna melt sandwich recipe is pretty straightforward, there are a few things that I learned during my recipe testing. So, here are a few tips to help you get the best results when making this recipe:

        • Drain the tuna well: Make sure to drain the cans of water-packed tuna before mixing to prevent too much water in the tuna salad, which could make it soggy.
        • Preheat the oven or skillet: Whether you are using the oven or a skillet, make sure it is properly preheated before you start cooking.
        • Medium to low heat is key: Keep it low and slow. Bake at the recommended 350 degrees F or cook over medium to medium-low heat on the stove to melt the cheese without burning the bread.
        • Give it a gentle press: If using the stovetop method, feel free to gently press down on the sandwich with a spatula to give the bread a nice sear. Be careful not to push so hard that all the filling spills out the sides.
        • Serve open-faced sandwiches: If you want to cut down on the carbs or prefer to eat an open-face tuna melt with a fork and knife, assemble open-faced tuna melts by simply omitting the top slice of bread.

        FAQs

        What is a tuna melt?

        A tuna melt is a hot sandwich that combines tuna salad with melty cheese between two slices of griddled bread. Additional toppings, such as avocado, tomato, and lettuce, can be included.

        What goes good with tuna melts?

        Tuna melts are a classic sandwich that pair well with tomato soup, coleslaw, pickle spears, potato chips, garden salad, potato salad, and pasta salad.

        What cheese is best with tuna?

        Cheddar cheese is classic in a toasted tuna sandwich, but have fun and experiment with different cheeses such as provolone, mozzarella, pepper jack, Havarti, Gruyere, fontina or smoked gouda.

        Other Seafood Recipes You Might Like

        If you try this Tuna Melt Sandwich recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Tuna melt sandwich with a pickle on top.
        Print

        Tuna Melt Sandwich Recipe

        Tuna Melt Sandwich layered with cheddar cheese, homemade tuna salad and baked in the oven for all the ooey-gooey goodness. Later, topped off with sliced avocado, tomatoes and salad greens to turn it in a out-of-this world delicious sandwich. Ready in 30 minutes and great for any meal of the day.
        Course Sandwich
        Cuisine American
        Diet Kosher
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Cook Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 30 minutes
        Servings 4 servings
        Calories 447kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Tuna Mixture:

        • 2 cans tuna 5 oz. each (I prefer wild-caught Albacore tuna packed in water) – drained
        • 4 stalks celery chopped
        • 2-3 small pickles chopped
        • 1 hard boiled egg peeled and chopped
        • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped
        • ½ cup mayonnaise
        • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
        • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        For the Sandwich:

        • 4 hamburger buns* sliced in half as you see in the photos (or your favorite toast)
        • 8 slices cheddar cheese or provolone, mozzarella or Havarti would also work
        • 1 cucumber sliced thinly
        • 1 avocado ripe sliced
        • 1 large tomato sliced
        • ½ cup salad greens or arugula
        • 4 cornichon as garnish – optional

        Instructions

        • To make the tuna mixture: Mix together drained tuna, celery, pickles, egg, parsley, mayonnaise, lemon juice, salt and pepper in a bowl. Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
        • To make the sandwiches: Preheat the oven to 350 degrees.
        • Place 1 slice of cheese on the bottom half of a bun and top it off with ½ cup of the tuna mixture. Place another slice of cheese on the top bun. Place both of them (facing up) on the sheet pan. Repeat the same process with the rest of the buns.
        • Bake in the oven for 8-10 minutes or until cheese melts. Take it out of the oven and let it cool for a minute.
        • To Assemble: Layer each bottom bun (the one with the tuna mixture) with sliced cucumber, avocado, tomato, and a green salad leaf. Put the top bun.
        • If preferred, garnish with a cornichon (as seen in the photos) and serve.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes 4 sandwiches, which is good for 4 servings. The nutrition information below is per serving.
        • Bread: We opted for brioche buns, but regular sliced whole wheat or white sandwich bread can also be used.
        • Cheese: Sharp yellow cheddar is ideal, but white cheddar, provolone, or Havarti can also be used.
        • Make Ahead: You can make the tuna salad a day in advance. When ready to serve, simply assemble the tuna melts as written in the recipe.
        • Storage: You can store the leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to one additional day.
        • To cook it on the stovetop:
          1. Butter Bread: Butter one side of 8 slices of bread.
          2. Assemble: Flip the bread and place 1 slice of cheese on each unbuttered side. Add ½ cup of the tuna mixture to 4 slices of bread. Top with avocado and tomato, followed by the top slice of bread (buttered side out).
          3. Toast: Heat a large skillet over medium to medium-low heat. Place 2 tuna melts in the skillet and cook until the bread is golden brown on the first side, about 4-5 minutes. Flip and continue to cook until the cheese is melted, about 3-4 minutes more. Remove from the skillet and continue with the remaining 2 sandwiches.
          4. Cool and serve: Let them cool for a few minutes and serve.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 447kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 33g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 113mg | Sodium: 955mg | Potassium: 696mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1081IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 363mg | Iron: 4mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/tuna-melt-sandwich/feed/ 9
        Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-sweet-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-sweet-potatoes/#comments Wed, 20 Sep 2023 19:47:47 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15280 Here at Foolproof Living, we love to roast colorful root veggies in the oven. Not only is this method quick…]]>

        Here at Foolproof Living, we love to roast colorful root veggies in the oven. Not only is this method quick and easy, but it’s the tastiest way to get your daily dose of nutrients. If you’re looking for more easy recipes for beautifully caramelized, tender roasted veggies, you have to make my Roasted Acorn Squash, this Maple Roasted Carrot dish, and my Baked Butternut Squash Cubes

        Roasted Brussel Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes in an oval plate with a spoon on the side.

        Ingredients

        We’re keeping the ingredient list short and simple for this roasted brussel sprout and sweet potato recipe. The veggies crisp up perfectly with just a little olive oil, and we’re adding a few additional seasonings to enhance the flavor of this dish. Here’s what you’ll need:

        Ingredients for the recipe in small bowls from the top view.
        • Fresh Brussels sprouts: Rinse them under cold water and slice them in half. If you have larger sprouts, cut them into quarters.
        • Sweet potatoes: You’ll need 1 or 2 large sweet potatoes or 3-4 medium sweet potatoes. Be sure to peel them and cut them into 1-inch cubes.
        • Fresh garlic cloves: Peel garlic and mince finely. Don’t have fresh garlic on hand? Use a teaspoon of garlic powder instead.
        • Extra-virgin olive oil
        • Seasonings: You’ll need paprika (sweet or smoked), ground cumin, kosher or sea salt, and black pepper. 
        • Fresh Herbs (optional): We used fresh parsley as a garnish, but when making this dish during the holiday season, we use other fresh herbs like fresh sage, fresh thyme, or fresh rosemary.

        Substitutions 

        Root vegetables are ideal for roasting because the high heat allows the veggie’s natural sugars to caramelize and release a sweet flavor. Feel free to swap the sweet potatoes for your favorite root vegetable or even switch up the flavor profiles of this dish. Here are some ideas:

        • Pioneer Woman’s Brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes: The Pioneer Woman has a delicious variation of this Brussel sprouts and sweet potato recipe that uses butternut squash and onion. If you’d like to try out her version, swap the sweet potatoes for cubed butternut squash and add some diced onion (she uses yellow onion, but red onion would also work.) If you don’t know how to cube butternut squash, check out my easy How to Cut Butternut Squash guide. If you’re not a fan of butternut squash, try substituting chopped carrots. You can even make roasted yams and Brussels sprouts for another substitution. 
        • Maple roasted Brussels sprouts and sweet potatoes: Sweet and savory is such a classic combo! Balance the savory spices in this recipe by adding a sweetener like sweet maple syrup, which will also help to bring out those beautiful caramelized flavors. I recommend drizzling your oven-roasted sweet potatoes and Brussels sprouts with maple syrup (about one tablespoon), just as I did in this Maple Roasted Carrots and Balsamic Maple Brussels Sprouts recipe. For another sweet option, try drizzling your roasted veggies with a dash of balsamic vinegar or balsamic glaze (affiliate link.) 

        How to Roast Sweet Potatoes and Brussel Sprouts?

        In just 30 minutes, you can serve up this impressive, colorful vegetable dish that pairs with an endless number of main dishes. Plus, with only one bowl and a sheet pan, it makes for a super easy cleanup. Here’s how to make brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes in oven:

        1. Prep your equipment: Preheat your oven to 400 degrees F (204 degrees C). Line a large sheet pan with parchment paper or aluminum foil and set aside. 
        A collage of images showing how to roast brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes.
        1. Combine the veggies and seasonings: Add the veggies, olive oil, garlic, cumin, paprika, salt, and pepper to a large or medium bowl. Toss Brussels sprouts and sweet potatoes with all the oil and seasonings until evenly coated.
        2. Transfer to the baking sheet: Transfer the seasoned veggies to the prepared baking sheet and spread them into a single layer. 
        3. Roast vegetables: Place in the center rack of the oven for 20-25 min, making sure to flip halfway through. 
        4. Serve: Transfer the roasted sweet potato and brussel sprouts to a serving bowl or plate. Sprinkle with fresh parsley or other fresh herbs, if desired. 

        Variations with Optional Add-Ins

        While roasted brussels sprouts and sweet potatoes are delicious as-is, they make an excellent base for salads, grain bowls, and more. Get creative by drizzling with dressings, adding lots of toppings, or adjusting the flavor profile to suit a special occasion. Here are a few suggestions:

        • Add quinoa: Turn this easy side dish into a roasted vegetable salad with cooked quinoa. For nutritious, simple, and filling lunch or dinner options, add your roasted brussels sprouts and sweet potato to this yummy Quinoa Sweet Potato Bowl or to my other delicious Quinoa Salad recipes. If you’d like to try these recipes but you are unfamiliar with cooking quinoa, I have you covered. Check out my easy guide for Cooking Quinoa on the Stove.
        • Mix with salad greens or massaged kale: Amp up the nutrients of this dish by tossing it with your favorite salad greens or kale. For a restaurant-worthy creation, finish off your sweet potato brussel sprout salad with a drizzle of Lemon and Balsamic Dressing and top it with lots of Crispy Bacon
        • Nuts and dried fruits: While you can enjoy roasted sweet potatoes and Brussels sprouts year-round, they’re especially fitting for the autumn season because of their warm, cozy flavors. If I’m making this dish for Thanksgiving, I love adding festive toppings like chopped pecans (or walnuts) and dried cranberries. Feel free to use your favorite nuts and dried fruit, such as dried figs or sliced almonds. Or, add a fun pop of color by tossing this sweet potato brussel sprout recipe with some fresh pomegranate seeds. 

        How to Make Ahead, Store, & Reheat?

        While sheet pan Brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes are quick and easy to throw together for a last-minute side dish, they’re also make-ahead-friendly for meal prep and storage-friendly for those yummy leftovers. Here are some make-ahead, storage, and reheating tips:

        • Make-ahead: You can make this sweet potato and brussel sprout recipe a day in advance so it’s ready to go when you are. Simply chop up the veggies, mix them together with the seasonings, garlic, and extra virgin olive oil, and store them in a plastic bag, large bowl, or airtight container in the fridge. Follow the above instructions to cook them when you’re ready to serve. 
        • Store: Bring the baked brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container. They’ll stay fresh in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
        • Reheat: You can reheat your leftovers for a few seconds in the microwave or in a 300-degree F oven for about 10 minutes or until warmed through. 
        A close up of the dish from the top view.

        What to Serve It With?

        Baked sweet potato and Brussels sprouts are a classic side that pairs with virtually any main dish. While it is one of my go-to dishes for holiday dinners, you can also enjoy this recipe as a snack, appetizer, or simple lunch! Here are a few of my serving recommendations: 

        Expert Tips

        When it comes to roasting Brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes, the goal is to make them tender, caramelized, and crisp rather than mushy and lifeless. Thankfully, this is easy to achieve with just a few tricks up your sleeve! Here’s what you need to know: 

        • Aim for equal-sized veggies: Cutting your veggies into fairly equally-sized pieces will help them cook evenly in the oven. I recommend chopping medium-sized sweet potatoes into 1-inch cubes and cutting the sprouts in half lengthwise. You may need to cut particularly large Brussels sprouts into quarters. 
        • Leave the outer leaves: While you can remove any loose sprout leaves before roasting, I prefer to leave them since they crisp up really well in the oven and add a nice crunch to the dish. 
        • Flip halfway through the roasting process: When roasting sweet potatoes and Brussels sprouts, flip them halfway through to ensure even cooking. They can turn from perfectly crisp and caramelized to mushy pretty quickly, so make sure to keep an eye on them after about 20 minutes (every oven is different). You’ll know they’re done when they’re fork-tender.

        FAQs

        Can I roast brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes together?

        Yes, you can. Roast sweet potatoes and brussel sprouts in the oven for a total time of about 20-25 minutes to achieve a fork-tender texture with crisp, caramelized edges. Plus, sweet potato brussels sprouts are a savory and sweet combination that makes for the perfect side dish.

        What temp to roast brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes?

        You can cook sheet pan sweet potatoes and brussel sprouts in a 400-degree F oven for 20-25 minutes or until fork-tender.

        Can I roast brussels sprouts and sweet potatoes in the air fryer instead?

        For a quick and easy cooking option, you can make air fryer brussel sprouts and sweet potatoes instead of roasting them in the oven. I recommend roasting them in the air fryer basket at 400 degrees F for 17-20 minutes or until you achieve tender potatoes and crispy brussel sprouts.

        What pairs well with brussel sprouts?

        Root veggies, such as sweet potatoes, carrots, and butternut squash, pair beautifully with sprouts. Roasted root vegetables and brussel sprouts require around the same cook time, resulting in a tender texture with crisp, golden brown, and caramelized edges. It’s the perfect combination of savory and sweet.

        Should I soak brussel sprouts before roasting?

        There’s no need to soak your sprouts before roasting them. However, I recommend giving them a good rinse under cold running water to remove any dirt, debris, or pesticides. You can lightly dry them with a paper towel before cooking to ensure they crisp up nicely.

        Other Roasted Vegetable Recipes You Might Like:

        Whether you need a delicious side dish to serve with your holiday dinner or you are just looking for a healthy veggie meal for a Tuesday night dinner, we have a good collection of vegetable side dishes for you to choose from. Below are a few hand-picked recipes that we make regularly:

        If you try this Roasted Sweet Potato Brussel Sprouts Recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Roasted Sweet Potatoes and Brussels Sprouts on a plate with a spoon on the side.
        Print

        Roasted Brussels Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes Recipe

        These Oven-Roasted Brussel Sprouts and Sweet Potatoes are an easy side dish that’s vegan, gluten-free, and dairy-free. Tender, perfectly caramelized, and seasoned with cumin and paprika, these veggies are just as tasty as they are nutritious. Serve this recipe as a snack or appetizer, alongside your favorite weeknight meal, or even as an accompaniment to your holiday table.
        Course Side Dish
        Cuisine American
        Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Cook Time 25 minutes
        Total Time 35 minutes
        Servings 4 servings (as a side dish)
        Calories 271kcal

        Ingredients

        • 1 pound Brussels sprouts trimmed and halved lengthwise
        • 1 pound sweet potatoes peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes
        • 2 cloves fresh garlic minced or 1 teaspoon garlic powder
        • ¼ cup olive oil
        • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
        • ½ teaspoon paprika sweet or smoked
        • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
        • ½ teaspoon black pepper
        • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley optional or other fresh herbs like fresh sage, thyme or rosemary

        Instructions

        • Preheat oven to 400 degrees F (or 204 degrees C). Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper (or aluminum foil) and set aside.
        • Into a large bowl, place halved Brussels sprouts, cubed sweet potatoes, minced garlic, olive oil, ground cumin, paprika, salt, and pepper.
        • Give it a good toss to ensure that the vegetables are coated with all the seasonings and oil.
        • Transfer onto the prepared baking sheet and make sure that they are spread on a single layer.
        • Roast vegetables in the oven for 20 to 25 minutes, flipping halfway through the cooking process.
        • Transfer the now-roasted sweet potatoes and Brussels sprouts to a serving platter. Serve it with a sprinkle of fresh parsley.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe yields about 4 to 5 cups of roasted vegetables, which is ideal for serving 4 people as a side dish. The nutritional values listed below are per serving.
        • Aim for equal-sized veggies: Cutting your veggies into fairly equally-sized pieces will help them cook evenly in the oven. I recommend chopping sweet potatoes into 1-inch cubes and cutting the sprouts in half lengthwise. You may need to cut particularly large Brussels sprouts into quarters. 
        • Make-ahead: You can make this recipe a day in advance so it’s ready to go when you are. Simply chop up the veggies, mix them together with the seasonings, garlic, and extra virgin olive oil, and store them in a plastic bag, large bowl, or airtight container in the fridge. Follow the above instructions to cook them when you’re ready to serve. 
        • Store: Bring the roasted vegetables to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container. Keep them in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
        • Turn it into a salad: An earlier version of this recipe was tossed with ½ cup of cooked quinoa, 1 cup of arugula, a handful of pumpkin seeds, and pomegranate arils. It was drizzled with a homemade salad dressing. Below are the ingredients you will need to make the dressing:
          • ¼ cup orange juice freshly squeezed
          • 2 tablespoons olive oil
          • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
          • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
          • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        Nutrition

        Calories: 271kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 674mg | Potassium: 853mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 17158IU | Vitamin C: 101mg | Calcium: 93mg | Iron: 3mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-brussels-sprouts-sweet-potatoes/feed/ 20
        Mediterranean Hummus Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/ https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/#comments Tue, 05 Sep 2023 00:39:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2804 While I love a good flavored hummus like my Carrot Hummus recipe, there really is something about plain hummus that…]]>

        While I love a good flavored hummus like my Carrot Hummus recipe, there really is something about plain hummus that just brings me back to my roots. Simple, straightforward, and with just a few pantry staples, homemade hummus is only a few steps away.

        A bowl of hummus garnished with chickpeas and parsley.

        Hummus Ingredients

        A traditional hummus recipe requires just a handful of ingredients. Since hummus is the Arabic word for chickpeas, it’s no wonder this is the main ingredient. Below is what you’ll need:

        Ingredients for basic hummus recipe.
        • Chickpeas: Although you can cook your own chickpeas (more on this below), I find using canned chickpeas is easier and does not require any advanced planning. We will need one can of chickpeas (also known as garbanzo beans) rinsed and drained.
        • Lemon Juice: Fresh lemon juice will provide a fresh pop of citrus.
        • Water: A bit of water helps with consistency. For best results, use ice-cold water.
        • Tahini Paste: A high-quality tahini (sesame paste) makes all the difference and gives this easy hummus recipe that special nutty flavor. I love super creamy Soom tahini (affiliate link) or Seed + Mill (affiliate link.)
        • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: Use good quality olive oil for the best flavor.
        • Garlic Cloves: I use raw garlic when making this hummus recipe from scratch. However, if you want to take things up a notch (and are not a fan of the pungent garlic flavor), you can use Roasted Garlic, or, quicker, Air Fried Garlic as well. 
        • Seasonings: Cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt add Mediterranean flavor and warmth.
        • Fresh Herbs: Upon serving, a final sprinkle of fresh herbs like parsley is all you need. 

        Substitutions and Optional Garnish Ideas

        While you can serve this DIY hummus simply as is, I find extra garnishes and Mediterranean additions compliment the classic characteristics of hummus and give it depth of flavor. Some favorites you can try include:

        • Chickpeas: If you would prefer to make hummus from dried chickpeas, I recommend trying Ottolenghi’s method of cooking chickpeas. Place 1 ⅓ cups dry chickpeas in a bowl, cover with cool water, add 1 teaspoon baking soda, cover and soak overnight. The next day, drain, rinse, and cook in a pot of water for 40 minutes to an hour, or until softened. And if you prefer it to be quicker, you can cook chickpeas in a pressure cooker as well.
        • Olive Oil: Create a deep crevice into the bowl of hummus with a large spoon and finish with a generous drizzle of olive oil.
        • Pine Nuts + Olives: Add crunch and fruitiness by finishing with toasted pine nuts and chopped Kalamata olives or green olives.
        • Hummus Seasoning: Finish with an array of spices and herbs, such as my Mediterranean Seasoning or Baharat Spice Blend, bright and tangy sumac, or dried oregano.
        • Greek: Garnish with chopped sun-dried tomatoes, crumbled feta cheese, chopped red onion, and a drizzle of olive oil.

        How to Make Hummus From Scratch?

        If you are ever looking for a step-by-step hummus recipe, you have come to the right place. Making your own hummus will always be better than store-bought hummus and might even be faster than taking a trip to the grocery store. Here’s how I like to do it:

        Step by step photos showing how to make hummus recipe.
        1. Prep ingredients: Combine the lemon juice and water in a small bowl. Reserve 2 tablespoons of chickpeas as a garnish.
        2. Mix Tahini: In another small bowl, whisk together the tahini and olive oil until shiny and smooth.
        3. Blend chickpeas: In the bowl of a food processor with the steel blade or a high-powered blender, add the remaining chickpeas and process for 15 seconds. Add lemon juice/water mixture, garlic, cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt. Process until the mixture begins to form into a paste, about 1 minute.
        Person showing how to make creamy hummus in a collage of images.
        1. Add tahini: With the food processor running, slowly add the tahini paste mixture through the tube and process until creamy, about 30-40 seconds. Be sure to stop the machine a few times and scrape down the sides.
        2. Serve: Transfer the hummus to a large bowl. Using the back of a spoon, create a deep crevice in the center. Finish with reserved chickpeas, a drizzle of olive oil, and chopped fresh parsley, and enjoy.

        How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze?

        Easy homemade hummus can be made ahead and stored in both the fridge and freezer. To do so, simply:

        • Make Ahead: Prepare this homemade hummus recipe as directed up to 2 days in advance. The flavors actually get better the longer they have a chance to marry together.
        • Store: Leftovers of this chickpea hummus recipe can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
        • Freeze: Store in a freezer-safe airtight container, with a little space at the top (to count for expansion), for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the fridge.

        How to Serve

        This basic hummus recipe can be served in a number of different ways. Go the more traditional route or think outside of the box by serving as:

        • Mezze Platter: The adoration for hummus is a social activity that is meant to be enjoyed amongst the company, and no mezze plate would be complete without it. Enjoy it alongside Baba Ganoush and Middle Eastern Red Pepper Dip for an authentic experience.
        • Grilled Meat: Make it a part of a filling meal by serving your garbanzo bean hummus alongside Mediterranean Chicken, Chicken Kabobs, Grilled Lamb, or beef kabobs.
        • Appetizer / Dip: Cut up fresh veggies like raw celery sticks, English cucumber, carrots, bell peppers, or radishes and dip right into Mediterranean hummus bowls. And if you want to take it up a notch, drizzle it with a spoonful of skhug sauce for that authentic Middle Eastern taste.
        • Spread: Use it as a sandwich spread to make your lunch that much more enjoyable, or add it to your favorite grain bowls.
        • Pita / Bread: Give it a casual approach with toasted pita bread, pita chips, crackers, Air Fried Garlic Bread, Olive Bread, or No Knead Artisan Bread.
        Greek hummus in a bowl garnished with chickpeas and parsley.

        Expert Tips

        While the recipe for this authentic hummus recipe is pretty simple and straightforward, below are a few tips to ensure you get perfect results on your first try:

        • Should I remove the skins of chickpeas? I am sure you’ve seen a lot of recipes suggesting removing the chickpea skins. While I get why they recommend doing so, I personally do not have the time or patience to do so. And I guarantee you that this recipe is just as creamy and delicious without removing the skin. 
        • Use high-quality tahini: The quality of your tahini makes a huge difference here. For optimal taste and texture, use a brand of tahini that uses the buttery white Humera sesame seeds from Ethiopia. It should also be soft and creamy. If the tahini bottle has been sitting in the fridge for a while, be sure to give it a good stir before using it.
        • Use an ice cube: This is an optional step, but it really works. To achieve an extra smooth and creamy hummus, add 1-2 ice cubes near the end of processing.
        • No food processor? Use a blender. However, please keep in mind that if you have a high-speed blender like Vitamix (affiliate link), you might have to stop the machine and scrape the sides a few times.
        • Serve at room temperature: Fun fact – restaurant hummus is never refrigerated and is made fresh each morning. While I refrigerate my batch of homemade hummus to get ahead, I always serve it at room temperature.

        FAQs

        What is the secret to the creamiest hummus?

        The creamiest hummus is made from soft chickpeas and a high-powered food processor or blender. Adding 1-2 ice cubes at the end of the processing time would also help.

        Can you have hummus on a Mediterranean diet?

        Yes, hummus is a staple of the Mediterranean diet and is celebrated for being plant-based and full of protein, dietary fiber, and healthy fats.

        What is the main ingredient in hummus?

        The main ingredient in hummus is chickpeas, sometimes referred to as garbanzo beans.

        How much tahini for hummus?

        This is more about personal preference and cultural influence, but I use ⅓ cup tahini for every 1 (14-15 oz) can of chickpeas.

        Other Mediterranean Recipes You Might Enjoy:

        It is no secret that I love making and sharing Turkish recipes on the blog. Below are other Mediterranean classics that I know you’ll like:

        Save This Recipe
        Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

        If you try this Mediterranean Hummus Recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Authentic hummus in a bowl drizzled with olive oil.
        Print

        Mediterranean Hummus Recipe

        A restaurant style yet Homemade Mediterranean Hummus recipe. This recipe makes the creamiest and most delicious hummus that you can make in minutes. Top it off with pine nuts, chopped olives, and a drizzle of oil for extra deliciousness.
        Course Appetizer
        Cuisine Mediterranean
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 10 minutes
        Cook Time 10 minutes
        Total Time 20 minutes
        Servings 6 people
        Calories 139kcal

        Ingredients

        • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
        • 1/4 cup water
        • 1/3 cup tahini paste
        • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
        • 1 can chickpeas (14 oz.) drained and rinsed
        • 2 small cloves garlic minced
        • 1/4 teaspoon cumin
        • Pinch of cayenne pepper
        • Pinch of black pepper
        • 1/2 teaspoon salt
        • 2 tablespoons Italian parsley finely chopped

        Instructions

        • In a small bowl, combine the lemon juice and water.
        • In a separate bowl (or a measuring cup), whisk together the tahini paste and olive oil until thoroughly incorporated.
        • Reserve 2 tablespoons of chickpeas as a garnish.
        • Place the rest of the chickpeas in a food processor and process them for 15 seconds. Add lemon juice and water mixture, garlic, cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt. Process until mixed, scraping down the bowl as necessary, 50-60 seconds.
        • While the food processor is running, slowly (in a steady stream), pour the tahini paste and olive oil mixture from the tube, and process until smooth and creamy (or it reaches your desired consistency,) for 30-40 seconds.
        • Transfer the hummus to a plate and sprinkle it with chopped parsley and reserved chickpeas. If preferred, drizzle it with olive oil. Serve it with fresh pita, pita chips or toasted bread on the side.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 ½ cups of hummus, which is ideal for 6 servings when served as an appetizer. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply the recipe. The nutrition information below is for one serving.
        • Make Ahead: Make the recipe as directed up to 2 days in advance. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge. The flavors actually get better the longer they have a chance to marry together.
        • Store: Leftover hummus can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 139kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 242mg | Potassium: 86mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 132IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/feed/ 15
        1905 Salad https://foolproofliving.com/1905-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/1905-salad/#comments Thu, 31 Aug 2023 19:24:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=70366 Viral salads are all the craze these days, much like the La Scala Salad (aka Kardashian Salad) and Jen Aniston…]]>

        Viral salads are all the craze these days, much like the La Scala Salad (aka Kardashian Salad) and Jen Aniston Salad. And this Columbia 1905 salad recipe has so much rich history, it’s no wonder it has taken the internet by storm.

        Columbia restaurant salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

        What is 1905 Salad?

        The 1905 salad was invented by a waiter named Tony Noriega at the Columbia Restaurant (one of the most iconic restaurants in America) in the heart of the Ybor City neighborhood of the Tampa Bay area in Florida. He was working late at the restaurant one night and used some leftovers in the fridge to create what the restaurant now serves tableside (with some minor adjustments made to the original).

        Contrary to its name, it was actually created in the 1940s and was later adapted by Columbia and added to the menu in the 1970s as an answer to the salad bar. The name of the salad, ‘1905’, was created to celebrate the year the restaurant was founded as Florida’s oldest restaurant.

        Since then, the unique flavors of the 1905 salad have been considered a culinary representation of the Cuban and Spanish heritage of Ybor City and the Tampa Bay area. Because of its Cuban/Spanish origin, the salad goes by many names, including the 1905 Columbia Salad, Cuban 1905 Salad, Florida Salad, Tampa Salad, or Tony Salad.

        Ingredients

        The beauty of the 1905 Columbia salad recipe is that it relies on simple, yet delicious, ingredients. Yet there are details in both the dressing and salad that are important to point out. I highly recommend sticking to the below ingredients to make the original 1905 Columbia salad recipe, but I also offer plenty of substitutions to give it your own unique flavor.

        Columbia Restaurant Salad Dressing

        This Columbia 1905 salad dressing has become so popular over the years, that it is now sold as a salad dressing in grocery stores like Publix and even online stores like Amazon. While you can always buy a bottle, making it at home is so easy. Here’s what you will need:

        1905 salad dressing recipe ingredients with text on the image.
        • Garlic: Freshly minced garlic cloves will provide the best flavor. In this case, I would not substitute it with garlic powder.
        • Dried Oregano: I used dried oregano, but you can use 1 sprig of fresh oregano for a stronger, floral flavor.
        • Worcestershire Sauce: This is the secret ingredient that gives the salad dressing that special umami flavor. Pick up a bottle of the popular Lea and Perrins Worcestershire Sauce (affiliate link) for authentic flavor.
        • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: The original recipe calls for extra-virgin Spanish olive oil, but you can use whichever olive oil you have on hand.
        • White Wine Vinegar: White wine vinegar provides a nice bit of acidity.
        • Fresh Lemon Juice: Use freshly squeezed lemon juice, which would be the juice of about 1 lemon.
        • Kosher Salt + Black Pepper

        Salad Ingredients

        • Iceberg Lettuce: We need 7-8 cups of crisp lettuce, which you can get from about one large head of iceberg lettuce. The key is to slice, rinse, and then dry it really well. If you have a salad spinner, this is the time to use it.
        • Tomatoes: Ripe, juicy tomatoes are key, but any kind will do. My favorites are heirloom, beefsteak, tomatoes on the vine, cherry, or Roma tomatoes.
        • Ham Slices: We need about 4-5 slices of deli ham. Slice them into thin, julienne slices (matchstick strips) when you get home.
        • Swiss Cheese: The same goes for the Swiss cheese. We need about 5 slices, also sliced into julienne.
        • Green Olives: Use pitted green olives, roughly chopped, or even pimento-stuffed green Spanish olives if you want to take it up a notch.
        • Pecorino Romano: The original recipe uses Romano cheese, which is Pecorino Romano sold here in the United States. Pick up a box of finely grated cheese or grate a whole block at home.

        Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins

        While I highly recommend sticking to the original 1905 salad recipe, I wanted to make sure I provided you with a few substitutions and optional additions. 

        • Salad Greens: A good substitute for iceberg lettuce would be romaine lettuce. Just be sure to slice it as thinly as you can.
        • Celery Stalks: Add some thinly sliced celery stalks for extra crunch.
        • Black Olives: Swap out the green olives for milder black olives instead.
        • Ham Substitutions: If you are not a fan of ham, you can use thinly sliced, deli-style chicken, turkey breast, salami, or pepperoni, or try some Grilled Shrimp instead.
        • Cheese: If you don’t have Pecorino Romano, finely grated Parmesan cheese will also work.
        • Croutons: Whether store-bought or Homemade Croutons, add a handful to the top for some extra crunch.
        • Hard-Boiled Eggs: Slice or dice some hard-boiled eggs for extra protein.
        • Onion: Toss in some thinly sliced red onion or green onions for an extra savory bite.
        • Make it Vegetarian: Omit the ham and use some Baked Tofu instead, or simply add more Swiss and green olives to compensate for the lack of meaty flavor.

        How to Make 1905 Salad Recipe?

        The recipe for the 1905 salad follows the same basic steps as any other salad: First, whip up the salad dressing, prepare the salad ingredients, and then toss them all together. Here’s how to do it in a few easy steps:

        A collage of images showing how to make Columbia restaurant salad recipe.
        1. Make the 1905 Salad Dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together the garlic, dried oregano, and Worcestershire sauce. Slowly add the olive oil while whisking constantly to form an emulsion. Stir in vinegar, lemon juice, salt, and pepper, while still whisking until smooth.
        2. Assemble the Salad: In a large salad bowl, combine lettuce, tomatoes, ham, Swiss cheese, and green olives.
        3. Toss: Toss salad ingredients with the dressing. Sprinkle with Romano cheese, taste for seasoning, and add more, if desired. Serve and enjoy!

        How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

        The Columbia Salad can be made ahead and even stored for later if done properly. Here are my best storage tips:

        • Make Ahead: Columbia restaurant actually recommends making the dressing 1-2 days in advance, but I find it lasts up to 3 days if stored in an airtight container or mason jar in the refrigerator.
        • Storage: The dressed salad will only keep fresh for 1 day. Please be aware that as it sits, it releases all of its juices. If you plan to store the salad for longer or know you will have leftovers, refrain from tossing the salad with the dressing until the day you are going to serve. Store the prepared salad ingredients in a large airtight container with a paper towel to absorb excess moisture for 2-3 days.

        What to Serve With the 1905 Salad?

        This is a hearty salad all on its own, so it can be served simply with bread and butter. The Columbia Restaurant serves it with a Cuban sandwich from the menu. Here at home, I love to serve it as a side salad with any of the following:

        1905 Columbia salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

        Expert Tips

        • Authentic flavors: The reason this salad became so famous is because it is so well-balanced. I highly recommend sticking to the original recipe to bring out all those Spanish flavors. This may mean a quick trip to the store, but I promise it is worth it.
        • Take your time when making the dressing: It’s interesting to note, that The Columbia restaurant actually adds the Worcestershire sauce and lemon juice at the end so that you can taste more of the savory, bright components. But I find the ingredients marry together well when mixed into one. The key is to emulsify the dressing so that the olive oil is mixed well with the Worcestershire sauce, vinegar, and lemon juice. To do so, slowly drizzle in the olive oil and give it one more good whisk just before tossing.
        • Assembly: The salad at the Columbia restaurant is prepared tableside for all guests who order it. If you really want to stick to history, serve this salad tableside for all your family members and friends, and for extra flair.
        • Salt: I intentionally included less salt in the salad dressing since this salad contains many salty ingredients, like ham, Swiss, salty green olives, and grated cheese. Be sure to taste test once you mix the dressing with the salad. The exact measurements will be based on your personal preference.
        • Mix at the last minute: Drizzle with the dressing just before serving to keep the iceberg lettuce crisp and crunchy and the rest of the ingredients fresh.
        • Presentation: Each ingredient brings its own color, taste, and texture, so have fun with the presentation, especially if serving this salad to a crowd. For extra bonus points, serve in a chilled salad bowl to keep it super cold.

        FAQs

        Why is it called 1905 salad?

        Although the 1905 salad was technically invented in the 1940s, it is named after the year the Columbia restaurant was founded.

        Who invented the 1905 salad?

        The 1905 salad was invented by waiter Tony Noriega, who pulled leftovers from the fridge one night after work to create this famous salad.

        How many calories are in a 1905 Columbia Salad?

        One serving of the 1905 Columbia Salad is 306 calories. This will vary based on the amount of Romano cheese you add at the end.

        Other Meal-Worthy Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

        If you try this 1905 Salad recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        1905 Salad from Columbia restaurant in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
        Print

        1905 Salad Recipe

        Be a part of the viral sensation and make the famous 1905 salad right at home! Made with the iconic Columbia Restaurant’s garlic salad dressing, sweet ham, and creamy cheese, it is an easy salad you can make in 15 minutes.
        Course Salad
        Cuisine Cuban
        Diet Gluten Free
        Prep Time 15 minutes
        Total Time 15 minutes
        Servings 6 servings
        Calories 306kcal

        Ingredients

        For The Salad Dressing:

        • 4 garlic cloves minced
        • 2 teaspoons dried oregano
        • 2 tablespoons Worcestershire Sauce
        • ½ cup extra virgin olive oil
        • 3 tablespoons white wine vinegar
        • 4 tablespoons lemon juice
        • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt plus more to taste
        • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

        For The Salad:

        • 1 head iceberg lettuce sliced and rinsed (~7-8 cups)
        • 1 large ripe tomato sliced
        • ½ cup ham slices* julienned – about ¼ lb or 5 slices of ham
        • ½ cup Swiss cheese julienned – 5-6 slices
        • ½ cup green olives pitted and chopped
        • ¼ cup Pecorino Romano grated or grated Parmesan cheese

        Instructions

        • To make the dressing, whisk garlic, dried oregano, and Worcestershire sauce in a bowl. Gradually add the olive oil while whisking constantly to form an emulsion. Stir in vinegar, lemon juice, salt and pepper. Whisk until thoroughly combined.
        • To assemble the Columbia restaurant salad, place iceberg lettuce, sliced tomatoes, julienned ham and Swiss cheese, and green olives in a large bowl.
        • Drizzle the salad with the dressing. Give it a toss until combined. Sprinkle it with Romano cheese.
        • Taste for seasoning, add more if necessary, and serve.

        Video

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe yields a large bowl of salad (about 7-8 cups), which is ideal for 6 servings as a side dish.
        • Ham: The original recipe uses baked ham. If you have some on hand, go ahead and use it. Otherwise, deli-style ham slices are a good substitution. You can also use deli-style chicken/turkey breast or even shrimp.
        • A word on salt: I intentionally included less salt in the salad dressing since this salad contains many salty ingredients, like ham, Swiss cheese, salty green olives, and Romano cheese. Be sure to give it a taste right after mixing it and adjust it according to your taste buds.
        • Store: This salad is best on the day it is made. However, leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for one day. Please be aware that it gets watery as it sits, so it is best to give it a good mix before serving.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 306kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 17g | Cholesterol: 25mg | Sodium: 756mg | Potassium: 346mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 857IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 173mg | Iron: 1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/1905-salad/feed/ 2
        Corn Stock https://foolproofliving.com/corn-stock/ https://foolproofliving.com/corn-stock/#respond Wed, 02 Aug 2023 13:46:06 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69428 This easy recipe for corn broth is my favorite way to reuse leftover corn cobs during the fresh corn season.…]]>

        This easy recipe for corn broth is my favorite way to reuse leftover corn cobs during the fresh corn season. After serving up delectable corn dishes— like my creamy and bold Mexican Street Corn, Barbequed Corn on the Cob, or 15-minute Air Fried Corn on the Cob —save your bare ears of corn. Then, in five effortless steps, you’ll have a sumptuous broth ready to make dozens of gourmet meals.

        Corn cobs, celery, parsley, and whole black peppercorns in a pot.

        Ingredients You’ll Need

        This delicious corn cob stock recipe uses only six simple ingredients to produce an all-purpose stock perfect for countless kinds of dishes.

        Ingredients for making corn broth from the top view with text on each ingredient.
        • Corn cobs: The best way to get deliciously sweet, nutritious, and robust corn stock is to use fresh corn on the cob with no blemishes. Needless to say, corn husks, silks, and kernels should be removed. If you can get your hands on it, I recommend buying Non-GMO corn.
        • Celery stalks
        • Yellow onion: I love using yellow onion in this recipe because of its mild, balanced taste. However, you may also use white onions if you’d like your stock to have a slightly more potent, intense flavor.
        • Fresh garlic cloves
        • Fresh parsley leaves
        • Whole black peppercorns

        Optional Add-Ins and Substitutions

        Because of this recipe’s incredible versatility, the sky is the limit when making your unique corn broth. Feel free to adjust the below optional add-ins to match the recipe you’re preparing, and keep in mind that practically any veggie will work in your stock—as long as they don’t overpower the delicate sweetness of corn’s natural flavor.

        • Carrot: You only need one small carrot stalk to add sweet, earthy notes to your corn broth. Be careful not to add too many carrots, though, as this ingredient may take over your recipe’s more nuanced, delicate flavors.
        • Fresh herbs: To give your stock recipe a hint of bright, herbaceous flavor, I recommend adding a few sprigs of fresh thyme, rosemary, or a bay leaf.
        • Spices: A few extra spices are all this corn broth recipe needs to lend its sweet overtones a touch of bold, fresh taste. Cumin seeds will add rich, warm tones to your stock, while coriander seeds are perfect for giving your mix a spicy, slightly citrusy edge. You may add a few bay leaves, too, for a somewhat more herby flavor.
        • Salt: I didn’t add salt to my corn broth to ensure I had more control over my prepared recipes’ seasoning balance. However, you may add salt to your mixture according to personal preference.
        • Parmesan rind: This nutty, bold ingredient is a perfect addition to homemade corn stock, especially if you are using your stock to make creamy risotto or corn chowder.

        How to Make Corn Stock?

        Learning how to make corn broth is an easy way to give your favorite recipes tantalizingly sweet, fresh undertones. These hassle-free instructions will have your stock ready to use in just five steps.

        A collage of images showing how to make corn cob stock.
        1. Add the ingredients: Take out a large pot or a large Dutch oven, and add the bare corn cobs, celery, onion, garlic, parsley, and peppercorns.
        2. Add the water: Pour water into the pot, and bring it to a boil over high heat. Once the pot of water comes to a boil, reduce the heat to a simmer. 
        3. Simmer: Let the mixture simmer for at least one hour or a maximum of two hours.
        4. Strain the stock: When cool enough to handle, place a fine-mesh strainer in a large bowl, and strain the corn stock into the bowl. Be sure to press down on the vegetables as they catch in the sieve to extract any trapped liquid.
        5. Cool: Pour the corn cob broth into individual jars and let them cool, for about 30 minutes. Discard solids.
        6. Store: Once cool, cover each jar with an airtight lid before labeling and dating them. Then, transfer the jars to the refrigerator or freezer for later use.

        How to Store and Freeze Corn Cob Stock?

        Homemade corn broth is one of the most storage-friendly recipes in my recipe book. Store your stock in airtight containers, such as Mason jars or weck jars, to ensure it remains as fresh and flavorful as possible.

        • To store: Let the corn stock cool for an hour or so and then divide it amongst airtight containers or jars and store it in the fridge for up to 5 days.
        • To freeze: For even longer storage, you may freeze your corn stock by letting it cool in airtight jars (such as Weck jars (affiliate link), closing the containers, and placing it in the freezer for up to three months.

        How to Use Corn Stock in Recipes?

        Versatile and oh-so-easy to make, this corn stock recipe comes in handy for dozens of mouthwatering dishes. Below, you’ll find just a few of my go-to stock-based recipes.

        • Soups, stews, and chili bases: Infuse your soup recipes with next-level flavors by transforming them into corn cob soup. I love adding the sweet notes of corn stock to my creamy and piquant Mexican Corn Soup—my favorite alternative to corn chowder. Or, for a heartier meal, use corn broth as a base for protein-packed chili recipes, like my Quinoa Chili or White Chicken Chili.
        • For cooking whole grains: You’ll never have to worry about bland grains again when you prepare them in this corn broth recipe. If you’re a quinoa fanatic like I am, you’ll love using corn stock in place of water to make basic cooked quinoa or to liven it up with a Mexican Quinoa version. You can also make show-stopping sides out of simple ingredients with dishes like Bulgur Wheat, Wild Rice, and Corn Risotto.
        • Cornbread and corn cakes: What’s cornbread without golden-sweet corn flavor in each bite? This corn broth makes an excellent addition to classic side dishes like Cornbread Muffins and Corn Cakes.
        • Polenta and grits: Mild, creamy, and endlessly customizable, polenta and grits taste out of this world when prepared with corn stock. If you want a vegetarian recipe that will stun your dinner guests with a five-star taste, this Creamy Polenta combines roasted mushrooms, toasted walnuts, and creamy blue cheese for an out-of-this-world flavor.
        • Poaching liquid: Corn stock makes an incomparably flavorful poaching liquid when preparing meats such as fish (especially salmon!) or chicken.
        • Sip on it: Drinking pure corn stock is a delicious and easy way to pack nutrients into every sip.
        Corn cob soup stock in a jar dated and labeled.

        Expert Tips

        There’s no reason to stress over this beginner-friendly stock recipe. With this pro guide, you’ll never have to worry about making irresistibly fresh corn stock again.

        • More corn, no problem: The recipe below only requires six empty corn cobs. However, if you have more ears of corn, feel free to add them to your mixture with enough water to cover them by an inch.
        • Let it simmer: After coming to a boil, let your corn cob soup stock simmer for at least an hour (and no longer than two hours!). This time allows the veggies to release their natural flavors into the liquid without boiling away any nutrients or diminishing their taste.
        • Strain: Because of all the vegetable juices released into corn stock, this recipe might produce a cloudy liquid. If you prefer a clear stock, layer a cheesecloth at the bottom of your fine-mesh strainer before draining your broth.
        • Label and date: The key to ensuring that your corn cob stock remains as bright and flavorful as possible is using it while it’s fresh. I recommend labeling and dating your stored broth so that you know when to use it. Remember, broth stored in the fridge should be used within five days, while frozen corn broth should be used within three months.

        FAQs

        What is corn stock?

        Corn stock is a liquid made from slow-cooking bare corn cobs and other veggies in water. The resultant broth has a mildly sweet, complex flavor that you can use to cook many dishes, from grains to cornbread.

        Can you use corn cobs in vegetable stock?

        Most definitely! Corn cobs add delightfully sweet undertones to vegetable stock and help eliminate waste in the kitchen.

        Is corn stock good for you?

        Yes! Corn contains many nutritious vitamins and minerals, including a hearty helping of Vitamin C, Vitamin B, and potassium.

        Other Corn Recipes You Might Also Like

        Few recipes match a stock of corn’s subtle sweetness and complex flavor. If you’re craving more soft, buttery corn recipes, these dishes will fill your table for days.

        If you try this Corn Stock recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

        Corn cobs and vegetables in a pot from the top view.
        Print

        Corn Stock Recipe

        Making corn stock is a great way to use up leftover corn cobs and getting a second life out of them. Make a batch and use it to infuse the sweet flavors of corn to your soup, risotto, chowder, and polenta recipes.
        Course Condiment
        Cuisine American, American Vegan
        Diet Vegan
        Prep Time 5 minutes
        Cook Time 1 hour
        Total Time 1 hour 5 minutes
        Servings 10 cups
        Calories 6kcal

        Ingredients

        • 6 corn cobs husked and kernels removed
        • 2 celery stalks cut in quarters
        • 1 medium onion peeled and quartered
        • 2 cloves garlic peeled and crushed
        • 4 sprigs fresh parsley
        • ¼ teaspoon whole black peppercorns about 10 peppercorns
        • 10 cups water

        Instructions

        • Place the corn cobs, celery, onion, garlic, parsley and peppercorns in a stock pot or large Dutch oven.
        • Pour the water into the pot. Bring it to a boil over high heat. As soon as it comes to a boil, reduce the heat to a simmer. Let it simmer for at least one hour or for up to 2 hours. Off the heat, let it cool for an hour or so.
        • Meanwhile, place a fine mesh strainer in a large bowl. When cool enough to handle, carefully strain corn stock and gently press down on the vegetables to extract any remaining liquid.
        • Pour into jars and let it cool (uncovered) on the kitchen counter for 30 minutes. Discard solids.
        • When cooled, cover tightly with the lid, label and date before placing the jars in the refrigerator or freezing them for later use.

        Notes

        • Yields: This recipe makes ~ 9 1/2 cups to 10 cups of corn stock. The nutritional information below is per cup.
        • Adding salt: We intentionally didn’t use salt in this recipe so that you can adjust it according to the recipe you plan to use it in. However, you can season it with salt if you prefer.
        • To store: Let the corn stock cool for an hour or so and then divide it amongst airtight containers or jars and store it in the fridge for up to 5 days.
        • To freeze: For even longer storage, you may freeze your corn stock in airtight freezer-safe containers for up to 3 months.

        Nutrition

        Calories: 6kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 0.02g | Saturated Fat: 0.01g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.003g | Sodium: 13mg | Potassium: 24mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 0.5g | Vitamin A: 38IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 12mg | Iron: 0.1mg
        ]]>
        https://foolproofliving.com/corn-stock/feed/ 0